Home

Bardac DC Drives- PLX User Manual

1. 271 DIO1 OP MODE DISABLED 400 Block Disconnect 272 0101 RECTIFY EN ENABLED 273 DIO1 THRESHOLD 0 00 400 Block Disconnect 274 DIO1 INVERT MODE NON INVERT 400 Block Disconnect GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect GOTO 116 ZERO REF START 400 Block Disconnect n 275 DIO1 IP HI VALUE 0 01 96 400 Block Disconnect S 276 DIO1 IP LO VALUE 0 00 96 0102 719 SETUP 4 J RUN MODE RAMPS GOTO 65 RAMPED SPD REF 4 277 0102 OP MODE DISABLED MOTORISED POT GOTO 62 INT SPEED REF 1 278 DIO2 RECTIFY ENABLED REF EXCH SLAVE GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 279 DIO2 THRESHOLD 0 00 SUMMER1 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 280 0102 INVERT MODE NON INVERT SUMMER2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect PID1 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect GOTO 42 JOG MODE SELECT PID2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect m 281 DIO2 IP HI VALUE 0 01 96 PARAMETER PROFL GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 282 0102 IP LO VALUE 0 00 DIAMETER CALC GOTO 400 Block Disconnect DIO3 T20 SETUP 4 TAPER CALC GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 283 0103 OP MODE DISABLED T COMP CUR LIM GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 284 DIO3 RECTIFY ENABLED T COMP CUR LIM GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 285 DIO3 THRESHOLD 0 00 PRESET SPEED GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 286 DIO3 INVERT
2. 757 742 L2 L3 Busbar connection 698 Drive mtg point 690 Al le G 201 E L1 12 13 157 o 108 At A ica 9 e 2x M6 Earth 2x M6 Earth psum 10 Rs A A o brc 2 g 2 360 225 1 x 180 r l Datum Weight 90KG See 7 5 Lifting Standard L1 L2 L3 top entry AC supply input versions Suffix TE Optional L1 L2 L3 bottom entry AC supply input versions Suffix BE Drive mtgs 8 x M8 fixings HJ103502 PL X275 980 IMPORTANT Ensure 200mm area top and bottom of drive for unrestricted air entry exit Air Intake Air Intake un Points IMPORTANT Ensure 200mm area top and bottom of drive for unrestricted air entry Air out Ensure exit air is not deflected towards air intake Venting kit Available Venting kit fixing point PLX275 980 5 6 Venting 6 1 General venting information In order to keep these units within the required operating temperatures under all operating limits they are equipped with a very efficient cooling system It consists of a powerful centrifugal fan system integral to the unit mounted at th
3. 7 02 2 2 Nv312 H1HV3 7 2 e SISSVHO SISSVHO LLN ual ANdNI NIVIA SHOLOV3H INN SHO19 VLNOO NIYIN 53505 191432 8 1 lOH LNOO Installation 217 14 11 4 Guidelines when using filters IMPORTANT SAFETY WARNINGS The AC supply filters must The drive and AC filter must only be The AC supply filter contains high not be used on supplies that used with a permanent earth voltage capacitors and should not be are un balanced or float with connection No plugs sockets are touched for a period of 20 seconds after DANGER respect to earth allowed in the AC supply the removal of the AC supply ELECTRIC SHOCK RISK 1 The AC connections from the filter to the drive must be less than 0 3m or if longer correctly screened 2 The AC filter drive earth and motor cable screen should connect directly to the metal of the cabinet 3 Do not run filtered and unfiltered AC supply cables together 4 The AC input filter has earth leakage currents RCD devices may need to be set at 5 of rated current 5 The AC supply filter must have a good earth connection to the enclosure back plane Take care with painted metal Remove paint and ensure good connection 14 12 Approvals UL cUL CE EMC Compliance statement for PL X This apparatus complies wit
4. ees rare Dra Deer vote dete cadets Ok ed eux estes acute 35 3 6 1 2 Hyperbolic taper equation 41 1 0 0 24 5 1 6 EE ESE CEE EE nnn nnn 35 Contents 5 3 6 1 3 Taper graphs showing tension versus diameter 0 36 3 6 1 4 Taper graphs showing torque versus diameter sess 36 3 6 2 TAPER TENSION CALC Total tension OP monitor PIN 494 36 3 6 3 TAPER TENSION CALC Tension reference PIN 495 sss nmn 36 3 6 4 TAPER TENSION CALC Taper strength input PIN 496 37 3 6 5 TAPER TENSION CALC Hyperbolic taper enable PIN 497 37 3 6 6 TAPER TENSION CALC Tension trim input PIN 498 nmm 37 3 6 7 TAPER TENSION CALC Tapered tension monitor PIN 499 37 3 7 APPLICATION BLOCKS TORQUE COMPENSATOR 001121 38 3 7 1 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Block 0 11 nan 39 3 7 2 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque demand monitor 40 3 7 3 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque trim input 501 20 7 2 7 7 40 3 7 4 TORQUE COMPENSAT
5. 62 3 15 1 COMPARATOR 1 Block diagram 1 EEE EE EE EE EE EE EEE 62 3 15 2 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Input 1 PIN 588 592 596 600 62 3 15 3 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Input 2 PIN 589 593 597 601 62 3 15 4 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Window mode select PIN 590 594 598 602 63 3 15 5 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Hysteresis 591 595 599 603 63 3 15 6 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Comparator 63 3 16 APPLICATION BLOCKS C O SWITCH 1 104 444666 63 3 16 1 C O SWITCH Block diagram 5 2 ERR E PR dope day vers Voy 63 3 16 1 1 switch used as sample and hold 24 2 74 47 2 2 22 64 3 16 2 C O SWITCH 1 2 3 4 Control PIN 604 607 610 613 64 3 16 3 C O SWITCH 1 2 3 4 Inputs HI LO PIN 605 608 611 614 606 609 61 2 615 64 3 16 4 C O SWITCH 1 2 3 4 C O switch 64 4 PIN table for application blocks 401 680 65 5 MOG Sigs oe EE 69 6 Record of applications m
6. 194 13 11 1 BLOCK OP CONFIG Block outputs 0 2 22 2 2 0220202 2 2294 195 13 11 2 Other GOTO WindOws cese 195 13 12 CONFIGURATION FIELDBUS memes ee esee eese nnns 195 Contents 11 13 13 CONFIGURATION DRIVE PERSONALITY 0 82 22 196 13 13 1 DRIVE PERSONALITY PASSIVE MOTOR SET 196 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 01 1 197 13 13 2 1 Recipe page block diagram 197 13 13 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY Maximum current response PIN 678 198 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 198 13 19 41 50 100 199 13 13 4 2 WARNING about changing BURDEN OHMS 0 cece cece eee meme mene 200 13 13 4 3 Changing control or power 0 1 nnn 200 13 14 CONFLICT HELP MENU etit a a a a a aaa a a a a a a EE E EEEE 201 13 14 1 CONFLICT HELP MENU Number of 201 13 14 2 CONFLICT HELP MENU Multiple GOTO conf
7. 121 LAY DIAGNOSTICS Peas reae RFEA E 122 7 2 DIAGNOSTICS ARM I LOOP 2 11 125 7 3 DIAGNOSTICS FLD LOOP MONITOR 1 Hmemememememememe misse sss nsns 128 7 4 DIAGNOSTICS ANALOG IO MONITOR 1 1 1 nini nnn 130 7 5 DIAGNOSTICS DIGITAL IO MONITOR nennen NA nessun nnne 131 7 6 DIAGNOSTICS BLOCK OP MONITOR 4 ENRERE EE EEEE e e en nnn 133 7 7 DIAGNOSTICS EL1 2 3 RMS MON 169 7 134 7 8 DIAGNOSTICS DC KILOWATTS MON 170 4 7 444 1 1 134 See also 5 1 6 Default DIAGNOSTIC summary windows DIAGNOSTICS 2 R 170 DC KILOWATTS MON eb P DIAGNOSTICS 2 7 R SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 If an adjustable parameter has been configured to be a GOTO target its value is then a monitor of DIAGNOSTICS 2 the source and is no longer adjustable R ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 The unit consists of functional software blocks that each perform a given task within the overall block DIAGNOSTICS 2 diagram Some of these blocks are permanently R FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 co
8. Mounting PL X b b cii siet Mounting PL X 65 145 Terminal tightening torques 41 208 209 210 214 Venting models PL X 185 265 using back panel aperture 211 Venting models PL X 185 265 using standoff pillars 211 Wiring instructions gt 213 Installation guide for EMC we 215 Introduction 20 JOG CRAWL SLACK Block 78 Jog mode select PIN 42 Jog speed 1 2 PINs 37 38 Jog Slack ramp 43 JUMPER connections JUMPER CONNECTIONS Make jumper GET FROM source connection Make jumper GOTO destination connection we 193 we 193 Key 0 2 46 Language select 2 7 4 2 164 Main contactor isolating AC stack and auxiliary supplies 37 Main contactor isolating AC stack supply Main contactor isolating DC armature Main Contactor operation Main contactor wiring options Maintenance Changing control or power cards 159 200 Men listesini naasa 226 Mode of operation
9. 180 13 5 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL INPUTS 180 13 5 1 Using DIPanputs for ericoder signals ioris iib Ei voce dee deter eee 180 13 5 2 DIGITAL INPUTS 7 5 er aE 181 13 5 2 1 DIPX SETUP DIP1 2 3 4 Input high value PINs 310 312 314 316 181 13 5 2 2 DIPX SETUP DIP1 2 3 4 Input low value PINs 311 313 315 2317 181 13 5 2 3 DIPX SETUP DIP1 2 3 4 Make input value GOTO destination connection 181 13 5 2 4 Default connections for 1 2 3 4 181 13 5 3 DIGITAL INPUTS RUN INPUT 000000000 0 182 13 5 3 1 RUN INPUT SETUP RUN input HI value PIN 318 4 2020 2 7 182 13 5 3 2 RUN INPUT SETUP RUN input LO value PIN 319 2 20 22 2 22 182 13 5 3 3 RUN INPUT SETUP Make input value GOTO destination connection 182 13 6 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS 2 00 183 13 6 1 DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS DIOX SETUP 183 13 6 1 1 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 Output mode enable PINs 271 277 283 289 184 13 6 1 2 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 val rectify enable PINs 272 278 284 290 184 13 6 1 3 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 OP comp threshold PINs 273 2
10. semi conductor fuses WARNING The phase order of EL1 2 3 must be the same as L1 2 3 auxiliary semi conductor fuses line reactor Terminals 1 36 are located on the bottom edge of the upper control board arranged as 3 blocks of 12 Terminals 2 12 14 24 and 31 are programmable Their default function is shown here 4 SEPPER PEER dh Drive Healthy Substantial run chassis earth O jog start stop relay thermistor Basic application 35 4 2 Main Contactor operation The control of the main contactor is very important Incorrect implemention is the main cause of failures See also 6 5 CHANGE PARAMETERS STOP MODE RAMP and 6 5 1 1 Block diagram of contactor control The essential elements of controlling the contactor are as follows 1 It must be possible to release the contactor without relying on electronics 2 The contactor must not break current To obey this rule the following applies a The PL X must not attempt to deliver armature current until after the contactor has closed b The armature current must be brought to zero before the contactor has opened 3 The contactor control circuit must be compatible with all likely application requirements The PL X has been designed to control all of the above requirements in the use of the main contactor The purpose of the main contactor is to provi
11. nmn 216 14 11 4 Guidelines when using filters 10101 semen enne ren 217 14 12 Approvals UL CUL CE Re eer i 217 14 12 1 CE IMMUN ro eve 217 1 amp 12 25 GE EmlSSIOTIS aee eoe aee eee gue aeque usen eee v qeu 217 14 12 3 UL cUL iiic REI X EI DE XX sexi HA RNA OR QE ROUND 217 14 13 What to do in the event of a problem nnne nnn 218 14 13 1 A simple clarification of a technical 7 2 2 7 7 4 44 4 0 44 4 218 14 13 2 A complete system failure meii rernu i enne 218 Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives 204 Installation 14 1 Product rating table Model Output power Max continuous Maximum field Main Maximum Line Cooling air PL 20 At At Current AMPS output current fuses Auxiliary reac flow and PLX 40 460V 500V DC Amps max Fuse ratings tor dissipation Input Output Standard Option 121 Amp 121 type cfm watts Kw HP HP AC DC PL X5 5 7 7 5 10 12 8 600 20 365 LR48 17 45 PL X10 10 13 15 20 24 8 600 20 365 LR48 17 80 PL X15 15 20 20 30 36 8 600 20 365 LR48 17 120 PL X20 20 27 30 40 51 8 5000 20 365 LR48 17 120 PL X30 30 40 40 60 72 8 5000 20 365 LR
12. D 12 L3 V b 2 38 28 38 28 38 110V AC Removable FAN SUPPLY TERMINALS backplate 4 N Auxiliary terminals a a vus 150 DIA HOLE fixing overall mm centre length fin backplate for air Airflow intake em Use the template provided to install N PRESS RIGHT KEY FOR ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 Control International ground symbol terminals black on green background identifies main equipment around connection on heatsink 2 power terminals 8 4 Iu COP Y 45 pha 38 J 34 38 45 earth a 41 175 E armature g 165 5 294 216 14 7 1 1 Mounting PL X 185 265 Four corner slots provided to mount the unit Use M8 5 16 screws All mounting hole dimensions are 2 mm The dimensions on this drawing are for the footprint A substantial earth connection should be made to the busbar provided Nominal cooling air throughput is specified in the rating table Use cool clean dry filtered air Allow at least 100mm 4 in space above and below the unit Ensure connections to power terminals are tight Power terminal fastenings are M10 See 14 10 Terminal tightening torques Mount the main contactor so as to avoid mechanical operating shock being transmitted to PL X busbars E g Ensure Line reactor is fitted between contactor and PL X The units m
13. 67 219 Field current feedback trim PIN 15 68 106 219 IR compensation PIN 14 68 109 219 Max tacho volts PIN 8 63 219 Motor encoder speed ratio PIN 12 67 124 219 Motor 1 or 2 select 20 44 48 70 163 196 Quadrature enable PIN 10 66 219 Rated armature amps PIN 2 60 219 Rated armature volts PIN 18 69 219 Rated field amps 4 44 61 112 219 Speed feedback type PIN 9 17 27 63 64 66 118 219 Zero speed offset PIN 7 62 219 CE EMISSIONS emen 217 CE Immunity een rx Der entra EAEE a 217 CHANGE PARAMETERS ce eror ia E 42 43 59 STOP MODE RAMP 35 38 39 71 85 ESSENTIAL pre start checks MECHANICAL ENGINEERING POWER 2 12 Quick start calibration Quick start calibration step by step Quick start current loop AUTOTUNE Configurable connections 1 1 Configurable connections Connecting linear values with different units 189 Connecting logic values with different messages 189 Connecting PINs with different units 169 18
14. 31 3 5 1 REEL DIAMETER CALC Block 0 6 nensem nnn 32 3 5 2 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter output monitor PIN 483 32 3 5 3 REEL DIAMETER CALC Web speed input PIN 484 2 22 32 3 5 4 REEL DIAMETER CALC Reel speed input PIN 485 22222 32 3 5 5 REEL DIAMETER CALC Minimum diameter input PIN 486 33 3 5 6 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter calculation min speed PIN 487 33 3 5 7 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter hold enable PIN 488 33 3 5 8 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter filter time constant PIN 489 2 33 3 5 9 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter preset enable PIN 490 34 3 5 10 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter preset value PIN 491 34 3 5 11 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter web break threshold 492 34 3 5 12 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter memory boot up 493 34 3 6 APPLICATION BLOCKS TAPER TENSION 35 3 6 1 TAPER TENSION CALC Block diagram 2 10 0 0 0 nnns 35 3 6 1 1
15. 3 47 51 2 BARAMETER SAVE rer E 47 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition 2 2 2 2 47 5 1 4 Branch hopping between monitor WINKOWS cc ccc EEE nnns 47 Bel 5 Power UP WINd OW Sire eoe erre oven verte bo ca Ee einn ele sensere e was e rr EE 47 5 1 6 Default DIAGNOSTIC summary windows 7 4444 21414 48 5 1 7 Finding the software version number of the 48 5 2 ENTRY MEN 48 5 2 1 Full menu diagram Change 4 0 4 44 101 2 4 4 4 1 nns 49 5 2 2 Full menu diagram Change parameters continued 50 5 2 3 Full menu diagram Diagnostics creerse cece 51 5 2 4 Full menu diagram Motor drive alarms serial links and display 52 5 2 5 Full menu diagram Application blocks and configuration 2 2 2 2 20 4 4444 53 5 2 6 Full menu diagram Configuration 4 6 6 54 5 2 7 Full menu diagram Block OP and Fieldbus configs Drive personality and Conflict Help 55
16. 0 0222 82 6 4 3 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Up Down time PINS 46 47 82 6 4 4 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Up Down command PINs 48 49 83 6 4 5 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Maximum minimum clamps PINS 50 51 83 6 4 6 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP preset PIN 52 0000 83 6 4 7 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Preset value PIN 53 2 22 84 6 4 8 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP memory boot PIN 54 000 12 22 84 6 5 CHANGE PARAMETERS STOP MODE 0 0 0 0 2 42 4 4 4 85 6 5 1 STOP MODE RAMP Block diagram 85 6 5 1 1 Block diagram of contactor control 1 4 1 nns 86 6 5 1 2 Speed profile when 1 6 nnn 87 6 5 1 3 Coritactor drop Out iiio ier ex bts a a a Ud 87 Precise Stoppllg ir bitte dab tates 88 6 5 2 STOP MODE RAMP Stop ramp time 56 00001 88 6 5 3 STOP MODE RAMP Stop time limit PIN 57 2 2 4 0 88 6 5 4 STOP MODE RAMP Live d
17. Run flag 167 Running mode monitor PIN 168 Speed demand monitor PIN 124 Speed error monitor PIN 125 Speed feedback monitor PIN 131 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Recipe page PIN 677 17 27 47 56 58 70 148 155 157 158 159 163 164 197 Recipe page block diagram Eeprom transfer between units E 2222 22 rere rendra eo Ra eap ENTRY MENU FIELD CONTROL Block diagram Field enable PIN 99 Speed reference monitor PIN 123 Field integral gain PIN 102 108 220 Start flag PIN 166 cette en dtd dei s Field proportional gain PIN 101 108 220 Tachogenerator volts monitor PIN 129 63 124 221 Field reference input PIN 114 112 UIP2 to 9 analogue input monitor PINs 150 to 157 130 Field weakening derivative time constant PIN 106 110 UIP2 to 9 digital input monitor PIN 162 131 221 Field weakening enable PIN 103 110 DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS Field weakening feedback derivative time constant PIN 107 DIO1 2 3 4 Input high value PINs 275 281 287 229 111 Sates A UM MEE 185 Field weakenin
18. 195 13 12 CONFIGURATION FIELDBUS CONFIG 2 2 enses sss sisse sese sese 195 13 13 CONFIGURATION DRIVE PERSONALITY 2 196 13 13 1 DRIVE PERSONALITY PASSIVE MOTOR SET 0 0 2 7222 2 196 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 2 0 0 72 2 197 13 13 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY Maximum current response PIN 678 198 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 198 13 4 CONFLICT HELP MENU epe e roc cO eque 201 13 14 1 CONFLICT HELP MENU Number of 4 4 6 6 201 13 14 2 CONFLICT HELP MENU Multiple GOTO conflict PIN identifier 2 201 168 CONFIGURATION 13 1 CONFIGURATION menu PIN numbers used 250 to 399 ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 CONFIGURATION 2 2 There are 720 parameters each with a unique PIN that is used in the process of configuration The PINs identify connection points during configuration and can store values CONNECTIONS It is possible to construct complex systems by making connections to PINs There are 2 connection tools available These are GOTOs and GET FROMs When a parameter is given a value by the p
19. 0 0 0 0 0 002070 0 7022 153 10 1 4 Howto us USB ports a boo Aone tle RR S Dee E NER ERMES 153 10 2 RS232 PORT PARAMETER 154 10 2 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive 2 0 02 nnn nnns 154 10 2 1 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE with a locked recipe page 155 10 2 1 2 Transmitting parameter data file to a PC Windows 95 155 10 2 2 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive 3 2 2 0 156 10 2 2 1 Receiving parameter data file from a PC Windows 95 upwards 156 10 2 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE menu list to host eee eee eee enn 157 10 2 3 1 Transmitting a menu list to PC Windows 95 upwards 157 10 2 3 2 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive to 2 158 10 2 3 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Eeprom transfer between units esses 159 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software 2 159 10 2 5 Parameter exchange using ASCII 5 0 000 0 160 10 2 5 1 PL PILOT and SCADA System Control And Data Acquisition package
20. 129 7 4 DIAGNOSTICS ANALOG IO MONITOR 4 130 7 4 1 ANALOG IO MONITOR UIP2 to 9 analogue input monitor PINs 150 to 157 130 7 4 2 ANALOG IO MONITOR AOP1 2 3 analogue output monitor PINs 159 160 161 130 7 5 DIAGNOSTICS DIGITAL IO MONITOR 131 7 5 1 DIGITAL IO MONITOR UIP2 to 9 digital input monitor PIN 162 131 7 5 2 DIGITAL IO MONITOR DIP1 to 4 and DIO1 to 4 digital input monitor PIN 163 131 7 5 3 DIGITAL IO MONITOR to Control IPs digital monitor PIN 164 132 7 5 4 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Armature bridge flag PIN 165 0 0 222 132 7 5 5 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Drive start flag 166 2 0 0022 2 132 7 5 6 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Drive run flag 167 2 2 132 7 5 7 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Internal running mode monitor 168 132 7 6 DIAGNOSTICS BLOCK OP MONITOR 2 133 7 6 1 BLOCK OP MONITOR General 2 0 6 134 7 7 DIAGNOSTICS EL1 2 3 RMS MON 169 0 2 2 4 134 7 8 DIAGNOSTICS DC KILOWATTS MON 170 0
21. 7 1 6 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Back emf monitor PIN 128 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 128 BACK EMF MON Y 128 0 00 Shows the value of the average DC back PARAMETER RANGE PIN emf as a of the desired max back emf BACK EMF MON 300 00 128 Note Back EMF AVF IR drop 124 DIAGNOSTICS 7 1 7 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Tachogenerator volts monitor PIN 129 R SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 R 129 TACHO VOLTS MON 129 TACHO VOLTS MON 0 00 Volts Shows the average DC tachogenerator PARAMETER RANGE PIN voltage independently of feedback type TACH VOLTS MON 220 00 Volts 129 Note There is an unfiltered version of this value on hidden PIN 716 7 1 8 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Motor RPM monitor PIN 130 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 130 MOTOR RPM MON B 130 MOTOR RPM MON R RPM Shows the value of the revs per minute of PARAMETER RANGE PIN the motor MOTOR RPM MON 7500 RPM 130 Note 130 MOTOR RPM MON will only be accurate when 1 In AVF feedback mode 18 RATED ARM VOLTS corresponds to 6 DESIRED MAX RPM for 100 speed 2 In ANALOG TACHO feedback mode 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS corresponds to 6 DESIRED MAX RPM for 100 speed Note There is an unfiltered version of this value on hidden PIN 717 7 1 9 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Encoder RPM monitor PIN 132 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 132 ENCODER RPM MON B 132 ENCODER RPM MON R 0 RPM Y Shows the value of the encoder rev
22. 181 EIRAS dues ae ye eer o esa ve e sue rye pe sae ce er Ev VE cree ee e Baek ape dude Digital inputs and outputs 2b 30 183 185 186 ARM I LOOP 2 Digital outputs 51111 25 26 Armature bridge flag 165 E DIGITAL OUTPUTS Armature current 96 monitor PIN 134 126 DOP1 2 3 Internal output result PINS 682 3 4 188 Armature current amps monitor PIN 135 126 DOP1 2 3 Make output GET FROM source connection 187 Armature current demand monitor 133 126 DOP1 2 3 OP comparator threshold PINs 262 265 268 Armature volts 96 monitor 127 Pee te ace ee OI Ded t euer 187 Armature volts monitor PIN 126 Back emf 96 monitor PIN 128 DOP1 2 3 OP val rectifiy enable PINs 261 264 267 187 DOP1 2 3 Output inversion enable PINs 263 266 269 BLOCK OP MONITOR 139184 2 eae ae eee 187 Current limit flag PIN 141 DIGITAL OUTPUTS DOPX 186 Current limit monitor lower PIN 137 126 221 Dimensions Current limit monitor upper PIN 136 126 221 Line reactor 204 212 Current limits prevailing uppe
23. nene VN Cae ou eae ii pu eR DC D CUN ER ELE OE Ve 4 2 1 Contactor control questions and answers 4 3 Main contactor wiring options e eh eni re n re e eterne nns 4 3 1 Main contactor isolating AC stack 4 nnn 4 3 2 Main contactor isolating AC stack and auxiliary supplies 4 3 3 Main contactor isolating DC armature 2 1 4 3 4 Using pushbuttons for simple STOP START Coast to stop 4 3 5 Using pushbuttons for STOP START With ramp to stop jog and slack take up 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks 4 4 1 POWER ees 4 4 2 MECHANICAL 4 5 CONTROL ENGINEERING COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 4 531 Quick start calibration i eere ee a exe ede eel ed Pe eed se ba Ee an oa eias 4 5 2 Quick start calibration step by step 2 1 22 2 24 4 41 11 nnn nns 4 5 3 Quick start current loop 44 2 2 022444 4 4 4 4 4 lt 4 5 4 PASSIVE MOTOR defaults Using passive motor menu for small test motors Overview of initial commissioning procedure Always check safety systems thorough
24. 62 8 SUMMER 2 Divider 2 421 221 3 2 9 SUMMER 2 Input 1 422 300 00 0 00 422 3 2 10 SUMMER 2 Input 2_ PIN 423 3 2 11 SUMMER 2 Input PIN 424 300 00 0 00 424 3 2 12 SUMMER 2 Deadband 425 O 100 0096 0 00 425 SUMMER 2 Output sign inverter PIN 426 0 Non invert 426 SUMMER 2 Symmetrical clamp 427 0 428 PID 1 Pid1 output value monitor 429 3 3 3 PID 1 Pid1 IP1 value PIN 430 300 00 0 00 430 334 PID 1 Pid1 IP1 ratio PIN 431 335 PID 1 Pid1 divider 432 336 PID 1 Pid1 IP2 value 433 337 PID 1 Pid1 2 ratio PIN 434 338 PID 1 Pid1 IP2 divider 435 1339 1 Pid proportional gain PIN 436 3310 PID 1 Pid1 integrator time constant PIN 437 8 3 11 PID 1 Pid derivative time constant PIN 438 3312 PID 1 Pid1 derivative filter time constant PIN 439 3313 PID 1 Pid1 integrator preset enable PIN 440 3 314 1 Pid1 integrator preset value PIN 441 32315 PID 1 Pid1 reset enable 442 3316 PID 1 Pid1 positive clamp level PIN 443 3 3 17 PID 1 Pid1 negative clamp level PIN 444 3 3 38 1 Pid output 96 trim PIN 445 3319 1 Pid1 Profile mode select PIN 446 3 320 1 Pid1 Minimum proportional gain PIN 447 3321 PID 1 Pid1 Profile X axis minimum 448 3 3 28 1 Pid Profiled proportional gain output PIN 449
25. UIPX Term Analog GOTO Default connection name Default connection UIP2 2 Analog GOTO Aux speed reference PIN 63 UIP3 3 Analog GOTO Speed reference Current demand Fast PIN 400 Internally connected not using the GOTO Block disconnect UIP4 4 Analog GOTO Ramp input PIN 26 UIP5 5 Analog GOTO Lower current clamp ve PIN 90 UIP6 6 Analog GOTO Main current limit Upper current clamp ve PIN 89 UIP7 7 Analog Not connected PIN 400 Default digital UIP8 8 Analog Not connected PIN 400 Default digital UIP9 9 Analog GOTO Not connected PIN 400 Default digital 13 3 1 7 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Make digital output 1 GOTO destination connection UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 UIP DIGITAL OP1 GOTO Defines the target destination PIN PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT for the logic connection to UIPX UIP DIGITAL OP1 GOTO PIN 000 to 720 See table UIPX Term Dig OP1 GOTO Default connection name Default connection UIP2 2 Dig OP1 Not connected PIN 400 Default analog UIP3 3 Dig OP1 GOTO Not connected PIN 400 Block disconnect UIP4 4 Dig OP1 GOTO Not connected PIN 400 Default analog UIP5 5 Dig OP1 GOTO Not connected PIN 400 Default analog UIP6 6 Dig OP1 GOTO Not connected PIN 400 Default analog UIP7 7 Dig OP1 GOTO Motorised pot preset enable PIN 52 UIP8 8 Dig OP1 GOTO Motorised pot up command PIN 48 UIP9 9 Dig OP1 GOTO Motorised
26. If at least one of the 6 current pulses is missing from the feedback waveform and the current demand is above 10 then the system will start counting missing pulses The alarm will trigger after a sequential series of missing pulses lasting approximately 30 seconds The most usual causes of missing pulse failure is either an open circuit main fuse or a gate lead plug not properly re connected after a stack maintenance procedure Alarm delay time approx 30 secs 8 1 6 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Reference exchange trip enable PIN 176 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 176 REF EXCH TRIP EN Enables the REFERENCE PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN EXCHANGE data link alarm trip REF EXCH TRIP EN ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 176 The drive can transmit and receive a speed reference or other parameter to or from another controller using the serial port During the receive cycle it checks that the data received is valid If the data is invalid then it raises an alarm This is only applicable in the SLAVE mode of operation See 10 3 RS232 PORT1 PORT1 REF EXCHANGE The alarm flag is available on hidden PIN 701 Alarm delay time 1 5 secs 8 1 7 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Overspeed delay time PIN 177 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 177 OVERSPEED DELAY Sets the the delay time before PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the overspeed alarm is latched OVERSPEED DELAY 0 1 to 600 0 seconds 5 0 secs 177 See 8 1 11 7 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Overspeed
27. 98 6 8 2 CURRENT CONTROL Current clamp scaler PIN 81 0 98 6 8 3 CURRENT CONTROL CURRENT 2 2 98 6 8 3 1 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload 96 target PIN 82 2 2 02 7 7 99 6 8 3 1 1 Diagram showing TARGET set 105 22 4 99 6 8 3 1 2 How to get overloads greater than 150 using 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET 100 6 8 3 1 3 Maximum overload table 2 7 7 2 4 44 4 44 0 74 4 4 1 10 0 100 6 8 3 2 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload ramp time 83 22 100 6 8 4 CURRENT CONTROL I DYNAMIC 101 6 8 4 1 DYNAMIC PROFILE Profile enable PIN 84 72 101 6 8 4 2 I DYNAMIC PROFILE Speed break point for high current limit PIN 85 102 6 8 4 3 DYNAMIC PROFILE Speed break point for low current limit PIN 86 102 6 8 4 4 I DYNAMIC PROFILE Profile current for low current limit PIN 87 102 6 8 5 CURRENT CONTROL Dual current clamps enable PIN 88 102 6 8 6 CURRENT CONTROL Upper current clamp PIN 89 0 0 0 103 6 8 7 CURRENT CONTROL Lower curren
28. 20 Model current rating 50 100 rating select 44 149 199 changing BURDEN OHMS 18 200 135 MOTORISED POT RAMP ere tae 82 MP Maximum minimum clamps PINs 50 51 MP memory boot up PIN 54 wee MP output monitor 45 0001 MP preset PIN 52 000000012 MP Preset value PIN 53 MP Up Down command PINs 48 49 MP Up Down time PINs 46 47 Numeric tables 13er Iii Imper a s SEs Overview of features 11212121 PASSWORD CONTROL Alter password Enter password RAMPS e acini eU 71 72 73 75 Forward down time 23 73 219 Forward minimum speed PIN 27 74 219 Forward up time PIN 22 Ramp automatic preset PIN 29 Ramp external preset PIN Ramp hold enable PIN 33 Ramp input PIN 26 Ramp output monitor PIN 21 Ramp preset value 31 2 Ramp S profile 96 32 71 75 Ramping flag PIN 35 Ramping threshold 34 Reverse down time PIN 25 Reverse minimum speed 28
29. R 6 2 16 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag PIN 35 o 1 Low 3 R 6 3 2 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog speed PIN37 10005 6 00 gt R 632 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog speed 2 10000 500 R 6 33 JOG CRAWL SLACK Slack speed 1 PIN39 100 0095 5 00 R 633 JOG CRAWL SLACK Slack speed 2 PINA0 100 00 500 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog mode select 42 0 1 bisabed JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog Slack ramp PIN 43 0 1 600 05 0 0 0 Oe 44 MOTORISED POT RAMP Motor pot output monitor PIN 45 300 00 0 00 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Up time 46 0 1 600 0 s M 0 4 0 MOTORISED RAMP MP Down time 47 0 1 600 0 s 7 8 9 2 3 5 6 4 8 1 600 0 s 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 7 6 4 4 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Up command PIN4S Disabled 6 4 4 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Down command PIN49 0 1 Disabled 49 646 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP preset enable 52 2 647 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Preset value PIN53 300 00 0 00 53 64 8 MOTORISED POT RAMP memory boot up mode PINS4 0 1 Disabled 54 ube fh ee ee x Oe 1 JOG CRAWL SLACK Crawl speed 41 100 00 10 00 1 5 1 1 5 5 5 220 PIN number tables 6 5 2 STOP MODE RAMP Stop ramp time PIN56 0 1 600 05 10 0 secs 56 65 3 STOP MODE RAMP Stop time limit PIN57 0 0
30. rcr 56 3 13 APPLICATION BLOCKS BATCH COUNTER 58 3 14 APPLICATION BLOCKS INTERVAL 60 3 15 APPLICATION BLOCKS COMPARATOR 1 to 4 62 3 16 APPLICATION BLOCKS C O SWITCH 1 to 4 0 0001511 63 4 PIN table for application blocks 401 680 65 5 HI OX Sacha dure Samara hama a eta a ede hu ea dO odes P tet 69 6 Record of applications manual modifications 2 2 0 2 20202022 69 7 Record of application blocks bug 7 70007 7 1 70 8 Changes to product since manual 2 2 4 00 3 1 12 70 3 1 General rules 3 1 1 Sample times When application blocks are being processed the workload on the internal microprocessor is increased With no application blocks activated the time taken to perform all the necessary tasks cycle time is approximately 5mS The input high time must be at least 50mS The input low time must be at least 50mS With all the application blocks activated the cycle time is approximately 10mS In the future the designers expect to add even more application b
31. sss 140 8 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS STALL TRIP MENU 0 0 0222 141 9 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Active and stored trip monitors PINS 181 182 142 10 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS External trip reset enable PIN 183 143 11 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS DRIVE TRIP 143 136 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 8 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS menu PIN number range 171 to 183 R ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 WARNING All these alarms are generated with semiconductor electronics Local safety codes may mandate electro mechanical alarm systems All alarms must be tested in the final application prior to use The manufacturer and suppliers of the PL X are not responsible for system safety There are 16 alarms that continuously monitor important parameters of the motor drive system 10 of the alarms are permanently enabled and 6 of the alarms can be enabled or disabled using this menu It also monitors the alarm status If any enabled alarm is triggered it is then latched causing the drive to shut down and the main contactor to be de energised If the alarm has been disabled then it will not be latched and will not affect the operation of the drive although it can still be monitored If 171 SPEED TRIP ENABLE is disabled then automatic switch to AVF is implemented for tacho and or encode
32. 32 4 Basie E 33 4 1 Basic speed or torque 1 6 EEE LEER EEE EGE nnn nnn 34 4 2 Main Contactor operation 4 0 0 0 EEE 35 4 2 1 Contactor control questions and answers 1 1 1 6 nnn nnn 35 4 3 Main contactor wiring options 2 2 4 4 4 44 4 4 61 sn n e en enne nens 37 4 3 1 Main contactor isolating AC stack supply 0272 2 2 2 2 4 4 44 1 nnns 37 Contents 4 3 2 Main contactor isolating AC stack and auxiliary supplies 2 24 7 2 2 2 4 37 4 3 3 Main contactor isolating DC 38 4 3 4 Using pushbuttons for simple STOP START Coast to 39 4 3 5 Using pushbuttons for STOP START With ramp to stop jog and slack take 40 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checKS aay vini exe mee exa exa nae bre e ER ERE 41 42471 POWER ENGINEERING RAI Ree eestor se Ib biu TR e pere RD eU DUE ete 41 4 4 2 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING e e ie essa assi sess se aene 41 4 5 CONTROL ENGINEERING COMMISSI
33. 390 fixing centre PRESS RIGHT KEY FOR ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 International ground symbol black on green background identifies main equipment around connection on heatsink Control terminals 2 power terminals Main earth terminal po k earth a 80 armature 100 218 14 6 1 1 Mounting PL X 65 145 Four corner slots are provided to mount the unit Use M8 5 16 in screws All mounting hole dimensions are 2 mm A substantial earth connection should be made to the busbar provided Nominal cooling air throughput is specified in the rating table Use cool clean dry filtered air Do not block the heatsink fins Allow at least 100mm 4 in space above and below the unit Ensure connections to power terminals are tight Power terminal fastenings are M10 See 14 10 Terminal tightening torques Mount the main contactor so as to avoid mechanical operating shock being transmitted to PL X busbars E g Ensure Line reactor is fitted between contactor and PL X The units must be orientated vertically as shown The dimensions on this drawing are for the footprint Overall dimensions are Width 216 Height 378 Depth 218 Unit weight 11Kg 210 Installation 14 7 Mechanical dimensions PL X 185 265 Unit weight 17Kg Symbolic drawing shown with end caps removed Back of enclosure minimum gap 25mm 34 66 66 34 n 1 165 di I 2 12 55 229 I x ui ui 3 power C terminals
34. 694 200 00 0 00 512 Power SAVED ONCE hw 681 137 16 BINVAL PiN682 Jow 682 137 6 DOP20 RBINVAL PiN688 683 137 6 DOP3O PBINVAL PlN684 684 1361 10 001 OP BIN VAL lw 685 136130 bDIOZO PBINVAL PING86 9686 13 6 1 10 DIO3 O P BIN VAL PIN 687 0 1 low 687 13 6 1 10 DIO4 O P BIN VAL 688 0 1 low 688 6 3 IN JOG FLAG In Jog mode process flag PINGBS 0 1 tow ess Apps manual WES BREAK FLAG PIN6SO 690 Apps manual REEL SPEED RECT PlN696 19 10520 0 00 696 Apps manual UNFILTERED DIAMETER 697 O 100 0096 0 0096 697 6 5 1 1 HEALTHY FLAG Healthy flag output PING08 0 1 lw 698 6 5 1 1 READY FLAG Ready flag output PIN 699 0 1 low 699 8 1 8 STALL WARNING Stall warning PIN 700 0 1 low 700 8 1 11 14 REF XC WARNING Reference exchange error warning PIN701 0 flw 701 8 1 1 5 THERMISTOR WARN Thermistor overtemp warning PIN702 702 8 11 SPEED FBK WARN Speed feedback mismatch warning PIN703 low 703 8 1 9 I LOOP OFF WARN Current loop off warning PIN 74 O 1 tow 704 123 INPUT Low pass filter input PIN705 705 123 LPFILTEROUTPUT Low pass filter outpu
35. CONFIGURATION 187 13 7 1 1 DOPX SETUP DOP1 2 3 OP val rectifiy enable PINs 261 264 267 Enables rectified mode for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN OP generator DOP1 RECTIFY EN ENABLED or DISABLED ENABLED 261 The digital output is generated by comparing an internal linear or logic signal with a threshold Select DISABLED for the bi polar mode E g Linear speed feedback The rectified mode will enable the digital output to change state at a chosen speed for both directions of rotation The bipolar mode will enable the digital output to change state at only one chosen point in the entire range of positive or negative rotation 13 7 1 2 DOPX SETUP DOP1 2 3 OP comparator threshold PINs 262 265 268 262 DOP1 THRESHOLD 0 00 Sets the comparator threshold PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for the DOPX OP generator DOP1 THRESHOLD 300 0096 0 00 262 The output of the comparator will be high when the signal from the rectifier mode box exceeds the threshold The comparator output is low for identical inputs 13 7 1 3 DOPX SETUP DOP1 2 3 Output inversion enable PINs 263 266 269 263 DOP1 INVERT MODE NON INVERT Allows the comparator output PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN logic to be inverted for DOPX DOP1 INVERT MODE INVERT or NON INVERT NON INVERT 263 13 7 1 4 DOPX SETUP DOP1 2 3 Make output GET FROM source connection Defines the sou
36. MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 141 STALL TRIP MENU 3 R 180 STALL DELAY TIME 8 1 8 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS STALL TRIP MENU R MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 STALL TRIP MENU 3 See also 6 8 3 1 2 How to get overloads greater than 15096 using 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET R STALL TRIP MENU 3 178 STALL TRIP ENBL STALL TRIP MENU im 179 STALL CUR LEVEL 3 In this case 179 STALL CUR LEVEL must be set below 82 TARGET for stall protection 8 1 8 1 STALL TRIP MENU Stall trip enable PIN 178 R STALL TRIP MENU 3 178 STALL TRIP ENBL Allows the motor stall alarm PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN trip to be enabled STALL TRIP ENBL ENABLED OR DISABLED ENABLED 178 A DC motor is generally not capable of carrying large amounts of current when stationary If the current exceeds a certain limit and the motor is stationary then the PL X controller can provide a stall trip alarm If 178 STALL TRIP is enabled the current is above 179 STALL CUR LEVEL and the motor is at zero speed below ZERO INTERLOCKS 117 ZERO SPD for longer than 180 STALL DELAY TIME then the alarm is activated WARNING When using armature voltage feedback the IR drop may be sufficient to provide a signal in excess of 117 ZERO INTLK SPD and hence the stall alarm will not operate Set 14 IR COMPENSATION as accurately as possible and then test the alarm with a stalled motor Disable the field Progressively increase cur
37. 435 458 PID 1 3 435 PID1 DIVIDER2 Sets divisor for IP2 signal PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN channel Zero gives zero output PID1 DIVIDER2 3 0000 1 0000 435 3 3 9 PID 1 2 PID proportional gain 436 459 PID 1 3 436 PID1 PROP GAIN Sets the PID gain independently PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the and D time constants PID1 PROP GAIN 0 0 to 100 0 1 0 436 Proportional output gain X 1 DiffT IntT X error96 A higher gain usually provides a faster response Normally the DiffT is much smaller than IntT hence the equation then approximates to Prop output gain X error96 E g A gain of 10 and a step change in the error of 1096 will result in a step change at the output of 10096 Note The gain may be profiled using the PARAMETER PROFILE section within this menu 3 3 10 PID 1 2 PID integrator time constant PIN 437 460 PID 1 3 437 PID1 INTEGRAL TC Sets the PID integrator time PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN constant PID1 INTEGRAL TC 0 01 to 100 00 seconds 5 00 secs 437 Note Processes that take a long time to react will usually require a longer integrator time constant When the PID output reaches the clamp limits the integrator is held at the prevailing condition The clamp levels are also seperately applied to the internal integrator term result See 3 3 16 and 3 3 17 PID 1 2 PID negative clamp level PIN 444 467 APPLICATION BLOCKS
38. 441 464 PID 1 3 441 PID1 PRESET VAL 441 PID1 PRESET VAL 0 00 This integrator preset value is PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN enabled by PID1 INT PRESET PID1 PRESET VAL 300 00 0 00 441 Note The preset function is overidden by the PID RESET function 24 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 3 15 PID 1 2 PID reset PIN 442 465 PID 1 3 442 PID1 RESET When DISABLED it turns on the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN OP and releases the integrator PID1 RESET ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 442 Note When the reset is ENABLED the output stage and the integrator are set to 0 00 Note The PID RESET operates independantly from and has priority over the integrator preset function 3 3 16 PID 1 2 PID positive clamp level PIN 443 466 PID 1 3 443 PID1 POS CLAMP 443 PID1 POS CLAMP 100 00 Sets the positive clamp level PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for the PID output PID1 POS CLAMP 0 00 to 105 00 100 00 443 Note When the output is being clamped at this level the integrator is held at its prevailing value 3 3 17 PID 1 2 PID negative clamp level 444 467 PID 1 3 444 PID1 NEG CLAMP 444 PID1 NEG CLAMP 100 00 Sets the negative clamp level PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for the PID output PID1 NEG CLAMP 0 00 to 105 00 100 00 444 Note When the output is being clamped at this level the integrator is held at its prevailing value 3 3 18 P
39. Max tacho volts Speed feedback type Encoder scaling In position flag ENCODER SCALING Quadrature enable IR compensation Encoder lines Field current fb trim Motor encoder speed ratio Arm volts trim Analog tacho trim Rated arm volts EL1 2 3 rated a c Motor 1 2 select Encoder sign Menu tree stucture 51 5 2 3 Full menu diagram Diagnostics Continued from previous Diagnostics DIAGNOSTICS Section 7 Speed loop monitor Armature current loop monitor SPEED LOOP MONITOR Total speed ref monitor Speed demand monitor Speed error monitor Armature volts monitor Armature volts monitor Back EMF monitor Tacho volts monitor Motor RPM monitor Encoder RPM monitor Speed feedback monitor ARM LOOP MONITOR Armature current demand monitor Armature current monitor Armature current amps monitor Upper current limit monitor Lower current limit monitor Actual upper limit Actual lower limit Overload limit monitor Field current loop monitor At current limit flag FIELD CURRENT LOOP MONITOR Field demand monitor Field current monitor Field current amps monitor Field angle of advance Analog monitor Field active monitor ANALOG IO MONITOR UIP2 analog monitor UIP3 analog monitor
40. See 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software version See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes This is the transfer of the Parameters from the host to the PL X This information is written directly to the drive s permanent memory so the drive s present settings for the TARGET RECIPE PAGE will be overwritten The file will contain its recipe page source Normal 2 3 and will automatically save on that recipe page See also 10 2 1 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE with a locked recipe page 3 1 Connect the PL X to the host using the appropriate lead See10 1 1 RS232 PORT1 Connection pinouts 2 Using a standard communications package prepare the host to send an ASCII file Remember to set up the host s serial port first See 10 2 2 1 Receiving parameter data file from a PC Windows 95 upwards 3 Make sure that the PORT1 FUNCTION has been set to PARAM EXCH SELECT 4 Enter this menu when the PL X says RECEIVING begin the file transmission by the host computer Note If the message AUTHORISATION NEEDED appears on the PL X display it means recipe page 3 has been locked and cannot be overwritten Please refer to supplier See also 10 2 1 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE with a locked recipe page 3 5 The file ends in a 0000001 FF which the PL X uses to automatically SAVE the file 6 The PL X must now be reset by pressing the LEFT key This resets to recipe page NORMAL RESET To see other pages the appropriate power up reset must then be actioned
41. Unit to unit 2 metre cable part number 14102596 Unit to host 9 way female Dtype part LA102595 Turn on the control supply to the source and target PL Xs The display and keys on both units should be working in order to proceed with this transfer technique Connect the RS232 PORT of the source PL X to the 5232 PORT of the target PL X using an appropriate lead wired between plug 1 and plug 2 as above with pins Y and Z transposed and pin X disconnected The socket is type FCC68 4 way The recipe page of the transmitted file depends on the recipe page selection in the source PL X See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page 677 Only one page is sent each time To send all three pages requires three separate transmission sequences The recipe page selected on the source PL X also determines its page destination on the target PL X Provided the displays and keys are operating on both units you may proceed to 10 1 2 RS232 PORT Port1 Baud rate PIN 187 and set the baud rates for each unit to be 9600 Then proceed to 10 2 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive transmit on the source PL X followed by 10 2 2 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive receive on the target PL X With the target PL X in the DRIVE RECEIVE window press the up key to place it in a RECEIVING mode Return to the source PL X and in the DRIVE TRANSMIT window press the up key to commence TRANSMITTING Note If the message AUTHORISATION NEEDED appears it means recipe page 3 has bee
42. 204 Block OP and Fieldbus configs Drive personality and Product rating table 41 146 204 Conflict Help 5 5 ive vocet lea 55 Pushbuttons for simple STOP START Coast to stop 31 39 Change parameters continued 50 Pushbuttons for STOP START With ramp to stop 30 39 40 Change parameters 1 49 Configuration continued 1 581165 LR 51 Motor drive alarms serial links and display functions 52 Fuses European stock 205 Fuses proprietary General requirements 212121 GET FROM window 1411121 GOTO window 1 2 1 GOTO GETFROM Enable Hidden larm output rectify enable PIN 250 27 178 Incrementing and decrementing parameter values 47 111 23 34 215 Installation 3 phase power supply 215 AC supply to L1 2 3 different to EL1 2 3 37 107 108 213 Earthing and screening guidelines Earthing diagram for typical installation Guidelines when using filters Mounting PL X 185 265
43. 3 5 4 REEL DIAMETER CALC Reel speed input PIN 485 7 105 00 3 5 55 REEL DIAMETER CALC Minimum diameter input PIN 486 7 0 100 00 10 00 486 3 5 6 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter calculation min speed 487 105 00 5 00 487 3 5 7 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter hold enable PIN 488 0 1 Disabled 488 3 558 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter filter time constant PIN 489 0 1 200 05 5 00 secs 489 3 5 9 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter preset enable PIN490 0 1 Disabled 490 3 5 10 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter preset value PIN 491 O 100 0096 10 00 491 35 1 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter web break threshold 492 0 100 00 7 50 492 3 5 12 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter memory boot up PIN 493 0 1 Disabled 493 3 6 2 TAPER TENSION CALC Total tension output monitor PIN 494 100 00 0 00 494 __ _ TAPER TENSION CALC Tension reference PIN495 7 0 100 00 0 00 1495 364 TAPER TENSION CALC Taper strength input PIN 496 100 00 0 00 496 3 6 5 TAPER TENSION CALC Hyperbolic taper enable 497 S 3 6 6 CALC Tension trim input PIN 498 100 00 0 04 498 3 6 7 TAPER TENSION CALC Tapered tension monitor 499 100 00 0 00 499 37 2 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque demand monitor PIN 500 300 00 0 00 500 373 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque trim input_PIN501__ 150 00 0 00 501
44. 3 7 14 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel input monitor PIN 512 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 512 ACCEL INPUT MON 512 ACCEL INPUT MON 0 00 Used to monitor accel or input PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN an external accel signal ACCEL INPUT MON to 105 00 0 00 512 See 3 7 12 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel line speed input PIN 510 3 7 15 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel filter time constant PIN 513 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 513 ACCEL FILTER TC Sets a filter time constant for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the line acceleration signal ACCEL FILTER TC 0 00 to 200 00 SECS 0 10 SECS 513 If the line speed input or the external accel input signal used to derive the accel value have a ripple content then this may cause tension variations The filter is provided to smooth the accel value Use the accel monitor to set the filter time constant Select the lowest filter time constant that gives a smooth accel value 3 7 16 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension demand input PIN 514 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 514 TENSION DEM IP 514 TENSION DEM IP 0 00 Sets the tension demand input PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN TENSION DEM IP 100 00 0 00 514 APPLICATION BLOCKS 45 3 7 17 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension scaler PIN 515 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 515 TENSION SCALER Scales the tension from the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN taper tension block TENSION SCALER 3 0000 1 0000 515 The result of the product of the tensi
45. 37 4 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Stiction compensation PIN 502 300 00 0 00 502 1375 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Stiction web speed threshold PIN 503 376 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Static friction comp PIN 504 300 00 0 00 504 3 7 7___ TORQUE COMPENSATOR Dynamic friction comp PIN 505 300 00 0 00 505 378 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Friction sign 506 379 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Fixed mass inertia PIN 507 300 00 0 00 507 37 10 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Variable mass inertia PIN508 300 00 0 00 508 3 7 11 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Material width 509 3712 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel line speed input PINSIO 108 00 0 00 510 3713 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel scaler PINSI1 5710000 10 511 3 714 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel input mon 512 3 7 15 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel filter time constant PIN 513 0 200 008 0 01 secs 513 37 16 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension demand IP_PIN 514 100 00 0 00 514 37 17 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension scaler PINS15 30000 1 0000 515 3 7 18 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque memory select enable PIN 516 0 1 1 Disabled 516 37 19 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque memory input PIN 517 300 00 0 00 61 3 7 20 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension enable PIN 518 3 7 21 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Overwind underwind PIN519 10 1 Enabled 51 3722 TORQUE COMPENSATOR T Inertia c
46. 400 Block Disconnect 614 C O SW4 HI VALUE 0 01 386 UIP8 LO VAL 1 0 00 387 UIP8 HI VAL 2 0 01 96 388 UIP8 LO VAL 2 0 00 389 0 8 THRESHOLD 6 000 VOLTS UIP9 T9 SETUP 4 EGO 390 UIP9 IP RANGE 0 3991 UIP9 OFFSET 0 00 400 Block Disconnect 615 C O SW4 LO VALUE 0 00 392 UIP9 CAL RATIO 1 0000 400 Block Disconnect GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 393 UIP9 MAX CLAMP 100 00 CONFIGURATION 2 394 UIP9 MIN CLAMP 100 00 548 MULTIFUN3 MODE C O SWITCH or JUMPER E ENABLE GOTO GETFROM DISABLED UIP ANALOG GOTO 400 Disconnect 549 MULTIFUNS OP SEL DISABLED UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP DIGITAL GOTO 49 DOWN COMMAND 400 Block Disconnect UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 395 UIP9 HI VAL 1 0 01 96 396 UIP9 LO VAL 1 0 00 397 UIP9 VAL 2 0 01 398 UIP9 LO VAL 2 0 00 400 Disconnect 22 320 UIP2 IP RANGE 0 EDT GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 321 0 2 IP OFFSET 0 00 MULTI FUNCTION 4 3 22 UIP2 CAL RATIO 1 0000 550 MULTIFUN4 MODE C O SWITCH or JUMPER 23 UIP2 MAX CLAMP 100 00 551 MULTIFUN4 OP SEL DISABLED 24 UIP2 MIN CLAMP 100 00 400 Block Disco
47. CURRENT CONTROL CURRENT CONTROL 3 97 SPD BYPASS CUR EN 81 CUR CLAMP SCALER CURRENT CONTROL 3 CURRENT OVERLOAD 4 CURRENT CONTROL 3 DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 CURRENT CONTROL 3 88 DUAL CLAMP ENBL CURRENT CONTROL 3 89 UPPER CUR CLAMP CURRENT CONTROL 3 90 LOWER CUR CLAMP CURRENT CONTROL 3 91 EXTRA CUR REF CURRENT CONTROL 3 92 AUTOTUNE ENABLE 93 CUR PROP GAIN 94 CUR INT GAIN 95 CUR DISCONTINUITY 96 4 QUADRANT MODE 445542544552 output becomes the phase angle demand for the thyristor stack 98 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 8 1 CURRENT CONTROL Block diagram CURRENT CONTROL Clamps C 91 Current PIN 84 Scaler Scaled user v Limit Clamp PIN 136 Overload PIN 81 Extra Calibration target one Inverter Current reference Menu Enable 1 Prevailing ve Clamp PIN 138 limit se To current Error amp clamps Scaled user ve Clamp PIN 137 Prevailing ve Input Overload Overload Dyn profile Dyn profile Lower Clamp PIN 139 Connected Ramp Limit Low spd High spd current rom speed control time monitor clamp m At limit flag PIN 141 Current reference PIN 83 PIN 140 PIN 86 PIN 85 PIN 90 Current Loop off PIN 94 PIN 678 Warning Regen on Integral Max curr Hidden POOR Gain Response PIN 704 allows Current Armature Demand Stack Input Firing from current al Angle control clamps output PIN 92 Autotune
48. DIO2 Setup DIO output mode DIO3 Setup DIO rectify enable Digital outputs DIO4 Setup DIGITAL OUTPUTS DIO threshold DIO invert mode Get from Goto DIO input high value DOP1 setup DIO input low value DOP SETUP 1 3 DOP2 setup DOP rectify enable Staging posts DOP3 setup STAGING POSTS DOP threshold DOP invert mode Digital post 1 Digital post 2 Digital post 3 Digital post 4 Analog post 1 Analog post 2 Analog post 3 Software terminals Analog post 4 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded run Anded jog Anded start Jumper connections Internal run input JUMPER CONNECTIONS Jumper Get from JUMPER 1 16 Jumper Get from Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper Continued on next page Jumper o lt gt Jumper Goto Menu tree stucture 55 Continued from previous 5 2 7 Full menu diagram Block OP and Fieldbus configs Drive personality and Conflict Help Configuration Block output config BLOCK OP CONFIG Run mode ramps goto Motorised pot goto Reference exch slave goto Fieldbus Config Application block GOTO connections FIELDBUS CONFIG Jumper 1 to 8 GETFROM Bit Packed GETFROM Jumper 9 to 16 GOTO Bit Packed GETFROM Bit Packed GOT
49. 2 Blow over the commutator using clean dry air to clear it of extraneous matter Check that the brushes are correctly seated and that the brush tensions are correct 3 Check that the motor vent blower is free to rotate and remember to re check the airflow when the blower is operating 4 The emergency stopping and safety procedure including local and remote actuators must be checked prior to applying power to the motor 5 The installation must be clean and free of debris swarf clippings tools etc The enclosure must be adequately ventilated with clean dry cool filtered air When the motor is running check the PL X heatsink fans are operating and the flow of heatsink air is unobstructed See 14 1 Product rating table for cooling airflow data checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked checked 42 Basic application 4 5 CONTROL ENGINEERING COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES Before applying power to the L1 2 3 terminals for the first time it is recommended that a high wattage resistor of between 4 and 40 Ohms E g a 1 Kw fire bar is inserted in series with the armature This will limit any potentially destructive current and prevent possible thyristor damage A typical example of the cause of fault current is the incorrect phasing of the EL 1 2 3 terminals with respect to L1 2 3 Without the correct semi conductor
50. 300 00 0 00 508 The compensation applied depends on reel diameter The diameter calculator block must be activated in order for the diameter value to be acquired by this block The gain curve of this input is proportional to DIA It is zero at minimum diameter and unity for maximum diameter To arrive at a suitable value to enter here you must perform a measurement of armature current APPLICATION BLOCKS 43 with a separate full reel running in speed control mode The purpose of this experiment is to simulate the condition of unity gain to this input and measure the torque required to accelerate the mass This condition occurs at maximum diameter and hence minimum reel speed First calculate the build up ratio E g If your core diameter is 0 1 metre and the full reel diameter is 0 5 metre then the build up ratio is 5 1 Then reprogram the reel drive speed ramp to a new longer ramp time as follows New ramp time the web speed ramp time X the build up ratio E g For a web speed ramp time of 10 secs and a build up ratio of 5 Adjust the reel speed ramp time to 50 secs for the duration of the experiment Remember to return the reel speed ramp time to the original setting after the reading has been completed 2 Set the speed of the reel drive to 100 Build up ratio in this example this results in a 20 speed Then increase the speed reference by 5 Note the change in ARM CUR in the diagnostics menu whilst
51. 501 TORQUE TRIMIP 00096 586 TMR EXPIRED FLAG LOW 502 STICTION COMP 0 00 COMPARATOR 1 3 503 STIC WEB SPD THR 5 006 588 COMP1 INPUT 1 0 00 504 STATIC FRICTION 0 00 96 589 COMP1 INPUT 2 0 00 505 DYNAMIC FRICTION 0 00 590 1 WINDOW SEL DISABLED 506 FRICTION SIGN NON INVERT 591 COMP1 HYSTERESIS 0 50 96 507 FIXED INERTIA 0 00 96 GOTO 400 Disconnect 508 VARIABLE INERTIA 0 00 COMPARATOR 2 3 509 MATERIAL WIDTH 100 00 96 592 COMP2 INPUT 1 0 00 96 510 ACCEL LINE SPEED 0 00 96 593 COMP2 INPUT 2 0 00 96 511 ACCEL SCALER 10 00 594 COMP2 WINDOW SEL DISABLED 512 ACCEL INPUT MON 0 00 96 595 COMP2 HYSTERESIS 0 50 513 ACCEL FILTER 0 10 SECS e GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 514 DEM 0 00 COMPARATOR 3 3 515 SCALER 1 0000 596 INPUT 1 0 00 516 TORQUE MEM SEL DISABLED 597 COMP3 INPUT 2 0 00 96 517 TORQUE MEM INPUT 0 00 96 598 COMP3 WINDOW SEL DISABLED 518 TENSION ENABLE ENABLED 599 COMP3 HYSTERESIS 0 50 96 519 OVER UNDERWIND ENABLED GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 520 NERTIA COMP MON 0 00 96 COMPARATOR 4 3 PRESET SPEED 600 COMP4 INPUT 1 0 00 523 PRESET OP MON 0 00 601 COMP4 INPUT 2 0 00 524 SEL1 LSB LOW 602 COMP4 WINDOW SEL DISABLED 525 PRESET SELECT 2 LOW 603 4 HYSTERESIS 0 50 96 526 PRESET SEL3 MSB LOW
52. 6 10 9 5 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Position reference PIN 242 SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 242 POSITION REF Used to enter POSITION REF PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN referred to MARKER OFFSET POSITION REF 30 000 counts O counts 242 Note 242 POSITION REF may be adjusted at any time If the system is above the zero lock threshold then changing this value has no effect It may be changed as many times as required whilst operating in the zero speed lock region 6 10 9 6 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker frequency monitor PIN 243 SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 243 MARKER FREQ MON Monitors the frequency of the PARAMETER RANGE marker pulse on T15 MARKER FREQ MON 20 00 to 655 37 HZ This output function measures the period between successive marker pulses to accurately compute the output frequency This window has a branch hopping facility Note For frequencies below 20 Hz the monitor will display a random reading DEFAULT 0 0 HZ 6 10 9 7 SPINDLE ORIENTATE In position flag PIN 244 SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 244 IN POSITION FLAG This goes high if the position PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN error is approx 20 counts IN POSITION FLAG LOW or HIGH LOW 244 Note The flag may oscillate whilst the loop is settling if 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK gain is high enough to cause overshoot This window has a branch hopping facility DIAGNOSTICS 121 7 DIAGNOSTICS 7 DIAGNOSTICS
53. PN The filters are useful for eliminating mechanical resonance effects from the control system closed loop 3 12 2 FILTER 1 2 Filter output monitor 568 573 FILTER 1 3 568 FILTER1 OP MON 568 FILTER1 OP MON 0 0096 Allows the filter 1 output to be PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN monitored FILTER1 OP MON 315 00 0 00 568 3 12 3 FILTER 1 2 Filter time constant 569 574 FILTER 1 3 569 FILTER1 TC Sets the value of the time PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN constant for the filter 1 block FILTER1 TC 0 000 to 32 000 SECS 1 000 SECS 569 For filter time constants in excess of 32 000 seconds the filters may be cascaded APPLICATION BLOCKS 57 3 12 4 FIXED LOW PASS FILTER There is a simple low pass filter function with a cut off frequency of approximately 10 Hz Amplitude Hidden PIN 705 Filter input Frequency LOW PASS Fixed 10Hz FILTER Cut off freq To use the filter connect the input using a GOTO window from another block and connect the output using a GETFROM from the destination block Alternatively use JUMPERS to make the connections Hidden PIN 38 706 Filter Output It may be useful for smoothing linear signals or eliminating resonances The filter does not have any adjustments hence the PIN numbers are hidden 58 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 13 APPLICATION BLOCKS BATCH COUNTER PINs used 578 to 582 BATCH COUNTER 582
54. Ro i aa 732 FIELD MONITOR Field current monitor PIN 144 R 7 3 3 FIELD MONITOR Field amps monitor PIN 145 R 731 FIELD MONITOR Field demand monitor 143 0 100 00 0 00 0 125 00 0 00 O 50 00 A 0 00 Amps 145 734 FIELD MONITOR Field firing angle monitor 146 10 155 146 7 3 5 FIELD MONITOR Field active monitor PIN 147 0 1 disabled 147 0 148 RESERVE EE 7 4 1 ANALOG IO MONITOR UIP3 analogue input monitor PIN 151 741 ANALOG IO MONITOR UIP2 analogue input monitor PIN 150 30 730 0 000 V R 30 730 0 000 V 151 741 ANALOG IO MONITOR UIP4 analogue input monitor PIN 152 30 730 0 000 V 7 4 1 ANALOG IO MONITOR UIP5 analogue input monitor PIN 153 30 730 0 000 V 153 7 4 1 ANALOG 10 MONITOR UIP6 analogue input monitor PIN 154 30 730 0 000V 154 744 ANALOG 10 MONITOR UIP7 analogue input monitor PIN 165 30 730 0 000V 155 744 ANALOG IO MONITOR UIPB analogue input monitor PIN 156 30 730 0 000V 156 74 ANALOG 10 MONITOR analogue input monitor PIN 187 30 730 0 000V 157 IIo pp 742 ANALOG 10 MONITOR analogue output monitor PIN 158 17 300V 0200 159 74 2 ANALOGIO MONITOR AOP2 analogue output monitor PIN 160 11 300V 0 000V 160 74 2 ANAL
55. TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 520 INERTIA COMP MON 520 INERTIA COMP MON 0 00 Allows the final result of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN inertia comp to be monitored INERTIA COMP MON 300 00 0 00 520 This has a branch hopping facility to 3 7 2 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque demand monitor PIN 500 APPLICATION BLOCKS 47 PIN 695 Min speed Hed beet 5 PIN 487 PIN 488 ue 3 8 Centre winding block arrangement e Hidden pin PIN 697 Unfiltered Diameter Hidden pin To activate this block connect the GOTO Eg to a staging post m Wes Seep Hold Filter REEL SPEED PIN 483 ROSAT PIN 492 Diameter Web break Minimum threshold Dia min is scaling REEL PIN 696 factor and low limit Tension DIAMETER Rectified reel speed reference Hidden pin PIN 486 PIN 490 PIN 491 Diameter min Diam Preset Preset value Web breakFlag on PIN 690 PIN 495 Tension ref Meri Dotted line shows factory internal software diameter Calculator T H Taper mode block must be actived Marites connection for diameter arithmetic PIN 494 Total Tension Taper strength Monitor PIN 498 Taper calc Use the SLACK take up mode to saturate the TAPER TENSION speed loop and then control 518 TENSION is ENABLE using 714 IN SLACK FLAG Torque Torque trim mem l TORQUE input input Tension enab
56. protection 112 STANDBY FLD CUR Motor field windings are normally very inductive and have a long time constant This results in smooth current in the field In this case the field current reading is reasonably accurate irrespective of when it is sampled FIELD CONTROL 3 113 FLD QUENCH DELAY ah anche anche Some motors have shorter field winding time constants than normal resulting in up to 20 ripple In this case the PL X may sample the current at a non ideal point in the cycle which will result in a slightly incorrect control level Usually no more than a few To normalise the field current back to its correct level it may be necessary to use the field current trim See 6 1 12 CALIBRATION Field current feedback trim PIN 15 or re calibrate the field current to overcome the inaccuracy Warning Field reversal or disconnection Due to the high inductance of motor fields it may take several seconds for the field current to decay to zero after the field output has been inhibited by the PL X Do not open circuit the field unless the field current has reached zero The PL X is unable to measure the decaying current after an inhibit so it is not possible to use the field current monitors or field active flag to show zero current has actually been attained It is necessary to observe the current on an external instrument and time how long it takes to decay The interval timer block may then be utilised to implement a safety delay before
57. 0 nnn nnn 52 3 10 3 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 Output select 1 to 8 PIN 545 7 9 551 3 5 7 9 52 3 10 4 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 Main input GET FROM 1 to 8 0 2 52 3 10 5 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 Aux input GET FROM 1 to 8 2 2 53 3 10 6 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 6 1108 53 3 11 APPLICATION BLOCKS LATCH 5 n uiiellieniel lI iidiveninelice si eli urirack srdcasi cri a aug 54 3 11 1 EATCH Block diagratri ir Oe eI Der eI eO Re p er V Ee IP 54 3 11 2 LATCH Latch output monitor PIN 560 2 2 0 0 122 54 3 11 3 LATCH Latch data input 561 0 000 0 0 0 0 2 2 54 3 11 4 LATCH Latch clock input PIN 562 2 42 2 55 3 11 5 LATCH batch set input 25 re eter ae aD 55 3 11 6 LATCH Latch reset input 564 0 0 070 0 2 2 4 55 3 11 7 LATCH Latch output value for HI LOW PINs 565 566 55 3 12 APPLICATION BLOCKS FILTER 1 2 56 3 12 1 FILTER Block diagram eirca 56 3 12 2 FILTER 1 2 Filter output monitor PIN 568 573 56 3 12 3
58. 10 00 81 6 8 10 CURRENT CONTROL Current amp proportional gain PIN 93 O 200 00 30 00 500 93 6 8 11 CURRENT CONTROL Current amp integral gain 94 O 200 00 13 00 100 94 6 8 12 CURRENT CONTROL Discontinuous current point 95 0 200 00 13 00 0 00 Note When using very small unloaded motors on high rated PL X units the missing pulse alarm be activated This is because the armature current is below the missing pulse detection threshold To prevent the alarm from tripping set 8 1 5 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Missing pulse trip enable PIN 175 to DISABLED See also 13 13 4 1 50 100 rating select for details of the burden jumper which allows selection of a high value burden resistor for an alternative method of testing the PL X on small motors The passive motor set parameters are the ones used in the REDUCED Menu The PASSIVE MOTOR SET is also useful for a rapid review of the alterable parameters in the CHANGE PARAMETERS reduced menu or setting these parameters for a second system See 11 1 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Reduced menu enable Menu tree stucture 45 5 Menu tree structure 5 Men tree Str ctuliB a D EROR Me USE RARE UR Y MARKE ERN T 45 bid tii teks x ex de eee eel an nel eed eee ee Sak 46 5 1 1 Incrementing and decrementing parameter
59. 2 2 2 2 68 6 1 14 CALIBRATION Analog tacho trim 17 2 00 0 69 6 1 15 CALIBRATION Rated armature volts 18 QUICK START 69 6 1 16 CALIBRATION EL1 2 3 rated AC volts PIN 19 QUICK START 69 6 1 17 CALIBRATION Motor 1 or 2 select PIN 20 0 4 70 6 2 CHANGE PARAMETERS RUN MODE 5 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 022 0 2 422 71 6 2 1 RUN MODE RAMPS Block diagram including 000 72 6 2 2 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp output monitor 21 000 1 73 6 2 3 RUN MODE RAMPS Forward up time 22 eaten nanan enne 73 Contents 5 6 2 4 RUN MODE RAMPS Forward down time 23 eaenes 73 6 2 5 RUN MODE RAMPS Reverse up time PIN 24 0 1 73 6 2 6 RUN MODE RAMPS Reverse down time 25 0000 000 73 6 2 7 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp input PIN 26 2 2 74 6 2 8 RUN MODE RAMPS Forward minimum speed PIN 27 000000 01 74 6 2 9 RUN MODE RAMPS Reverse minimum speed PIN 28 2 74 6 2 10 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp automatic preset PIN 29 75 6 2 11 RUN
60. 4 SETUP 4 340 UIP4 IP RANGE 0 941 UIP4 IP OFFSET 0 00 477 PROFLR Y Xmin 0 00 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 342 0 4 CAL RATIO 1 0000 478 PROFLR Y AT Xmax 100 00 96 LATCH 3 343 JUIPA MAX CLAMP 100 00 96 479 PROFILER Xmin 0 00 96 560 LATCH OUTPUT MON 0 00 344 UIP4 MIN CLAMP 100 00 480 PROFILER Xmax 100 00 561 LATCH DATA IP LOW UIP ANALOG GOTO 26 RAMP INPUT 481 PROFLR X RECTIFY ENABLED 562 LATCH CLOCK IP LOW PRFL X AXIS GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 563 LATCH SET LOW UIP DIGITAL OP1 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 564 RESET IP LOW 945 UIP4 VAL 1 0 01 96 483 DIAMETER OP MON 0 00 565 LATCH HI VALUE 0 01 96 346 0 4 LO VAL 1 0 00 947 UIP4 VAL 2 0 01 348 UIP4 LO VAL 2 0 00 96 484 DIA WEB SPEED 0 00 96 566 LATCH LO VALUE 0 00 96 485 DIA REEL SPD IP 0 00 96 FILTER 1 3 486 DIAMETER MIN 10 00 96 568 FILTERT OP MON 0 00 96 NE 349 UIP4 THRESHOLD 6 000 VOLTS 487 DIA MIN SPEED 5 00 96 1 000 SECS UIP5 5 SETUP 4 488 DIAMETER HOLD DISABLED 400 Block Disconnect 35
61. 5 10 20 or 30V This allows signals other than 10V full scale to be used and enables the input to be used as a sophisticated digital input This can be achieved by programming the input to the 30V range and setting the programmable threshold detector at 15V to recognise a O or 1 All the analogue input voltages can be monitored using the built in menus which will display in the selected ranges of 5 120V 10 240V 20 480V and 30 720 Volts See 6 7 7 7 SPEED PI ADAPTION Using small speed inputs The default gives low gain for small inputs Note When used as digital inputs the UIPs provide excellent noise immunity and settable threshold Introduction and Technical Data 27 When using 4 20mA loop signals all that is required is to fit an external burden resistor of 220 Ohms between the input and OV Then set up the relevant UIP to read the resulting voltage signal generated by passing the signal current through the burden The diagram shows a 4 20mA signal flowing through an external burden resistor TONN OV ov See 13 3 1 2 1 4 20mA loop input SETUP 3 4 4 Analogue tachogenerator input This input is intended solely for the connection of an analogue bi polar DC tachogenerator An AC tachogenerator with a rectified output may also be used with the PL series 2 quadrant drives Terminals T25 OV and T26 TACH should be used for the two connections to the tachogenerator A DC voltage of up to 200V DC maximum can be applied dir
62. 5005200 4 1 PL X85 164 205 60000 250A 28500 170M3816 1 250A 24000 A500S250 4 1 PL X115 216 270 128000 315A 46500 170M3817 1 350A 47000 A500S350 4 1 PL X145 270 330 128000 400A 105000 170M3819 1 400A 61000 A500S400 4 2 PL X185 350 430 240000 500A 145000 170M5810 2 500A 97000 5005500 4 2 PL X225 435 530 240000 550A 190000 170 5811 2 6 140000 5005600 4 2 PL 265 520 630 306000 6 275000 170 5812 2 Consult Ferraz Shawmut Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives The above fuses are specified for operation up to 500V DC for armature circuit time constants up to 10mS The table below gives maximum typical operating voltage for various time constants inductance resistance Please refer to the fuse manufacturers data for further information Maximum working DC voltage Maximum allowable time constant 500 10mS 450 20mS 400 30mS 380 40mS 360 50mS Installation 207 14 4 PL X family cover dimensions Se 1 7 D Dimension in PL X 5 50 PL X65 145 PL X185 265 W 216 216 216 H 289 378 378 D 174 218 294 A fixing centre 175 175 175 B fixing centre 228 390 390 C 258 410 410 See 14 5 14 6 and 14 7 for unit footprint and busbar dimensions Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for
63. 560 LATCH OUTPUT MON 0 00 110 MIN FLD CURRENT 10 00 568 FILTER1 OP MON 0 00 96 111 STANDBY FLD ENBL DISABLED 573 FILTER2 OP MON 0 00 112 STANDBY FLD CUR 25 00 578 COUNTER COUNT 0 113 FLD QUENCH DELAY 10 0 SECS 583 TMR ELAPSED TIME 0 0 SECS 114 FIELD REFERENCE 100 00 69 EL1 2 3 RMS 0 0 VOLTS SUMMER 1 3 401 SUMMER1 0 00 96 402 SUMMER1 SIGN1 NON INVERT 403 SUMMER1 SIGN2 404 SUMMER1 RATIO1 1 0000 405 SUMMER1 2 1 0000 406 SUMMER1 DIVIDER1 1 0000 407 SUMMER1 DIVIDER2 1 0000 408 SUMMER1 INPUT1 0 00 96 409 SUMMER1 INPUT2 0 00 96 410 SUMMER1 INPUT3 0 00 411 SUMMER1 DEADBAND 0 00 412 SUMMER1 OP INVRT NON INVERT 413 SUMMER1 CLAMP 105 00 SUMMER 2 3 415 SUMMER2 0 00 96 416 SUMMER2 SIGN1 NON INVERT 417 SUMMER2 SIGN2 NON INVERT 418 SUMMER2 RATIO1 1 0000 419 SUMMER2 2 1 0000 420 SUMMER2 DIVIDER1 1 0000 421 SUMMER2 DIVIDER2 1 0000 422 SUMMER2 INPUT1 0 00 423 SUMMER2 INPUT2 0 00 424 SUMMER2 INPUT3 0 00 425 SUMMER2 DEADBAND 0 00 426 SUMMER2 OP INVRT NON INVERT 427 SUMMER2 CLAMP 105 00 3 429 PID1 OP MONITOR 0 00 430 PID1 INPUT1 0 00 431 PID1 RATION 1 0000 432 PID1 DIVIDER1 1 0000 433 PID1 INPUT2 0 00 434 PID1 RATIO2 1 0000 435 PID1 DIVIDER2 1 0000 436 PID1 PROP 1 0 437 PID1 INTEG
64. 6 DIGITAL INPUTS 3 DIP2 T15 SETUP 4 DIGITAL INPUTS 3 DIP3 T16 SETUP 4 There are 4 digital logic inputs DIP1 2 3 4 on terminals T14 15 16 17 plus the RUN input on T31 The DIP inputs may also be used for DIGITAL INPUTS 3 incremental encoder or register mark inputs In DIP4 T17 SETUP 4 this case the logic functions will continue to operate as described here The LO and HI values can be entered using the display and keys or may be connected to other output PINs using JUMPERS This turns the function into a change over switch for dynamic values For logic only usage a value of 0 00 is read as a low Any non zero value is read as a high Logic inversion is accomplished by entering 0 00 in the value for HI window and 0 01 in the value for LO window 13 5 1 Using DIP inputs for encoder signals Logic thresholds 0 2V 1 AV Note When using encoders with quadrature outputs it is very important that the phase relationship of the 2 pulse trains remains as close to 90 degrees as possible If the encoder is not mounted and centered accurately on the shaft it can cause skewing of the internal optics as the shaft rotates through 360 degrees This produces a severe degradation of the phase relationship on a cyclical basis If the encoder appears to gyrate as the shaft rotates you must rectify the problem before trying to proceed with commissioning The best way of checking the output is to use a high quality oscillosco
65. 74 219 Reverse up time 24 73 219 Record of bug fixes Record of modifications Reduced menu enable Regenerative stopping with PL models 22 88 Remotely mounted display unit 21 48 159 160 164 218 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition 17 27 47 58 70 163 196 SELF TEST MESSAGE 18 32 148 149 150 156 159 SELF TEST MESSAGE Authorisation needed 149 Data corruption 18 148 156 Disable GOTO 148 Enable GOTO 149 Enter password GOTO CONFLICT Integral armature current cal Internal error ees Memory version error esse Memory write 2 0 3 eene Proportional armature current cal fail Self caltolerance 5 iere eie ert ER Stop drive to adjust parameter Semiconductor fuse ratings SERIAL LINKS Drive 2 2 2 memi PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive receive 156 158 PARAMETER EXC
66. Bardac drives PL PLX Digital DC Drive Part 1 Basic Product Manual HG501441 v5 15h Part 1 Basic Product Manual Part 2 Application Blocks Part 3 High Power Modules Contents Contents 3 Bardac drives ap NOTE These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment or to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation operation or maintenance Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser s purposes the matter should be referred to the local Supplier sales office The contents of this instruction manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement commitment or relationship The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Bardac Corporation The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Bardac Corporation Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty IMPORTANT MESSAGE This is a version 5 15 manual Version 5 17 and above software has all the functions described See 5 1 7 Finding the software version number of the unit DO YOU NEED HELP See 14 13 What to do in the event of a problem Other PL X manuals Part 2 APPLICATION BLOCKS Part 3 PL X 275 980 from 650A to 2250A SERIAL COMMS and STACK DRIVER All also available to download from the
67. COMPENSATOR blocks In this case the diameter x Minimum threshold result is automatically connected to these blocks REEL mesi factor and low limit via internal software connections d Hence the GOTO of this block must be connected reel speed iade pin to a staging post for example in order to activate waa fe Filter Note This block is usually used in conjunction with the TAPER TENSION CALC TORQUE PIN 492 Web break the block See 3 8 Centre winding block arrangement 3 5 2 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter output monitor PIN 483 483 DIAMETER OP MON 0 0096 DEFAULT 0 0096 RANGE 0 00 100 0096 PARAMETER DIAMETER OP MON This is the output result of the diameter calculator 3 5 3 REEL DIAMETER CALC Web speed input PIN 484 484 DIA WEB SPEED IP 0 0096 Sets the input value prior to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN rectifying for the WEB speed DIA WEB SPEED IP 105 00 0 00 484 3 5 4 REEL DIAMETER CALC Reel speed input PIN 485 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 485 DIA REEL SPD IP 485 DIA REEL SPD IP 0 00 Sets the input value prior to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN rectifying for the reel speed DIA REEL SPD IP 105 00 0 00 485 APPLICATION BLOCKS 33 3 5 5 REEL DIAMETER CALC Minimum diameter input PIN 486 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 486 DIAMETER MIN 486 DIAMETER MIN 7 10 00 Sets minimum diamete
68. DISABLED JUMPER 6 4 GET FROM 718 CUR DEMAND UNF GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect m 260 SCOPE OP SELECT DISABLED GOTO 400 Block Disconnect DIGITAL INPUTS 3 JUMPER 7 4 DIP1 T14 SETUP 4 GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 310 DIP1 IP HI VALUE 0 01 96 E GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 311 DIP1 IP LO VALUE 0 00 96 JUMPER 8 4 E GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 400 Block Disconnect DIP2 715 SETUP 4 400 Block Disconnect ee 312 DIP2 IP HI VALUE 0 01 313 DIP2 IP LO VALUE 0 00 400 Block Disconnect E GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 400 Disconnect DIP3 T16 SETUP 4 314 DIP3 IP VALUE 0 01 400 Block Disconnect 315 DIP3 IP LO VALUE 0 00 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect a GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 11 4 DIP4 T17 SETUP 4 400 Block Disconnect 316 DIP4 IP HI VALUE 0 01 400 Block Disconnect 3 317 DIP4 IP LO VALUE 0 00 96 EE GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 400 Block Disconnect RUN IP SETUP 4 400 Disconnect 318 RUN IP VALUE 0 01 319 RUN IP LO VALUE 0 00 96 400 Block Disconnect GOTO 308 INTERNAL RUN 400 Block Disconnect DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS 3 JUMPER 14 4 DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 15 4 GOTO 40
69. GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 527 PR VALUE FOR 000 0 00 C O SWITCH 1 3 528 PR VALUE FOR 001 0 00 604 C O SW1 CONTROL LOW 529 PR VALUE FOR 010 0 00 605 C O SW1 HI VALUE 0 01 530 PR VALUE FOR 011 0 00 606 C O SW1 LO VALUE 0 00 531 PR VALUE FOR 100 0 00 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 532 PR VALUE FOR 101 0 00 C O SWITCH 2 3 2 B33 PR VALUE FOR 110 0 00 poe 607 C O SW2 CONTROL LOW 534 PR VALUE FOR 111 0 00 608 C O SW2 VALUE 0 01 380 UIP8 RANGE 0 381 UIP8 OFFSET 0 00 382 UIP8 CAL RATIO 1 0000 383 UIP8 MAX CLAMP 100 00 384 0 8 MIN CLAMP 100 00 UIP ANALOG GOTO 400 Block Disconnect MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 609 SW2 LO VALUE 0 00 96 UIP DIGITAL OP1 GOTO 48 MP UP COMMAND UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 385 0 8 VAL 1 0 01 96 544 MULTIFUNT MODE C O SWITCH or JUMPER GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 545 MULTIFUN1 OP SEL DISABLED C O SWITCH 3 3 400 Block Disconnect 610 C O SW3 CONTROL LOW 400 Block Disconnect 611 C O SW3 HI VALUE 0 01 400 Block Disconnect 612 C O SW3 LO VALUE 0 00 ERES GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 546 MULTIFUN2 MODE C O SWITCH or JUMPER C O SWITCH 4 3 547 MULTIFUN2 OP SEL DISABLED 613 C O SW4 CONTROL LOW
70. JOG speed 2 E i Threshold PIN 39 ou off Ramping SLACK speed1 Flag output PIN 40 Ramp Preset PIN 31 Value gate Ramp Preset SLACK speed2 Value input Offset Scaler PIN 354 GO TO High value Ny Default 1 355 PIN2 357 High PIN 30 Ramp Ext Preset Lower Low High valie 2N Permanent action in run PIN1 356 PIN2 358 mode momentary action Current is GO TO at commencement of Jog Crawl speed Clamp PIN 29 T19 Default RUN MODE RAMP ds Jog Mode And Auto Select JOG CRAWL SLACK Preset PIN 360 PIN 42 T6 UIP6 PIN 43 Jog Slack Operating JOG MODE START T33 JOG T32 Ramp input Applied ramp Contactor Ramp function SELECT 719 IP level IP level Total value time state PIN 689 Stopped low low low reference Stop ramp time OFF m aod Stopped high low low reference Stop ramp time OFF Running low high low reference Run mode ramp Slack 1 takeup low high high tef slack1 Jog slack ramp Slack 2 takeup high high high tef slack2 Jog slack ramp Jog speed 1 low low high Jog speed 1 Jog slack ramp Time Jog speed 2 high low high Jog speed 2 Jog slack ramp Also in Crawl high high low Crawl speed Run mode ramp Speed Control PIN 65 ANALOG X Offset Scaler PIN 364 GO TO OP1 High value Ny Default PIN1 365 PIN2 367 Main Upper PIN 162 clamp Dig mon High value2 Ny PIN1 366 PIN2 3
71. LOW or HIGH LOW Sets logic level for the latch PARAMETER reset input LATCH RESET IP See the truth table for a complete definition 3 11 7 LATCH Latch output value for HI LOW PINs 565 566 LATCH 565 LATCH HI VALUE 565 LATCH HI VALUE 0 01 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT Sets the output value for the high result LATCH HI VALUE 300 00 0 01 LATCH 3 566 LATCH LO VALUE Y 566 LATCH LO VALUE 0 00 e RANGE DEFAULT PIN 300 0096 0 0096 566 Sets the output value for the PARAMETER low result LATCH LO VALUE 56 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 12 APPLICATION BLOCKS FILTER 1 2 PINs used 568 9 and 573 4 There are 2 identical filter blocks FILTER 1 3 GET FROM APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 FILTER 1 3 FILTER 1 568 FILTER1 OP MON Each filter has an accurate time constant set by the user With a 0 000 value the filter is transparent FILTER 1 3 569 FILTER1 TC There is also a simple low pass filter in the hidden PIN list Input is PIN 705 and output is PIN 706 FILTER 2 Amplitude 3 12 1 FILTER Block diagram FILTER 1 FILTER 2 GO TO PIN 573 Filter Output monitor FILTER 1 GO TO PIN 568 Filter Output monitor 1 Filter input GET FROM Filter input Frequency Frequency PIN 574 Time constant PIN 569 Time constant 2
72. MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 This alarm may be caused by two possible events at the commencement of a running mode request It is accompanied by automatic inhibiting of the current loop followed by de energisation of the contactor 1 If the incoming 3 phase supply is of insufficient quality to allow the synchronisation circuit to measure its frequency and or phase rotation It may be due to an intermittant or missing phase on EL1 2 3 2 The ZERO REFERENCE interlock function has been enabled and the operator has failed to reset the external speed references to zero See 6 10 CHANGE PARAMETERS ZERO INTERLOCKS 8 1 11 19 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Warning flags Note The following alarms are also available on hidden PINs after the normal delay time irrespective of whether they are enabled to trip the drive or not These flags are reset by a start or jog command 700 STALL WARNING 701 REF XC WARNING 702 THERMISTOR WARN 703 SPD FBK WARN There is also one further active flag 704 1 LOOP OFF WARN a hidden PIN which goes low as soon as the current loop stops making current under the following fault conditions 8 1 11 1 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Armature overcurrent 8 1 11 11 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Supply phase loss Control supply or EL1 2 3 supply 8 1 11 12 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Synchronization loss The drive needs to be started T33 T32 and the RUN enabled T31 for 704 to function This is because it is operating within the curren
73. PLBLK5 15M4 HG103562v5 15h Mar 2011 EL LELLULLLLULLLILU CZT LGOS LLLLLLLLLUL LA AAA Sb meer PIN 62 SPEED Sod int ax T1 3 Int Ref 1 CONTROL ref Reset OV terminal PIN PIN Common otorised pot 70 73 PIN 63 Speed Error Speed loop Spd Ref 2 amplifier Default Terminal 2 No display PIN 713 Speed Speed error Ref 3 Mon GO TO Def Terminal 3 PIN 125 50 10 High value Ny Default PIN1 325 PIN2 327 PIN 65 Ref 4 High Low Fig atus Low value2 7 Speed ETE PIN1 326 PIN2 328 Low value2 GO OP2 ref Dig mon internal Default Internal connection From Total Speed d Run mode ramp block output bypass Speed Ref demand enable monitor monitor PIN 97 PIN 123 PIN 124 reference to current loop Range PIN 330 T3 UIP3 monitor ANALOG X Offset Scaler PIN 334 GO TO OP1 H PIN 27 Fwd min speed High value Default PIN1 335 PIN2 337 High Speed tow Fn value Ref cur alie PINT 336 2 338 demand Dig mon GO TO OP2 T4 Default PIN 28 Run mode ramp Rev min speed PIN 340 T4 UIP4 GO TO PIN 37 H Run mode BOE ramp OP E i Monitor JOG speed 1 B S PIN 21 GO TO OP1 Default PIN1 345 PIN2 347 High value Ny High Ramped Low High value2 Speed pili 162 PIN1 346 PIN2 348 Ref Digimon GO TO OP2 PIN 38 BR PIN 34 E 5 Ramping 8 5 Flag
74. UIP3 T3 SETUP Digital IP high value for output 1 PIN 335 300 00 0 01 13 3 1 10 UIP3 T3 SETUP Digital IP low value for output 1 PIN 336 300 00 0 00 1331 1 UIP3 T3 SETUP UIP3 Digital IP high value for output 2 337 300 00 0 01 337 13 3 1 12 UIP3 73 SETUP UIP3 Digital IP low value for output 2 338 300 00 0 00 338 13 81 13 UPS 73 SETUP UIPS Threshold PIN339 9830 000 eooov 339 133 1 4 SETUP UIPA Input range 340 ranges 10V range 340 13 4 2 UIPA T4 SETUP UIPA Input offset PIN341 100 00 0 00 341 13 8 3 UIPA TA SETUP UIPA Linear scaling factor PIN 342 3 0000 1 0000 342 13 3 1 4 UIP4 4 SETUP UIP4 Max clamp level 343 300 00 100 0096 13 3 1 5 4 T4 SETUP UIP4 Min clamp level 344 300 00 100 00 13 3 1 9 UIP4 T4 SETUP UIP4 Digital IP high value for output 1 PIN 345 300 00 0 01 2 13 3 1 10 UIP4 T4 SETUP UIP4 Digital IP low value for output 1 PIN 346 300 00 0 00 2 13 3 1 11 UIP4 T4 SETUP UIP4 Digital IP high value for output 2 PIN 347 300 00 0 0196 13 3 1 12 UIP4 T4 SETUP UIP4 Digital IP low value for output 2 PIN 348 300 00 0 00 13 3 1 13 UIP4 T4 SETUP UIP4 Threshold 349 30 000 V 6 000V 224 PIN number
75. 15096 for 25 seconds for PLX Field programmable minimum to 10096 continuous with fail alarm Note Models PL440 PLX440 PL980 PLX980 have no overload capability PLX275 980 4 Mechanical Dimensions PL X 275 440 1 757 742 Busbar connection 698 Drive mtg point 690 L2 Standard L1 L2 L3 Top entry AC supply input versions Suffix TE Optional L1 L2 L3 bottom entry AC supply input versions Suffix BE Drive mtgs 4 x M8 fixings HJ103501 201 14 12 L3 157 e e F 108 64 2 x M6 Earth 10 f o 1 Datum in ES Ed 25 x wo S N 350 22 04 ee zu 220 x 175 Datum Weight 45KG See 7 5 Lifting Air out IMPORTANT Ensure 200mm area Ensure exit top and bottom of drive for air is not unrestricted air entry exit deflected towards air intake Venting kit FT Available Air Intake i Venting kit Lift fixing point Points o o oy Fi Air Intake IMPORTANT Ensure 200mm area top and bottom of drive for unrestricted air entry 200 4 5 Mechanical Dimensions PL X 520 980
76. 23 FORWARD DOWN TIME 10 0 SECS 121 AT STANDSTILL HIGH 75 MISSING PULSE EN ENABLED 24 REVERSE UP TIME 10 0 SECS SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 76 REF EXCH TRIP DISABLED 177 0VERSPEED DELAY 5 0 SECS STALL TRIP MENU 3 SEE 178 STALL TRIP ENBL ENABLED 179 STALL CUR LEVEL 95 00 180 STALL DELAY TIME 10 0 SECS 181 ACTIVE TRIP 8100 82 STORED TRIP 0000 183 EXT TRIP RESET ENABLED SERIAL LINKS 2 RS232 PORT1 3 187 PORT1 BAUD RATE 9600 188 PORT1 FUNCTION PARAM EXCH SELECT PARAMETER EXCHANGE 4 DRIVE TRANSMIT 5 DRIVE RECEIVE 5 MENU LIST TO HOST 5 REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 189 REF XC SLV RATIO 1 0000 190 REF XC SLV SIGN NON INVERT 191 REF XC SLAVE MON 0 00 96 E 192 REF XC MASTERMN 0 00 96 PEN GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect PORT1 COMMS LINK 4 193 PORT1 GROUP ID 0 194 PORT1 UNIT ID 0 E 195 PORT1 ERROR CODE 0001 mom 196 P1 DOP3 RTS MODE DISABLED DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 2 uin REDUCED MENU ENABLE DISABLED PASSWORD CONTROL 3 ENTER PASSWORD
77. 267 DOP3 RECTIFY ENABLED GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 268 DOP3 THRESHOLD 0 00 JUMPER 3 4 rA 269 DOP3 INVERT MODE NON INVERT e GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect GET FROM 698 HEALTHY FLAG JUMPER 4 4 STAGING POSTS Sin CUu GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 296 DIGITAL POST 1 LOW JUMPER 5 4 297 DIGITAL POST 2 EOW E GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 298 DIGITAL POST 3 LOW JUMPER 6 4 299 DIGITAL POST 4 LOW ttt GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 300 ANALOG POST 1 0 00 JUMPER 7 4 301 ANALOG POST2 0 00 whe LL oaet GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect V 302 ANALOG POST 3 0 00 96 JUMPER 8 4 mn 303 ANALOG POST 4 0 00 see FROM 400 Block Disconnect SOFTWARE TERMINALS 3 JUMPER 9 4 305 ANDED RUN HIGH GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 306 ANDED JOG HIGH JUMPER 10 4 307 ANDED START HIGH GOTO 400 Block Disconnect zs 308 INTERNAL RUN IP LOW JUMPER 11 4 JUMPER CONNECTIONS3 J GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 1 4 JUMPER 12 4 ES GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect See GOTO 400 Block Disconnect HE GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 13 4 JUMPER 2 ee ear cette GOTO 400 Block Disconnect GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 14 4 400 Block Disconnect sree GOTO 400 Block Disconnect Index 229 16 Index ALARMS CHANGE PARAMETERS CURRENT CONTROL 43 97 Digital OP short circuit tri
78. 365 13 8 1 10 UIPS T6 SETUP UIP Digital IP low value for output PIN 366 300 00 0 00 366 UIP6 T6 SETUP UIP6 Digital IP high value for output 2 PIN 367 300 00 0 01 367 133 112 UIP T6 SETUP UIP6 Digital IP low value for output 2 PIN368 300 00 0 00 368 13 8143 UIP6 6 SETUP Threshold PIN3698 30 000V 6 000V 369 13 3 14 77 SETUP Input range PIN370 1of4renges 10V range 370 13 3 2 UIP7 T7 SETUP Input offset PIN371 100 005 0 00 371 13 8 3 UIP7 7 SETUP Linear scaling factor PIN 372 3 0000 10000 372 13 3 1 4 UIP7 T7 SETUP UIP7 Max clamp level PIN 373 300 00 100 00 373 15 1 5 Application blocks 401 680 Menu Description PIN number tables 225 Reserved for future blocks 13132 DRIVEPERSONALTY Respepage PIN677 Reset 77 S 13 13 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY Max current response PING78 0 1 Disabled 678 13 13 DRIVE PERSONALITY 1D_ABCXRxxx MON PIN 679 Binary value By model 679 P 13 134 DRIVE PERSONALITY larm BURDEN OHMS PIN 680 1 to 327 679 By model 680 15 1 6 Hidden pins 680 720 12 1 14 SUM1 CH1 SUBTOT Summer1 Ch1 subtotal monitor 692 200 00 0 00 692 12 1 14 SUM2 CH2 SUBTOT Summer2 Ch2 subtotal monitor PIN 693 200 00 0 00 12 1 14 SUM2 CH1 SUBTOT Summer2 Ch1 subtotal monitor
79. 4 2 2 2 1 4445 EEE EEE nnne 164 WARNING Comms operation is suspended whilst the unit is in CONFIGURATION mode See 13 CONFIGURATION and 13 2 7 CONFIGURATION ENABLE GOTO GETFROM The RS232 PORT1 is a standard product feature providing a daisy chain fast data facility without need for a host REFERENCE EXCHANGE an ASCII comms proprietary multi drop link using ANSI X3 28 2 5 B protocol A full description of the ASCII comms facility can be found in the SERIAL COMMs manual The RS232 PORT1 is used for configuration with PL PILOT and archiving recipes via windows hyperterminal PL X units with 5 01 upward software versions can support proprietary fieldbus applications This requires extra hardware in the shape of a Mounting board for FIELDBUS card part no LA102738 b FIELDBUS card e g Profibus Devicenet The above components are incorporated within the unit and plugged onto the PL X control card There is a sub menu in the CONFIGURATIONS menu that allows configuration of the parameters to be input and output by the PL X See 13 12 CONFIGURATION FIELDBUS CONFIG A full description of the FIELDBUS facility can be found in the SERIAL COMMs manual 152 SERIAL LINKS SERIAL LINKS menu Port1 is a non isolated RS232 port used for PL X configuration and serial comms ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 R SERIAL LINKS R SERIAL LINKS 2 RS232 PORT1 Glossary of terms Protocol The instructions for the order of sendi
80. 4 00 Add description of new burden resistor switch Improved functionality 13 13 3 1 Aug 00 4 01 4 00 Add new apps blocks Comparators 1 4 Improved functionality Apps Aug 4 01 Add new apps blocks C O switch 1 4 manual 2000 4 00 Man typo Terminal 23 DOP2 should be Ramping flag Previous manuals say At standstill is on T23 Various Sept N A Running mode mon numerical codes incorrect now OK 2000 4 02 Lowest value for 2 RATED ARM AMPS changed from Values below 33 have inferior transient 6 1 2 Nov 4 02 20 to 33 Range was 5 1 now 3 1 response 50 100 burden value switch 13 3 3 2000 added to power board extends range to 6 1 4 03 677 RECIPE PAGE function added Allows 3 total drive recipes to be utilised 13 13 2 Feb 4 03 2001 4 03 REFERENCE EXCHANGE now able to receive and re Improved functionality allowing cascading of 10 3 Feb 4 03 transmit simultaneously digitally locked multiple units 2001 4 03 171 SPEED TRIP ENABLE Automatic switch to AVF function added 8 1 1 Feb 01 4 03 4 03 UIP AOP DIP DIO DOP set up windows Function terminal number included in display Feb 01 4 03 4 03 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 4 Key reset does not affect Improved functionality Protects user from 6 9 3 Feb 4 03 this parameter Or corresponding value of PASSIVE accidental field over voltage by retaining set 2001 MOTOR SET value after restoring 4 KEY reset defaults 4 05 Extra information about contactor control Incorrect contactor control by users is main 4 July 4 05
81. 5 3 Archiving PL X 2 idle did dive gura eee ee 56 46 Menu tree structure 5 1 Key functions The user display has been designed to make programming as simple as possible 4 keys arranged as up down and left right are used to step through the tree structure in their nominated direction UP increase PRESS RIGHT KEY FOR ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 DOWN decrease RIGHT enter next menu level LEFT exit to previous menu level Automatic default 96 diagnostic summary windows keystrokes not needed Notice that tapping the left key allows you to exit from any location back to the start point on the previous menu level The selected menu is displayed on the upper line of characters If you hold the left key down you will quickly arrive back at the default diagnostic windows The level number is displayed at the right hand end of the top line are sited at ends of branches Parameters may be changed with up down keys As well as travelling around the tree structure the keys perform other functions These are as follows Menu tree stucture 47 5 1 1 Incrementing and decrementing parameter values This is achieved using the up down keys All the parameters that may need changing have been placed at the end of a branch where the up down keys change the parameter value inst
82. 7 No display Subtotal output Input 1 PIN 410 1 Input 3 PIN 402 PIN 403 PIN 405 2 P e x PN PN PIN 413 No display Subtotal output Summer 1 GO TO PIN 413 p T 10 PIN 159 monitor 253 252 251 AOP1 VY Rect Bipolar Offset o GET FROM AOP1 This is a programmable GET FROM connection made from a block input to any other PIN within blocks This is an external This connection is made by wire connection made to a PL X terminal virtue of the design of the block and is not programmable Note To start a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to ENABLED The PL X possesses a versatile range of pre designed BLOCKS Signals need to be routed to the inputs of the blocks processed inside the block then routed from the output to the desired destination Examples of blocks are a signal summer and a universal terminal input There are 2 types of connection tool which can be programmed by the user called GOTO and GET FROM It is not possible to make illegal connections e g from output to output It is possible however to connect more than 1 GOTO to a legal pin eg an input and this would result in an error at the target PIN The PL X has a conflict checker which warns of GOTO connection conflicts after configuration When the user sets ENABLE GOTO GETFROM to DISABLED See 13 14
83. APPLICATION BLOCKS 37 3 6 4 TAPER TENSION CALC Taper strength input PIN 496 TAPER TENSION CALC 3 496 TAPER STRENGTH 496 TAPER STRENGTH 7 0 00 Sets the amount of taper for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the taper tension calculator TAPER STRENGTH 100 00 0 00 496 Note 100 00 taper progressively reduces the tension to zero at full diameter 0 00 taper gives constant tension over the entire diameter range 100 00 taper progressively increases the tension to 200 00 at full diameter The taper may be linear or hyperbolic See 3 6 5 TAPER TENSION CALC Hyperbolic taper enable PIN 497 3 6 5 TAPER TENSION CALC Hyperbolic taper enable PIN 497 TAPER TENSION CALC 3 497 HYPERBOLIC TAPER When enabled the taper profile PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN is hyperbolic Disabled its linear HYPERBOLIC TAPER ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 497 See 3 6 4 TAPER TENSION CALC Taper strength input PIN 496 3 6 6 TAPER TENSION CALC Tension trim input PIN 498 TAPER TENSION CALC 3 498 TENSION TRIM IP 498 TENSION TRIM IP 0 00 Sets a trim input level added to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the tapered tension TENSION TRIM IP 100 00 0 00 498 3 6 7 TAPER TENSION CALC Tapered tension monitor PIN 499 TAPER TENSION CALC 3 499 TAPERED TENS MON 499 TAPERED TENS MON 0 00 This is the output of the taper PARAMETER RANGE PIN tension calculator without trim TAPERED TENS MON 100 00 499
84. Altitude Short circuit rating Field output modes Special features Application blocks Serial comms Fully isolated from power circuit Advanced PI with fully adaptive current loops for optimum dynamic performance Self Tuning Current Loop utilising Autotune algorithm Adjustable speed PI with integral defeat By Armature Voltage feedback with IR compensation By encoder feedback or analogue tachogenerator By a combination of encoder feedback and analogue tachogenerator or AVF Speed range 100 to 1 typical with tachogenerator feedback 0 1 Analogue Tachogenerator Feedback subject to tachogenerator 2 Armature Voltage Feedback 0 01 Encoder only Encoder tacho encoder AVF With digital reference High energy MOV S Overcurrent 150 for 25s Tacho failure With auto AVF back up option Thyristor Stack over temperature Zero speed detection Stall protection Interline device networks Overcurrent instantaneous Field failure Motor over temperature Thyristor Trigger failure Standstill logic With first fault latch automatic display and power off memory Diagnostic monitoring of all parameters in engineering and or units Full diagnostic information available on RS232 using PL PILOT graphical tool Digital I O logic status plus automatic default 96 diagnostic summary windows 0 4 ambient operating temperature 35C for PL X900 PL X980 Derate by 1 per Deg C above 40C up
85. DISABLED 73 6 7 7 SPEED CONTROL SPEED ADAPTION This menu allows sophisticated modification of the speed loop error amplifier It can provide modified SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 gains of the proportional and integral terms with 79 SPD ADAPT ENABLE the gains changing linearly as the SPEED CONTROL 3 SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 74 SPD ADPT LO BRPNT speed error signal moves between 2 break points SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 79 SPD ADAPT ENABLE is used to activate the TOISED BPE TAUBRPNT function The low break point is the starting level for gain changing and the high break point is the finishing level Below the low break point the terms SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 are set by 76 LOW BRPT PRP GAIN and 77 LOW 76 LO BRPNT PRP GAIN BRPT INT T C in this sub menu Above the high break point the terms are set by SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 71 SPEED PROP GAIN and 72 SPEED INT T C in 77 LO BRPNT INT T C the previous menu The change is linear between the 2 sets of terms SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 as the actuating signal speed error traverses 78 INT 96 DURING RAMP between the chosen break points The break points work symmetrically for each polarity of error There is also the ability to prevent the integrator from accumulating error during a long speed up ramp This can be useful for systems involving high inertias where there is a possibility of speed error at the top of the ramp while the loop removes the integrator error
86. FILTER1 GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 SUMMER 2 GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 FILTER2 GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 PID 1 GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 BATCH COUNTER GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 INTERVAL TIMER GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 PID 2 GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 PARAMETER PROFL GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 DIAMETER CALC GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 TAPER CALC GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 CUR LIM GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP CONFIG T COMP CUR LIM GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE C oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe CONFIGURATION 195 13 11 1 BLOCK OP CONFIG Block outputs GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 Description GOTO Defines the destination PIN for connection from the block output 13 11 2 Other GOTO windows Not all of the GOTO connection windows are found in this menu Some blocks have them contained within their own menus These include the following PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT Description GOTO PIN O00 to 720 400 Input output terminals Multi function blocks 1 8 Jumpers Comparators C O switches These functions occur in multiples and have few other parameters to program Therefore as an aid in assisting the user to remember the particular unit in use at the time of connection each one contains its own GOTO windo
87. However parameters that used to match the motor to the drive not affected by restoring the defaults This includes all those in the CALIBRATION menu and 100 FIELD VOLTS OP for MOTOR 1 and MOTOR 2 and 680 larm BURDEN OHMS These parameters remain as previously calibrated to prevent accidental de calibration when restoring defaults See 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition See also 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 for details of 2 and 3 key reset operation This feature allows for 3 total instrument recipes to be stored and retrieved WARNING Recipe page 2 and 3 each have their own set of calibration parameters so be careful to check them all prior to running CHANGE PARAMETERS 59 6 1 CHANGE PARAMETERS CALIBRATION Calibration PIN numbers range 2 to 20 R CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 CALIBRATION 3 Bold windows are used for QUICK START Note The parameter on the lower line is preceded by a number and bracket e g 3 CURRENT LIMIT CE This number is important It is called the PIN Parameter Identification Number Each parameter has a unique PIN that is used in the process of configuration There are up to 720 PIN numbers within the system They are used to identify connection points when a schematic is being configured and can also hold the result of an operation or logic output CONNECTIONS It is possible to construct complex functional blocks by making connections
88. IP level Ramp input Applied ramp Total value time Ramp PIN 689 Contactor state Stopped low low low reference Stop ramp time OFF In Jog flag Stopped high low low reference Stop ramp time Running low high low reference Run mode ramp Slack 1 takeup low high high ref 4 slack1 Jog slack ramp Slack 2 takeup high high high ref slack2 Jog slack ramp Also in Speed Control PIN 65 Mode RAMP AUTO PRESET RAMP EXT PRESET RUN MODE RAMP action JOG MODE RAMP action 1 DISABLED DISABLED Held at zero when stopped Held at zero when stopped Starts from zero Starts from zero 2 DISABLED ENABLED Held at PRESET VALUE Held at PRESET VALUE when stopped permanently Starts from PRESET VALUE 3 ENABLED DISABLED Ramp continues to follow input Ramp continues to follow input reference when stopped reference when stopped Starts from PRESET Starts from PRESET VALUE VALUE 4 ENABLED ENABLED Held at PRESET VALUE Held at PRESET VALUE when stopped permanently Starts from PRESET VALUE Mode 1 ensures that the ramp output is reset to 0 00 during all stopping modes Modes 2 3 4 have an active ramp output during all stopping modes which is useful in cascaded systems The action of starting momentarily presets the ramps Default value 0 00 Note 30 RAMP EXT PRESET has permanent action on the RUN MODE RAMP and if a
89. Input Terminal weakening PID PIN 319 Field delay and quench PIN CONTACTOR PIN 104 PIN 105 PIN 106 Weakening 96 A AMPS 100 CONTROL Fid wk Prop Fid wk Int wk deriv Enable PIN PIN Volts INTERNAL zero interlock The contactor Ga PIN 103 145 RUN control relay has a 24V coil with a 100mS hardware off delay The coil is only energised with CSTOP at 24V AND the OV switch on HIGH al Alarms are HIGH ON reset by a LOW OFF high to low OV SWITCH transition Contactor Stop mode STOP MODE RAMP Control Ramp time PIN 56 Contactor dro Drive run Hidden PIN 720 ALARMS All System reset A low RUN input sets pulse Healthy when drop out delay to zero high PIN 698 Drop out delay IP PIN 131 Out Stop mode Speed TIMER Ramp time Feedback Control Internal To speed logic enable control block Enable PIN 60 PIN 57 PIN 58 Control Drop out Stop time Live delay logic Pol di FIELD BRIDGE OV terminal Common
90. LOOP MONITOR 3 This menu allows monitoring of the parameters associated with the field control loop The motor field current can be read in amps which alleviates the need to undertake difficult readings with an ammeter during commissioning DIAGNOSTICS 129 7 3 4 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field firing angle of advance monitor PIN 146 PARAMETER RANGE PIN Shows the value of the field bridge firing angle of advance in degrees ANGLE OF ADVANCE to 180 DEG Note this parameter is only updated if the field is enabled The convention used is O degrees is no firing and 180 degrees is full firing The formula for calculating the field volts is as follows Volts 0 45 AC supply volts 1 cos alpha Firing angle of advance degrees alpha Field volts table Note The result is rounded down then reduced by 1 volt due to the drop in the field bridge Firing angle deg AC supply 200 AC supply 240 AC supply 380 AC supply 415 AC supply 480 25 Minimum field Minimum field Minimum field Minimum field Minimum field 30 12 14 22 24 28 40 20 24 39 42 49 50 31 37 60 65 76 60 44 53 84 92 107 70 58 70 111 121 141 80 73 88 140 154 177 90 89 107 170 185 215 100 104 125 199 218 252 110 119 143 228 249 288 120 134 161 255 279 324 130 146 176 279 305 353 140 157 1
91. MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 It is good practice to protect DC motors against sustained thermal overloads by fitting temperature sensitive resistors or switches in the field and interpole windings of the machine Temperature sensitive resistors have a low resistance typically 200 Ohms up to a reference temperature 125 deg C Above this their resistance rises rapidly to greater than 2000 Ohms Temperature switches are usually normally closed opening at about 105 deg C Motor overtemperature sensors should be connected in series between terminals and T36 If the motor temperature rises such that the resistance of the sensor exceeds 1800 Ohms the thermistor alarm will be activated If this happens the motor must be allowed to cool before the alarm can be reset Motors overheat due to many factors but the most common cause is inadequate ventilation Check for blower failure wrong rotation of the blower blocked ventilation slots and clogged air filters Other causes of overheating relate to excessive armature current The nominal armature current on the motor nameplate should be checked against the current calibration for the PL X There is no motor temperature alarm inhibit terminals T30 and T36 must be linked if over temperature sensors are not used Note There is a flag on hidden PIN 702 which warns of thermistor over temp after the normal delay time This flag is reset by a start or jog command Alarm delay t
92. PIN 86 vcs ev rir oder vea tesa ray tee ded 102 289554 dura espe eae eias SEE 184 Lower current clamp PIN 90 103 220 DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS DIOX SETUP 183 O LOAD 96 TARGET set to 105 99 DIGITAL INPUTS Overload 96 target PIN 82 DIP inputs for encoder 180 Overload ramp time PIN 83 overload table overloads greater than 150 Profile enable PIN 84 Set current loop control terms manually 17 105 DIP1 2 3 4 Input high value PINs 310 312 314 318 Upper current clamp 89 1029 220 E IN EEEIEE DIAGNOSTIC summary windows 48 RUN INPUT SETUP DIAGNOSTICS 25 43 47 64 67 68 69 121 122 125 RUN INPUT SETUP Make input value GOTO destination 128 130 131 133 134 221 226 233 GONMECTION ng xn dee ai 182 DIAGNOSTICS RUN INPUT SETUP RUN input HI value PIN 318 182 223 ANALOG IO RUN INPUT SETUP RUN input LO value PIN 319 182 223 AOP1 2 3 analogue output monitor DIGITAL INPUTS DIPX SETUP
93. Please refer to the separate APPLICATION BLOCKS MANUAL for details on the specification and use of the apps blocks CONFIGURATION Section 13 Enable goto getfrom Universal inputs UNIVERSAL INPUTS UIP2 setup UIP SETUP 2 9 UIP3 setup UIP input range UIP4 setup UIP input offset UIP5 setup UIP calibration ratio UIP6 setup UIP maximum clamp UIP7 setup UIP minimum clamp UIP8 setup UIP analog goto UIP9 setup UIP digital output 1 goto UIP digital output 2 goto UIP high value output 1 UIP low value output 1 UIP high value output 2 UIP low value output 2 UIP threshold 54 Menu tree structure Continued from previous 5 2 6 Full menu diagram Configuration continued Analog outputs ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Armature current output rectify AOP1 setup AOP SETUP 1 3 AOP2 setup AOP divider AOP3 setup AOP offset AOP rectify enable Digital inputs Scope output select DIGITAL INPUTS DIP1 setup Get from DIP SETUP 1 4 DIP2 setup DIP input high value DIP3 setup DIP input low value DIP4 setup Digital in outputs Run input setup DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS Goto RUN INPUT SETUP Run input high value Run input low value DIO1 Setup Goto DIO SETUP 1 4
94. The drive will receive the data and report LEFT KEY TO RESTART when complete This resets to recipe page NORMAL RESET To see other pages the appropriate power up reset must be actioned The new parameter data file including calibration values has been automatically saved in the PL X Click on the disconnect icon or click on Call then Disconnect to finish You may now exit from HyperTerminal by clicking on File then Exit or by pressing Alt and F4 or by closing the window You will be asked if you wish to save the session this is not necessary so choose No WARNING Check the CALIBRATION parameters are correct after this process SERIAL LINKS 157 10 2 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE menu list to host PARAMETER EXCHANGE 4 MENU LIST TO HOST 5 MENU LIST TO HOST 5 UP KEY TO CONTINUE Starts the process of serial transmission PARAMETER RANGE of the working menu listing to the host MENU LIST TO HOST TRANSMITTING then FINISHED This is the transfer of the menu list description including all values from the PL X to a host computer or printer This information fully documents the PL X s working settings in a clear textual format Note Any parameter that has been changed from the factory default will have a space followed by a character at the end of the line The character may be a f or or other depending on the host The listing is of the drive s present working settings which may or may not have been saved permanently using PARAMETER SAVE The
95. Zero interlocks 2 Digital inputs 14 Speed control 3 Reference exchange 15 Preset speed 4 Jumpers 16 Parameter profile 5 Multi function 17 Latch 6 Alarms 18 Batch counter 7 PID1 2 19 Interval timer 8 Summer 1 2 20 Filters 9 Run mode ramps 21 Comparators 10 Diameter calc 22 C O Switches 11 Taper tension 23 AII terminal outputs 166 APPLICATION BLOCKS 12 1 3 Logic levels Logic inputs will recognise the value zero any units as a logic low All other numbers including negative numbers will be recognised as a logic high 12 1 4 Activating blocks In order to activate a block it is necessary to configure its GOTO window to a PIN other than 400 Block disconnect In the CONFIGURATION menu first enter the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM window and set it to ENABLED Then staying in the CONFIGURATION menu proceed to BLOCK OP CONFIG to find the appropriate GOTO After completing the connection return to the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM window and set it to DISABLED 12 1 4 1 Conflicting GOTO connections When the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM window is set it to DISABLED the system will undertake an automatic conflict check If it has found that there are 2 or more GOTOs connected to the same PIN it will issue the alarm GOTO CONFLICT Proceed to 13 14 CONFLICT HELP MENU in CONFIGURATION to find the number of conflicting GOTO connections and the target PIN that causes the conflict One of the GOTO connections must be removed to
96. a high UIPX input UIP2 HI VAL OP2 300 00 0 01 327 Note You can make a simple AND gate by selecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 13 3 1 12 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Digital input low value for output 2 PIN 3 2 8 to 3 9 8 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 328 UIP2 LO VAL OP2 328 UIP2 LO VAL OP2 0 00 Sets the OP2 value selected by PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN a low UIPX input UIP2 LO VAL OP2 300 0096 0 0096 328 Note You can make a simple OR gate by selecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 13 3 1 13 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Threshold PIN 3 2 9 to 3 9 9 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 329 UIP2 THRESHOLD Sets the threshold to determine PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the logic high low for UIPX UIP2 THRESHOLD 30 000 V 6 000 V 329 E g If the range input is set to 20 or 30V then a threshold of 15 000 V will cause the output to go high for signals greater than 15 000 and low for signals less than or equal 15 000V The threshold is algebraic Hence a threshold of 1 000 V will give a high for an input of 0 999 V 178 CONFIGURATION 13 4 CONFIGURATION ANALOG ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 OUTPUTS 260 SCOPE OP SELECT CONFIGURATION ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 ANALOG OUTPUTS 250 larm OP RECTIFY PINs used 250 to 260 ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 T10 SETUP 4 There are 4 analogue outputs ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 3 programmable and 1 committed to output the AOP2 T11 SETUP 4
97. and may be connected to a digital output if desired Rules of operation 1 Motor 1 and 2 calibration parameters are NOT overwritten if the factory default parameters are restored 2 The MOTOR 1 2 SELECT parameter is NOT overwritten if the factory default parameters are restored This means that the PL X default power up 4 KEY RESET will not affect the prevailing calibration parameters PINs 2 20 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 680 larm BURDEN OHMS in both the active set and the passive set All other parameters are restored to the factory defaults See 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition See 4 5 4 PASSIVE MOTOR defaults Using passive motor menu for small test motors See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 There is a class of parameters that are prevented from being altered by the keys during motor running These are indicated in the PIN number tables at the back of the manual by a letter S STOP DRIVE TO ADJUST in the Property column See 15 PIN number tables If 20 MOTOR 1 2 SELECT is altered during running then any class S parameters in the DRIVE PERSONALITY PASSIVE MOTOR SET that differ from their counterparts in the ACTIVE set will not become active until the next STOP sequence This functionality gives an extra level of safety but still allows dynamic alteration of most of the important parameters during running by one digital input CHANGE PARAMETERS 71 6 2 CHANGE
98. as generally useful as possible in most applications All the programmable terminals are available to be re allocated to an alternative function by the user if desired This is a list of the default functions Note if after programming you wish to return the drive to this default function set up then arrange to have all 4 menu keys depressed simultaneously during the application of control power See 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition and see 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 OV terminal OV T1 Aux Speed Reference Analogue Input UIP2 2 to 10V linear input for to 10096 speed Overvoltage protected 50V Input impedance 100K Speed Reference Current demand Analogue Input UIP3 to 10V linear input for to 100 speed Overvoltage protected to 50V Input impedance 100K Note this analogue input is sampled faster than the others for very rapid response applications E g as a current reference See 6 7 1 SPEED CONTROL Block diagram See 6 7 7 7 SPEED PI ADAPTION Using small speed inputs The default gives low gain for small inputs 28 Introduction and Technical Data Ramped Speed Reference Analogue Input UIP4 4 10V linear input for to 100 speed Overvoltage protected to 50V Input impedance 100K This input is routed through a programmable up down ramp See 6 7 7 7 SPEED ADAPTION Using small speed inputs The default gives l
99. lt input 2 algebraic APPLICATION BLOCKS 63 3 15 4 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Window mode select PIN 590 594 598 602 COMPARATOR 1 3 590 COMP1 WINDOW SEL 7 Enables the window PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN comparator mode COMP1 WINDOW SEL ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 590 The output is low for input 1 gt lt the window amplitude created by input 2 algebraic The window is created symmetrically around 0 00 and has a range of input 2 If hysteresis is applied it operates at each boundary of the window 3 15 5 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Hysteresis PIN 591 595 599 603 COMPARATOR 1 3 591 COMP1 HYSTERESIS 591 COMP1 HYSTERESIS 0 50 Sets the level of hysteresis PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN applied to input 1 ve COMP1 HYSTERESIS 0 to 10 00 0 50 591 E g A value of 1 00 requires input 1 to exceed input 2 by more than 1 00 for a high output and to fall below input 2 by 1 00 or more to go low 3 15 6 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Comparator GOTO COMPARATOR 1 3 GOTO 7 Sets the PIN for the GOTO PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT connection target parameter GOTO 2 to 720 400 Block disconnect Note To activate the block the GOTO must be connected to a PIN other than 400 Block disconnect 3 16 APPLICATION BLOCKS C O SWITCH 1 to 4 Pins 604 to 615 There are 4 identical changeover switches each with 2 inputs and 1 output This description applies to all 4 APPLICATI
100. should be checked See also 3 6 Supply loss shutdown The supply is monitored on EL1 2 This allows AC supply or DC outgoing main contactors to be used Alarm delay time 2 0 secs 146 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 8 1 11 12 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Synchronization loss MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 SYNCHRONIZATION LOSS The PL X controller automatically locks on to any 3 phase supply within a frequency range of 45 to 65 Hertz This allows the thyristors to be fired at the correct instant during each supply cycle The synchronisation circuit can cope with a large level of supply distortion to ensure operation with very distorted supplies The lock on time is 0 75 seconds If the standard wiring configuration is adopted with EL1 2 3 permanently energised then the phase lock will only need to lock on during the first application of power This allows the main contactor to be operated very rapidly with minimal start up delay if required Wiring configurations that involve application of the auxiliary supply coincident with a start requirement will have 0 75 second delay prior to main contactor energisation If the supply frequency exceeds the min max limits or if the controller is supplied from a power supply which has excessive distortion this may cause synchronisation errors and the alarm to operate Note This alarm will operate during running If there is failure to achieve synchronisation at start then the alarm
101. the feedback sign is automatically provided by the AVF and 16 digital input is made free for other uses Unless zero speed lock is required See 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE In this case T16 is still required for the encoder direction The final steady state 100 speed feedback RPM is determined from 6 DESIRED MAX RPM The dynamic scaling is derived from 18 RATED ARM VOLTS These 2 full scale settings must correspond with each other for optimum performance AVF feedback usually contains ripple hence it is advisable to reduce the SPEED CONTROL loop gains with AVF feedback selected See 6 7 4 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 There is an encoder failure detection system that may be configured to either trip the drive or automatically switch to AVF See 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 4 ENCODER TACHO In this mode the tachogenerator provides the main dynamic feedback and the encoder trims the accuracy to an extremely high level Note Low frequencies give poor performance The limit of reasonable performance with encoder tacho feedback is provided with a full speed input frequency of 2Khz 60 lines at 2000 rpm single pulse train or 30 lines at 2000 rpm for quadrature encoder With more lines the performance improves with less the dynamic stability degrades particularly at low speeds In this mode when using a non quadrature single line encoder the feedback sign is auto
102. the temperature of the air being drawn in then further measures must be taken to direct it away from the system Air Intake Venting Kit ensures exhaust air does not mix with input air Air Intake IMPORTANT Ensure 200mm area 1 Air Intake top and bottom of drive for unrestricted air entry PLX275 980 9 7 Product rating table Model Output power Max continuous Max field DC Line Cooling air PL 20 At At At Current AMPS output Amps reactor flow and PLX 40 OP 460V 500V 750V type dissipation 380 415AC 480AC 690AC Kw HP HP HP ACIP DC OP std option cfm watts PL X275 275 370 400 600 530 650 32 50 LR650 400 1700 PL X315 315 425 460 690 615 750 32 50 LR750 400 2000 PL X360 360 485 520 780 700 850 32 50 LR850 400 2300 PL X400 400 540 580 875 780 950 32 50 LR950 400 2500 PL X440 440 590 640 970 860 1050 32 50 LR1050 400 2800 PL X520 520 700 760 1140 1025 1250 64 LR1250 800 3200 PL X600 600 810 880 1320 1190 1450 64 LR1450 800 3700 PL X700 700 940 1020 1530 1350 1650 64 LR1650 800 4200 PL X800 800 1080 1170 1760 1520 1850 64 LR1850 800 4700 PL X900 900 1200 1300 1950 1680 2050 64 LR2050 800 5200 PL X980 980 1320 1430 2145 1845 2250 64 LR2250 800 5700 Important Notes 1 Only use UL fuses for installations complying with UL cod
103. 0 0 0 134 8 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS ore AE EE 135 8 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 0 0 0 esas sess 136 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable 171 137 8 1 2 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch tolerance PIN 172 139 8 Contents 8 1 3 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Field loss trip enable PIN 173 139 8 1 4 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Digital OP short circuit trip enable PIN 174 2 139 8 1 5 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Missing pulse trip enable PIN 175 2 2 2 72 140 8 1 6 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Reference exchange trip enable PIN 176 140 8 1 7 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Overspeed delay time 177 140 8 1 8 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS STALL TRIP 141 8 1 8 1 STALL TRIP MENU Stall trip enable PIN 178 0 0 2 141 8 1 8 2 STALL TRIP MENU Stall current level PIN 179 9 2 2 2 141 8 1 8 3 STALL TRIP MENU Stall time 180 02 2 2 22 141 8 1 9 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Active and stored trip monitors PINS 181 182 142 8 1 10 MOTOR DRI
104. 00 Sets the WEB speed above PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN which stiction comp occurs STIC WEB SPD THR 0 00 to 10 00 5 00 503 Some systems require extra torque to overcome starting friction This level must be set to ensure the reel motor starts rotating The system will add the compensation set in 3 7 4 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Stiction compensation PIN 502 when the web speed reference is greater than the threshold AND the reel speed feedback is less than 2 00 Hence the compensation is only active during the stiction phase and will not be permanently applied at zero web speed reference The threshold is not signed and is applied to both directions of rotation A value of 5 00 is suggested as a starting point APPLICATION BLOCKS 41 3 7 6 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Static friction compensation PIN 504 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 504 5 FRICTION 504 STATIC FRICTION 0 00 Sets the compensation required PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN to overcome static friction STATIC FRICTION 300 00 0 00 504 This compensation is applied at a constant level throughout the speed range With an empty reel running at 10 speed observe the ARM CUR MON in the diagnostics menu Enter the monitored value here Arm current Stiction current Dynamic friction at start of motion current at full reel speed Static friction current at all reel speeds Reel speed 3 7 7 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Dynamic fric
105. 0000 ALTER PASSWORD 0000 LANGUAGE SELECT 0 SOFTWARE VERSION APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 25 REVERSE DOWN TIME 10 0 SECS 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK 0 00 26 RAMP INPUT 0 00 240 MARKER ENABLE DISABLED 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED 0 00 96 241 MARKER OFFSET 0 28 REVERSE MIN SPEED 0 00 242 POSITION REF 0 29 RAMP AUTO PRESET ENABLED 243 MARKER FREQ MON 0 00 Hz 30 RAMP EXT PRESET DISABLED 244 IN POSITION FLAG LOW 31 RAMP PRESET VALUE 0 00 CALIBRATION 3 32 RAMP S PROFILE 2 50 2 RATED ARM AMPS 9 6 AMPS 33 RAMP HOLD DISABLED 3 CURRENT LIMIT 150 00 34 RAMPING THRESHOLD 0 50 4 RATED FIELD AMPS 2 00 AMPS 35 RAMPING FLAG LOW 5 RATED RPM 1500 RPM JOG CRAWL SLACK 3 6 DESIRED MAX RPM 1500 RPM 37 JOG SPEED 1 5 00 7 ZERO SPD OFFSET 0 00 38 JOG SP
106. 1 6 RECTIFIER 1 linear input linear output Output MAIN To create an Exclusive OR function easily The invert mode OP is the EXOR of the MAIN OP SELECT inputs 3 10 2 1 Sample and hold function To perform a sample and hold simply set the AUX GET FROM source PIN to be the same as the output GOTO destination PIN and the MODE to Then when the output select is disabled the output value will follow the main input When the output select is enabled the value pertaining at that time will be held See also 3 16 1 1 C O switch used as sample and hold function 3 10 3 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 Output select 1 to 8 PIN 545 7 9 551 3 5 7 9 MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 545 MULTIFUN1 OP SEL 545 MULTIFUN1 OP SEL d DISABLED When disabled the main input PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN flows directly to the output MULTIFUN1 OP SEL ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED When enabled 1 of 7 transfer functions selected by the logic mode switch is then output When this PIN is used as a logic input with the main input in invert mode the ouput is EXOR of the 2 inputs 3 10 4 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 Main input GET FROM 1 to 8 MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 GET FROM Sets the PIN for the main input PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT signal source GET FROM 000 to 720 400 Block disconnect APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 10 5 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 Aux input GET FROM 1 to 8 MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 AUX GET FROM 53 RAN
107. 1 of 7 300 00 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 558 559 56 561 5 O1 WIN L w w w 300 00 0 01 300 00 0 00 0 w w w aj O1 al gt aj N O1 o 9 315 00 573 O 32 000 s 574 575 576 577 0 315 00 0 00 0 0 32000 ol N N L 579 L 580 32000 581 8 8 0 32000 2 3 68 APPLICATION BLOCKS 586 3 14 4 INTERVAL TIMER Timer interval 585 0 1 600 0 s 3 14 5 INTERVAL TIMER Timer expired flag PIN 586 0 1 300 00 00 1255 2 22 COMPARATOR 1 Input 2 PIN 589 300 00 0 00 58 3 15 3 9 uH 3 14 3 INTERVAL TIMER Timer reset enable input 584 Disabled 584 3 15 2 COMPARATOR 1 Input 1 PIN 588 8 Lo 0 Esse x s saei 598 3 15 5 COMPARATOR 2 Hysteresis PIN 595 10 00 0 0096 595 3 15 2 COMPARATOR 3 Input 1 PIN 596 300 00 0 00 596 3 15 3 COMPARATOR 3 Input 2 PIN 597 300 00 597 3 15 4 COMPARATOR 3 Window mode select 598 Disabled 598 3 15 5 COMPARATOR Hysteresis 599 O 10 00 0 00 599 Le o ucc pi ie oc _ 01 ped usar
108. 2 0096 X axis is speed error Set in THIS MENU LO prop gain of 5 LO Int TC of 1 000 Note The default settings are designed to give lower gain with low error This provides smooth steady state performance Applications that require precise control at very low speeds may function better with the adaption disabled See also 6 10 8 1 Low speed performance 6 7 7 7 SPEED PI ADAPTION Using small speed inputs Some applications utilise very small speed inputs e g positioning In this case the default settings for the SPEED PI ADAPTION may be unsuitable This is because they are designed to give low gain for low errors which provides smooth running at speed For small inputs it may be necessary to either DISABLE the function or modify the parameters to provide higher gain for small errors See 6 10 8 1 Low speed performance CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 8 CHANGE PARAMETERS CURRENT CONTROL 2 number range 81 to 97 The current control menu looks fairly complex initially but is not too difficult to understand when considered in separate blocks See 6 8 1 CURRENT CONTROL Block diagram The current control loop gets its current reference from the output of the speed loop error amplifier The reference enters the current control section and is subjected to a series of 4 clamps R CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 CURRENT CONTROL 3 i3 CURRENT LIMIT 96 This provides the absolute limits of overload See CALIBRATION menu ii CURR
109. 23 3 3 11 PID 1 2 PID derivative time constant 438 461 PID 1 3 438 PID1 DERIV TC Sets the PID derivative time PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN constant PID1 DERIV TC 0 000 to 10 000 seconds 0 000 secs 438 If the derivative time constant is set to 0 000 then the D term is effectively removed from the block Loops that require a rapid response but suffer from overshoot normally benefit from a smaller derivative time constant 3 3 12 PID 1 2 PID derivative filter time constant PIN 439 462 PID 1 3 439 PID1 FILTER TC Sets the time constant of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN PID output filter PID1 FILTER TC 0 000 to 10 000 seconds 0 100 secs 439 The derivative of a noisy error signal can lead to unwanted output excursions This filter time constant is typically set at DERIV TC 5 See above A time constant of 0 000 will turn the filter off The filter is applied to the sum of the P and D terms 3 3 13 PID 1 2 PID integrator preset PIN 440 463 PID 1 3 440 PID1 INT PRESET Enables the integrator to be PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN preset to the value in PIN 441 PID1 INT PRESET ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 440 Note The PID INT PRESET function operates independantly from the PID RESET function If the integrator preset is permanently enabled then the term is effectively removed from the block 3 3 14 PID 1 2 PID integrator preset value
110. 241 41 2 119 6 10 9 5 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Position reference 242 72 7 2 120 6 10 9 6 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker frequency monitor 243 4 120 6 10 9 7 SPINDLE ORIENTATE In position flag 244 2 2 2 7 22 2 4 120 7 DIAGNOSTICS ee ou y treu um DUE PER Essa cw sio Pero da e edu cis 121 7 1 DIAGNOSTICS SPEED LOOP 2 se rens nnns 122 7 1 1 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Total speed reference monitor 123 122 7 1 2 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed demand monitor PIN 124 2 123 7 1 3 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed error monitor PIN 125 0 0 00 2 22 123 7 1 4 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Armature volts monitor PIN 126 123 7 1 5 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Armature volts 96 monitor 127 123 7 1 6 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Back emf 96 monitor PIN 128 0 02 123 7 1 7 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Tachogenerator volts monitor PIN 129 124 7 1 8 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Motor RPM monitor PIN 130 0 0 2 4 124 7 1 9 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Encoder RPM monitor PIN 132 2 0 2 2 124 7 1 10 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed feedback 96 monitor
111. 3 324 1 Pid1 clamp flag monitor PIN 450 3 3 25 1 Pid1 error value monitor PIN 451 332 PID 2 Pid2 output value monitor 452 3 33 PID 2 Pid2 IP1 value 453 83 34 PID2 Pid2IP1 ratio PIN 454 335 6 PID2 Pid2 P1 divider PIN 455 83 36 PID 2 Pid2 IP2 value 456 3 3 7 PID 2 Pid2 IP2 ratio 457 338 PID 2 Pid2 1 2 divider PIN 458 3 3 9 2 Pid2 proportional gain 459 3310 PID 2 Pid2 integrator time constant 460 00 1000 1 0 436 0 1 Disabled 440 0 1 bisaed 442 0 1000 o0 449 Fo 1 tow 450 0 0 10000 10 459 66 APPLICATION BLOCKS Paragraph Menu Description Range Default number Values 461 462 463 464 3 3 15 PID 2 Pid2 reset enable PIN 465 3 3 16 PID 2 Pid2 positive clamp level PIN 466 0 105 00 100 0096 Disabled 3 3 17 PID 2 Pid2 negative clamp level PIN 467 0 105 00 100 00 1 1 3 3 18 PID 2 Pid2 output 96 trim PIN 468 3 0000 0 2000 3 3 19 PID 2 Pid2 Profile mode select 469 1 of 5 modes 3 3 20 PID 2 Pid2 Minimum proportional gain PIN 470 O 100 0096 20 0096 0 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 3 3 21 PID 2 Pid2 Profile X axis minimum 471 100 00 3 3 23 PID 2 Pid2 Profiled proportional gain output PIN 472 0 100 0 oo 27 476 477 478 REEL DIAMETER CALC Web speed input PIN 484 105 00 0 00
112. 96 157 UIP9 T9 MON 0 000 VOLTS 86 SPD BRPNT AT LOI 100 00 96 159 AOP1 710 0 000 VOLTS 87 CUR LIMIT AT LOI 100 00 96 160 2 T11 MON 0 000 VOLTS 88 DUAL CLAMP ENBL DISABLED 161 AOP3 712 0 000 VOLTS 89 UPPER CUR CLAMP 0 00 DIGITAL 10 MONITOR 3 90 LOWER CUR CLAMP 0 00 162 UIP 23456789 00000000 91 EXTRA CUR REF 0 00 96 163 DIP 12341234 DIO 00000000 92 AUTOTUNE ENABLE DISABLED 164 DOP 123TRJSC 10110000 93 CUR PROP GAIN 30 00 165 ARM BRIDGE FLAG LOW 94 CUR INT GAIN 3 00 166 DRIVE START FLAG LOW 95 CUR DISCONTINUITY 13 00 167 DRIVE RUN FLAG LOW 96 4 QUADRANT MODE ENABLED 168 RUNNING MODE MON STOP 97 SPD BYPASS CUR EN DISABLED BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 FIELD CONTROL 2222 14 21 RAMP OP MONITOR 0 00 99 FIELD ENABLE ENABLED 45 MP OP MONITOR 0 00 96 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 90 00 192 REF XC MASTER MN 0 00 96 101 FIELD PROP GAIN 10 401 SUMMER1 OP MON 0 00 96 102 FIELD INT GAIN 100 415 SUMMER2 OP MON 0 00 96 FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 429 PID1 OP MONITOR 0 00 96 103 FLD WEAK ENABLE DISABLED 452 PID2 OP MONITOR 0 00 96 104 FLD WK PROP GAIN 50 475 PROFILE YOP MON 0 00 105 FLD WK INT TC ms 4000 483 DIAMETER OP MON 0 00 96 106 FLD WK DRV TC ms 200 494 TOTAL TENSION MN 0 00 96 107 FLD WK FB DRV ms 100 500 TORQUE DEMAND MN 0 00 96 108 FLD WK INT ms 100 523 PRESET OP MON 0 00 96 109 SPILLOVER AVF 100 00
113. AND both speed demand and feedback are less than 117 ZERO INTLCK SPD96 an encoder position control loop activates The motor must have a bi directional output shaft encoder Quadrature OR pulse and direction When locked the speed may exceed 117 ZERO INTLCK SPD96 without losing the lock Lock is only released by speed demand gt 117 ZERO INTLCK SPD Suggested value 10 00 Increasing improves position response excessive gain may cause position instability See 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PIN 9 QUICK START Warning PL PILOT may add up to 10 5 to PL X cycle times which may affect the response of applications that require fast sampling Eg SPINDLE ORIENTATE To overcome this effect reduce the PL PILOT baud rate 6 10 9 3 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker enable PIN 240 SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 240 MARKER ENABLE Enables the marker in order to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN determine spindle orientation MARKER ENABLE ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 240 DISABLED turns off the spindle orientate function and the marker frequency monitor function Note 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK function will continue to work however stopping position is arbitary 6 10 9 3 1 Marker specification The logic threshold levels for T15 ar O 2V 1 gt 4V The maximum input voltage is 50V The minimum width specification for the marker is 10 uS The precise point of reference is the rising edge of the marker Various types of mark
114. ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 141 AT CURRENT LIMIT 141 AT CURRENT LIMIT Shows if the armature current has reached PARAMETER RANGE PIN the prevailing current limit clamp AT CURRENT LIMIT HIGH at limit or LOW 141 128 DIAGNOSTICS 7 3 DIAGNOSTICS FLD LOOP MONITOR FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 PIN number range 143 147 147 FIELD ACTIVE MON FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 143 FIELD DEMAND MON FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 144 FIELD CUR MON FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 145 FLD CUR AMPS MON For convenience the field current is also shown as a of max rated value in a dedicated window FLD I LOOP MONITOR 3 146 ANGLE OF ADVANCE 7 3 1 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field demand monitor PIN 143 FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 143 FIELD DEMAND MON H 143 FIELD DEMAND MON H 0 0096 Shows the value of the field current PARAMETER RANGE PIN demand as a 96 of full scale FIELD DEMAND MON 0 00 to 100 0096 143 7 3 2 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field current 96 monitor PIN 144 FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 R 144 FIELD CUR MON R 144 FIELD CUR MON 0 00 Shows the value of the average DC motor PARAMETER RANGE PIN field current as a of rated field amps FIELD CUR MON 0 00 to 125 00 144 7 3 3 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field current amps monitor PIN 145 FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 145 FLD CUR AMPS MON R 145 FLD CUR AMPS MON R 0 00 AMPS Shows the value of the average DC motor PARAMETER RANGE PIN field current in amps FLD CUR AMPS MON 0 00 to 50 00 AMPS 145 R DIAGNOSTICS FLD
115. CH103313 33 1250 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1250 D300084 PL X360KW 850A CH103313 33 1400 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1400 E300085 PL X400KW 950A CH103324 33 1400 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1400 E300085 PL X400KW 950A CH103324 73 1250 TTF 74 9 URD 73 TTF 1250 T300696 PL X440KW 1050A CH103325 33 1400 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1400 E300085 PL X440KW 1050A CH103325 73 1400 TTF 74 8 5 URD 73 TT F 1400 300718 PL X520KW 1250A CH103326 2x73 1800 TTF 91 11 URD 273 TTF 1800 302236 PL X520KW 1250A CH103326 2x33 1800 PLAF 55 5 6 9 URD 233 PLAF 1800 B300427 PL X600KW 1450A CH103327 2x32 2000 TDF 91 5 6 9 URD 232 TDF 2000 Y300217 PL X600KW 1450A CH103327 2x73 2000 TTF 91 10 URD 273 TTF 2000 P300738 PL X700KW 1650A CH103328 2x73 2200 TTF 91 9 5 URD 273 TTF 2200 Q300739 PL X700KW 1650A CH103328 2x73 2200 PLAF 78 9 5 URD 273 PLAF 2200 M301909 PL X800KW 1850A CH103329 44 2700 TTOF TOF 65 6 9 URD 44 2700 E239158 PL X800KW 1850A CH103329 2x73 2500 PLAF 78 9 URD 273 PLAF 2500 R300740 PL X900KW 2050A CH103330 44 3000 TTOF TOF 65 6 9 URD 44 3000 PL X900KW 2050A CH103330 2x73 2800 PLAF 78 8 5 URD 273 PLAF 2800 300741 PL X980KW 2250A CH103469 44 3200 TTOF TOF 65 6 9 URD 44 3200 221805 7 3 Terminal information 7 3 1 See Part 1 main product manual for control terminal information section 3 3 3 3 4 and 3 5 Control Terminals 7 3 2 Powerboard Terminals Remove busbar cover plate to reveal powerboard terminal
116. CONTACTOR LOCK OUT is displayed See 8 1 11 18 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Contactor lock out Alarm delay time 0 5 secs 8 1 11 13 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Heatsink overtemp MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 HEATSINK OVERTEMP In the event of blower failure or restriction of the cooling airflow the heatsink temperature may rise to an unacceptable level Under these conditions the heatsink overtemp alarm will operate If this alarm operates on units fitted with a heatsink blower it should be checked for obstruction and the cooling air path checked for obstructions Models fitted with twin top mounted fans are provided with fan stall protection Once the obstruction is removed the fan should resume normal operation If the fan does not run the fan assembly must be replaced For units with an AC driven rear mounted fan PL X 185 225 265 check that the 110V AC fan supply is present on terminals B1 B2 For PL X 275 980 check that the 240V AC fan supply is present on the terminals provided under the lower connection cover For PL X275 980 this alarm will also operate if the supply voltage is not present aswell as for over temperature of the heatsink The unit enclosure must be supplied with sufficient cool dry clean air See 14 1 Product rating table The unit must be allowed to cool in order to re start Alarm delay time 0 75 secs 8 1 11 14 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Short circuit digital outputs MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DR
117. CONTROL Useful tips for eliminating unwanted analogue references 1 The RUN MODE RAMP output will remain at precisely zero providing the Ramp Hold T16 input is permanently high and the ramp is not permanently preset to a non zero value The ramp input may often be used by line master drives but in the slave drive the ramp should be disabled using T16 Note that the incoming digital reference may be passed through the ramp function by re configuring the appropriate internal PL X connections In this case the analogue input to the ramp terminal T4 is disconnected 2 Analogue input 2 T2 may be used for inching references In which case it should be re connected via input 1 of the SUMMER 1 apps block which possesses a deadband function During normal running the terminal is shorted to OV or left open circuit This ensures no signal passes if the input remains within the deadband The analogue inch reference is set above the deadband so as to give the required inching speeds forward or backward Selection between analogue inching and absolutely zero is thus automatic If T2 is not being used it may be dis connected or the UIP2 scaler on PIN 322 should be set to 0 0000 3 Zero input 3 T3 using 6 6 7 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed Current Reference 3 ratio PIN 67 162 SERIAL LINKS 10 3 1 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange slave ratio PIN 189 REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 189 REF XC SLV RATIO RANGE DEFAULT PIN Scales the inc
118. COUNTER gt TARGET APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 z BATCHCOUNTER 3 578 COUNTER COUNT BATCH COUNTER 3 579 COUNTER CLOCK This block provides a batch counter function The minimum low or high logic input dwell time is BATCH COUNTER 3 5OmS giving a maximum count frequency of 10Hz 580 COUNTER RESET A positive clock transition causes the counter to count up If the count is equal to or greater than the target PATER COUNTER 2 then 582 gt TARGET flag is set high The SSI COUNTER TARGET counter continues counting positive clock transitions unless the reset input is high or the counter reaches 32000 This feature is useful if the counter is used to signal intermediate points within a total batch The count target may be changed without interfering with the counting process The reset input resets the counter to zero 3 13 1 BATCH COUNTER Block diagram BATCH COUNTER PIN 581 PIN 582 Counter Count 32000 2 0 o targe Batch counter PIN 579 Counter clock input high time must be at least 50mS The clock input low time must be at least 50mS GO TO PIN 580 PIN 578 Count reset Count Value monitor PN See 3 1 1 Sample times 3 13 2 BATCH COUNTER Counter count monitor PIN 578 BATCH COUNTER 3 578 COUNTER COUNT Allows the batch counter value PARAMETER RANGE PIN to be monitored COUNTER COUNT O to 32
119. ENABLE GOTO GETFROM 13 14 1 CONFLICT HELP MENU Number of conflicts CONFLICT HELP MENU 3 NUMBER OF CONFLICTS 0 Shows the number of GOTO PARAMETER RANGE connections in conflict NUMBER OF CONFLICTS 01050 Note there will be at least 2 conflicts for each conflict PIN Removing one GOTO from the conflict PIN will reduce the conflict number by at least 2 This window has a branch hopping facility to the MULTIPLE GOTO ON PIN window 13 14 2 CONFLICT HELP MENU Multiple GOTO conflict PIN identifier CONFLICT HELP MENU 3 MULTIPLE GOTO ON PIN MULTIPLE GOTO ON PIN 400 Shows the next PIN with PARAMETER RANGE more than 1 GOTO connected MULTIPLE GOTO ON PIN O to 720 Note there will be at least 2 conflicts for each conflict PIN Removing one GOTO from the conflict PIN will reduce the conflict number by 2 The number 400 is block disconnect and indicates no conflicts This window has a branch hopping facility to the NUMBER OF CONFLICTS window Installation 203 14 Installation VE USCA AMO Mecca le etia i a 6 ice e id de ct entities 203 T4 1 Product rating Rente bete rre E eoe ene apod E RR e eR hee 204 14 2 Product rating labels et ot ix b RE EU d qM DOE SIR ete eevee 204 14 3 Semiconductor fuse 65 1 s e e ee essen nennen 204 14 371 Proprietary TUSGS soc nue
120. Finding the software CONFIGURATION CONFLICT HELP MENU CONFIGURATION ENABLE GOTO GETFROM CONFIGURATION UNIVERSAL INPUTS CONFIGURATION ANALOGUE OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION DIGITAL INPUTS CONFIGURATION DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION DIGITAL OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION STAGING POSTS CONFIGURATION 2 SOFTWARE TERMINALS 3 CONFIGURATION 2 JUMPER CONNECTIONS 3 CONFIGURATION BLOCK OP CONFIG CONFIGURATION FIELDBUS CONFIG CONFIGURATION DRIVE PERSONALITY version number of the unit See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes Note PILOT is not subject to PASSWORD control See 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL CONFIGURATION 169 13 2 Configurable connections The internal connections within the PL X may be re configured using the display and keys or PL PILOT 1 ANALOG GO TO GO TO Range PIN 320 monitor T2 PIN 150 y 1 UIP2 PIN 321 PIN 322 Offset Scaler This is a universal programmable connection device known as a JUMPER It is basically a piece of virtual wire with a GOTO at the p 1 323 324 destination end and GET FROM at EINE 925 High value the source end It can join any pair s eh of PINs including PINs within blocks PIN 326 328 Dig mon h There 16 jumpers GOTO connection from a block output to any PIN except outputs bd PIN 408 dead band 4 m
121. GOTO GETFROM GOTO CONFLICT window to set it to DISABLED This message will then appear if the user has accidentally connected more than one GOTO to any PIN during the session It will also appear as an alarm message if the drive is asked to run and there is a GOTO CONFLICT E g if a parameter file containing a GOTO CONFLICT has been loaded See 13 14 CONFLICT HELP MENU 9 1 10 SELF TEST MESSAGE Internal error code INTERNAL ERROR CODE This message will appear for a variety of reasons 0001 Codes 0001 2 3 indicate a microprocessor system problem Please consult supplier The message SUPPLY PHASE LOSS indicates the control supply has dipped See 3 6 Supply loss shutdown Code 0005 appears if a very small motor is run on a large PL X with a high inductance 3 phase supply In this case it will be necessary to re calibrate the model rating to a lower current See 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 and 13 13 4 1 50 100 rating select If this message appears when running then 1 The armature current will quench 2 The main contactor and field will de energise 3 The digital outputs will be disabled 4 HEALTHY flag PIN 698 will be set low Normal operation may be re instated by pressing the left key or turning the control supply off and on again 9 1 11 SELF TEST MESSAGE Authorisation needed i arameter n This message will appear if a PARAMETER SAVE on ONSA ON NEEDED RECIPE PAGE 3 KEY
122. MESSAGE Slack speed 1 2 PINs 39 40 79 Armature 1 1 1 1 143 Small test 2 44 70 199 Armature 4 4 143 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Au totune quit 545 rer rese bees 103 147 Anded jog PIN Bad reference exchange 146 161 Anded run PIN 305 2 Cannot autotune 103 147 Anded start PIN 307 Contactor lock out 146 147 Internal run input PIN 308 Field l055 ie Re EE MER 144 Software version sei inest pex Field overcurrent 4 0 143 Software version number of the unit Heatsink overtemp 146 Speed current reference monitor PIN 64 Missing pulse 1 145 SPEED CONTROL Overspeed 140 144 Block diagram iei eror vir re etu Short circuit digital 25 146 High break point PIN 75 Speed feedback 145 Integral 96 during ramp PIN 78 zs Stall
123. MODE NON INVERT LATCH GOTO 400 Block Disconnect GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect FILTER1 GOTO 400 Disconnect GOTO 33 RAMP HOLD FILTER2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect T 287 0103 IP HI VALUE 0 01 96 E BATCH COUNTER GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 288 DIO3 IP LO VALUE 0 00 INTERVAL TIMER GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 0104 T21 SETUP 4 FIELDBUS CONFIG 3 289 0104 OP MODE DISABLED c JUMPER 1 4 290 DIO4 RECTIFY ENABLED GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 291 DIO4 THRESHOLD 0 00 JUMPER 2 4 292 0104 INVERT MODE NONHNVERT e GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect GET FROM 400 Disconnect JUMPER 3 4 GOTO 88DUALICLAMPENBL GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect E 293 DIO4 IP HI VALUE 0 01 96 JUMPER 4 4 EE 294 DIO4 IP LO VALUE 0 00 96 FROM 400 Block Disconnect DIGITAL OUTPUTS 3 JUMPER 5 4 DOP1 T22 SETUP 4 GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect TERES 261 DOP1 RECTIFY ENABLED JUMPER 6 4 262 DOP1 THRESHOLD 0 00 GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 263 DOP1 INVERT MODE NON INVERT JUMPER 7 4 m GET FROM 120 AT ZERO SPD FLAG GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect DOP2 T23 SETUP 4 JUMPER 8 4 264 DOP2 RECTIFY ENABLED FROM 400 Block Disconnect 265 DOP2 THRESHOLD 0 00 BIT PACKED GETFROM 266 DOP2 INVERT MODE NON INVERT JUMPER 1 4 ETE GET FROM 35 RAMPING FLAG GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect DOP3 T24 SETUP 4 JUMPER 2 4
124. MODE RAMPS 3 34 RAMPING THRESHOLD 34 RAMPING THRESHOLD i 2 50 Sets the operating threshold for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN 35 RAMPING FLAG output RAMPING THRESHOLD 0 00 to 100 00 2 50 34 Until the output of the ramp is within this tolerance of its target value then 35 RAMPING FLAG is high This is also true if the ramp is being held at a value that differs from the input by more than the threshold See 6 2 16 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag PIN 35 6 2 16 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag PIN 35 RUN MODE RAMPS 3 35 RAMPING FLAG 35 RAMPING FLAG LOW Allows the output status of the ramping PARAMETER RANGE PIN flag to be monitored HIGH RAMPING RAMPING FLAG HIGH or LOW 35 The ramping flag may be used to modify the speed loop integrator during ramping See 6 7 7 5 SPEED ADAPTION Integral during ramp PIN 78 Note 78 INT DURING RAMP does not reset the integrator it merely alters the of integration For very precise performance at the ramp end points e g stopping it is useful to be able to RESET the SPEED LOOP integrator during the ramping process By holding it in RESET during the ramping process there is no undesirable integral history to intefere with the loop at the end of the ramp This RESET can be achieved by connecting a JUMPER from 35 RAMPING FLAG to 73 SPEED INT RESET See 13 2 4 JUMPER connections This monitoring window is able to branch hop to 6 2 2 RUN MODE RAMP
125. MON 0 00 Monitors the final total output PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN value of the summer block SUMMER1 OP MON 200 00 0 00 401 3 2 3 SUMMER 1 2 Sign 1 PIN 402 416 Used to invert the signal PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN arriving at input 1 SUMMER SIGN1 INVERT NON INVERT NON INVERT 402 16 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 2 4 SUMMER 1 2 Sign 2 PIN 403 417 SUMMER 1 3 403 SUMMER1 SIGN2 RANGE DEFAULT PIN Used to invert the signal PARAMETER arriving at input 2 SUMMER1 SIGN 2 INVERT or NON INVERT NON INVERT 403 3 2 5 SUMMER 1 2 Ratio 1 PIN 404 418 SUMMER 1 3 404 SUMMER1 RATIO1 RANGE DEFAULT Sets the ratio value for the PARAMETER signal arriving at input 1 SUMMER1 RATIO1 3 0000 1 0000 3 2 6 SUMMER 1 2 Ratio 2 PIN 405 419 SUMMER 1 3 405 SUMMER1 RATIO2 RANGE DEFAULT Sets the ratio value for the PARAMETER signal arriving at input 2 SUMMER 1 RATIO2 3 0000 1 0000 3 2 7 SUMMER 1 2 Divider 1 PIN 406 420 SUMMER 1 3 406 SUMMER1 DIVIDER1 RANGE DEFAULT Sets divisor for signal arriving PARAMETER at IP1 A zero gives zero output SUMMER 1 DIVIDER1 3 0000 1 0000 3 2 8 SUMMER 1 2 Divider 2 PIN 407 421 SUMMER 1 3 407 SUMMER1 DIVIDER2 RANGE DEFAULT PIN Sets divisor for signal arriving P
126. MON 523 PRESET SPEED MON 0 00 Allows the preset speed block PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN output to be monitored PRESET SPEED MON 300 00 0 00 523 3 9 3 PRESET SPEED Select bit inputs 1 Isb 2 msb PINs 524 525 526 PRESET SPEED 3 524 PRESET SEL1 LSB Sets the logic state of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN preset speed block digital input PRESET SEL1 LSB HIGH or LOW LOW 524 3 9 4 PRESET SPEED OP value of 000 to 111 PINs 527 to 534 PRESET SPEED 3 527 PR VALUE FOR 000 527 PR VALUE FOR 000 0 00 Sets the values for each preset PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN speed block digital input code PR VALUE FOR 000 300 00 0 00 527 See 3 9 1 PRESET SPEED Block diagram APPLICATION BLOCKS 51 3 10 APPLICATION BLOCKS MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 PINs used 544 to 559 MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 544 MULTIFUN1 MODE There are 8 identical independent MULTI FUNCTION blocks They are identified by the suffix MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 1 to 8 in the menu windows 545 MULTIFUN1 OP SEL Only number 1 is shown here MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 They are used to perform simple signal processing GET FROM on 1 or 2 signals Available functions are comparator AND OR MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 LOGIC INVERT sign change rectify and sample AUX GET FROM and hold These blocks may also be used as JUMPERS to make connections 3 10 1 MULTI FU
127. Note This does not affect the signal used for the digital threshold comparison This scaling factor may be used to introduce an inversion by selecting a negative number A scaling factor of 1 0000 is equivalent to 100 00 In this case the full range of the input as selected in the range selection window will be equivalent to a 100 00 signal E g With the 30V range selected and a scaling factor of 1 0000 then a signal of 30V would represent a demand of 100 00 speed 13 3 1 4 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Maximum clamp level PIN 3 2 3 to 3 9 3 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 323 UIP2 MAX CLAMP 323 UIP2 MAX CLAMP 100 00 Sets an upper clamp level for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the scaled linear input signal UIP2 MAX CLAMP 300 00 100 00 323 13 3 1 5 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Minimum clamp level PIN 3 2 4 to 3 9 4 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 324 UIP2 MIN CLAMP 324 UIP2 MIN CLAMP 100 00 Sets a lower clamp level for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN scaled linear input signal UIP2 MIN CLAMP 300 0096 100 00 324 176 CONFIGURATION 13 3 1 6 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Make analog GOTO destination connection UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 UIP ANALOG GOTO UIP ANALOG GOTO PIN Description of function Defines the target destination PIN for the analog connection to UIPX PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT UIP ANALOG GOTO PIN 000 to 720 See table
128. OF INJURY PACKAGING The packaging is combustible and if disposed of incorrectly may lead to the generation of toxic fumes which are lethal WEIGHT Consideration should be given to the weight of the product when handling REPAIRS Repair reports can only be given if the user makes sufficient and accurate defect reporting Remember that the product without the required precautions can represent an electrical hazard and risk of injury and that rotating machinery is a mechanical hazard PROTECTIVE INSULATION 1 All exposed metal insulation is protected by basic insulation and user bonding to earth i e Class 1 2 Earth bonding is the responsibility of the installer 3 All signal terminals are protected by basic insulation and the user earth bonding Class 1 The purpose of this protection is to allow safe connection to other low voltage equipment and is not designed to allow these terminals to be connected to any un isolated potential 16 Warnings It is essential that all the following warnings are read and understood 2 4 Summary of further WARNINGS This summary is provided for convenience only Please read the entire manual prior to first time product use OV on T13 must be used for protective clean earth connection Terminals T30 and T36 must be linked if external over temperature sensors are not used See 3 5 Control terminal default functions WARNING Do not rely on any drive function to prevent the motor from operat
129. OUT The contactor will de energise if START and JOG are both low In this case the time taken for the contactor to de energise depends on the STOP MODE RAMP when stopping from a running mode or JOG SLACK RAMP when stopping from a jog mode Note flags on hidden PINs 689 IN JOG FLAG 698 HEALTHY FLAG 699 READY FLAG 714 IN SLACK FLAG 720 SYSTEM RESET pulse 6 5 1 2 Speed profile when stopping Start goes Motor speed follows down low d icon ramp providing current Speed reference d out demand does not limit _ Motor speed if drive is Motor speed if current not able to regenerate demand stays at limit or if either the CSTOP or RUN line go LOW SPEED DEMAND Stop ramp time is set by PIN 56 6 5 1 3 Contactor drop out Start goes H MOTOR SPEED low amp following ramp Motor will coast if Contactor drops X Drop out speed live delay mode PIN out at this time SPEED DEMAND set by PIN 59 58 is DISABLED providing the Stop ramp time is speed follows Drop out Delay Delay timer time PIN 60 starts now set by 56 the down ramp If START or JOG goes high during the 60 DROP OUT DELAY time then the contactor stays energised and the drive will restart immediately The 60 DROP OUT DELAY timer will be reset to time zero This allows jogging without the contactor dropping in and out Stop time limit PIN 57 Contactor drops out at this time if it has not already drop
130. PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN Sets positive forward limit level of total speed reference MAX POS SPEED REF 0 00 to 105 0096 105 00 6 7 3 SPEED CONTROL Max negative speed reference PIN 70 70 MAX NEG SPEED REF 105 00 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT Sets negative reverse limit level of total speed reference MAX NEG SPEED REF 0 00 to 105 00 105 00 6 7 4 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop error amplifier SPEED PROP GAIN 0 00 to 200 00 15 00 Increase to improve response time excessive values may cause instability 94 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 7 5 SPEED CONTROL Speed integral time constant PIN 72 R 72 SPEED INT T C ik 1 000 SECS Sets the integral time constant PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the speed loop error amplifier SPEED INT T C 0 001 to 30 000 secs 1 000 secs 72 This should be matched with the mechanical time constant of the motor load combination Generally an increased integral time will slow the response R SPEED CONTROL 3 72 SPEED INT T C 6 7 6 SPEED CONTROL Speed integral reset enable PIN 73 SPEED CONTROL 3 73 SPEED INT RESET 7 The integral reset be PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN enabled leaving prop only SPEED INT RESET ENABLED OR DISABLED
131. PARAMETERS RUN MODE RAMPS CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 B RUN MODE RAMPS 3 2 numbers range 21 to 35 A different down ramp time is settable for stopping modes See 6 5 2 STOP MODE RAMP Stop ramp time PIN 56 A different up down ramp time is settable for JOG control See 6 3 6 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog Slack ramp 43 Summary of available functions This block sets the rate of acceleration and deceleration of the motor independantly of the incoming reference There are 4 independent up down forward reverse ramp times and an output indicates that ramping is taking place The output can be held or preset to any value with preset commands from various sources for a wide number of applications The ramp shape can be profiled to a classic S shape for smooth control See 6 2 13 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp S profile PIN 32 See 6 3 CHANGE PARAMETERS JOG CRAWL SLACK and 6 5 CHANGE PARAMETERS STOP MODE RAMP These have their own ramp rate times which overide the run mode ramps The incoming reference can have a minimum speed imposed in either direction The ramp preset function is momentary in jog mode Note that the RUN MODE RAMP may be programmed to be active when the unit is in stop mode See 6 2 1 RUN MODE RAMPS Block diagram including JOG This function is useful in cascaded systems RUN MODE RAMPS 3 34 RAMPING THRESHOLD RUN MODE RAMPS 33 RAMP HOLD RUN MODE RAMPS 35 RA
132. PIN 131 124 7 2 DIAGNOSTICS ARM I LOOP 125 7 2 1 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Armature current demand monitor PIN 133 126 7 2 2 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Armature current 96 monitor PIN 134 126 7 2 3 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Armature current amps monitor PIN 135 126 7 2 4 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Upper current limit monitor PIN 136 126 7 2 5 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Lower current limit monitor 137 0 20 222 2 126 7 2 6 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Actual prevailing upper lower current limits PINs 138 139 127 7 2 7 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Overload limit monitor PIN 140 0 22 127 7 2 8 ARM I LOOP MONITOR At current limit flag PIN 141 0 002 127 7 3 DIAGNOSTICS FLD LOOP 128 7 3 1 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field demand monitor PIN 143 csse mm mnn 128 7 3 2 FLD I LOOP MONITOR Field current 96 monitor PIN 144 0 2 128 7 3 8 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field current amps monitor PIN 145 2 2 128 7 34 FLD I LOOP MONITOR Field firing angle of advance monitor PIN 146 2 129 7 3 5 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field active monitor PIN 147
133. PL X1 transmit must be connected to the PL X2 receive and the PL X1 receive to the PL X2 transmit 10 1 2 RS232 PORT1 Port1 Baud rate PIN 187 R RS232 PORT1 3 187 PORT1 BAUD RATE ab Sets the baud rate of port1 to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN suit the host PORT1 BAUD RATE 1 of 9 standard baud rates 9600 187 The standard baud rates available are 300 600 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 34 800 and 57 600 Note This is not subject to PASSWORD control See 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL 10 1 3 RS232 PORT1 Port1 function PIN 188 RS232 PORT1 3 188 PORT1 FUNCTION an Sets the function of 1 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN PORT1 FUNCTION 4 modes PARAMETER EXCH SELECT 188 O PARAM EXCH SELECT 1 REF EXCHANGE MASTER 2 REF EXCHANGE SLAVE 3 ASCII COMMS If PARAM EXCH SELECT is selected proceed to the PARAMETER EXCHANGE sub menu If master or slave ref EXCHANGE is selected proceed to the REFERENCE EXCHANGE sub menu ASCII COMMS is selected to implement a full duplex ANSI communications protocol for use with a host computer or the PL PILOT configuration tool Please refer to SERIAL COMMS MANUAL for specification Note This is not subject to PASSWORD control See 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL 10 1 4 How to use USB ports Note Some computers may not be fitted with an RS232 COM port Instead they will possess a USB port In this case it is necessary to fit a USB RS232 con
134. Prime warnings in manual summarised in one section mode of failure Improve warning presentation 2 4 2001 How to use USB ports Some computers only have USB ports 10 1 4 Further information about PL PILOT PL PILOT upgraded to implement multidrop 10 2 5 1 Data corruption message for each recipe page After message left key returns to the RAM 9 1 1 data prevailing prior to parameter exchange Change push button control diagram add new one Previous diagram did not latch STOP 4 3 4 5 Add hidden PIN 714 IN SLACK FLAG Useful for controlling tension enable 6 3 Make 3 CURRENT LIMIT adjustable whilst running Users request 6 1 3 New DIAGNOSTICS PIN 132 ENCODER RPM MON Users request Assist encoder commissioning 7 1 9 Change name of hidden PIN 709 from ENCODER To emphasize that this PIN 709 is scaled by 6 1 10 3 RPM to MOTOR RPM Function unchanged PIN 12 MOT ENC SPD RATIO and its 100 evel is determined by 6 DESIRED MAX RPM rating for main PL X 65 and 85 fuses changed Change in spec from device manufacturers 14 1 14 3 5 01 PORT1 FUNCTION no longer subject to password Improved functionality 11 2 10 1 Mar 02 5 01 5 01 Fieldbus based comms facility added sub menu in mproved functionality Requires mounting Serial Comms Mar 02 5 01 CONFIG menu Uses16 GOTOs and 16 GETFROMS board and PROFIBUS card Manual 5 01 Range of 18 RATED ARM VOLTS and 19 EL1 2 3 mproved functionality 6 1 Mar 02 5 01 RATED AC and their monitors increased to 1000V 5 01
135. RANGE DEFAULT PIN PID parameter profile X AXIS PID1 X AXIS MIN 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 448 26 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 3 22 PID 1 2 PID Profile X axis GET FROM PID 1 3 PID1 5 GET FROM PID1 5 GET FROM dn 400 Block Disconnect Sets the PIN for the profile X PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT axis input signal source PID1 X AXIS GET FROM to 720 400 Block Disconnect Note This GET FROM input has a built in rectifier and hence will accept bi polar or unipolar inputs 3 3 23 PID 1 2 PID Profiled prop gain output monitor PIN 449 472 PID 1 3 449 PID1 PROFILED GN 449 PID1 PROFILED GN 0 0 This is an output monitor of the PARAMETER RANGE PIN PID1 profiled proportional gain PID1 PROFILED GN 0 0 to 100 0 449 This window has a branch hopping facility 3 3 24 PID 1 2 PID clamp flag monitor PIN 450 473 PID 1 3 450 PID1 CLAMP FLAG 450 PID1 CLAMP FLAG LOW Shows if the PID OP has PARAMETER RANGE PIN reached the clamp limits PID1 CLAMP FLAG HIGH clamped or LOW 450 See 3 3 16 and 3 3 17 PID 1 2 PID negative clamp level PIN 444 467 This window has a branch hopping facility 3 3 25 PID 1 2 PID error value monitor PIN 451 474 PID 1 3 451 PID1 ERROR MON 451 PID1 ERROR MON 0 0096 Shows the result of subtracting PARAMETER RANGE PIN IPs Channel 2 from Channel 1 PID1 ERROR MON 105 00 451 Note This error signal is inter
136. RPM that is a non unity ratio of the motor RPM Some systems have the encoder geared up to obtain a higher feedback frequency MOT ENC SPD RATIO Motor RPM Encoder RPM true for all speeds When using encoders it is advisable to initially run the system in AVF mode to verify the integrity of the encoder feedback signals using an oscilloscope Then after setting the QUADRATURE ENABLE and ENCODER LINES parameters run the system in AVF feedback mode and monitor 132 ENCODER RPM in the DIAGNOSTICS menu This will verify the encoder operates as expected prior to using it as a feedback source Note An encoder may be input and used for other tasks instead of feedback On hidden PIN 709 MOTOR RPM is the encoder feedback scaled to 100 6 DESIRED MAX RPM It is also scaled by 12 MOT ENC SPD RATIO which acts as a pure multiplying factor Both 132 ENCODER RPM and PIN 709 MOTOR RPM are purely encoder signals that work independently of the type of feedback selected They both read zero with no pulses on the encoder inputs 6 1 10 4 ENCODER SCALING Encoder PIN 13 R ENCODER SCALING 4 13 ENCODER SIGN 3 Modifies the encoder rotation PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN sign ENCODER SIGN NON INVERT or INVERT NON INVERT 13 Use this to invert the encoder feedback sign if needed Note in combined feedback modes type 3 and 4 with single line encoders the feedback sign is automatically taken from the AVF or tacho if SPINDLE ORIENTATE is n
137. Reverse minimum speed PIN 28 RUN MODE RAMPS 3 28 REVERSE MIN SPEED 28 REVERSE MIN SPEED 0 0096 Supports the reverse ve ramp PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT output at a minimum level REV MIN SPEED O to 105 0096 0 0096 Note that when the FORWARD MIN SPEED parameter see above is set between O and 0 5 then the ramp output follows the input at the desired ramp rates through zero i e there are no min speeds operating and there is no hysterisis around zero Note also that another mode of operation exists when 28 REVERSE MIN SPEED is between O and 0 5 AND 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED is greater than O 596 In this case 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED is operative and the ramp output will not go negative This facility may be used to prevent accidental negative rotation With 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED and 28 REVERSE MIN SPEED outside a band of 0 5 then both minimum speeds will be active with O 596 hysterisis around zero CHANGE PARAMETERS 75 29 6 2 10 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp automatic preset RUN MODE RAMPS 3 29 RAMP AUTO PRESET When enabled the system PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT reset also presets the ramp RAMP AUTO PRESET ENABLED or DISABLED ENABLED The SYSTEM RESET produces a logic pulse 5mS each time the MAIN CONTACTOR is energised See 6 2 1 RUN MODE RAMPS Block diagram including JOG 6 2 11 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp external preset RUN MODE RAMPS 3 30 RAMP EXT PRESET Wh
138. TOF 65 7 URD 44 TTOF 2500 BS C221538 7 2 2 PLX Models AC fuses for Standard supply voltage Up 480V AC PLX AC Bardac PART SIZE CURRENT MOUNTING DEPTH FERRAZ PART NUMBER AND REFERENCE No RATING A mm PLX275KW 650A CH103311 32 800 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 32 TTF 0800 P300071 PLX275KW 650A 103311 33 800 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 0800 Z300080 PLX315KW 750A 103312 32 900 50 6 6 9 URD 32 TT F 0900 Q300072 PLX315KW 750A 103312 33 900 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 0900 A300081 PLX360KW 850A 103313 32 1000 50 6 6 9 URD 32 TTF 1000 5300074 PLX360KW 850A 103313 33 1000 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1000 B300082 PLX400KW 950A CH103314 33 1100 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1100 C300083 PLX400KW 950A 103314 2 33 1250 67 6 6 9 URD 233 TTF 1250 D300268 PLX440KW 1050A CH103315 2x33 1250 TTF 67 6 6 9 URD 233 TTF 1250 D300268 PLX440KW 1050A CH103315 2x33 1400 TTF 67 6 6 9 URD 233 TTF 1400 E300269 PLX520KW 1250A 103316 73 1400 74 8 5 URD 73 TT F 1400 5300718 PLX520KW 1250A 103316 2 33 1600 67 6 6 9 URD 233 TTF 1600 F300270 PLX600KW 1450A 103317 2 33 1800 PLAF 55 5 6 9 URD 233 PLAF 1800 B300427 PLX600KW 1450A CH103317 2x32 1800 TDF 91 6 6 9 URD 232 TDF 1800 X300216 PLX700KW 1650A 103318 2 33 1800 PLAF 55 5 6 9 URD 233 PLAF 1800 B300427 PLX700KW 1650A
139. TOL set to greater than approx 20 Encoder loss and 172 SPEED TRIP TOL Drive TRIP Automatic switch to AVF combinational feedback exceeded The speed mismatch may be small because the AVF component is still valid hence 172 SPEED TRIP TOL must be set low enough to ensure an automatic switch occurs Tacho loss and Drive TRIP Automatic switch to AVF 172 SPEED TRIP TOL exceeded Encoder Armature Volts Incorrect encoder and or tacho polarity Drive TRIP Drive TRIP OR Encoder Tacho Combinational feedback with field weakening Total encoder and or tacho loss lt 10 signal Drive TRIP when field weakening region entered Drive TRIP when field weakening region entered Partial encoder and or tacho loss Protection limited to armature overvolts TRIP at minimum field current Protection limited to armature overvolts TRIP at minimum field current Encoder Armature voltage mode selected with field weakening enabled Drive TRIP when field weakening region entered Drive TRIP when field weakening region entered 138 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS A continuous comparison is made by the controller of the speed feedback and armature voltage feedback If the difference is greater than the value set by 8 1 2 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch tolerance PIN 172 the alarm is operated If armature voltage feedback is selected then the speed feedback alarm is automatically suppressed If 103 FLD WEAK
140. TRIP MESSAGE menu PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT SPD TRIP ENABLE ENABLED OR DISABLED ENABLED Feedback type Fault mode Result if trip ENABLED Result if trip DISABLED Armature Voltage No faults normally possible Alarm suppressed Alarm suppressed Armature voltage mode selected with field weakening enabled Drive TRIP when field weakening region entered Drive TRIP when field weakening region entered Tacho OR Encoder Incorrect polarity and 172 SPEED TRIP TOL set to less than approx 2096 Drive TRIP Automatic switch to AVF Incorrect polarity and 172 SPEED TRIP TOL Drive TRIP Drive TRIP set to greater than approx 2096 Feedback loss and Drive TRIP Automatic switch to AVF 172 SPEED TRIP TOL exceeded Tacho OR Encoder Incorrect polarity Drive TRIP Drive TRIP With field weakening Total feedback loss 1096 signal Drive TRIP when field weakening region entered Drive TRIP when field weakening region entered Partial feedback loss Protection limited to armature overvolts TRIP at minimum field current Protection limited to armature overvolts TRIP at minimum field current Encoder Armature Volts Incorrect encoder and or tacho polarity and Drive TRIP Automatic switch to AVF OR Encoder Tacho 172 SPEED TRIP TOL set to less than approx 20 Incorrect encoder and or tacho polarity and Drive TRIP Drive TRIP 172 SPEED TRIP
141. This allows the synchronisation circuits to lock onto the supply prior to the application of power to the motor This results in a fast release of current to the armature because it avoids the synchronisation delay Also the field can remain energised after contactor drop out allowing dynamic braking and or condensation prevention in standby field mode Disadvantages The field winding is not electromechanically isolated by the main contactor which may contravene safety codes without additional measures The field standby level may not be set to a low enough level by the user and could cause overheating of the field winding Phase forward may occur before contactor has closed causing fault current Time delay from START command to phase forward is 75mS 4 3 2 Main contactor isolating AC stack and auxiliary supplies Contactor Motor Field Auxiliary ee Line reactor NM Cie C IN LZ Ns Advantages The field winding is electromechanically isolated by the main contactor Some retro fit installations are only able to provide the 3 main phases because the main contactor is remotely located to the drive panel in which case this wiring method may be preferred The PL X cannot phase forward until the contactor has closed because EL1 2 3 take time to synchronise 38 Basic application Disadvantages The auxiliary supplies are de energised by the main contactor This causes a turn on delay of approximately 0 75 secs whil
142. This has a branch hopping facility to 3 6 2 TAPER TENSION CALC Total tension monitor PIN 494 38 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 7 APPLICATION BLOCKS TORQUE COMPENSATOR PINs used 500 to 520 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 511 ACCEL SCALER TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 512 ACCEL INPUT MON TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 513 ACCEL FILTER TC TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 514 TENSION DEM IP TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 515 TENSION SCALER TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 516 TORQUE MEM SEL TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 517 TORQUE MEM INPUT TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 518 TENSION ENABLE TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 519 OVER UNDERWIND amp TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 520 INERTIA COMP MON TORQUE COMPENSATOR 500 TORQUE DEMAND TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 501 TORQUE TRIM IP TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 502 STICTION COMP TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 503 STIC WEB SPD THR TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 504 STATIC FRICTION TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 505 DYNAMIC FRICTION TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 506 FRICTION SIGN TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 507 FIXED INERTIA TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 508 VARIABLE INERTIA TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 509 MATERIAL WIDTH TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 510 ACCEL LINE SPEED 424424526 APPLICATION BLOCKS 39 This block is used to add loss compensation to the tension demand signal generated by the TAPER TENSION CALC block The result is steered to the positive or negative current limits to provide a torque clamp which will give the correct ten
143. action of changing feedback mode to AVF will automatically rescale the 100 speed feedback to refer to 18 RATED ARM VOLTS To continue running in this mode e g if tacho has failed and avoid tripping ensure the field weakening region is avoided by remaining at a speed which gives an armature voltage below 109 SPILLOVER AVF 130 MOTOR RPM monitor will read incorrectly unless 6 DESIRED MAX RPM is readjusted to base RPM If this trip occurs the DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE will be SPEED FBK MISMATCH Note The limit of field weakening range is 10 1 See 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 110 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 9 6 1 FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 103 FLD WEAK ENABLE This allows the field weakening to be enabled or disabled FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening enable PIN 103 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT FLD WEAK ENABLE ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 6 9 6 2 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening proportional gain PIN 104 FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 104 FLD WK PROP GAIN This sets the proportional gain of the field weakening loop PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN FLD WK PROP GAIN 0 to 1000 50 104 Generally an increased proportional value will speed up the response of the armature voltage when operating around the spillover voltage point and a decrease will slow the response Increasing the value too far may cause instability of the armature
144. alarms prior to the trigger can be accessed for advance warning purposes using the active monitor window There is a USER ALARM on hidden PIN 712 This may be connected by the user to any flag to trip the drive 244425442226 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Active trip monitor PIN 181 Alarm sensing circuit 2 Alarm enable selector Speed feedback trip enable DD PIN 171 Speed feedback mismatch tol PIN 172 z v issing pulse trip enable N 175 2 4 eference exchange trip enable v D I C verspeed delay time N 177 Stored trip monitor PIN 182 Drive Alarms Alarm latching circuit PIN 178 Stall current level PIN 179 Stall delay time PIN 180 0 User Alarm Hidden PIN 712 Motor High for Healthy PIN 698 Stall trip enable Ext trip reset enable PIN 183 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 171 SPD TRIP ENABLE Allows the speed feedback mismatch TRIP to be disabled 171 SPD TRIP ENABLE ENABLED 137 If an alarm is enabled triggered and latched causing the drive to shut down then after approximately a further 10mS no further alarms will be latched Hence when the latched status of the alarms is monitored it is unlikely that more than 1 alarm will be latched If however more than 1 is latched then the first that arrived and initiated the shutdown can be determined from the DRIVE
145. are integer If toggling stops and mode CONF then ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be DISABLED See 13 2 7 Displayed mneumonic SPD larm Ifid RJSC Sref Ilim mode Source PIN number 131 134 144 164 123 138 139 167 STOP RUN Manual section 7 1 10 7 2 2 7 3 2 7 5 3 7 1 1 7 2 6 7 2 6 7 5 6 5 1 7 Finding the software version number of the unit To find the version number of the software loaded on the drive see 11 4 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Software version This is a version 5 15 manual Version 5 17 and above software has all the functions described Software version 4 05 upwards is compatible with PL PILOT version 4 05 However PL Pilot See 13 1 1 will not be able to utilise or configure FIELDBUS parameters See also16 1 Record of modifications 5 2 ENTRY MENU ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 When you enter the first vertical menu level level 1 PARAMETER SAVE 2 you will find 8 headings as you scroll up and down R PRESS RIGHT KEY FOR o ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 d H CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 After tapping the right key to proceed to the next level you can travel up and down the level using the ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 up and down keys The menus are circular so you H DIAGNOSTICS can travel up or down to reach your desired destination The menus are designed so that the most frequently used windows are closest to the entry points R ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 There are 2 styles of menu
146. armature current signal AOP1 2 3 Programmable output specification 12 bit plus sign resolution 2 5mV steps Short circuit protection to OV Protection is only available for any one output More than 1 OP shorted may damage the unit Output current maximum Output range 11 300V 10V normally represents 10096 ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 AOP3 T12 SETUP 4 PIN 159 T 10 OP monitor AOP1 pau PIN 253 PIN 252 PIN 251 AOP1 V T 2 Rect Bipolar Offset GET FROM 13 4 1 ANALOG OUTPUTS AOP4 larm output rectify enable PIN 250 ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 250 larm OP RECTIFY ae Sets larm output T29 to be PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN either bi polar or rectified larm OP RECTIFY ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 250 13 4 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS AOP1 2 3 4 SETUP AOP1 T10 SETUP There are 3 menus 1 for each analogue output GET FROM This list shows AOP1 ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 AOP1 T10 SETUP 4 AOP1 T10 SETUP 4 251 AOP1 DIVIDER The signal to be output is obtained from the 5 AOP1 T10 SETUP 4 internal system using the GET FROM window 252 AOP1 OFFSET The next process is a signed scaling divider followed by an offset which may be added or subtracted The output mode may be selected as AOP1 T10 SETUP 4 either rectified or bi polar prior to being placed on 253 AOP1 RECTIFY EN the terminal as a linear voltage signal CONFIGURATION 13 4 2 1 AOPX SETUP AOP1 2 3 Dividi
147. automatically lock any unlocked page 3 If page 3 is already locked it will not receive any file either locked or unlocked To remove the lock from a page 3 recipe on the PL X first SAVE it on a free page eg page 2 of the PL X This copies the page 3 contents on to page 2 which discards the lock Then transmit this page 2 file to the computer for use with other PL Xs See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 10 2 1 2 Transmitting parameter data file to a PC Windows 95 upwards Microsoft HyperTerminal part of Accessories in Windows 95 upwards Not available in Vista Vista users can download this from the WEB The first part of this section describes how to create a personalised Hyperterminal which once created may be used for all PARAMETER EXCHANGE functions between host computers and the PL X On computers supplied with Windows 95 upwards this program is to be found as standard in the folder Accessories To use it click on Start then travel through Programs Accessories and click on Hyper Terminal Double click on the Hypertrm exe icon or highlight it and click on File then Open It is now necessary for you to create a personalised Hyperterminal that can be used to receive or send parameter files to the PL X Note this tool does not hold any parameter files it only handles the files You will be asked for a Name for the connection an Icon use your name or your company name for example Then choose one of
148. between parameter PINs When a parameter is given a value by the programming procedure or is using its default value it is important to understand how it is affected by a connection to another source In this case the value is solely determined by the source and by looking at the parameter you can use it as a diagnostic monitor of that source The parameter value may only be re entered if the connection from the source is first removed Note Bold windows are used for QUICK START R CALIBRATION 3 17 ANALOG TACHO TRIM R CALIBRATION 3 18 RATED ARM VOLTS IC ALIBRATION 19 EL1 2 3 RATED AC oS CALIBRATION R 3 20 MOTOR 1 2 SELECT R CALIBRATION 3 2 RATED ARM AMPS R CALIBRATION 3 CURRENT LIMIT R CALIBRATION 3 4 RATED FIELD AMPS R CALIBRATION 3 5 BASE RATED RPM R CALIBRATION 3 6 DESIRED MAX RPM 3 R CALIBRATION 7 ZERO SPEED OFFSET CALIBRATION 3 n 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS CALIBRATION 3 R 9 SPEED FBK TYPE CALIBRATION 3 R ENCODER SCALING 4 CALIBRATION 3 R 14 IR COMPENSATION CALIBRATION 3 R 15 FIELD CUR FB TRIM CALIBRATION 3 R 16 ARM VOLTS TRIM 60 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 1 1 CALIBRATION Block diagram DC shunt wound motor PIN 143 Tachogenerator Field Internal o And or encoder isolated Feedback sensors for field current PIN 144 Tacho voltage Feedback Z
149. determine the alarm threshold The loss detection threshold is set at approximately 75 of the voltage entered here By entering a voltage higher or lower than the rated voltage it is possible to accomodate systems requiring detection at higher or lower thresholds Eg With 19 EL1 2 3 RATED AC set to 415V the alarm will detect at 311 volts on EL1 2 3 75 of 415 311 With 19 EL1 2 3 RATED AC set to 500V the alarm will detect at 375 volts on EL1 2 3 75 of 500 375 See 8 1 11 11 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Supply phase loss also see 3 6 Supply loss shutdown 70 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 1 17 CALIBRATION Motor 1 or 2 select PIN 20 R CALIBRATION 3 20 MOTOR 1 2 SELECT En Selects motor 1 or motor 2 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN reduced menu as active MOTOR 1 2 SELECT MOTOR 1 or MOTOR 2 MOTOR 1 20 All the alterable parameters contained in the CHANGE PARAMETERS reduced menu may have 2 value settings MOTOR 1 and MOTOR 2 This window selects the active set The active set is always the one available in the CHANGE PARAMETERS menu display The passive set can be viewed and modified in the configuration menu See 13 13 1 DRIVE PERSONALITY PASSIVE MOTOR SET See 11 1 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Reduced menu enable The passive motor set of parameters is the same as the REDUCED MENU This PIN can of course be configured to be set by a digital input for external set selection It may also be used as a diagnostic to show which set is active
150. distribution domestic environment mains conducted emissions limits on this port a separate filter is required Please refer to supplier 14 12 3 UL cUL The PL X range is UL and cUL listed File number E168302 218 Installation 14 13 What to do in the event of a problem If there is a problem with the PL X that you cannot solve without assistance then it may be necessary for you to contact the equipment supplier for help Problems can vary between 1 A simple clarification of a technical issue to 2 A complete system failure 14 13 1 A simple clarification of a technical issue Problems of the first variety can normally be resolved quickly by telephone fax or email When sending information about your enquiry please include the following information a The product serial number This is found under the top end cap b The software version number if possible See 11 5 Remotely mounted display unit If you are making a telephone enquiry please have this manual to hand at the time of the call 14 13 2 A complete system failure For more serious problems of the 2 variety it is necessary for you to provide the following information or if making a telephone call have the information to hand The engineer providing assistance may ask you to send some or all of this to him a The product serial number This is found under the top end cap b The software version number if possible See 11 4 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Software
151. driven winding Features Independent adjustment and selection of P I D Scaling of feedback and reference inputs Adjustable filter Preset mode on integral term Output scaler with independent limit clamps Built in gain profiling option 3 3 1 PID 1 2 Block diagram 2 identical independant PID blocks Gain profiler PIN 441 PIN GET 446 447 448 449 FROM B mode min Gain Preset value select P gain min PIN 430 PIN 431 PIN 437 PIN Time const x 451 Input 1 val Error val PIN 432 433 434 Int preset PIN 440 PIN 438 Time const D PIN 439 Filter time Constant TF Prop gain PIN 436 PIN 442 Clamp flag Reset Input 2 val a Gain profiler PIN PIN 469 470 471 472 FROM mode min Gain Preset value select P gain min OP Release Reset PIN 453 PIN 454 PIN 460 PIN Time const X 474 Input 1 val Error val PIN 455 Prop gain Output Enable Filter Int preset PIN 463 PIN 464 P PIN 456 PIN 456 PIN 461 Time const D PIN 462 Filter time Constant TF PIN 473 Clamp flag Prop gain PIN 459 PIN 465 Reset Input 2 val APPLICATION BLOCKS 21 3 3 2 PID 1 2 PID output monitor PIN 429 452 PID 1 3 429 PID1 OP MONITOR 429 PID
152. e un ee 3 15 4 COMPARATOR 4 Window mode select 602 Disabled 3 15 5 COMPARATOR 4 Hysteresis 603 O 10 00 0 00 3 16 2 C O SWITCH 1 Control PIN 604 604 1 3 16 3 C O SWITCH 1 Input LO value PIN 606 300 00 0 00 606 3 16 3 C O SWITCH 1 Input HI value PIN 605 300 00 0 0096 605 605 3 6 3 GOSWTCHzTWwlOvawe PNG OOOH 609 615 3 16 3 C O SWITCH 4 Input LO value PIN 615 300 00 0 00 615 APPLICATION BLOCKS 5 Index Batch counter ininsduininhirhiuuirniud 58 General purpose filters 1 and 2 56 Lateh block iieis trege he pee ainak 54 Parameter 27 Se 19 Preset speed block 48 PIN number tables 69 Reel diameter 31 Simple logical and linear processing 45 51 Summer tand 2 14 Taper tension 35 7 8 32 Winding torque 31 38 The description of every parameter can be located by using the table in chapter 4 They are listed in numeric order under convenient headings The tables contain a cross reference to each parameter paragraph
153. eee eens nnnm nenne 8 2 3 General amp amp te ci en 9 3 APPEICATION BEOGKS 4 5 d rare at SAU E E ORE Rui Edo EARNE 11 3 1 2 2 2 11 3 2 APPLICATION BLOCKS SUMMER 1 2 14 3 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS PID 71 2 0 deca cerae ark cue 19 3 4 APPLICATION BLOCKS PARAMETER 0 020202 27 3 5 APPLICATION BLOCKS REEL DIAMETER CALC 0 0 002022 31 3 6 APPLICATION BLOCKS TAPER TENSION 35 3 7 APPLICATION BLOCKS TORQUE COMPENSATOR 00020122 38 3 8 Centre winding block 0 0 47 3 9 APPLICATION BLOCKS PRESET SPEED 48 3 10 APPLICATION BLOCKS MULTI FUNCTION 1 108 00 00 0001 51 3 11 APPLICATION BLOCKS J LATCH sheets seca tra tyre nr ES e e Ea ra Ra Rea Rea ege 54 3 12 APPLICATION BLOCKS 7 FILTER 1 2 ons pase kg
154. electronic stopping facility The PL models that do not have this facility will not be able to decelerate faster than the natural coast down rate For all models when the motor has reached zero speed then the main contactor will de energise See 6 3 5 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog mode select PIN 42 Note The user control input contact must be maintained using external interlocking relay logic or LAT1 2 on terminals 47 and 48 See 4 3 4 Using pushbuttons for simple STOP START See 4 3 5 Using pushbuttons for STOP START With ramp to stop jog and slack take up The Start and Jog inputs provide the following operating features a Normal running b Jogging with 2 selectable jog speeds and programmable contactor drop out delay c Crawling The crawl speed is a programmable parameter d Slack take up with 2 selectable take up speeds With start high and jog low then jog going high acts as a slack take up With start low the jog input is a jog control The jog slack speed 2 select input is on T19 Jog mode select With jog low and mode select high then start going high acts as the crawl control See 6 3 5 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog mode select PIN 42 The crawl uses the run mode ramp times to accelerate and the Stop mode ramp times to stop Coast stop main contactor control Digital input CSTOP T34 With a high input the controller operates normally When the Coast Stop is at zero volts or open circuit the main contactor is open and the drive no
155. et oP weeded ovens eun E eene ue uersus aine SE 205 14 3 2 European stock fuses id ed ec Aen rine Re Ra LE I NE LU UR AUR ICE I 205 1453 3 DG semi conductor FUSES acie avere reru 206 14 4 PL X family cover 1 441 1 nnns nnne 207 14 5 Mechanical dimensions PL X 0 1 1 2 2 2 2 7 144 4 44 44 4 4 1 0 1 1 4 208 14 6 Mechanical dimensions PL X 65 145 42 2 20 002 02 2 0 209 14 7 Mechanical dimensions PL X 185 265 0 00 210 14 8 bile hi ee ine ann Ra RA eid 212 14 9 Eso snc MM 213 14 9 1 Wiring diagram for AC supply to L1 2 3 different to EL1 2 3 E g Low voltage field 213 14 10 Terminal tightening torques 2 iag II III he ee ee ee entere nen 214 14 11 Installation guide for cipe y ve eyed Ver vcra 215 14 11 1 3sphase power supply eeu Sean quaa ree err or en Dra Dre Dr e Or 215 14 11 2 Earthing and screening guidelines sss emen nnn 215 14 11 3 Earthing diagram for typical installation
156. expected for the prevailing supply then the control loop will phase back the output voltage accordingly 214 Installation However when the difference becomes excessive it may be preferable to feed the 2 power ports from different supply voltages The reason for this is usually to prevent high peak voltages from being imposed on a winding where the supply voltage is much higher than the winding rating Also a winding that was designed to run at full voltage fully phased forward will be subjected to a worse form factor when run continuously phased right back leading to overheating The wiring diagram below shows the preferred method of supplying the ports with different AC voltages It uses a single phase isolated transformer from L2 3 levels to EL2 3 to suit field E g The motor armature may be rated at 460V DC to be supplied from 415V AC supply and the field voltage may be rated at 100V DC originally designed to be supplied from a rectified 110V AC supply EL1 and EL2 supplied with 3 phase supply at high Isolated single phase step 460V AC Phase equivalent voltage E g UA AC down transformer is fed from to L1 and L2 and routed Phased as per L1 2 3 the phase equivalent of L2 according to preferred and L3 provides 130V AC to contactor arrangement EL2 and EL3 VA must be sufficient to supply required field current EL2 has high and low voltage connections made possible because the transformer EL2 3 semi conducto
157. flag is reset to zero if the internal supplies go totally off and back on again See also 8 1 11 11 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Supply phase loss 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition Sometimes it is useful to return a unit to its default setup condition E g a trial configuration may prove to be unworkable and it is easier to start again If all 4 keys are held down during the application of the control supply then the drive will automatically display the default parameters and connections EXCEPT those in the CALIBRATION menu and 100 FIELD VOLTS OP for MOTOR 1 and MOTOR 2 and 680 larm BURDEN OHMS These parameters remain as previously calibrated to prevent accidental de calibration when restoring defaults The defaults will only be permanently retained however if they are saved using the PARAMETER SAVE menu To revert to the last saved set turn the control supply off without doing a PARAMETER SAVE Also the PASSWORD is reset to 0000 See 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL See also 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page 677 for details of 2 and 3 key reset operation and power up messages 5 1 4 Branch hopping between monitor windows One large class of menu is the DIAGNOSTICS This provides a very comprehensive monitoring facility of analogue linear input signals control logic levels alarms and internal parameters Each parameter to be monitored is sighted at the end of a branch Here the up down keys all
158. from the RUN terminal and set HIGH to allow the drive to run CONFIGURATION 193 13 10 CONFIGURATION JUMPER CONNECTIONS This menu defines the JUMPER connection PINs using GET FROM and GOTO windows JUMPER CONNECTIONS 3 JUMPER 16 4 There are 16 uncommitted JUMPERS JUMPER CONNECTIONS 3 JUMPER 1 4 JUMPER CONNECTIONS 3 JUMPER 2 4 JUMPER CONNECTIONS 3 JUMPER 3 4 JUMPER CONNECTION JUMPER CONNECTIONS 3 JUMPER X 4 JUMPER CONNECTIONS 3 JUMPER 15 4 13 10 1 JUMPER CONNECTIONS Make jumper GET FROM source connection GET FROM PIN Description of function Defines the source PIN for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT connection using JUMPER GET FROM 000 to 720 400 13 10 2 JUMPER CONNECTIONS Make jumper GOTO destination connection Defines the destination PIN for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT connection using a JUMPER X GOTO PINOOO to 720 400 See 13 2 4 JUMPER connections for a description of the type of connections possible 194 CONFIGURATION 13 11 CONFIGURATION BLOCK OP CONFIG This menu is used to connect block diagrams BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE CONFIGURATION 2 BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 RUN MODE RAMPS GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 MOTORISED POT GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 PRESET SPEED GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 REF EXCH SLAVE GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 LATCH GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3 SUMMER 1 GOTO BLOCK OP CONFIG 3
159. fuses this may result in thyristor damage on the application of the start command Note The fire bar will be removed prior to performing the AUTOTUNE procedure as described later 1 For systems using field weakening start with the unit calibrated for armature voltage feedback first in order to verify normal operation up to base speed Then introduce field weakening only after careful calibration and switching to either tacho or encoder feedback 2 For systems employing torque control it is recommended to set up in basic speed mode first in order to establish correct speed loop functioning and calibration 4 5 1 Quick start calibration Assuming that the drive unit is correctly installed and the motor and load are safe and ready to be rotated then the next task is to calibrate the drive to suit the supply and the motor The PL X series has a method of calibration which avoids the need to solder resistors and set switches All the fundamental drive scaling parameters can be programmed via the on board display and menu keys Once the initial calibration menu is completed the chosen limits may be saved and will remain unaltered unless you wish to re calibrate There is also the choice of using a password to prevent unauthorised re calibration The unit automatically knows the model armature current ratings and will prevent setting of armature current in excess of the model rating See 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden
160. integral All these terms are associated with the armature voltage spillover loop and they are chosen FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 to give the best response without excessive 106 FLD WK DRV TC ms overshoots or instability of the armature voltage The control loop monitors the armature voltage and FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 compares it to the desired spillover voltage It then 107 FLD WK FBK DRV ms controls the field current to optimise the speed control of the drive in the field weakening region FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 When the armature voltage reaches the spillover 108 FLD WK FBK INT ms voltage further speed increases are achieved by field weakening and the armature voltage is effectively clamped at the spillover voltage In this region the output power is constant for a given armature current FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 109 SPILLOVER AVF See 6 1 11 CALIBRATION compensation 14 Further accuracy be achieved with IR COMP WARNING When using field weakening and a DC side power contactor the motor armature must be connected to the REMOTE AV sensing terminals T41 and T43 Failure to do this will cause flashover of the commutator because the AVF feedback is lost when the contactor opens WARNING Do not use field weakening if Armature Voltage Feedback is selected in the CALIBRATION menu If AVF has been selected and field weakening enabled then if the field weakening region is entered the drive will trip Note The
161. internet at www bardac com 1 Table of contents 1 Table of KREIS EAEE 3 2 WY ANN S 13 2 1 General WarminGS late DR DAR RR cust ceteceid est a i tata dens 13 2 2 Warnings and Instructions DEI Dp X ee ee 14 2 3 Genetal RI DULCI II D EMT 15 2 4 Summary of further WARNINGS 1 7 2 1 0 0 01444 1 4 1 4 1 enn 16 3 Introduction and Technical Data 19 Solr D LLLI 20 3 2 How do they wOrk 2 2 eee ye e na e 20 3 2 1 Useful things know about the 0 22 4 1 21 3 2 2 Tips for using the 4444444 1 2 4 1 1 nnn 21 3 3 General Technical 11 21 1 21 7 4 444 44442 44 1 1 1 2 0 22 3 3 1 Regenerative stopping with PL 5 1 22 3 3 2 Supply voltages required for all models 2
162. ll PIN 126 TACHO DATAPLATE MOTOR DATAPLATE Isolated AV mon sensors Volts 1000 RPM Max rated arm amps fora PIN 127 Type Bipolar Rectified AC DC Max rated arm volts current Max rated field amps and PL X PIN 128 ENCODER DATAPLATE Max rated field volts ATA Bemf 96 Lines per revolution Base rated RPM terminal V Arm Cur fb Armature 96 PIN 134 Amps DC Kwatts AV sensing inputs PIN 170 olts PIN 8 only used with DC side contactors 129 T 26 a Tacho Volt Unfiltered 96 ipis 131 Input pulse sign i lt 2 Speed Fb detector and freq i Monitor measurement Unfiltered PIN 715 RPM Pins 130 717 Quadrature Encoder Mot Enc Encoder Desired Zero enable lines Speed sign MAX speed PIN 132 PIN 10 PIN 11 Ratio PIN 13 RPM offset Encoder PIN 12 PIN 6 PIN7 Rpm Monitor Unfiltered 6 1 2 CALIBRATION Rated armature amps PIN 2 QUICK START Note the presence of a PIN number on the bottom line shows that one more step right takes us to the end of a branch Then we reach the end of a branch of the tree and this has resulted in a parameter value on the lower line which can be modified by use of the up down keys The desired 100 continuous PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT rated motor current in amps RATED ARM AMPS 33 100 of PL X rating 33 XXX X A This current may be less than the value on the motor data plat
163. longer operates If this input drops low during running then the main contactor will de energise within 100mS and the motor will coast to rest under the influence of external factors e g friction and inertia or by using an external dynamic braking resistor to dissipate the rotational energy Note The CSTOP must be high for at least 50mS prior to START going high Note When the digital outputs are shorted the 24V output will continue to operate with a current capability of 50mA This is so that the CSTOP line does not go low and shut down the drive If it is important that the drive continues running with a shorted digital output then a digital output set permanently high may be used as an auxiliary 24V power output for other tasks allowing the main 24V output to be devoted entirely to the CSTOP function 24V Supply 22V to 32V Output 24V T35 24V output for external logic Short circuit protected with fault annunciation Overvoltage protection to bOV See 3 4 2 Digital inputs and outputs Warning If powering an external encoder then load T35 with a 390R 5W resistor to OV T36 This will to prevent the 24V output rising above the encoder voltage rating OV terminal OV T36 Control terminals on lower power board numbers 41 to 53 Not programmable Remote AVF positive input from motor armature T41 RA RA used for remote armature volts sensing Automatic internal disconnection If DC contactor is used with field weakening it a
164. loop output is automatically disconnected Note The summing junction for this input is shown in 6 7 1 SPEED CONTROL Block diagram 106 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 9 CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD CONTROL PIN number range 99 114 FIELD CONTROL 3 114 FIELD REFERENCE R FIELD CONTROL R CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 99 FIELD ENABLE FIELD CONTROL 3 3 R FIELD CONTROL The field controller within the PL X consists of a 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 96 single phase half controlled thyristor bridge with a flywheel diode The AC supply to the bridge is delivered through terminals EL2 and EL3 and the rectified output is on terminals F and F The supply can be anywhere in the range of 100 to 480V AC but must at least be 1 1 times the maximum field output voltage you require Note that the supply to EL2 and EL3 is also utilised to determine phase rotation of the local supply FIELD CONTROL 3 101 FIELD PROP GAIN FIELD CONTROL 3 102 FIELD INT GAIN The purpose of the field winding in a motor is to provide flux that intersects the armature windings FIELD CONTROL 3 The flux generated is a function of the CURRENT FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 flowing in the field coils When considering the set up of the field output you are able to use 1 of 2 types of control strategy FIELD CONTROL 3 111 STANDBY FLD ENBL 1 Voltage clamp with higher current limit protection 2 Current control with higher voltage clamp FIELD CONTROL 3
165. measures all of these to high resolution with excellent response time In addition it is possible to program the voltage range of each input to 5 10 20 30V This allows signals other than 10V full scale to be used and enables the input to be used as a sophisticated digital input This can be achieved for example by programming the input to the 30V range and selecting the programmable logic threshold at 15V to recognise a O or 1 Each input has 3 outputs a linear output and a dual logic output They operate simultaneously UIP3 is specially adapted to acquire signals with a faster response than the others and is therefore used for input to the speed current loop that requires a fast response There is a permanent internal connection to the speed current loop from UIP3 to 64 SPEED REF 3 MON The linear GOTO of UIP3 is operative independantly of the internal connection to the speed current loop Note The GOTO may be left UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP9 T9 SETUP 4 UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP3 T3 SETUP 4 UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP4 T4 SETUP 4 UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP5 T5 SETUP 4 UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP6 T6 SETUP 4 UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP7 T7 SETUP 4 UNIVERSAL INPUTS 3 UIP8 T8 SETUP 4 4445 configured to 400 Block Disconnect if the internal connection is utilised connect UIP3 elsewhere nullify the internal connection set 67 SPD CUR RF3 RATIO in the SPEED REF SUMM
166. monitor all the available parameters It provides the user with block diagrams where each parameter may be quickly accessed and altered The system allows recipes of drive configurations to be stored and or down loaded as desired It may also be operated off line to develop and save recipes PL PILOT is also able to support up to 10 drives on one link It can access all parameters connections and diagnostics for each drive It is able to display these from any drive or combinations of drives and send recipes to any drive on the link This powerful tool is available free of charge and is supplied on a CD with the PL X The operating instructions for PL PILOT are accessed within the tool itself by using the HELP BUTTON Click on the Help BUTTON in the top right hand corner of the PL PILOT entry menu for further information To install from the CD follow the self launching instructions when the CD is inserted into the PC For users that are installing for the first time select Typical in the Setup type dialog box For users that are installing the latest version on systems with an existing version select Repair If you have existing recipes in the previous version these will automatically be retained in the latest version If you have to change any com port settings on the computer or save changed serial link parameters on the PL X then you may need to turn the PL X off and on again to clear the comms buffers of false data before the s
167. niei sedie vr ser a gra ovr eee eles eee eee 21 3 3 General Technical eer RUPEE 22 3 3 1 Regenerative stopping with PL models sss 22 3 3 2 Supply voltages required for all models 1 2 1 1 72 242 1 1 6 nns 22 3 3 3 Control terminals electrical 4 6 6 24 3 4 Control terminals overview 211 21 nnn nnn nnns 25 3 4 1 General requirements 25 34 2 Digital inp ts and outputs hee 25 3 4 3 Analogue nputszi ido E e UU DEOR SOUS 26 3 4 4 Analogue tachogenerator 2 44 444 re nnns 27 3 4 5 Signal test PiS eese nce eese Sea Eun iue Rees ese NU eddy e pe iR E x ER RP RD Dr RES D 27 3 5 Control terminal default 22 22 22 2 2 1 44 01 nennen nnn nnn 27 3 5 1 Run Jog Start qoe vets eee 29 3 5 2 Summary of defau
168. not available on a terminal UIP2 to 9 are universal inputs and can be used as DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 digital and or analogue inputs The digital logic 165 ARM BRIDGE FLAG level always appears in this menu and the analogue value will simultaneously appear in the analogue IO monitor menu R DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 The logic inputs are arranged in groups and can be 166 DRIVE START FLAG viewed together in one window DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 167 DRIVE RUN FLAG 7 5 1 DIGITAL IO MONITOR UIP2 to 9 digital input monitor PIN 162 R DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 R 162 UIP 23456789 162 UIP 23456789 00000000 Shows the digital logic level for UIP2 to 9 PARAMETER RANGE PIN Set the logic threshold in the config menu UIP 23456789 0 1 for each UIP O low 162 Note If this value is connected to another PIN then the pure binary to decimal equivalent is used Most significant bit on the right least significant on the left 7 5 2 DIGITAL MONITOR DIP1 to 4 and DIO1 to 4 digital input monitor PIN 163 R DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 R 163 DIP 12341234 DIO 163 DIP 12341234 DIO 00000000 Shows the digital logic level present at the PARAMETER RANGE PIN DIP1 4 and DIO1 4 terminals DIP 12341234 DIO 0 1 for each IP low 163 Note If this value is connected to another PIN then the pure binary to decimal equivalent is used Most significant bit on the right least significant on the left 13
169. open 272 DIO1 RECTIFY EN and the terminal behaves as a digital input only The digital output processing function may still be used internally even though the output switch is DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 open 273 DIO1 THRESHOLD By selecting ENABLED in 271 DIO OP MODE a 9 274 DIO1 INVERT MODE input function still operates and may be used to monitor the terminal state at any time See 3 4 2 Digital inputs and outputs and 7 5 2 DIGITAL IO MONITOR DIP1 to 4 and DIO1 to 4 digital input DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 monitor PIN 163 GET FROM For systems involving multiple units with digital outputs wired in OR d mode the input function DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 can be used to monitor when the last OR d output GOTO turns off PIN 271 PIN 272 DIO1 DIO1 T1 8 SETUP 4 lt E E 718 V T CETERO 275 DIO1 IP HI VALUE PRIOR HEY PIN 273 Threshold PIN 275 DIO Monitor PIN PIN 163 184 CONFIGURATION 13 6 1 1 DIOX SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 Output mode enable PINs 271 277 283 289 DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 271 DIO1 OP MODE Enables the output mode of PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN operation of the DIOX terminal DIO1 OP MODE ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 271 Note The terminal logic level is sensed by the input function irre spective of the output mode selection 13 6 1 2 DIOX SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 val rectify enable PINs 272 278 284 29
170. or 2 select PIN 20 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL The password will prevent accidental alteration by unauthorised users It does not protect against sabotage It allows a password to be required prior to parameter changes The default password and power up entry are both OOOO So a PL X that has not had a password alteration is always unlocked An altered password is not retained after removal of the control supply unless a PARAMETER SAVE has been actioned If a parameter change is tried without a valid password entry then the message ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD CONTROL 3 its own password but is recommended that the same password is used for every page to avoid confusion A file copied using parameter exchange will carry the password from the source page If that file is transmitted to another drive unit the password will be carried with it This requires careful housekeeping If you forget the password then enter 4591 and the existing password is shown in ALTER PASSWORD ey DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 2 PASSWORD CONTROL 3 will flash as the up down keys are pressed See also 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page 677 Each recipe page may have Note PL PILOT PORT 1 FUNCTION and 187 PORT1 BAUD RATE are not subject to password control Hence it is also possible to overcome the problem of forgetting passwords by using the PL PILOT config tool to save the recipe It may then be re loaded aft
171. panel 211 14 7 1 3 Venting models PL X 185 265 using standoff 211 14 8 Elnie Teactots suck ences ee goku eene ue iri e eere 212 14 9 Wirinig IFiStrUctlorns Rr rex ra eerte 213 14 9 1 Wiring diagram for AC supply to L1 2 3 different to EL1 2 3 E g Low voltage field 213 14 10 Terminal tightening torques er eae kn re vase Re Rin ie rU DR RE EE IRR EEA 214 14 11 Installation guide for 0 00 00550 215 14 11 1 3 phase power supply 4 4 11 0 1 66 nnne nnn nnn nnn 215 14 11 2 Earthing and screening guidelines sss emen 215 14 11 3 Earthing diagram for typical installation 1 216 14 7154 Guidelines wheniusing filters Ye ede RE Ed REDE 217 14 12 Approvals UL cUL G E see eee ea ie dee shee de o de iD redi 217 25e IS S 217 14 12 2 GE Emissions uiuiniesiiecg i EG jxi reira 217 14 12 3 Ub epit Re e RI ERU ENSURE eom eset te E dee de dete 217 14
172. parameter is summation of all possible speed references including the RUN MODE RAMP Note that the RUN MODE RAMP may be active when the unit is in stop mode This feature allows cascaded systems to function even if a member of the system is stopped See 6 2 CHANGE PARAMETERS RUN MODE RAMPS DIAGNOSTICS 123 7 1 2 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed demand monitor PIN 124 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 124 SPEED DEMAND MON 124 SPEED DEMAND MON 0 00 Shows the value of the total speed PARAMETER RANGE PIN demand after the STOP RAMP BLOCK SPEED DEMAND MON 300 00 124 7 1 3 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed error monitor PIN 125 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 125 SPEED ERROR MON 125 SPEED ERROR MON 0 00 Shows the value of the speed error as a PARAMETER RANGE PIN of full scale SPEED ERROR MON 300 00 125 7 1 4 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Armature volts monitor PIN 126 R SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 R 126 ARM VOLTS MON 126 ARM VOLTS MON 0 0 Volts Shows the average DC armature voltage PARAMETER RANGE PIN independently of feedback type ARM VOLTS MON 1250 0 Volts 126 7 1 5 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Armature volts monitor PIN 127 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 127 ARM VOLTS MON 127 ARM VOLTS MON 0 00 Shows the value of the average DC arm PARAMETER RANGE PIN voltage as a of desired max arm volts ARM VOLTS MON 300 00 127 Note 100 level is equivalent 18 ARM VOLTS
173. pot down command PIN 49 13 3 1 8 SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Make digital output 2 GOTO destination connection UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO Defines the target destination PIN for the logic connection to UIPX All UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO default connections are 400 Block Disconnect PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 000 to 720 400 CONFIGURATION 177 13 3 1 9 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Digital input high value for output 1 PIN 3 2 5 to 3 9 5 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 325 UIP2 HI VAL OP1 325 UIP2 HI VAL OP1 eb 0 0196 Sets the OP1 value selected by PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN a high UIPX input UIP2 HI VAL OP1 300 0096 0 0196 325 Note You can make a simple AND gate by selecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 13 3 1 10 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Digital input low value for output 1 PIN 3 2 6 to 3 9 6 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 326 UIP2 LO VAL OP1 326 UIP2 LO VAL OP1 0 0096 Sets the OP1 value selected by PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN a low UIPX input UIP2 LO VAL OP1 300 0096 0 0096 326 Note You can make a simple OR gate by selecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 13 3 1 11 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Digital input high value for output 2 PIN 3 2 7 to 3 9 7 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 327 UIP2 HI VAL OP2 327 UIP2 HI VAL OP2 7 0 01 Sets the 2 value selected by PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN
174. read as a low Any non zero value is read as a high Logic inversion is accomplished by entering 0 00 in the value for HI window and 0 01 in the value for LO window ANALOG GO TO GO TO Low value1 Anat monitor 4 150 P 1 321 322 Offset Scaler PIN 325 PIN 327 Dig mon p 1 323 324 High Low PIN 326 PIN 328 4 Low 2 27 GO TO OP2 yy 4 173 UIP2 T2 SETUP 329 UIP2 THRESHOLD UIP2 T2 SETUP 320 UIP2 IP RANGE UIP2 T2 SETUP 321 UIP2 IP OFFSET UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 322 UIP2 CAL RATIO UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 323 UIP2 MAX CLAMP UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 324 UIP2 MIN CLAMP UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 UIP ANALOG GOTO UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 UIP DIGITAL OP1 GOTO UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 325 UIP2 HI VAL OP1 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 326 UIP2 LO VAL OP1 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 327 UIP2 VAL 2 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 328 UIP2 LO VAL OP2 24404542526 174 CONFIGURATION 13 3 1 UNIVERSAL INPUTS Block diagram monitor NS o There are 2 independent i a digital outputs driven by the Offset Scaler comparator Each has a GO TO connection plus a value for high and a High Low gt 162 326 PIN 328 value for low 325 PIN 327 Dig mon an 4 This is a code not a voltage UIP2 T2 SET
175. safe and reliable operation Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the wiring without first disconnecting the product from the circuit being tested STATIC SENSITIVE This equipment contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts Observe static control precautions when handling installing and servicing this product THESE WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS ARE INCLUDED TO ENABLE THE USER TO OBTAIN MAXIMUM EFFECTIVENESS AND TO ALERT THE USER TO SAFETY ISSUES APPLICATION AREA Industrial non consumer Motor speed control utilising DC motors PRODUCT MANUAL This manual is intended to provide a description of how the product works It is not intended to describe the apparatus into which the product is installed This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to design an application install service or come into direct contact with the product APPLICATIONS ADVICE Applications advice and training is available from Bardac Drives Warnings 15 2 3 General Risks INSTALLATION THIS PRODUCT IS CLASSIFIED AS A COMPONENT AND MUST BE USED INA SUITABLE ENCLOSURE Ensure that mechanically secure fixings are used as recommended Ensure that cooling airflow around the product is as recommended Ensure that cables and wire terminations are as recommended and clamped to required torque Ensure that a competent person carries out the installation and commissioning of this product Ensure that the product ratin
176. scitessi i a P a a a aa 7 2 2 Warnings and Instructions Haaa 8 PECNEECCNIICUBI CHR 9 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 11 11 3 1 1 11 3 1 2 Order 12 3 1 3 12 3 1 4 Activating amp isiin bts opseretesnsauntasemecneiciass 12 3 1 5 CONFLICT PAR ERE E RON E LEER ONERE teks 12 3 2 APPLICATION BLOCKS SUMMER 1 2 0000555 1111 14 3 2 1 SUMMER 1 2 Block diagram 2 1 1 41 2 00 0 15 3 2 2 SUMMER 1 2 Total output monitor 401 415 15 3 2 3 SUMMER 1 2 Sign 1 PIN 402 416 000 0 0 15 3 2 4 SUMMER 1 2 Sign 2 403 417 0 enne 16 3 2 5 SUMMER 1 2 Ratio 1 404 418 00000 16 3 2 6 SUMMER 1 2 Ratio
177. source of the settings depends on the power up reset type that occurred on the last application of the control supply and any changes that have been made prior to transmission See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page 677 Read only values show the level pertaining at the time 1 Connect the PL X to the host using the appropriate lead See10 1 1 RS232 PORT Connection pinouts 2 Using a standard communications package prepare the host to receive an ASCII file Remember to set up the host s serial port first See 10 2 1 2 Transmitting parameter data file to a PC Windows 95 upwards 3 Make sure that the PORT1 FUNCTION has been set to PARAM EXCH SELECT 4 Get the host ready to receive a file use the file extension PRN Suggest using PR2 PR3 for pages 2 3 5 Start transmitting on the PL X by selecting MENU LIST TO HOST followed by the up key 6 The file ends in a CTRL Z With some packages this automatically closes the file If not when the PL X says it has FINISHED and the host has stopped scrolling text or printing close the file manually 7 The file can now be treated like any normal text file Note It is also possible to print a menu list from the total instrument drop down list within PL PILOT 10 2 3 1 Transmitting a menu list to a PC Windows 95 upwards On computers supplied with Windows 95 upwards this program is found in the folder Accessories See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes This desc
178. stopping sequence an external latching circuit must be employed to control the STOP START contacts T47 48 cannot be used and the RUN input is not controlled from the START terminal See 4 3 5 Using pushbuttons for STOP START With ramp to stop jog and slack take up See 6 5 CHANGE PARAMETERS STOP MODE RAMP 40 Basic application 4 3 5 Using pushbuttons for STOP START With ramp to stop jog and slack take up INTERNAL CONTACT Internal contacts 24V coil energised by START or JOG AND CSTOP 5 C Stop mode ramp delay Terminated m going LOW RC SNUBBER across COAST contactor coil STOP Contactor Typical values are P Must be COIL 100 Ohms 1W and high prior O 1uF both rated for to START SUPPLY the coil supply volts i MAIN CONTACTOR Relay COIL Auxiliary contact on main contactor in series with RUN for contactors with erapr y eee RA ON delay gt 75mS RUN must be at 24V to enable current Note This circuit will cause the STOP MODE RAMP to operate when the STOP button opens during running Then the speed will ramp down under control of the STOP MODE RAMP The main contactor will de energise after the STOP MODE RAMP parameters have been satisfied See 6 5 1 3 Contactor drop out Note The CSTOP must be high for at least 50mS prior to START going high The PLX or PL models that have the regenerative stopping facility will regenerate to maintain the ramp
179. the speed demand above the zero speed threshold 242 POSITION REF may be changed as many times as required and the shaft position will track it relative to the 241 MARKER OFFSET position Each time 242 POSITION REF is changed to a new value the 244 IN POSTION FLAG may be used to determine when the new position has been achieved The gain and hence response of the position control loop is set by 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK A value of zero will turn off the position loop The block also provides 243 MARKER FREQ MON giving marker frequency For systems that require position locking at zero speed but the absolute position is not important then 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK only may be used In this case no marker is required and the 240 MARKER ENABLE input should be set to disabled 6 10 9 1 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Block diagram Below Zero Interlock Speed PIN 117 PIN 240 Threshold MARKER SPINDLE OFFSET ORIENTATE Mere One shot Enable PIN 243 Marker Terminal 16 BIDIRECTIONAL Output FB PULSE B PULSE COUNTER To position n E Control loop Shaft position feedback count Terminal 17 FB PULSE A PIN 244 Position FLAG 6 10 9 1 1 Spindle orientate operation For all speeds above 117 ZERO INTLK SPD the spindle orientate control action is disabled However the marker frequency monitor will function within its defined limits providing 240 MARKER ENABLE is enabled Note The marker that is used for orientatio
180. the block diagram See 6 8 1 CURRENT CONTROL Block diagram 7 2 5 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Lower current limit monitor PIN 137 137 LOWER CUR LIM MN ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 137 LOWER CUR LIM MN Shows the 96 value of the scaled lower current limit in the current clamp block 0 0096 PARAMETER RANGE LOWER CUR LIM MN 150 0096 137 This is the last stage clamp in the block diagram See 6 8 1 CURRENT CONTROL Block diagram DIAGNOSTICS 127 7 2 6 ARM LOOP MONITOR Actual prevailing upper lower current limits PINs 138 139 ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 R 138 ACTUAL UPPER LIM 138 ACTUAL UPPER LIM 0 0096 Shows the 96 value of the prevailing upper PARAMETER RANGE PIN limit in the current clamp block ACTUAL UPPER LIM 150 0096 138 R ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 139 ACTUAL LOWER LIM Shows the 96 value of the prevailing lower PARAMETER RANGE PIN limit in the current clamp block ACTUAL LOWER LIM 150 0096 139 The lowest of all clamps is the prevailing source See 6 8 1 CURRENT CONTROL Block diagram 139 ACTUAL LOWER LIM 0 0096 7 2 7 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Overload limit monitor PIN 140 ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 140 O LOAD LIMIT MON 140 O LOAD LIMIT MON 0 0096 Shows the prevailing 96 value of the PARAMETER RANGE PIN overload limit in the current clamp block O LOAD LIMIT MON 0 00 to 150 0096 140 7 2 8 ARM I LOOP MONITOR At current limit flag PIN 141
181. the icons offered Once you have finished click on OK Having done this you will be asked for a telephone number to dial this can be ignored as you connecting a drive to the host computer but you need to select whichever port you are using for the connection to the drive Com 1 for example Select from the Connect using menu by clicking on the down arrow and highlighting the appropriate selection Click on OK and select the port settings The settings should be set to Baud rate match PL X baud rate 8 Data bits Parity none 1 Stop bit and Xon Xoff Flow control Select each of these from the menu choices available as above Note that Advanced port settings can be left as defaults unless you have problems with data corruption during transmission or reception Click on OK when you have finished selecting the port settings Now click on File Properties Settings and check that Emulation is set to Auto detect The setting of Backscroll buffer lines should be zero In addition click on ASCII Setup and confirm that Append line feeds to incoming line ends and Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII are unchecked and that Wrap lines that exceed terminal width is checked Click on OK then OK again in the previous menu to finish It is recommended that the above settings are saved When you have completed and saved the above you will have a personalised Hyperterminal that may be used at any time to send or receive PL X parameter files and there wi
182. the parameter 680 larm BURDEN OHMS is set as closely as possible to the actual resistance used on the power board DO NOT ALLOW THE MODEL RATING TO EXCEED THE VALUES IN THE RATING TABLE AND ON THE RATING LABEL FOUND UNDER THE UPPER END CAP FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING WILL INVALIDATE ANY WARRANTY AND VIOLATE APPROVAL STANDARDS NO LIABILITY IS ACCEPTED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND OR DISTRIBUTOR FOR FAULTS CAUSED BY RE RATING OF THE PRODUCT 13 13 4 3 Changing control or power cards Whenever it is necessary to replace either the control card or the power assembly or transfer a control card to a new power assembly then 680 larm BURDEN OHMS and the actual BURDEN OHMS must be re checked and 680 larm BURDEN OHMS changed if necessary according to the above procedures See13 13 4 Removing the control card First remove the plastic cover from the unit To do this remove the end caps then remove the 4 corner fixing screws that retain the cover When removing the cover please take care not to stress the display and key connection ribbons Unplug the ribbons from the control card to completely remove the top cover The plugs are keyed to ensure correct reconnection Then remove the two retaining screws at the lower corners of the control card Lift the lower edge of the control card up The card hinges on the upper pair of plastic retainers The only resisting force is due to the 2 X 20 interconnect pins in their sockets just above terminals T17 to T30 Once
183. this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 13 6 1 9 Default connections for DIO 1 2 3 4 DIOX Terminal Function Terminal 10 mode High value Low value GOTO DIO1 Zero reference interlock T18 Input 0 01 High 0 00 Low PIN 116 DIO2 Jog Mode select T19 Input 0 0196 High 0 0096 Low PIN 42 DIO3 Ramp Hold T20 Input 0 01 High 0 00 Low PIN 33 DIO4 Dual current clamp enable T21 Input 0 01 High 0 00 Low PIN 88 13 6 1 10 DIO1 2 3 4 Internal output result PINs 685 6 7 8 There is a hidden PIN for each block to enable internal connection of the output processing part of the block This section of the block will continue to function irrespective of the output mode DIO1 2 3 4 PIN 685 6 7 8 DIO1 O P BIN VAL 13 7 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL OUTPUTS PINs used 261 to 269 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 3 There are 3 digital outputs DOP1 2 3 DOP3 724 SETUP 4 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 3 DOP1 T22 SETUP 4 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 3 DOP2 T23 SETUP 4 13 7 1 DIGITAL OUTPUTS DOPX SETUP The windows are shown for DOP1 DOP2 3 DOP1 T22 SETUP 4 windows are identical apart from the PIN numbers GET FROM DOP1 T22 SETUP 4 261 DOP1 RECTIFY EN DOP1 T22 SETUP 4 262 DOP1 THRESHOLD PIN 262 Threshold DOP1 T22 SETUP 4 263 DOP1 INVERT MODE See 3 4 2 Digital inputs and outputs DOP3 may be used to control external serial link convertors DOP monitor Digital PIN 164 OP terminal
184. threshold PIN 262 300 00 0 00 262 13 7 1 3 722 SETUP DOP1 Output inversion mode PIN 263 0 1 263 187 1 123 SETUP DOP2 Output value rectifier enable PIN 264 0 1 Enabled _ 264 187 2 723 SETUP DOP2 OP comparator threshold PIN 265 300 00 0 00 265 13 7 13 DOP2 T23 SETUP DOP2 Output inversion mode PIN266 0 Noninvert 266 187 1 T24 SETUP DOP3 Output value rectifier enable PIN 267 0 1 Enabled 267 187 2 724 SETUP DOP3 OP comparator threshold PIN 268 300 00 0 00 268 13 7 13 DOP3 T24 SETUP DOP3 Output inversion mode PIN 2689 0 Noninvert 269 te ee s 13611 118 SETUP DIO1 Output mode enable PIN271 bisabled 271 13 6 1 2 DIO1 T18 SETUP DIO1 Output value rectify enable PIN 272 0 1 Enabled 272 18 6 8 DIOT 118 SETUP DIO1 OP comparator threshold PIN 273 300 00 0 00 18 6 14 DIOT 118 SETUP DIO1 Output inversion mode PIN274 0 1 13 6 1 7 0101 T18 SETUP 0101 Input high value PIN 275 300 00 0 01 13 6 1 8 DIO1 T18 SETUP DIO1 Input low value PIN 276 S 1361 2102 719 SETUP DIO2 Output mode enable 277 0 1 bisabled 277 13 6 1 2 DIO2 T19 SETUP 0102 Output value rectify enable PIN 278 0 1 Enable
185. to max bC 55C Protect from direct sunlight Ensure dry corrosive free environment 8596 Relative humidity maximum Note Relative humidity is temperature dependent do not allow condensation Non flammable non condensing Pollution Degree 2 Installation cat 3 Derate by 196 per 100 Metres above 1000 Metres Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5000A PL X5 30 10 000A PL X40 145 18000A PL X185 265 RMS symmetrical amperes 480 Volts AC maximum when protected by Ar class fuses See fuse table See also PL X 650 980 manual Constant current Constant voltage Automatic weakening Delayed quenching after stop command to allow dynamic braking Economy mode to leave field excited at low level to prevent motor cooling Field supply inputs independent from armature supply inputs Connection Conflict Checker 3 Total Instrument Recipe pages Family of remote interface units Field weakening Motorised pot simulator Dual motor swap Spindle orientation PC configuration and monitoring tool Centre winding 2 Summers Batch counter Latch 8 Multi function Preset Speed 2 PIDs Parameter profiler 4 Comparators 4 Changeover switches Delay timer Filters RS232 port ANSI X3 28 2 5 B multi drop Fieldbus options Profibus Devicenet Ethernet using Driveweb technology 24 Introduction and Technical Data 3 3 3 Control terminals electrical specification This describes the electr
186. to 10096 Formula for calculating Dwell time for a given PIN82 Overload 96 target and PIN138 prevailing Current Limit DWELL TIME 150 PIN82 x 25 I limit PIN82 in seconds Assuming current remains at the limit Formula for calculating Current limit setting required for a given PIN82 Overload 96 target and DWELL TIME Current limit required PIN8296 15096 PIN8296 x 25 DWELL TIME secs Formula for calculating PIN82 Overload 96 target required for a given Current limit and DWELL TIME PIN82 Overload 96 target DWELL TIME secs x Current limit 3750 DWELL TIME secs 25 100 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 8 3 1 2 How to get overloads greater than 150 using 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET Use this to provide larger overload percentages on motors smaller than the PL X model rating This example shows how 82 0 LOAD TARGET provides a 200 overload for a 9 amp motor with a 12 amp PL X5 With larm 150 The 150 limit is available for 25 secs prior to commencing reduction Eg for PL X5 150 18 amps For a motor rated at 9 amps this represents 200 150 82 TARGET set to 75 00 Eg Limits with 2 ARM AMPS 12 amps 100 EGER Lm 83 0 LOAD RAMP TIME 2 RATED ARM AMPS Eg for PL X5 set to 12 amps Equivalent to PL X 100 133 of full load motor current 1 The current set 2 RATED ARM AMPS 12 amps represents 100 of the drive PL X5 but for t
187. to TRIP O 2 secs to automatic AVF switch WARNING The protection afforded in field weakening mode is limited to total feedback loss only This is because the speed AVF relationship is not maintained in field weakening mode If a partial loss of feedback occurs the motor will run to excessive speed When the field has been completely weakened and is at its minimum level the armature overvoltage trip will come into operation This may only occur at a dangerous speed It is therefore recommended that a mechanical device be utilised to protect against this possibility Correct setting of 110 MIN FIELD CURRENT should ensure that the overvolts TRIP occurs just above the maximum operating speed MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 139 8 1 2 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch tolerance PIN 172 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 172 SPEED TRIP TOL 172 SPEED TRIP TOL da 50 0096 Sets the speed feedback PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN mismatch trip tolerance SPEED TRIP TOL 0 00 to 100 0096 50 0096 172 Note If this value is set too low then spurious alarms may be caused by dynamic lags or non linear effects Note Mismatched calibration between the AVF and tacho and or encoder calibration erodes this margin Note There is a flag on hidden PIN 703 which warns of a speed mismatch after the normal delay time This flag is reset by a start or jog command 8 1 3 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Field loss trip enable PIN 173 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 H 173 FL
188. unit 48 5 2 5 Ix X GG e vag A RE NOE UR ERE 48 5 2 1 Full menu diagram Change 1 49 5 2 2 Full menu diagram Change parameters 50 5 2 3 Fullimenu diagram Diagnostics eee ie Bee deine 51 5 2 4 Full menu diagram Motor drive alarms serial links and display 52 5 2 5 Full menu diagram Application blocks and 0 0 1 53 5 2 6 Full menu diagram Configuration continued 2 0 1 54 5 2 7 Full menu diagram Block and Fieldbus configs Drive personality and Conflict Help 55 b 3 Archiving PE X recip8S zitat Ee Ri UU UR HU pec RR ERE ERE ERR ERE RMERPRN MERE 56 CHANGE PAHAWMIETEHS eicere o ete auo Ley ead EDRAEE EUR RM EIE RE 57 6 1 CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 2 59 6 1 1 CALIBRATION Block diagram ne en nnns 60 6 1 2 CALIBRATION Rated armature amps 2 QUICK 60 6 1 3 CALIBRATION Current limit 96 PIN 3 Q
189. value PIN 527 0 00 PIN 528 10 00 PIN 529 20 00 PIN 530 30 00 PIN 531 40 00 PIN 532 50 00 PIN 533 60 00 PIN 534 70 00 3 4 digital inputs for 4 preset speeds PIN number OP value Actual value PIN 527 25 00 PIN 528 50 00 PIN 529 75 00 PIN 530 62 50 PIN 531 100 00 PIN 532 75 00 PIN 533 87 50 PIN 534 0 00 49 Assuming that there are 3 output values 1 W 2 X 3 Y required and that logic select input has the highest priority followed by 2 and 1 in that order By entering the values for each PIN number as shown in the table the desired result is obtained This will give 8 values up to 70 00 for the 8 BCD codes Make the GOTO connection to the Value for low PIN on a digital input E g DIP1 on T14 Then connect the GOTO of DIP1 to the desired preset speed target PIN The DIP1 digital input will be the 25 input The preset speed select1 input will be the 50 input The preset speed select2 input will be the 75 input The preset speed select3 input will be the 100 input The intermediate combinations are shown here bolded with intermediate values for smoother transition but may be set to other values as desired 50 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 9 2 PRESET SPEED Preset speed output monitor PIN 523 PRESET SPEED 3 523 PRESET SPEED
190. version c Wiring diagram of the PL X installation with details of external signals connected to the PL X d Machine schematic with details of intended function of motor being driven by the PL X e All possible motor details f Precise description of fault condition including any alarm messages issued by the PL X g If possible any information about the operating conditions prior to and at the point of the failure h A menu listing or a list of parameters that have been changed from the default values Or recipe file i Is the PL X being commissioned for the first time If so have you ticked the boxes in section 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks The engineer providing assistance is aware of the prime importance of providing a solution and also understands through experience that you may be working in hostile conditions WARNING Take careful note of all the information in section 2 Warnings and in particular section 2 3 General Risks when performing measurements and investigating failures This applies to electrical and mechanical systems PIN number tables 219 15 PIN number tables 15 1 Numeric tables Key to PROPERTIES R in REDUCED MENU Not changed by 4 key reset 5 STOP DRIVE TO ADJUST 15 1 1 Change parameters 2 121 De ee T 33 Amps CALIBRATION Current limit PIN 3 QUICK START 25 Amps RP 6 1 6 CALIBRATION Desired max rpm PIN6 QUICKSTART 0 6000rpm_ 1500rm 6 RPS 6 1 8 CALIBRATION Max tach
191. 0 Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives To obtain line reactor dimensions Please refer to www bardac com Manuals amp Software Installation 213 14 9 Wiring instructions Note The PL X controller is an open chassis component for use in a suitable enclosure Only qualified personnel should install commission and service this apparatus according to the safety codes in force 1 All units must be protected by correctly rated semi conductor fuses 3 main fuses and 3 auxiliary fuses Failure to do so will invalidate warranty See 14 3 Semiconductor fuse ratings A DC armature fuse for regenerative applications is highly recommended See 14 3 3 DC semi conductor fuses 2 Power wiring should utilise cables with a minimum rating of 1 25 X full load current Control wiring should have a minimum cross section of 0 75bmm Copper conductors must be rated 60C or 75C over 100 Amps 3 A substantial ground or earth connection should be made to the earth terminal on the drive identified by the international ground symbol A control clean protective earth connection must be made to terminal 13 4 A 3 phase contactor must be connected in the main AC supply with suitable voltage and current ratings AC1 The contactor is not required to switch current and is employed in the sequencing and carrying of power to the unit The contactor coil must be provided wit
192. 0 If 3 CURRENT LIMIT or if 82 96 TARGET level is set to 0 then no permanent current will flow See 6 8 3 1 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload target PIN 82 6 1 4 CALIBRATION Rated field amps PIN 4 QUICK START R CALIBRATION 3 4 RATED FIELD AMPS This is the desired 100 DC PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT output field current in amps RATED FIELD AMPS 0 1A 100 of model rating 25 AMPS 4 If the field amps is not given on the motor dataplate you can deduce it by measuring the resistance of the field winding after allowing it to reach full working temperature then using the following equation Field current Field dataplate volts Resistance in Ohms Alternatively if you know the rated field voltage you can go to the CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD CONTROL menu and select the 100 FIELD VOLTS OP clamp parameter Adjust the field output voltage to the dataplate value as a of the applied AC supply Please ensure that 4 RATED FIELD AMPS is sufficiently high to force the 100 FIELD VOLTS OP clamp into operation at the desired voltage under all conditions 4 RATED FIELD AMPS scaled by 114 FIELD REFERENCE sets the demand for the field current control loop and 100 FIELD VOLTS OP operates as a clamp on the field bridge firing angle The one that results in the lower output has priority Hence it is possible to operate with the field current control prevailing and the voltage as a higher safet
193. 0 DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 272 DIO1 RECTIFY EN Selects rectified or bipolar PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN mode for the OP generator DIO1 RECTIFY EN ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 272 The digital output is generated by comparing an internal linear or logic signal with a threshold E g Linear speed feedback The rectified mode will enable the digital output to change state at a chosen speed for both directions of rotation The bipolar mode will enable the digital output to change state at only one chosen point in the entire range of positive or negative rotation T 18 DIO Monitor PIN 163 Rect Bipolar GET FROM PIN 273 Threshold PIN 275 High value SS PIN 276 GO TO 13 6 1 3 DIOX SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 OP comp threshold PINs 273 279 285 290 DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 273 0101 THRESHOLD 273 0101 THRESHOLD 0 0096 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN Sets the comparator threshold for the DIOX OP generator DIO1 THRESHOLD 300 0096 0 0096 273 The output of the comparator will be high when the signal from the rectifier mode box exceeds the threshold The comparator output is low for identical inputs For comparing threshold window 13 6 1 4 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 OP inversion DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 274 DIO 1 INVERT MODE PINs 274 28 logic values always put 0 00 in the 0 286 291 274 DIO 1 INVERT MODE NON INVERT Allows the
194. 0 LATCH 3 560 LATCH OUTPUT MON 560 LATCH OUTPUT MON 0 00 Shows the output value of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN latch block LATCH OUTPUT MON 300 00 0 00 560 3 11 3 LATCH Latch data input PIN 561 LATCH 3 561 LATCH DATA IP Sets logic level for the data PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN input Min dwell time 50mS LATCH DATA IP LOW or HIGH LOW 561 If the clock level has changed from a low to a high since the last sample then the logic level of the data input high or low is placed on the latch output stage giving an output value for high or low 9 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 11 4 LATCH Latch clock input PIN 562 LATCH 3 562 LATCH CLOCK IP RANGE DEFAULT PIN LOW or HIGH LOW 562 Sets logic level for the latch PARAMETER clock input LATCH CLOCK IP If the clock level has changed from a low to a high since the last sample then the logic level of the data input high or low is placed on the latch output stage giving an output value for high or low See the truth table for a complete definition 3 11 5 LATCH Latch set input PIN 563 LATCH 3 563 LATCH SET IP RANGE DEFAULT Sets logic level for the latch set PARAMETER input LATCH SET IP LOW or HIGH LOW See the truth table for a complete definition 3 11 6 LATCH Latch reset input PIN 564 LATCH 3 564 LATCH RESET IP RANGE DEFAULT
195. 0 0 secs 60 0 secs 57 This is initiated by the start input going low CHANGE PARAMETERS 89 6 5 4 STOP MODE RAMP Live delay mode PIN 58 STOP MODE RAMP 3 58 LIVE DELAY MODE 3 Enables the drive during the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN drop out delay time LIVE DELAY MODE ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 58 This is used when the drive must remain enabled during the period of time when the contactor drop out delay timer is running E g when an external force is trying to rotate the load and this is undesirable or a final shaft positioning routine is operating See 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE See also 6 10 CHANGE PARAMETERS ZERO INTERLOCKS for details of other zero speed functions A change of this parameter during the drop out delay time is not effected until the next contactor drop out 6 5 5 STOP MODE RAMP Drop out speed PIN 59 R STOP MODE RAMP 3 59 DROP OUT SPEED 59 DROP OUT SPEED 2 00 Sets the speed level at which PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the drop out delay timer starts DROP OUT SPEED 0 00 to 100 00 2 00 59 Note If this parameter is set to 100 then the drop out delay timer will commence with the STOP command rather than waiting to reach a low speed The level is symmetrical for forward and reverse rotation 6 5 6 STOP MODE RAMP Drop out delay PIN 60 STOP MODE RAMP 3 60 DROP OUT DELAY Adds a time delay to the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAUL
196. 0 Block Disconnect JUMPER 16 4 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect BIT PACKED GOTO JUMPER 1 4 ERIRES GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 2 4 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 3 4 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 4 4 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 5 4 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 6 4 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 7 4 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect JUMPER 8 4 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 199 FBUS DATA CONTRL 00000000 If FIRE ANGLE BSTOP 155 FLD CUR SAMPLE DELAY 20 TEST SWITCH DISABLED PPDET AMPLITUDE COMP 250 INTERVAL COMP 400 TEST VARIABLE 230 SCAN la DEMAND LEVEL 4 SCAN TIME OUT 10 EMF CALC la FBLEVEL 7 ZERO la DETECT LEVEL 6 larm FBK CALIBRATION ENABLED la AVE NULL ADJUST 2 la INST NULL ADJUST 0 la FEEDFORWARD 1 00 AOP3 USER CONFIGURED ENABLED GLOBAL HLTH OVERRIDE 0000 HIGH B W TACH SAMPLE DISABLED LP FILTER LAG 0 20 SECS DISPLAY AVERAGE LAG 0 50 SECS DISPLAY REFRESH TIME 1080 OP MODE STEP NUMBER 3 i uP EXECUTION TIME 9829 Sores PLL ERROR MONITOR 0 CONFLICT HELP MENU 3 NUMBER OF CONFLICTS 0 MULTIPLE GOTO ON 400 PARAMETER SAVE 2
197. 0 UIP5 IP RANGE 0 489 DIA FILTER TC 5 00 SECS 351 UIP5 IP OFFSET 0 00 96 490 DIAMETER PRESET DISABLED 573 FILTER2 OP MON 0 00 96 352 0 5 CAL RATIO 1 0000 491 DIA PRESET VALUE 10 00 96 574 FILTER2 TC 1 000 SECS 353 0 5 MAX CLAMP 100 00 96 354 0 5 MIN CLAMP 100 00 96 UIP ANALOG GOTO 90 LOWER CUR CLAMP UIP DIGITAL OP1 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 355 UIP5 HI VAL 1 0 01 96 356 UIP5 LO VAL 1 0 00 357 UIP5 VAL 2 0 01 358 UIP5 LO VAL OP2 0 00 359 UIP5 THRESHOLD 6 000 VOLTS UIP6 6 SETUP 4 360 UIP6 IP RANGE 0 361 UIP6 IP OFFSET 0 00 362 UIP6 CAL RATIO 1 0000 363 UIP6 MAX CLAMP 100 00 364 0 6 MIN CLAMP 100 00 96 UIP ANALOG GOTO 89 UPPER CUR CLAMP TARDA UIP DIGITAL OP1 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 365 UIP6 VAL 1 0 01 366 UIP6 LO VAL 1 0 00 367 UIP6 VAL 2 0 01 368 UIP6 LO VAL 2 0 00 96 369 UIP6 TH
198. 00 7 This is useful if your speed feedback is derived from an external amplifier which may have a small offset If this parameter is adjusted un necessarily then it will appear as an offset on the speed feedback See 7 1 10 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed feedback monitor PIN 131 CHANGE PARAMETERS 63 6 1 8 CALIBRATION Max tacho volts PIN 8 R CALIBRATION 3 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS Scales the tacho input for full feedback volts at 100 speed Multiply the output volts per rev value for the tacho by the full speed rpm of the tacho e g 1 tacho rating 0 06 V per rev 100 speed of tacho 500 rpm then tacho scaling 30 00V g 2 tacho rating 0 09 V per 100 speed of tacho 2000 rpm then tacho scaling 180 00V 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS P ji 60 00V i gt PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN MAX TACHO VOLTS 200 00 volts 60 00 Alternatively for systems NOT employing field weakening run the system AVF at desired full speed and monitor the tacho volts See 7 1 7 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Tachogenerator volts monitor PIN 129 then after entering the observed full speed tacho volts convert to tacho feedback See 3 4 4 Analogue tachogenerator input also 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PIN 9 QUICK START The sign of the parameter should correspond to the sign of the tacho volts for positive speed demand For tacho volts which exceed 200 full scale it is necessary to provide
199. 00 Block disconnect APPLICATION BLOCKS 4 PIN table for application blocks 401 680 Paragraph Menu number Description Block disconnect 322 Summer 23 SUMMERi 24 SUMMERi 325 SUMMERT 26 SUMMER i 27 SUMMER i 328 SUMMERT 29 SUMMER i 2 10 SUMMER 3241 SUMMER T 242 SUMMER 213 SUMMERi 32414 SUMMER Total output value monitor PIN 401 Sign 1 PIN 402 Sign 2 PIN 403 Ratio 1 PIN 404 Ratio 2 PIN 405 Divider 1 PIN 406 Divider 2 PIN 407 Input 1 PIN 408 Input 2 PIN 409 Input 3 PIN 410 Deadband PIN 411 Output sign inverter PIN 412 Symmetrical clamp PIN 413 NEE __ 3 222 SUMMER 2 Total output value monitor PIN 415 3 2 3 SUMMER2 Sign 1 PIN 416 324 SUMMER2 Sign2 PIN 417 325 SUMMER2 Ratio 1 PIN 418 3 26 SUMMER2 Ratio2 PIN 419 3 2 7 SUMMER 2 Divider 1 PIN 420 65 Values 0 1 Non invert 402 o1 203 404 405 406 407 401 300 00 0 00 300 00 0 00 100 0096 0 0096 rot Nonvinvert o 0 200 0096 105 0096 200 00 0 00 AL A paj ao oy gt Non invert ER un 0 1 Nerinvet A are zi
200. 000 578 Note This value is the output of the block GOTO connection This window has a branch hopping facility to 3 13 6 BATCH COUNTER Count equal or greater than target flag PIN 582 APPLICATION BLOCKS 59 3 13 3 BATCH COUNTER Clock input PIN 579 BATCH COUNTER 3 579 COUNTER CLOCK Sets the clock input logic level PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for the batch counter COUNTER CLOCK LOW or HIGH LOW 579 The counter will increment on a positive clock transition 3 13 4 BATCH COUNTER Reset input PIN 580 BATCH COUNTER 3 580 COUNTER RESET Sets the reset input logic level PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for the batch counter COUNTER RESET LOW or HIGH LOW 580 The counter is held reset while the reset input is high 3 13 5 BATCH COUNTER Counter target number PIN 581 BATCH COUNTER 581 COUNTER TARGET 581 COUNTER TARGET 32000 Sets the target number for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN batch counter COUNTER TARGET 0 to 32000 32000 581 When the batch counter value equals or exceeds the target value this output goes high Changing the counter target does not interfere with the counting process 3 13 6 BATCH COUNTER Count equal or greater than target flag PIN 582 BATCH COUNTER 3 582 COUNTER gt TARGET Allows the equal or greater PARAMETER RANGE PIN output flag to be monitored COUNTER gt TARGET LOW or HIGH 582 When the batch counter value eq
201. 096 100 0096 114 This parameter is scaler of 6 1 4 CALIBRATION Rated field amps PIN 4 QUICK START It may be used for systems requiring an external field reference input The minimum field clamp will operate if the reference goes below minimum field CHANGE PARAMETERS 113 6 10 CHANGE PARAMETERS ZERO INTERLOCKS PIN number range 115 121 This menu is used to enable 2 interlocking functions that are associated with zero speed R CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 ZERO INTERLOCKS There normal standstill behaviour is as follows After the satisfying conditions of zero speed and current demand AND zero speed feedback are fulfilled the firing pulses are removed and all other loops remain active to enable a rapid response for a new request for speed 117 ZERO INTLK SPD sets the threshold for both the zero speed reference and feedback decisions 118 ZERO INTLK CUR sets the threshold for the zero current demand decision If 118 ZERO INTLK CUR is set to 0 00 then the firing pulses are not removed Due to the rapid response of the above mode it may be necessary to implement 115 STANDSTILL ENBL Without this quench function enabled the motor may be continuously moving as the system responds to small variations which may be undesirable i 115 STANDSTILL ENBL provides an extra level of inhibit by not only removing the firing pulses but also quenching the loops It operates after the sati
202. 1 OP MONITOR 7 0 00 This is the final output of the PARAMETER RANGE PIN PID1 block PID1 OP MONITOR 300 00 429 This window has a branch hopping facility to 3 3 25 PID 1 2 PID error value monitor PIN 451 474 3 3 3 PID 1 2 PID IP1 value PIN 430 453 PID 1 3 430 PID1 INPUT1 430 PID1 INPUT1 0 00 Sets value for PID input 1 This PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN is normally the PID reference PID1 INPUT1 300 00 0 00 430 3 3 4 PID 1 2 PID IP1 ratio PIN 431 454 PID 1 3 431 PID1 RATIO1 Sets the scaling factor for the PID input 1 value PARAMETER PID1 RATIO1 RANGE DEFAULT 1 0000 3 0000 3 3 5 PID 1 2 PID IP1 divider 432 455 PID 1 3 432 PID1 DIVIDER1 Sets divisor for IP1 signal PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN channel Zero gives zero output PID1 DIVIDER1 3 0000 1 0000 432 3 3 6 PID 1 2 PID IP2 value PIN 433 456 PID 1 3 433 PID1 INPUT2 433 PID1 INPUT2 e 0 0096 Sets value for PID input 2 This PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN is normally the PID reference PID1 INPUT2 300 00 0 00 433 22 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 3 7 PID 1 2 PID IP2 ratio 434 457 PID 1 3 434 PID1 RATIO2 Sets the scaling factor for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN PID input 2 value PID1 RATIO2 3 0000 1 0000 434 3 3 8 PID 1 2 PID IP2 divider
203. 120 35 200 PL X40 40 53 60 80 99 8 5000 20 365 LR120 35 300 PL X50 50 67 75 100 123 8 11850 20 365 LR120 35 320 PL X65 65 90 100 124 155 16 60000 20 365 LR270 60 350 PL X85 85 115 125 164 205 16 60000 20 365 LR270 60 475 PL X115 115 155 160 216 270 16 128000 20 365 LR270 60 650 PL X145 145 190 200 270 330 16 128000 20 365 LR330 60 850 PL X185 185 250 270 350 430 32 50 240000 50 5000 LR430 180 1000 PL X225 225 300 330 435 530 32 50 240000 50 5000 LR530 180 1300 PL 265 265 360 400 520 630 32 50 306000 50 5000 LR630 180 1600 Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives Notes 1 Only use UL fuses for installations complying with UL codes 2 20 models PL 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 145 225 have a regenerative stopping capability 3 The PL X 185 225 265 requires 3 auxiliary fuses max ratings 121 5000 standard type CHOO850A 4 The standard auxiliary fuses in the above table are chosen for the 121 rating When selecting alternative types the fuse current rating must be at least 1 25 X the field current rating of the motor The l t rating of the fuse must not exceed the figure in the table 5 Please consider the total component dissipation within the enclosure when calculating the required air throughput This includes the fuses line reactors and other sources of dissipation See 14 8 Line reactor and 14 3 Semi
204. 13 Tachogenerator infernal Field And or encoder Amps isolated Feedback sensors for field current PIN 144 Default B train fate DIP monitor voltage Or sign T6 PIN 163 PINTA v Feedback PIN 315 Isolated sensors for arm current and PL X TACHO DATAPLATE Volts 1000 RPM Type Bipolar Rectified AC DC MOTOR DATAPLATE Max rated arm amps Max rated arm volts Default A train encoder ENCODER DATAPLATE Max rated field amps Lines per revolution Max rated field volts At termi Base rated RPM A inal V Arm Cur fb PIN 316 S PIN 317 DIP monitor 7 PIN 163 mon AMP Rated PIN 135 Armature PIN 134 Amps Unfiltered PIN 719 T41 AV sensing inputs only used with DC side contactors DC Kwatts Default Zero ref Interlock High value DIO Monitor PIN 163 rR Default PIN 277 Jog mode Select 78 Y 4 Rect Bipolar DIO Monitor PIN 163 Default Ramp Hold Input PIN 283 PIN 284 DIO3 Rect Bipolar GET FROM PIN 285 Threshold Default Dual Clamp Enable PIN 289 P DIO4 Digital 10 DIO Monitor PIN 163 Total speed to the Run Mode Ramp PIN 123 Ref ref prior Reference Inpu
205. 13 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Heatsink overtemp 0 0 2202 202202 146 8 1 11 14 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Short circuit digital 15 2 2 2 2 4 4 146 8 1 11 15 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Bad reference exchange 146 8 1 11 16 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Cannot autotune 0 222 147 8 1 11 17 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Autotune 1 12 2 nan 147 8 1 11 18 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Contactor lock out 0 2 0 2020 22 147 8 1 11 19 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Warning flags 2 4 0 0 0 020 2202 220 147 9 SELF TEST MESSAGE recens ente Det vena inn e a Dx Edi ede ua a c i v 148 9 1 1 SELF TEST MESSAGE Data 2 2 0 0 00 0 4 4 148 9 1 2 SELF TEST MESSAGE Disable GOTO 0 0 2 148 9 1 3 SELF TEST MESSAGE Self cal tolerance 148 9 1 4 SELF TEST MESSAGE Proportional armature current cal fail 148 9 1 5 SELF TEST MESSAGE Integral armature current cal 148 9 1 6 SELF TEST MESSAGE Stop drive to adjust
206. 13 What to do in the event of a problem 1 2 14 2 1 2 4 nnns 218 14 13 1 simple clarification of a technical 4 1 218 14 7 3 2 A complete sySteni failure ee roin uses oe eater esos S D E ER ERR UT 218 T5 PIN n umber tables sec Eia doge x eon RU e a eG Dd na o c Ceca el OR LEM Gun 219 LOST NUMERIC tables aa orth maa desear ES 219 15 71 1 Change parameters 2 121 cene nest 219 15 1 2 Diagnostics and alarms 123 183 6 65008 221 15 1 3 Serial links T87 249 eR uet bees 222 15 1 4 Configuration 25T 400 5 ie etui ES ave OR ERE ee 222 15 1 5 Application blocks 401 680 4 6 nnn nnn 224 15 1 6 Hidden pins 680 720 eerte ut eae sneha 225 15 2 Une 226 NEM cM 229 16 1 Record eva Beare seasons Fata Lie P Pala rai rura iR ai gne a 233 16 2 234 17 Changes to product since manual publication 234 12 Conten
207. 160 10 3 RS232 PORT PORT1 REF EXCHANGE 2 161 10 3 1 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange slave ratio PIN 189 162 10 3 2 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange slave sign PIN 190 162 10 3 3 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange slave monitor PIN 191 162 10 3 4 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange master monitor 192 162 10 3 5 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange master GET 162 11 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS onere eren SIS XX SINE Ge ERO DERE aS ERO e irR ones 163 11 1 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Reduced menu 22 163 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD 2 4 2 163 11 2 1 PASSWORD CONTROL Enter password 41 1 6 nnns 164 11 2 2 PASSWORD CONTROL Alter password 2 0 2 11 164 11 3 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Language 2 2 164 11 4 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Software 2 1 4 4 241 164 11 5 Remotely mounted display 2 1 1
208. 2 405 419 00000 16 3 2 7 SUMMER 1 2 Divider 1 406 420 0000 0 etes 16 3 2 8 SUMMER 1 2 Divider 2 PIN 407 421 00000000 16 3 2 9 SUMMER 1 2 Input 1 408 422 0000 17 3 2 10 SUMMER 1 2 Input 2 PIN 409 423 0 17 3 2 11 SUMMER 1 2 Input 410 424 17 3 2 12 SUMMER 1 2 Deadband PIN 411 425 0000 17 Contents 3 2 13 SUMMER 1 2 Output sign inverter PIN 412 426 17 3 2 14 SUMMER 1 2 Symmetrical clamp PIN 413 427 sss 18 3 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS PID 1 2 tero ecu mea dv eco Ter cua 19 3 3 1 PID 1 2 Block dlagram ou dide beet ttt seeds ot 20 3 3 2 PID 1 2 PID output monitor PIN 429 452 2 21 3 3 3 PID 1 2 PID IP1 value PIN 430 453 21 3 3 4 PID 1 2 PID IP1 ratio PIN 431 454 2 42 4 2 2 21 3 3 5 PID 1 2 PID 1 1 divider PIN 432 455 0 21 3 3 6 PID 1 2 PID IP2 value PIN 433 456 21 3 3 7 PID 1 2 PID IP2 ratio PIN 434 457 22 3 3 8 PID 1 2 PID 1 2 divider PIN 435 458 0000 22 3 3
209. 2 2 149 9 1 7 SELF TEST MESSAGE Enter 02 0 6 6 149 9 1 8 SELF TEST MESSAGE Enable GOTO 2 149 9 1 9 SELF TEST MESSAGE GOTO 149 9 1 10 SELF TEST MESSAGE Internal error 4 149 9 1 11 SELF TEST MESSAGE Authorisation 0 0 0 9 149 9 1 12 SELF TEST MESSAGE Memory write error 150 9 1 13 SELF TEST MESSAGE Memory version 4 nns 150 9 1 13 1 Transferrng tiles using PE PIEQT iig E TERI ERIGI ee 150 10 SERIAL LINKS RS232 and 151 TO 1 SERIAL LINKS RS232 PORT 1 ces eee bak WE eo Qu OQ Te prr UE 152 10 1 1 RS232 PORT Connection 5 1 1 0 0 6 nnn nns 153 10 1 2 RS232 PORT Port1 Baud rate 187 2 2 153 10 1 3 RS232 PORT Port1 function PIN 188 0 153 10 1 4 How touse USB ports rnt nte esc UE rame Eae uS Ra Eme 153 10 2
210. 2 2 0 00 00 22 3 3 3 Control terminals electrical 4 6 24 3 4 Control terminals overview rE I hne 25 3 4 1 General requirements 6 nr NR EN eene UU EN EI OI EE EEE 25 3 4 2 Digital inputs and outputs 4 1 6 EEE TRAE nnn nnn 25 3 4 2 1 Encoder Inputs reir par vA C RS RRIFERUSRRUK R RRCIXRRPRROREEPER casehenen 26 2 4 2 2 Digital niin A E aE 26 3 4 3 Analogue Inputs dudes MOVER ERE 26 3 4 4 Analogue tachogenerator input see ehe ne ess re een nana 27 24 5 Signal testiplDSsci ioe ras pace seek Eu I eue 27 3 5 Control terminal default 22 222 22 11 1 22 2 2 0 0 41 1 13 0004 4 EEEE EEEE 27 25 7 Run dog PI MD EDREPPRPERO bee netebeonnsecsenenenes 29 3 5 2 Summary of default terminal 0 1 40212 1 0 1 31 3 0 50 1058 5 ei OA OAK ORA ki
211. 2 DIAGNOSTICS 7 5 3 DIGITAL IO MONITOR DOP1 to 3 Control IPs digital monitor 164 R DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 8 164 DOP 123TRJSC CIP 164 DOP 123TRJSC CIP 00000000 Shows the digital logic level for DOP1 to 3 PARAMETER RANGE PIN and Therm Run Jog Start Cstop DOP 123TRJSC CIP 0 1 for 8 signals O low 164 Note The DOP value shown is the intended value If the DOP is shorted a 1 still shows as a 1 Note If this value is connected to another PIN then the pure binary to decimal equivalent is used Most significant bit on the right least significant on the left 7 5 4 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Armature bridge flag 165 DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 165 ARM BRIDGE FLAG 165 ARM BRIDGE FLAG Shows whether the positive or negative PARAMETER RANGE PIN armature bridge is selected ARM BRIDGE FLAG HIGH bridge LOW bridge 165 7 5 5 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Drive start flag PIN 166 R DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 166 DRIVE START FLAG Shows the status of the internal drive PARAMETER RANGE PIN START which may be defeated by alarms DRIVE START FLAG HIGH on or LOW off 166 7 5 6 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Drive run flag PIN 167 R DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 167 DRIVE RUN FLAG Shows that a command to RUN has been PARAMETER RANGE PIN issued to the current loop DRIVE RUN FLAG HIGH Run or LOW Stop 167 7 5 7 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Internal running mode monitor PIN 168 R DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 168 RUNNING MODE MON Shows mode selecte
212. 24 PID 1 2 PID clamp flag monitor PIN 450 473 0 0 0 0 26 3 3 25 PID 1 2 PID error value monitor PIN 451 474 26 3 4 APPLICATION BLOCKS PARAMETER PROFILER 00 0010121 27 3 4 1 PARAMETER PROFILER Block 0 1 0 2 0 00 1 ann 27 3 4 1 1 Profile for Y increasing with 00 2 1 27 3 4 1 2 Profile for Y decreasing with Xi a Seed 28 3 4 1 3 Examples of general nnne 28 3 4 2 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile Y output monitor PIN 47 2 7 29 3 4 3 PARAMETER PROFILER Profiler mode 476 29 3 4 4 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile Y at Xmin PIN 477 22 29 3 4 5 PARAMETER PROFILER Profiler Y at Xmax PIN 478 22 22 29 3 4 6 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile X axis minimum 479 202 30 3 4 7 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile X axis maximum 480 30 3 4 8 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile X axis rectify 481 30 3 4 9 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile X axis GET 2 30 3 5 APPLICATION BLOCKS REEL DIAMETER CALC
213. 3 we 175 Minimum clamp level PIN 3 2 4 to 3 9 4 Threshold 3 2 9 to 3 9 9 177 68 ZERO INTERLOCKS Block diagram SPINDLE ORIENTATE Standstill enable 115 114 220 standstill flag 121 115 220 Zero interlocks current level 118 xo Zero interlocks speed level PIN 117 4 114 220 zero reference flag 119 4 115 220 Zero reference start enable PIN 116 114 220 zero speed flag PIN 120 115 220 The description of every parameter can be located by using the tables in chapter 15 They are listed in numeric order under convenient headings The tables contain a cross reference to each parameter paragraph Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives Record of modifications 233 16 1 Record of modifications Manual Description of change Reason for change Paragraph Date Software Version reference version 4 00 Add new sub menu for spindle orientation Improved functionality 6 10 9 Aug 00 4 01 4 00 Add new sub menu for PORT 1 COMMS LINK Improved functionality 10 1 4 7 Aug 00 4 01
214. 3 SPEEDPIADAPTON Lowpointproporiona gain PIN76 0 200 500 76 2 6 7 7 4 SPEED ADAPTION Low integral time constant 77 001 30 000s 1 000 secs 77 6775 SPEED ADAPTION Integral 96 during ramp 78 0 100 0096 100 0096 78 6 7 7 6 SPEED PI ADAPTION Adapt input enable 79 0 1 Enabled 79 CURRENT CONTROL Current clamp scaler 81 0 150 00 150 0096 81 6 8 3 1 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload target value 82 0 105 00 105 0096 82 6 8 3 2 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload ramp time 83 0 20 0s 83 6 8 4 1 DYNAMIC PROFILE Profile enable 84 Disabled 84 DYNAMIC PROFILE Speed break point at high current PIN 85 0 105 00 75 00 85 DYNAMIC PROFILE Speed break point at low current PIN 86 105 0096 100 0096 um 0 0 91 CURRENT CONTROL Autotune enable PING2 Disabled 92 93 94 95 C 1 DYNAMIC PROFILE Current limit at low current PIN 87 150 00 100 0096 87 URRENT CONTROL Dual current clamps enable 88 Disabled 88 CURRENT CONTROL Upper current clamp 89 100 00 100 00 1 0 1 97 pre P p IE re 0 100 00 106 161 102 WEAKENING MENU Field weakening enable PIN 103 7 0 1 Disabled 103 104 105 WEAKENING MENU Field weakening derivative 106 5000 ms 106 WEAKENING MENU Field weakening feedback deriv TC PIN 107 5000 ms 107 0 0 10 10 108 109 110 111 112 11
215. 3 114 115 2 100 00 117 118 L 119 L L 121 122 1 1 ZERO INTERLOCKS Zero reference start enable PIN TIG 0 1 Disabled 116 1 1 1 PIN number tables 221 15 1 2 Diagnostics and alarms 123 183 Paragraph Menu Description IR 711 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Total speed reference monitor 123 300 00 0 00 7 1 2 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed demand monitor PIN 124 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed error monitor PIN 125 300 00 0 0096 300 00 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Encoder RPM monitor PIN 132 7500 rpm A 723 ARMI LOOP MONITOR Arm current amps monitor 135 3000 0 A 0 00 Amps A A RM LOOP MONITOR Lower current limit monitor 137 150 00 0 00 7 1 10 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed feedback monitor PIN 131 300 00 0 00 ARM LOOP MONITOR Actual upper limit monitor 138 150 00 ARM LOOP MONITOR Actual lower limit monitor PIN 139 150 00 0 00 ARM LOOP MONITOR Overload limit monitor PIN 140 0 150 00 EP 0 RM LOOP MONITOR Arm current monitor 134 150 00 0 00 RM LOOP MONITOR Upper current limit monitor 136 150 00 0 00 2 0 2 0 ARM LOOP MONITOR At current limit flag 141 IR E SENE R 1727 ARM LOOP MONITOR Arm current demand monitor 133 150 0096 06008 133 i 0
216. 3 71 BIGITAL OUTP TS DOPX SETUP diam rero EE ka eye y rav 186 13 8 CONFIGURATION STAGING 5 188 13 8 1 Connecting PINs with different 0 1 1 6 189 13 8 2 STAGING POSTS Digital analog 1 2 3 4 PINs 296 to 190 13 9 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE 85 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 00 191 13 9 1 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded run PIN 305 0 2 191 13 9 2 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded jog PIN 306 0 191 13 9 3 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded start PIN 307 ssssssssss mmm 192 13 9 4 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Internal run input PIN 08 192 13 10 CONFIGURATION JUMPER 65 2 193 13 10 1 JUMPER CONNECTIONS Make jumper GET FROM source connection 193 13 10 2 JUMPER CONNECTIONS Make jumper GOTO destination connection 193 13 11 CONFIGURATION BLOCK OP CONFIG 194 13 11 1 BLOCK OP CONFIG Block outputs GOTO sssssssssssseee seme mener 195 T3 11 2 Other GOTO Windows fv e roseus re pes paa rta A RM E rre uie
217. 3 9 8 177 Speed reference 1 PIN 62 Speed reference 2 63 91 220 Speed Current Reference ratio PIN 67 92 Speed Current Reference sign PIN 66 91 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Block diagram etr rot e toe ee toe eta 117 Marker enable PIN 240 118 222 Marker frequency monitor 243 120 222 Marker offset 241 119 222 Marker specification position flag 244 120 222 Position reference PIN 242 120 222 Spindle orientate operation 117 Zero speed lock PIN 122 118 220 STAGING POSTS Digital analog 1 2 3 4 PINs 296 to 303 190 STOP MODE RAMP Block diagtr rm e ia eere race rie Supply loss shutdown Supply voltages required for all models 22 PIN number tables Digital output 1 GOTO destination connection Digital output 2 GOTO destination connection 4176 Input offset PIN 3 2 1 to 3 9 1 174 Input range PIN 3 2 0 to 3 9 0 174 Linear scaling ratio PIN 3 2 2 to 3 9 2 4175 Maximum clamp level 3 2 3 to 3 9
218. 3 restricted distribution domestic environment 14 11 2 Earthing and screening guidelines Important points to note are A separate earth conductor is taken from the motor housing and is run adjacent to the drive conductors right up to the main earth terminal on the drive This conductor should not be grounded separately to any other earth point The drive earth terminal should be separately taken to the cabinet star earth point or earth busbar as should the OV connection reference at Terminal 13 Motor drive and three phase supply cables should be segregated from other cables in the cabinet preferably by a distance of at least 300mm Motor drive cables can be screened or armoured especially if they pass near other sensitive apparatus and the screening should be bonded to the motor housing and the point of entry of the cabinet using 360 gland techniques It is understood that the bonding of both ends of the screening and earth conductors may result in significant earth current flow if the motors and control cabinet are in widely different locations so that there are large earth potential differences In these circumstances it is recommended that a separate parallel earth conductor PEC which may be a bonded metal conduit is used alongside the drive cables to give a preferential route for this current See IEC 61000 5 2 for more detail Installation in conformance with this standard is regarded as good practice and will result in improve
219. 301 31 800 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 31 TTF 0800 Y300401 PL275KW 650A CH103301 32 800 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 32 TTF 0800 P300071 PL275KW 650A CH103301 33 800 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 0800 2300080 PL315KW 750A CH103302 32 900 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 32 TTF 0900 0300072 PL315KW 750A CH103302 33 900 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 0900 00081 PL360KW 850A CH103303 32 1000 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 32 TTF 1000 300074 PL360KW 850A CH103303 33 1000 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1000 B300082 PL400KW 950A CH103304 32 1100 50 6 6 URD 32 TTF 1100 M300759 PL400KW 950A CH103304 33 1100 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1100 C300083 PL440KW 1050A CH103305 33 1250 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1250 D300084 PL440KW 1050A CH103305 2x33 1250 TTF 67 6 6 9 URD 233 TTF 1250 D300268 PL520KW 1250A CH103306 33 1500 TTF 50 6 6 URD 33 TTF 1500 Y300585 PL520KW 1250A CH103306 33 1600 TTF 50 6 6 URD 33 TTF 1600 2300586 PL600KW 1450A CH103307 33 1800 TTF 50 6 6 URD 33 TTF 1800 A300587 PL600KW 1450A CH103307 2x33 1800 PLAF 55 5 6 9 URD 233 PLAF 1800 B300427 PL700KW 1650A CH103308 33 2000 TTF 50 6 5 5 URD 33 TTF 2000 B300588 PL700KW 1650A CH103308 2x33 2000 PLAF 91 5 6 URD 233 PLAF 2000 R302235 PL800KW 1850A CH103309 2x33 2200 PLAF 91 5 6 URD 233 PLAF 2200 0302234 PL800KW 1850A 103309 44 2200 TOF 65 7 5 URD 44 TTOF 2200 K235184 PL900KW 2050A CH103310 44 2500 TOF 65 7 URD 44 TTOF 2500 BS C221538 PL900KW 2050A CH103310 44 2400 TOF 65 7 5 URD 44 TTOF 2400 W233906 PL980KW 2250A CH103467 44 2500
220. 306000 No fuse No fuse FWH 700 170 5811 XL50F700 TT350 661RF2 700 available available 710 Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives 14 3 2 European stock fuses Model Max Main STOCK part number PL 20 fuses MAIN FUSE MAIN FUSE Single AUX FUSE AUX FUSE PLX 40 Amps max 3 fuses pole holder 3 fuses Single pole 121 required 3 required required holder 3 required PL X5 10 600 CH00612A CP102071 14X51 CH00620A CP102071 PL X10 20 600 CHO0740A CP102053 14X51 CHOO620A CP102071 PL X15 30 600 0740 102053 14X51 CHOO620A 102071 PL X20 40 5000 CHOO850A CP102054 Size 00 20 102071 PL X30 60 5000 CHOO880A CP102054 Size 00 20 102071 PL X40 80 5000 CHO008100 CP102054 Size 00 20 102071 PL X50 100 11850 008125 102054 00 20 CP102071 PL X65 124 60000 008160 102054 00 20 102071 PL X85 164 60000 009250 102055 1 0 0620 CP102071 PL X115 216 128000 9250 102055 1 20 CP102071 PL X145 270 128000 CHO10550 CP102233 Size 3 20 CP102071 PL X185 350 240000 010550 102233 3 00850 102054 PL X225 435 240000 CHO10550 CP102233 Size 3 CHOO850A_ CP102054 PL 265 520 306000 CHO10
221. 4 0 0 0244 188 13 8 CONFIGURATION STAGING 5 188 13 8 1 Connecting PINs with different cece cece nennen 189 13 8 1 1 Connecting linear values with different 102 4 189 13 8 1 2 Connecting logic values with different messages 0 444 189 13 8 1 3 Connecting to multi state logic parameters 4 2 190 13 8 2 STAGING POSTS Digital analog 1 2 3 4 PINs 296 to 303 190 13 9 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TERMINALS 0 2 22 191 13 9 1 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded run PIN 305 77 7 7 7 7 4 191 13 9 2 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded jog PIN 306 0 7 7 4 191 13 9 3 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded start PIN 307 0 2 0 0 20 27222 192 13 9 4 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Internal run input 308 2 2 02 27 192 13 10 CONFIGURATION JUMPER CONNECTIONS 193 13 10 1 JUMPER CONNECTIONS Make jumper GET FROM source connection 193 13 10 2 JUMPER CONNECTIONS Make jumper GOTO destination 193 13 11 CONFIGURATION BLOCK OP
222. 4 2 1 Encoder inputs Note DIP3 T16 B train or sign and DIP4 T17 A train are designed to accept bi directional encoder pulse trains DIP2 T15 is designed to accept a MARKER for spindle orientation The encoder outputs must be able to provide a logic low below 2V a logic high above 4V may range up to 5OV max and up to 100KHz These 2 inputs are single ended and non isolated For other types of encoder output the user must provide some external conditioning circuitry The output format may be pulse only for single direction pulse with sign or phase quadrature See 6 1 10 CALIBRATION ENCODER SCALING Note The UIPs offer much higher noise immunity for 24V logic signals 3 4 2 2 Digital outputs When the digital outputs are shorted the 24V output will continue to operate with a current capability of 5OmA This is so that the CSTOP line does not go low and shut down the drive If it is important that the drive continues running with a shorted digital output then a digital output set permanently high may be used as an auxiliary 24V power output for other tasks allowing the main 24V output to be devoted entirely to the CSTOP function The current capability of the digital outputs is also an important issue Typically 50mA is a sufficient specification However occasionally higher output current is required The PL X series addresses this by allowing a total current limit to be made available to all the digital outputs allowing the user to exp
223. 40 6109 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker offset_PIN241 15000 o 241 7 77 619 9 5 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Position reference PIN 242 30 o 17 109 6 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker frequency monitor 243 20 655 37 Hz Omz 243 16109 SPINDLE ORIENTATE 1 position flag 244 0 1 iow 244 15 1 4 Configuration 251 400 ANALOG OUTPUTS larm rectify enable 250 0 1 Disabled 250 13 4 2 1 AOP1 T10 SETUP AOP1 Dividing factor PIN 251 184 22 10 SETUP Offset PIN252 100 00 0 00 252 184 2 3 T10 SETUP Rectifier mode enable PIN 253 0 1 Disabled 259 13 423 AOP2 T11 SETUP AOP2 Dividing factor PIN 254 134 22 2 11 SETUP 2 Offset PIN255 100 009 0 00 255 13 4 2 3 2 T11 SETUP AOP2 Rectifier mode enable PIN 2566 0 1 Disabled 256 13 4 21 AOP3 T12 SETUP AOP3 Dividing factor PIN 257 184 22 T12 SETUP AOP3 Offset PIN258 100 009 0 00 258 134 2 3 13 SETUP Rectifier mode enable PIN 259 0 1 Disabled 259 7 134 3 ANALOG OUTPUTS Scope output select on AOP3 PIN 260 0 1 Disabled 260 187 1 122 SETUP DOP1 Output value rectifier enable PIN 261 0 1 261 187 2 722 SETUP OP comparator
224. 6 45 3 7 19 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque memory input PIN 517 20 2 1242 0 1 45 3 7 20 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension enable PIN 518 2 0 222 45 3 7 21 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Overwind underwind 519 22 2 2 46 3 7 22 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Inertia comp monitor PIN 520 46 3 8 Centre winding block nn me hn nennen 47 3 9 APPLICATION BLOCKS PRESET SPEED 48 3 9 1 PRESET SPEED Block 2 0 sena nns 49 3 9 2 PRESET SPEED Preset speed output monitor 523 4 2 50 3 9 3 PRESET SPEED Select bit inputs 1 Isb 2 3 msb PINs 524 525 526 50 3 9 4 PRESET SPEED OP value of 00010111 PINs 527 to 534 50 3 10 APPLICATION BLOCKS MULTI FUNCTION 1 108 0 00 1112 51 3 10 1 MULTI FUNCTION Block 2 2 51 3 10 2 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 Function mode PINs 544 6 8 550 2 4 6 8 52 3 10 2 1 Sample and hold 4 4
225. 600 0 s 60 0 57 654 STOP MODE RAMP Live delay mode 58 O 1 Disabled 58 6 5 5 STOP MODE RAMP Drop out speed PIN59 7 0 100 00 2 00 59 656 STOP MODE RAMP Drop out delay PINGO 0 1 600 05 10secs 60 ee R 6 6 2 SPEED REF SUMMER Internal speed reference 1 PIN 62 105 00 0 00 62 R 6 6 3 SPEED REF SUMMER Auxiliary speed reference 2 PINGS 105 00 0 00 63 R 6 6 4 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed reference 3 monitor PIN64 105 00 0 00 64 R 6 65 SPEED REF SUMMER Ramped speed reference 4 PIN65 105 00 0 00 65 R 6 6 6 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed Current reference 3 sign PIN 66 0 1 Nonivert 66 R 6 67 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed Current reference ratio PIN G7 3 0000 1 0000 67 EMEN I MMMNET I 672 SPEED CONTROL speed reference PIN 69 O 105 00 105 0099 69 673 SPEED CONTROL Max speed reference PIN70 0 105 00 105 00 70 R 674 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 0 20000 1500 71 R 675 SPEED CONTROL Speed integral time constant_PIN72 001 30 0005 1 0005 72 67 6 SPEEDCONTROL Speedintgralreset 724 bisabed 73 6771 SPEED PI ADAPTION Low break point PIN 72 0 100 00 1 00 74 67 7 2 SPEED Pl ADAPTION High break point_PIN75 0 100 009 2 00 75 67 78
226. 68 GO TO OP2 Default block diagram Anatog monitor PIN 53 Memory MOTORISED Preset boot up POT RAMP Value 1 Preset disabled Sf 2 Retain Offset enabled PIN 52 i Motorised Motorised High value T Preset r PIN1 375 PIN2 377 aah vate S Enable potentiometer Pot Default T 7 um m pa Low value2 Y GO TO OP2 PIN 48 Up Command Default T 8 PIN 162 Dig mon Range PIN a monitor Down 4 T8 mri du Min clamp Max clamp UIP8 PIN 381 PIN 382 wa 51 50 Scaler PIN 384 Slave High value Ny PIN1 385 PIN2 387 Default High MP Low UP PIN 162 PIN1 386 PIN2 388 GO TO OP2 Input Dig mon CURRENT CONTROL Clamps PIN 91 Current PIN 82 PIN 84 PIN 87 PIN 89 DU DB DE Goll atin Overload Dynamic Dynamic Upper cur PIN 81 inverter Manu target profile profile clamp Prevailing ve Current reference Enable Low 1 1 PIN 138 PIN1 395 PIN2 397 Th Default To current Error amp clamps T Scaled user ve Clamp PIN 137 A Prevailing ve Overload Overload Dyn profile Dyn profile Lower Clamp PIN 139 Connected Ramp Limit Low spd High spd current from speed control time monitor break point break point At limit flag M PIN 141 y High value Ny
227. 7 158 SERIAL LINKS Read only values will show the level pertaining at the time Once data is received and the drive reports Finished click on the disconnect icon or click on Call then Disconnect to finish You may now exit from HyperTerminal by clicking on File then Exit or by pressing Alt and F4 or by closing the window You will be asked if you wish to save the session this is not necessary as your personalised Hyperterminal already exists If you previously selected Capture text the file of received menu listing can now be loaded into whichever word processor you are using to be viewed or printed etc 10 2 3 2 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive to drive See 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software version During maintenance it is sometimes not possible to transfer parameter settings using computers but may be necessary to transfer settings from one unit to another To overcome this problem the PL X has a built in ability to exchange parameters between two functioning control cards This method may be used if there is a problem with the power chassis but the unit still responds to the application of the control supply as normal For faulty units see 10 2 3 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Eeprom transfer between units w Socket pin function Plug 1 Plug 2 W Note x W OV OV OV x The wires on y x Open Open Open Y pins Y and Z Y transmit Wire3 eJ are transposed 2 2 receive Wire4 2
228. 7 If there has been a problem there may be a message See 9 1 1 SELF TEST MESSAGE Data corruption 8 WARNING Check the CALIBRATION parameters are correct after this process Note There is a hidden pin 708 REMOTE PARAM RCV which is a logic input that can initiate a drive receive 10 2 2 1 Receiving parameter data file from a PC Windows 95 upwards See 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software version See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes Microsoft HyperTerminal part of Accessories in Windows 95 upwards If you have not already created a personalised Hyperterminal please see 10 2 1 2 Transmitting parameter data file to a PC Windows 95 upwards This description assumes you have already stored a parameter file from a PL X See 10 2 1 2 Open your personalised Hyperterminal and click on Transfer then Send Text File and you will be asked for a folder and file that was used for the previously captured data you wish to send to the PL X Highlight the file from the list provided and it will be selected ready for sending Do not click on Open yet Prepare the drive to receive data as outlined in PARAMETER EXCHANGE This information is written directly to the drive s permanent memory so the drive s present settings for the target recipe page will be overwritten The file will contain its original recipe page source Normal 2 3 and will automatically save on that recipe page Once the drive reports RECEIVING click on Open
229. 700 CP102233 Size 3 CHOO850A_ CP102054 Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives 206 Installation 14 3 3 DC semi conductor fuses For PLX units used in applications in which regeneration occurs for most or all of the time it is recommended to fit a DC side semi conductor fuse This will further protect the unit in the event of an unsequenced power loss when regeneration is taking place Note It is not normally necessary to use DC fuses with the PL Models but if required then these fuses can be used Example A PL model that allows regenerative stopping is employed on a site that suffers from a higher than normal amount of power brown outs or blackouts Model Max cont DC fuse BUSSMAN EU Ferraz Shawmut PL 20 Current max Up to Up to PLX 4Q AMPS It 500V DC 500V DC IP UL AC DC Rating 124 Buss part size Rating 124 Ferraz size PL X5 10 12 600 16A 48 170M1559 1 360 500535 4 1 PL X10 20 24 600 32A 270 170M1562 1 35A 360 500535 4 1 PL X15 30 36 600 40A 270 170M3808 1 40A 460 A500S40 4 1 PL X20 40 51 5000 63A 770 170M3810 1 60A 1040 500560 4 1 PL X30 60 72 5000 80A 1250 170M3811 1 80A 1900 500580 4 1 PL X40 80 99 5000 125A 3700 170M3813 1 100A 2900 5005100 4 1 PL X50 100 123 11850 160A 7500 170M3814 1 125A 5000 5005150 4 1 PL X65 124 155 60000 200A 15000 170M3815 1 200A 13000
230. 79 285 290 184 13 6 1 4 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 OP inversion PINs 274 280 286 291 184 13 6 1 5 SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 Make output GET FROM source 185 13 6 1 6 SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 Make input GOTO destination connection 185 13 6 1 7 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 Input high value PINs 275 281 287 293 185 13 6 1 8 DIOX SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 Input low value PINs 276 282 288 294 186 13 6 1 9 Default connections for 01 2 3 4 nennen 186 13 6 1 10 DIO1 2 3 4 Internal output result PINS 685 6 7 8 27 2 7 186 13 7 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL OUTPUTS 0 186 13 7 1 DIGITAL OUTPUTS DOPX SETUP 0 0 snas 186 13 7 1 1 DOPX SETUP DOP1 2 3 OP val rectifiy enable PINs 261 264 267 187 13 7 1 2 DOPX SETUP DOP1 2 3 OP comparator threshold PINs 262 265 268 187 13 7 1 3 DOPX SETUP DOP1 2 3 Output inversion enable PINs 263 266 269 187 13 7 1 4 DOPX SETUP DOP1 2 3 Make output GET FROM source 187 13 7 1 5 Default connections for 1 2 3 7 1 4 0 6 0 188 13 7 1 6 1 2 3 Internal output result PINS 682 3
231. 8 By selecting the prevailing current limit DISABLED the system can operate as a speed controller When the torque demand is ENABLED the torque compensator provides the new current limit When winding the drive system relies on arranging the speed loop to saturate so that the current is operating at the limit determined by the torque compensator The speed loop saturation may be accomplished by utilising the SLACK take up function See JOG CRAWL SLACK in the main manual There is a hidden PIN 714 IN SLACK FLAG which stays high during the slack take up mode including the ramp up down periods This FLAG can be used to operate 518 TENSION ENABLE 46 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 7 21 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Overwind underwind PIN 519 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 519 OVER UNDERWIND Selects the winding style to be PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN overwind or underwind OVER UNDERWIND ENABLED or DISABLED ENABLED 519 Overwinding is selected when the function is enabled Underwind is selected when the function is disabled The term overwinding is referring to the chosen direction of layer addition on the reel It assumes that the web is wound onto the reel in the direction which requires a positive current clamp If the web is wound on in the underwind direction then the reel must change direction of rotation and the negative current clamp is operative 3 7 22 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Inertia comp monitor PIN 520
232. 8 6 9 6 FIELD CONTROL FLD WEAKENING 2 109 6 9 6 1 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening enable PIN 103 110 6 9 6 2 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening proportional gain PIN 104 110 6 9 6 3 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening integral time constant PIN 105 110 6 9 6 4 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening derivative time constant PIN 106 110 6 9 6 5 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening feedback derivative time constant PIN 107 111 6 9 6 6 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening feedback integral time constant PIN 108 111 6 9 6 7 FLD WEAKENING MENU Spillover armature voltage 109 111 6 9 6 8 FLD WEAKENING MENU Minimum field current PIN 110 111 6 9 7 FIELD CONTROL Standby field enable PIN 111 0 0222 112 6 9 8 FIELD CONTROL Standby field current PIN 112 22 2 112 6 9 9 FIELD CONTROL Quench delay PIN 113 0 00 0 0 0 2 112 6 9 10 FIELD CONTROL Field reference input PIN 114 22 112 6 10 CHANGE PARAMETERS ZERO 8 0 000 00 sn nnn 113 6 10 1 ZERO INTERLOCKS Block diagram sese se 114 6 10 2 ZERO INTERLOCKS Standstill en
233. 810 880 1320 1450 64 506 x 700 x 350 PL and PLX 700 700 940 1020 1530 1650 64 506 x 700 x 350 PL and PLX 800 800 1080 1170 1760 1850 64 506 x 700 x 350 PL and PLX 900 800 1200 1300 1950 2050 64 506 x 700 x 350 PL PLX 980 980 1320 1430 2145 2250 64 506 x 700 x 350 Starred models PL 2 Quadrant models have electronic regenerative stopping PL X Models have no overload capability Standard Models Main 3 phase supply 50 6Ohz Any supply from 12 to 480V AC 10 Auxiliary phase supply 50 60hz Any supply from 100 to 480V AC 1096 Control 1 phase 50VA 50 60Hz Any supply from 110 to 240V AC 1096 High Voltage HV Models Main 3 phase supply 50 6Ohz Any supply from 12 to 690V AC 1096 Auxiliary phase supply 50 60hz Any supply from 100 to 690V AC 10 Control 1 phase 50VA 50 60Hz Any supply from 110 to 240V AC 1096 Internal Fan supply PL X 275 315 360 400 440 models also need a separate 100VA 240V 50 60Hz ac supply for the fan PL X 520 600 700 800 900 980 models also need a separate 200VA 240V 50 60Hz ac supply for the fan OUTPUT VOLTAGE RANGE Armature PLX and PL O to 1 2 times AC supply PL O to 1 3 times AC supply Absolute upper limits Note 1 1 times AC supply is recommended if supply variations exceed 696 Field O to 0 9 times AC supply on auxiliary terminals EL1 EL2 EL3 OUTPUT CURRENT RANGE Armature O to 10096 continuous
234. 84 102 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 8 4 2 DYNAMIC PROFILE Speed break point for high current limit PIN 85 DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 85 SPD BRPNT AT HI 85 SPD BRPNT AT HI I zs 75 0096 Sets the speed break point for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN 150 CURRENT LIMIT SPD BRPNT AT HI I 0 00 to 105 0096 75 0096 85 Note 3JCURRENT LIMIT 96 set in the CALIBRATION menu will prevail This is the normal current limit setting However the profile calculation starts or ends at 15096 6 8 4 3 DYNAMIC PROFILE Speed break point for low current limit PIN 86 DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 86 SPD BRPNT LO I 86 SPD BRPNT AT LO I 7 100 00 Sets the speed break point for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN 87 CUR LIMIT AT LO SPD BRPNT AT LO 0 00 to 105 00 100 00 86 6 8 4 4 DYNAMIC PROFILE Profile current for low current limit PIN 87 DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 87 CUR LIMIT AT LO 87 CUR LIMIT AT LO 100 00 Sets the current limit prevailing PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN at 86 SPEED BRPNT AT LO CUR LIMIT AT LO 0 00 to 150 00 100 00 87 6 8 5 CURRENT CONTROL Dual current clamps enable PIN 88 CURRENT CONTROL 3 88 DUAL CLAMP ENBL 3 Enables the upper and lower PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN dual clamps to be independant DUAL I CLAMP ENBL ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 88 If 88 DUAL CLAMP is disabled then the clamps produce symmetric ve and ve current limits in conjunction with 81 CUR CLAMP SCALER The default control
235. 89 300 328 380 150 166 200 318 347 402 160 173 208 330 361 416 170 177 213 338 369 427 177 179 215 341 372 430 After about 150 degrees there is only about 5 more volts available This is important to realise when operating in the current control mode In order to maintain the correct current the volts must be able to move higher as the field warms up and the field winding resistance increases Also it is necessary to allow a margin for supply tolerance This means that when the field is at its highest operating temperature the firing angle should not normally exceed 150 degrees to be sure of preventing saturation of the control loop A typical field winding resistance will change by about 20 between cold and running temperature Hence the maximum cold firing angle will be at about 125 degrees If the field loop does saturate then the speed loop will have to work harder to maintain control In AVF Armature voltage feedback systems the speed holding may be less accurate 7 3 5 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field active monitor FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 147 FIELD ACTIVE MON 147 FIELD ACTIVE MON DISABLED Shows whether the field output is active ENABLED or inactive DISABLED PIN 147 PARAMETER RANGE FIELD ACTIVE MON ENABLED OR DISABLED 130 DIAGNOSTICS 7 4 DIAGNOSTICS ANALOG IO MONITOR PIN number range 150 161 ANALOG IO MONITOR This menu allows monitoring of the analogu
236. 9 Connecting to multi state logic parameters 190 CONFIGURATION 134 151 166 168 171 172 178 180 183 186 188 191 193 194 195 196 199 201 227 CONFIGURATION ANALOG 8 178 CONFIGURATION BLOCK OP CONFIG 134 194 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS 183 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL INPUTS 180 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL 186 CONFIGURATION FIELDBUS CONFIG 151 171 195 CONFIGURATION JUMPER CONNECTIONS 193 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TERMINALS 191 CONFIGURATION STAGING POSTS 171 188 CONFIGURATION menu eee 166 168 CONFLICT HELP MENU 149 166 169 172 201 228 CONFLICT HELP MENU Multiple GOTO conflict PIN 201 Number of conflicts sees 201 Conflicting GOTO connections 166 Contactor Goritactor drop OUt si ise a Dres Somn teda rex 40 87 control Drop out delay 60 89 116 220 Drop out speed PIN 59 89 220 Live delay mode PIN 58 89 116 220 Speed profile when stopping 87 Stop ramp time PIN 56 a Stop t
237. 9 PID 1 2 PID proportional gain PIN 436 459 000 cece eee eee eee eee eee eee tena 22 3 3 10 PID 1 2 PID integrator time constant PIN 437 460 0 0 2 22 3 3 11 PID 1 2 PID derivative time constant 438 461 23 3 3 12 PID 1 2 PID derivative filter time constant PIN 439 462 23 3 3 13 PID 1 2 PID integrator preset 440 463 0015052 23 3 3 14 PID 1 2 PID integrator preset value PIN 441 464 23 3 3 15 PID 1 27 PID reset PIN 442 1465 sepu bb ead 24 3 3 16 PID 1 2 PID positive clamp level PIN 443 466 24 3 3 17 PID 1 2 PID negative clamp level PIN 444 467 0 00 0 24 3 3 18 PID 1 2 PID output 96 trim 445 468 0 00 0 02 24 3 3 19 PID 1 2 PID profile mode select PIN 446 469 25 3 3 20 PID 1 2 PID minimum proportional gain PIN 447 470 0 25 3 3 21 PID 1 2 PID Profile X axis minimum 448 471 0 0 0 0 25 3 3 22 PID 1 2 PID Profile X axis GET FROM 26 3 3 23 PID 1 2 PID Profiled prop gain output monitor PIN 449 472 26 3 3
238. AND the OV switch on HIGH 2 second off delay Alarms are reset by a high to low transition HIGH ON LOW OFF OV SWITCH START PIN 307 Drive run Hidden PIN 720 System reset ALARMS All A low RUN input sets pulse Healthy when drop out delay to zero high PIN 698 Drop out delay IP Contactor Stop mode Control Ramp time PIN 56 Contactor drop PIN 131 Out Stop mode Speed TIMER Ramp time Feedback Control Internal To speed logic enable control block Enable PIN 60 PIN 57 PIN 58 Control Drop out Stop time Live delay logic Delay limit itty CHANGE PARAMETERS 87 The following conditions must be true for the main contactor to be energised 1 All alarms AND supply synchronisation healthy G99 READY FLAG 2 CSTOP at 24V Note The CSTOP must be high for at least 50mS prior to START going high 3 Start OR Jog high When the contactor has energised the drive will run if RUN input is high AND _ if enabled the ZERO INTERLOCK is satisfied The contactor will de energise after approximately 100 milliseconds if 699 READY FLAG goes low OR CSTOP goes low If the zero interlock is enabled and requests a non run action then the contactor will energise for approximately 2 seconds but no current will flow The contactor will drop out if the zero reference interlock condition is not satisfied within approximately 2 seconds The display will show CONTACTOR LOCK
239. ARAMETER at IP2 A zero gives zero output SUMMER1 DIVIDER2 3 0000 1 0000 407 APPLICATION BLOCKS 17 3 2 9 SUMMER 1 2 Input 1 PIN 408 422 SUMMER 1 3 408 SUMMER1 INPUT1 408 SUMMER1 INPUT1 2 0 00 Sets value for input 1 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN SUMMER1 INPUT 1 300 00 0 00 408 3 2 10 SUMMER 1 2 Input 2 PIN 409 423 SUMMER 1 3 409 SUMMER1 INPUT2 409 SUMMER1 INPUT2 0 00 Sets value for input 2 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN SUMMER INPUT2 300 00 0 00 409 3 2 11 SUMMER 1 2 Input PIN 410 424 SUMMER 1 3 410 SUMMER1 INPUT3 410 SUMMER1 INPUTS ii 0 0096 Sets value for input 3 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN SUMMER INPUTS 300 0096 0 0096 410 3 2 12 SUMMER 1 2 Deadband PIN 411 425 SUMMER 1 3 411 SUMMER1 DEADBAND 411 SUMMER1 DEADBAND 0 0096 Sets 96 deadband width PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN centred on 0 00 for input 1 SUMMER1 DEADBAND 0 00 to 100 0096 0 0096 411 3 2 13 SUMMER 1 2 Output sign inverter PIN 412 426 SUMMER 1 3 412 SUMMER1 OP INVRT Used to invert the output signal PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN from the summing block SUMMER1 OP INVRT INVERT NON INVERT NON INVERT 412 18 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 2 14 SUMMER 1 2 Symmetrical clamp PIN 413 427 SUMMER 1 413 SUMMER1 CLAMP 413 SUMMER1 CLAMP 105 00 Sets the value of a symmetrical P
240. ARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN clamp for inputs 1 2 and output SUMMER1 CLAMP 0 00 to 200 00 105 00 413 The subtotal values after clamping for SUMMER are available on hidden PIN 692 CH1 and 691 CH2 The subtotal values after clamping for SUMMER 2 are available on hidden PIN 694 1 and 693 CH2 APPLICATION BLOCKS 19 3 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS PID 1 2 There are 2 identical PID blocks PID 1 3 Pins 429 to 474 451 PID1 ERROR MON APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 PID 1 3 PID 1 3 441 PID1 PRESET VAL PID 1 3 442 PID1 RESET PID 1 3 443 PID1 POS CLAMP PID 1 3 444 PID1 NEG CLAMP PID 1 445 PID1 OUTPUT TRIM PID 1 3 429 PID1 OP MONITOR PID 1 3 430 PID1 INPUT 1 PID 1 3 431 PID1 RATIO1 PID 1 3 432 PID1 DIVIDER1 PID 1 3 433 PID1 INPUT2 PID 1 3 434 PID1 RATIO2 PID 1 PID 1 446 PID1 PROFL MODE 435 PID1 DIVIDER2 PID 1 PID 1 447 PID1 MIN PROP GN 436 PID1 PROP GAIN PID 1 448 PID1 X AXIS MIN PID 1 3 437 PID1 INTEGRAL TC PID 1 3 PID1 X AXIS GET FROM PID 1 3 438 PID1 DERIV TC PID 1 3 439 PID1 FILTER TC PID 1 3 440 PID1 INT PRESET PID 1 3 449 PID1 PROFILED GN PID 1 450 PID1 CLAMP FLAG os Pe Pe oe oe Qu oe oe oe oe oe 99 442425242526 20 APPLICATION BLOCKS This block performs the function of a classical PID to allow insertion of an exterior control loop around the basic drive loops Typical uses are Dancer arm loadcell tension centre
241. BK TYPE or UIPX RANGE the states placed in numerical order as follows 15 choice logic O 2 choice logic 1 3 choice value of pure number 2 4 choice value of pure number 3 5 choice value of pure number 4 Hence in order to switch between choice 1 value O and 2 value 1 a normal logic flag may be connected as the source of control If the block providing the instuction to change state possesses a value for high low output e g digital input DIP1 ensure that a low is 0 00 value and a high 0 01 value To switch between type 4 value 3 and type 5 value 4 use a value for low of 0 03 and for high 0 04 If the source of logic state is internal and does not possess a value for high low then utilise one of the C O SWITCHES See the Applications Manual for details of the C O SWITCH E g The C O SWITCH uses a logic value to switch between a HI value input and a LO value input To switch between type 4 value 3 and type 5 value 4 use a LO value of 0 03 and HI value 0 04 Hence when the logic value is O the C O SWITCH will send the value of pure number 3 to the multi state PIN and then choice 4 will be selected Likewise choice 5 will be selected for a logic 1 13 8 2 STAGING POSTS Digital analog 1 2 3 4 PINs 296 to 303 STAGING POSTS 3 296 DIGITAL POST 1 Used as storage point for logic PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN state and or connecting point DIGITAL POST 1 HIGH or LOW LOW 296 When a p
242. CH103318 2x32 1800 TDF 91 6 6 9 URD 232 TDF 1800 X300216 PLX800KW 1850A 103319 2 33 2200 PLAF 55 5 6 URD 233 PLAF 2200 0302234 PLX900KW 2050A 103320 44 2400 TOF 65 7 5 URD 44 2400 W233906 PLX980KW 2250A CH103468 44 2500 TOF 65 7 URD 44 TTOF 2500 BS C221538 PLX275 980 11 7 2 3 PLX Models DC fuses for Standard supply voltage Up to 480V AC For PLX units used in applications in which regeneration occurs for most or all of the time it is recommended to fit a DC side semi conductor fuse This will further protect the unit in the event of an unsequenced power loss when regeneration is taking place Note It is not normally necessary to use DC fuses with the PL Models but if required then these fuses can be used Example A PL model that allows regenerative stopping is employed on a site that suffers from a higher than normal amount of power brown outs or blackouts PL X DC Fuses Bardac SIZE CURRENT MOUNTING DEPTH FERRAZ PART NUMBER AND REFERENCE PART No RATING A mm PL X275KW 650A CH103321 33 900 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 0900 A300081 PL X275KW 650A CH103321 33 1000 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1000 B300082 PL X315KW 750A CH103322 33 1100 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1100 C300083 PL X315KW 750A CH103322 33 1250 TTF 50 6 6 9 URD 33 TTF 1250 D300084 PL X360KW 850A
243. COMP1 INPUT 1 COMPARATOR 1 3 589 COMP1 INPUT 2 PIN 591 Comp 1 Hysteresis PIN 589 Input 2 COMPARATOR 1 3 590 COMP1 WINDOW SEL COMPARATOR 1 3 591 COMP1 HYSTERESIS PIN 590 COMPARATOR 1 Window enable With the window mode disabled the block functions as a comparator with input 1 on the positive input and input 2 on the negative input The hysteresis level is applied above and below the value of input 1 The hysteresis range is O 10 00 If the window mode is enabled then the value on input 2 creates a symmetrical window around zero If the value on input 1 lies within the window then the comparator output is high If hysteresis is used in the window mode it is applied at each boundary 3 15 2 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Input 1 PIN 588 592 596 600 COMPARATOR 1 3 588 COMP1 INPUT 1 588 COMP1 INPUT 1 N 0 00 Sets the level of input 1 ve PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the comparator 1 COMP1 INPUT 1 300 0096 0 00 588 The output is high for input 1 gt input 2 algebraic The output is low for input 1 lt input 2 algebraic 3 15 3 COMPARATOR 1 2 3 4 Input 2 PIN 589 593 597 601 COMPARATOR 1 589 COMP1 INPUT 2 589 COMP1 INPUT 2 0 00 Sets the level of input 2 ve PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the comparator 1 COMP1 INPUT 2 300 0096 0 00 589 The output is high for input 1 gt input 2 algebraic The output is low for input 1
244. CONFLICT HELP MENU See also 13 8 1 Connecting PINs with different units Note To end a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to DISABLED Note It is not possible to connect a GOTO directly to a GETFROM To do this first connect the GOTO to a STAGING POST or other unused PIN then connect the GETFROM to the same STAGING POST 170 CONFIGURATION 13 2 1 Key features of GOTO window Note To start a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to ENABLED Note To end a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to DISABLED Most blocks being Pressing and holding connected are also shown the up or down key here for extra clarity will cause accelerated scrolling UIP ANALOG GOTO PIN Description of function JIP ANALOG GOTO For simple blocks the block description appears here UIPX CONFIGURATION 4 UIP ANALOG GOTO Defines the target destination PIN for the UIPX analog connection e The PIN of the target The description of the A default of 400 connection will scroll target connection will shows that there is here scroll on the bottom no connection made line DEFAULT O to 720 400 13 2 2 Key features of GET FROM window Note To start a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to ENABLED Note To end a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM mu
245. CUR CLAMP SCALER sets the limit If the upper clamp is set negative and the lower clamp set positive than the result is 0 00 If the upper clamp is more ve than the lower in the ve region the lower behaves as a current demand 6 8 8 CURRENT CONTROL Extra current reference PIN 91 CURRENT CONTROL 3 91 EXTRA CUR REF Sets the value of an extra current reference input PARAMETER EXTRA CUR REF RANGE 300 00 DEFAULT 0 00 6 8 9 CURRENT CONTROL Autotune enable PIN 92 CURRENT CONTROL 3 92 AUTOTUNE ENABLE Enables the autotune function PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN to start It turns itself off AUTOTUNE ENABLE ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 92 If change your supply voltage current calibration or motor type then AUTOTUNE must repeated This is a stationary test There is no need to disconnect the motor from the load The motor field is automatically disabled If the motor rotates above 20 speed due to residual magnetism the test is aborted See 8 1 11 16 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Cannot autotune 8 1 11 17 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Autotune quit Note The autotune function makes a one off adjustment to the current loop error amplifier terms to achieve optimum performance When ENABLED it will wait until the main contactor is energised and the drive run before starting its autotune routine It may take from a few seconds up to about 1 minute typicall
246. D JOG is normally used by a To internal serial link to control the drive The local system hardware terminal in the LOW position From ANDED will defeat the serial link JOG PIN 306 The serial link in the OFF position will HIGH or LOW defeat the local hardware terminal Sets a logic input to an internal PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN AND gate to control JOG ANDED JOG HIGH or LOW HIGH 306 192 CONFIGURATION 13 9 3 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded start PIN 307 307 ANDED START is normally used by a To internal serial link to control the drive The local system hardware terminal in the LOW position From ANDED will defeat the serial link START PIN 307 The serial link in the OFF position will HIGH or LOW defeat the local hardware terminal SOFTWARE TERMINALS 3 307 ANDED START Sets a logic input to an internal PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN AND gate to control START ANDED START HIGH or LOW HIGH 307 13 9 4 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Internal run input 308 SOFTWARE TERMINALS 3 308 INTERNAL RUN IP Used to set RUN mode if the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN RUN terminal is reprogrammed INTERNAL RUN IP HIGH or LOW LOW 308 The RUN command normally comes from the default RUN terminal T31 and will show the state of T31 However this terminal may be used as a programmable terminal in the event of a shortage of digital inputs In this case 308 INTERNAL RUN IP must be disconnected
247. D LOSS TRIP EN Allows the field failure alarm PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN trip to be disabled FLD LOSS TRIP EN ENABLED OR DISABLED ENABLED 173 This alarm will normally trigger if the field current drops below 20 of rated current 5 in field weakening mode Faulty operation of the field controller may also cause a motor field fail alarm The most usual cause for the motor field alarm is an open circuit motor field If this alarm occurs the motor field connections should be checked and the field resistance measured The resistance of the field dataplate field volts dataplate field current WARNING For rated field currents that are less than 2596 of model rating the alarm threshold may be too low to trigger The alarm must be tested To overcome this problem 4 RATED FIELD AMPS may be set to a higher level and 114 FIELD REFERENCE set lower This has the effect of raising the threshold E g Set 4 RATED FIELD AMPS to twice motor rating and 114 FIELD REFERENCE to 50 00 If the PL X is feeding a load which requires no field supply for example a permanent magnet motor then 99 FIELD ENABLE should be disabled This automatically inhibits the field fail alarm Alarm delay time 2 00 secs 8 1 4 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Digital OP short circuit trip enable PIN 174 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 174 DOP SCCT TRIP EN Allows the digital output short PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN circuit alarm trip to be enabled DOP SCCT T
248. DIAGNOSTICS 7 1 DIAGNOSTICS SPEED LOOP SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 MONITOR 131 SPEED FBK MON a SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 R 123 TOTAL SPD REF MN PIN number range 123 to 132 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 124 SPEED DEMAND MON This menu allows monitoring of the parameters associated with the the speed loop SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 125 SPEED ERROR MON The feedback sources can also be read in engineering units which alleviates the need to undertake difficult readings with a voltmeter SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 during commissioning R 126 ARM VOLTS MON For convenience the armature voltage is also shown as a of max rated value in a dedicated window DIAGNOSTICS SPEED LOOP MONITOR 2 3 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 127 ARM VOLTS MON The armature volts tacho volts and encoder rpm monitors all function continuously irrespective of SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 which is the source of feedback These signal 128 BACK EMF MON channels may be utilised for tasks other than speed feedback R SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 129 TACHO VOLTS MON R SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 130 MOTOR RPM MON R SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 132 ENCODER RPM MON 7 1 1 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Total speed reference monitor PIN 123 244442555 123 TOTAL SPD REF R SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 R 123 TOTAL SPD REF MN 0 0096 4 Shows the value of the total speed PARAMETER RANGE reference before the STOP RAMP BLOCK TOTAL SPD REF MN 300 00 This
249. ED DISABLED 111 Used to keep motor warm during off periods to prevent condensation in cold climates When disabled the field quenches to zero See 6 9 8 FIELD CONTROL Standby field current PIN 112 A run condition is enabled by START or JOG and RUN This parameter prevails for non running conditions 6 9 8 FIELD CONTROL Standby field current PIN 112 FIELD CONTROL 3 112 STANDBY FLD CUR 112 STANDBY FLD CUR 7 25 00 Sets the standby value of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN field current STANDBY FLD CUR 0 00 to 100 00 25 00 112 Used to keep motor warm during off periods to prevent condensation in cold climates 100 00 represents 4 RATED FIELD AMPS as set in the CALIBRATION menu 6 9 9 FIELD CONTROL Quench delay PIN 113 FIELD CONTROL 3 113 FLD QUENCH DELAY 3 Set the field quench delay time PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN after main contactor drop out FLD QUENCH DELAY 0 0 to 600 0 seconds 10 0 secs 113 Used to ensure the motor can generate into a dynamic braking resistor after the main contactor drops out A run condition is enabled by START or JOG and RUN This delay activates upon commencement of a non running condition 6 9 10 FIELD CONTROL Field reference input PIN 114 FIELD CONTROL 3 e 114 FIELD REFERENCE 114 FIELD REFERENCE 3 100 0096 Sets the value of an external PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN field reference input FIELD REFERENCE 0 0096 TO 100 0
250. EED 2 5 00 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS 60 00 VOLTS 39 SLACK SPEED 1 5 00 9 SPEED FBK TYPE ARMATURE VOLTS 40 SLACK SPEED 2 5 00 ENCODER SCALING 4 41 CRAWL SPEED 10 00 96 10 QUADRATURE ENABLE ENABLED 42 JOG MODE SELECT LOW 11 ENCODER LINES 1000 43 JOG SLACK RAMP 1 0 SECS 12 MOT ENC SPD RATIO 1 0000 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 13 ENCODER SIGN NON INVERT 45 MP OP MONITOR 0 00 14 IR COMPENSATION 0 00 46 MP UP TIME 10 0 SECS 15 FIELD CUR FB TRIM 1 0000 47 MP DOWN TIME 10 0 SECS 16 ARM VOLTS TRIM 1 0000 48 MP UP COMMAND DISABLED 17 ANALOG TACHO TRIM 1 0000 49 MP DOWN COMMAND DISABLED 18 RATED ARM VOLTS 460 0 VOLTS 50 MP MAX CLAMP 100 00 19 EL1 2 3 RATED 415 0 VOLTS 51 MP MIN CLAMP 100 00 96 20 MOTOR 1 2 SELECT MOTOR 1 52 MP PRESET DISABLED DIAGNOSTICS 2 53 MP PRESET VALUE 0 00 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 fone 54 MP MEMORY BOOT UP DISABLED 123 TOTAL SPD REF MN 0 00 STOP MODE RAMP 3 124 SPEED DEMAND MON 0 00 56 STOP RAMP TIME 10 0 SECS 125 SPEED ERROR 0 00 57 STOP TIME LIMIT 60 0 SECS 126 ARM VOLTS MON 0 0 VOLTS 58 LIVE DELAY MODE DISABLED 127 ARM VOLTS MON 0 00 96 59 DROP OUT SPEED 2 00 128 BACK EMF MON 0 00 60 DROP OUT DELAY 1 0 SECS 129 VOLTS MON 0 00 VOLTS SPEED REF SUMMER 3 130 MOTOR RPM MON 0 RPM 62 INT SPEED 1 0 00 96 2e 132 ENCODER RPM MON 0 RPM 63 SPEED REF 2 0 00 o 131 SPEED FBK MON 0 00 64 SPEED
251. ENABLE is enabled then the controller suspends the speed to volts comparison in the field weakening region where the volts are clamped to a maximum value Instead when in the field weakening region it checks whether the speed feedback is below 1096 of full speed If so the alarm will operate This means that it is not practical to start field weakening below 10 of full speed i e 10 1 range The automatic switch to AVF feature allows continued running although at the lower accuracy level of Armature Voltage feedback The AVF remains the source of feedback until the next STOP START sequence The original feedback source is then restored and the alarm reset to allow auto AVF protection once again It may be necessary to reduce the 172 SPEED TRIP TOL to about 1596 if a smooth transfer to auto AVF is required However if the threshold is too low then an unwarranted transfer may occur during speed transients There is a flag on hidden PIN 703 which warns of a speed mismatch after the normal delay time This flag is reset by a STOP command It is suggested that the flag is configured to a digital output to provide a warning that the auto AVF has occurred The speed feedback mismatch alarm is normally triggered by failure of the feedback mechanism in one of the following ways 1 Disconnection of wiring 2 Failure of the tachogenerator or encoder 3 Failure of the tachogenerator or encoder mechanical coupling Note Alarm delay time O 4 secs
252. ENSION CALC 3 496 TAPER STRENGTH TAPER TENSION CALC 3 497 HYPERBOLIC TAPER TAPER TENSION CALC 3 498 TENSION TRIM IP Tapered tension Tension ref 10096 X 100 Dia Min dia X Taper strength 100 Example Tapered tension 0 7 X 100 16 0 7 116 81 20 3 6 1 2 Hyperbolic taper equation Min diameter 10 Diameter 50 Tension ref 70 Taper strength 40 70 100 X 100 50 10 X 40 100 0 7 X 100 40 X 0 4 Tapered tension Tension ref 100 X 100 Dia Min dia X Taper strength Dia 36 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 6 1 3 Taper graphs showing tension versus diameter Tension graph for linear taper Tension graph for hyperbolic taper 200 200 3 6 1 4 Taper graphs showing torque versus diameter Torque Graph for linear taper Torque graph for hyperbolic taper 0 taper straight line 3 6 2 TAPER TENSION CALC Total tension OP monitor PIN 494 494 TOTAL TENSION MN 0 00 This is the total output of the PARAMETER RANGE PIN taper tension calculator TOTAL TENSION MN 100 00 494 This has a branch hopping facility to 3 6 7 TAPER TENSION CALC Tapered tension monitor PIN 499 3 6 3 TAPER TENSION CALC Tension reference PIN 495 495 TENSION REF 0 00 This is the tension reference for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the taper tension calculator TENSION REF 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 495
253. ENT OVERLOAD This allows the drive to actively modify the current overload as it occurs The reduction rate of the overload is adjustable After an overload the load must return below the target level for an equivalent time to re enable the overload capability iii DYNAMIC PROFILE This clamp is used to protect motor commutators that have problems commutating current at high speed or in field weakening mode of operation This function allows the setting of break points that profile the current according to the speed iv 89 UPPER CUR CLAMP 90 LOWER CUR CLAMP These clamps allow the current limits to be adjusted from external signals They can accept a single positive input and produce a scaled bi polar clamp or separate positive and negative inputs for the upper clamp and lower clamp Scaling is achieved by a master current scaler The 4 clamps operate such that the lowest has priority The actual prevailing clamp level is available as a diagnostic for ve and ve current The output of the clamping stage is referred to as the current demand and is compared with the current feedback in a P error amplifier The control terms and a non linear adaptive algorithm are available for programming There is also the facility to activate a super fast current response See 13 13 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY Maximum current response PIN 678 CURRENT CONTROL 3 CURRENT CONTROL 3 CURRENT CONTROL 3 CURRENT CONTROL 3
254. EPTED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND OR DISTRIBUTOR FOR FAULTS CAUSED BY RE RATING OF THE PRODUCT See 13 13 4 2 WARNING about changing BURDEN OHMS WARNING All units must be protected by correctly rated semi conductor fuses Failure to do so will invalidate warranty See 14 3 Semiconductor fuse ratings WIRING INSTRUCTIONS VERY IMPORTANT Read all warnings in section 14 9 WARNING Safety earthing always takes precedence over EMC earthing See 14 11 2 Earthing and screening guidelines IMPORTANT SAFETY WARNINGS The AC supply filters must The drive and AC filter must only be The AC supply filter contains high not be used on supplies that used with a permanent earth voltage capacitors and should not be are un balanced or float with connection No plugs sockets are touched for a period of 20 seconds after DANGER respect to earth allowed in the AC supply the removal of the AC supply ELECTRIC SHOCK RISK See 14 11 4 Guidelines when using filters Introduction and Technical Data 19 Introduction and Technical Data 3 Introduction and Technical Data es 19 Bel 14 1 20 3 2 How do they beet reU rrr els pde Em d aM ex Ep PESE 20 3 2 1 Useful things to know about the eee 21 3 2 2 Tips for using the manual eic seines
255. ER menu to 0 0000 then reconfigure the linear GOTO The parameter 64 SPEED REF 3 MON is a monitor of the UIP3 analog output CONFIGURATION UNIVERSAL INPUTS UIP2 to 9 This shows the UIP2 submenu UNIVERSAL INPUTS UIP2 T2 SETUP There are 8 sub menus one for each input 2 to 9 Each input terminal UIP2 to 9 is provided with its own processing block with a linear and logic output It allows the following functions Range selectable 5 10 20 30V Linear functions Linear offset Signed scaling Clamping of the linear output Logic functions Adjustable threshold for logic level detection The comparator output is a low or a high The high state results in the VALUE being output The low state results in the LO VALUE output Note UIPs offer good noise immunity The LO and HI values can be entered using the display and keys or may be connected from other PINs using JUMPERS This turns the function into a change over switch for dynamic values There are 2 sets of value for high and value for low windows each pair having its own GOTO connection facility This allows 2 independent output values for a logic high input and 2 independent output values for a logic low input This facility allows versatile parameter changeover functions to be selected by a single input E g DIG OP1 GOTO value change to target PIN x DIG OP2 GOTO simultaneous logic change to target PIN y For logic only usage a value of 0 00 is
256. FILTER 1 2 Filter time constant 569 574 oo Hen 56 3 12 4 FIXED LOW PASS FILTER erret xenon tee exe err Rr Ux e nere DE aerea 57 6 Contents 3 13 APPLICATION BLOCKS BATCH 58 3 13 1 BATCH COUNTER Block diagr m xi eee see ele eee 58 3 13 2 BATCH COUNTER Counter count monitor PIN 578 1111 58 3 13 3 BATCH COUNTER Clock input 579 2 2 4 59 3 13 4 BATCH COUNTER Reset input PIN 580 59 3 13 5 BATCH COUNTER Counter target number PIN 581 59 3 13 6 BATCH COUNTER Count equal or greater than target flag 582 59 3 14 APPLICATION BLOCKS INTERVAL 0000 60 3 14 1 INTERVAL TIMER Block diagram 444 4 1 60 3 14 2 INTERVAL Time elapsed monitor 583 4 1 60 3 14 3 INTERVAL Timer reset enable PIN 584 00 60 3 14 4 INTERVAL Time interval setting PIN 585 0 61 3 14 5 INTERVAL TIMER Timer expired flag 586 0 61 3 15 APPLICATION BLOCKS COMPARATOR 1 to 4
257. Field fail threshold for non field weakening mode of mproved functionality 5 was sometimes 8 1 3 Mar 02 5 01 operation raised from 5 to 20 too low to ensure trip for small field 5 01 20 MOTOR 1 2 SELECT Parameters subjected to mproved functionality 6 1 17 Mar 02 5 01 STOP DRIVE TO ADJUST status now only transposed during stop sequence 5 01 64 SPEED CUR REF 3 removed from GOTO selection This PIN 64 is not able to be a GOTO target 13 3 Mar 02 5 01 because it is internally connected to UIP3 5 01 50 100 burden selection may be by switch or Improved functionality The jumper provides 13 13 4 1 Mar 02 5 01 jumper The jumper will progressively become the sole small motor burden when parked on one pin method on all models PL X 5 50 6A 65 265 24A 5 01 Inverse time armature current overload algorithm Improved functionality Algorithm now uses 6 8 3 1 Mar 02 5 01 better precision maths to improve accuracy 5 02 Enhanced Fieldbus functionality See version 5 02 Serial Comms manual July 02 5 02 64 SPEED CUR REF 3 changed to To reflect the fact that this PIN is internally 13 3 64 SPD CUR REF 3 MON connected to UIP3 T3 and hence display is a monitor Also removed from GOTO choices 5 02 French language added to version 5 02 software Improved functionality 11 3 July 02 5 02 5 12 Software for future Ethernet options added mproved functionality Nov 02 5 11 Tacho input min range limit lowered mproved functionality 3 4 4 Option now ava
258. GE 000 to 720 DEFAULT 400 Block disconnect Sets the PIN for the auxiliary PARAMETER input signal source AUX GET FROM 3 10 6 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 GOTO 1 to 8 MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 GOTO RANGE DEFAULT 000 to 720 400 Block disconnect Sets the target PIN for the PARAMETER multi function output signal GOTO 54 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 11 APPLICATION BLOCKS LATCH LATCH 3 566 LATCH LO VALUE APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 o gt LATCH 3 560 LATCH OUTPUT MON This block provides a standard D type latch function The logic inputs are scanned at least once every bOmS hence the maximum operating LATCH 3 frequency is 10Hz See 3 1 1 Sample times 961 LATCH DATA IP 3 11 1 LATCH Block diagram LATCH 3 561 TO 562 LATCH CLOCK IP input LATCH 3 563 LATCH SET IP PINs used 560 to 566 PIN Data 560 228 rp Output mon CLOCK OUTPUT PIN 565 Value for Clock input SET RESET PIN 566 PIN 563 PIN 564 Set input Reset input Value for LO LATCH 3 564 LATCH RESET IP p a SET RESET CLOCK DATA OUTPUT High Low Don t care Don t care Value for high Low High Don t care Don t care Value for low LATCH 3 High High Don t care Don t care Value for high 565 LATCH HI VALUE Low Low VE EDGE Low Value for low Low Low VE EDGE High Value for high 3 11 2 LATCH Latch output monitor PIN 56
259. GE DEFAULT PIN Usually used for forward slack SLACK SPEED 1 100 00 5 00 39 R 40 SLACK SPEED 2 5 00 Sets the value of slack speed 2 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN Usually used for reverse slack SLACK SPEED 2 100 00 5 00 40 6 3 4 JOG CRAWL SLACK Crawl speed PIN 41 Sets the value of crawl speed PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN CRAWL SPEED 100 00 10 00 41 80 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 3 5 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog mode select JOG CRAWL SLACK 3 R 42 JOG MODE SELECT PIN 42 Combines with the JOG START PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN inputs for jog crawl slack mode JOG MODE SELECT LOW or HIGH LOW 42 The factory default for JOG MODE SELECT is an external connection to T19 Operating JOG MODE START T33 JOG T32 Ramp input Applied ramp Contactor function SELECT IP level IP level Total value time state T19 IP level Stopped low low low reference Stop ramp OFF Stopped high low low reference Stop ramp OFF Running low high low reference Run mode ramp ON Slack 1 takeup low high high ref slack 7 Jog slack ramp ON Slack 2 takeup high high high ref slack 2 Jog slack ramp ON Jog speed 1 low low high Jog speed 1 Jog slack ramp ON Jog speed 2 high low high Jog speed 2 Jog slack ramp ON Crawl high high low Crawl speed Run mode ramp ON 6 3 6 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog Slack ramp PIN 43 JOG CRAWL SLAC
260. HANGE Drive to drive 153 158 PARAMETER EXCHANGE menu list to host 157 parameter exchange rules relating to software version 150 154 156 158 159 164 Parameter exchange using ASCII COMMS 56 160 168 PARAMETER EXCHANGE with a locked recipe page 149 155 PL PILOT and 150 160 168 Receiving parameter data file from a PC 156 Reference exchange master GET FROM 162 Reference exchange master monitor PIN 192 162 Reference exchange slave monitor PIN 191 162 Reference exchange slave ratio PIN 189 Reference exchange slave sign 190 162 RS232 PORT Connection pinouts 18 153 154 156 157 161 RS232 PORT1 PARAMETER 18 154 RS232 PORT Port1 Baud rate 187 153 158 222 RS232 PORT Port1 function PIN 188 153 RS232 PORT1 PORT1 REF EXCHANGE 140 161 Transmitting a menu list to a 157 Transmitting SERIAL LINKS 232 Index parameter data file to a PC 154 155 156 157 Technical Date ceo rete rur exe Ee Ree toe E RE Re 22 105 USB ports wise 153 160 168 233 Tips for using the manual eee 21 Signal test pins eee 27 105 TRIP
261. HI value PIN 318 300 00 0 01 2 13 5 3 2 RUN INPUT SETUP RUN input LO value PIN 319 300 00 0 00 1 13 3 1 1 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIP2 Input range PIN 320 1 of 4 ranges 10V range 13 3 1 2 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIP2 Input offset 321 100 00 0 00 13 3 1 3 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIP2 Linear scaling factor PIN 322 3 0000 1 0000 13 3 1 4 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIP2 Max clamp level 323 13 3 1 5 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIP2 Min clamp level 324 300 00 100 00 300 00 100 00 13 3 1 9 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIP2 Digital IP high value for output 1 PIN 325 13 311 10 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIPZ Digital IP low value for output 1 326 300 00 0 00 326 18 31 11 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIPZ Digital IP high value for output 2 PIN 327 300 00 0 01 327 13 3 1 12 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIP2 Digital IP low value for output 2 PIN 328 300 00 0 00 328 13 91 18 UIP2 T2 SETUP UIP2 Threshold PIN329 30 000V 6 000V 329 13 3 1 1 UIP3 T3 SETUP UIP3 Input range PIN 330 1 of 4 ranges 10V range 18 3 1 2 UIP3 T3 SETUP UIP3 Input offset PIN 331 100 00 0 00 13 3 1 3 UIP3 T3 SETUP UIP3 Linear scaling factor PIN 332 3 0000 1 0000 13 3 14 UIP3 T3 SETUP Max clamp level 333 300 00 100 00 13 3 1 5 UIP3 T3 SETUP UIP3 Min clamp level 334 300 00 100 00 13 3 1 9
262. ID 1 2 PID output 96 trim 445 468 PID 1 3 445 PID1 OUTPUT TRIM Sets the scaling trim factor for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the PID output PID1 OUTPUT TRIM 3 0000 0 2000 445 The output of the PID may be inverted by selecting a negative trim factor APPLICATION BLOCKS 25 3 3 19 PID 1 2 PID profile mode select PIN 446 469 Allows selection of gain profile PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN curve shape PID1 PROFL MODE 1 of 5 modes 0 446 ode Law of profile curve Yaxis output Yaxis MAX Yaxis output Linear change between MIN and MAX Yaxis output Cubic law change between MIN and MAX M 0 1 2 Yaxis output Square law change between MIN and 3 4 Yaxis output 4 power law change between MIN and These X and Y axis values are always associated with 436 PID1 PROP GAIN each other OUTPUT PRFL X AXIS GET FROM 3 3 20 PID 1 2 PID minimum proportional gain PIN 447 470 PID 1 3 447 PID1 MIN PROP GN 447 PID1 MIN PROP GN 20 00 Sets the minimum value for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN PID parameter profile ouput PID1 MIN PROP GN 0 00 to 100 00 20 00 447 3 3 21 PID 1 2 PID Profile X axis minimum PIN 448 471 These X and Y axis values are always associated with each other PID 1 3 448 PID1 X AXIS MIN 448 PID1 X AXIS MIN 0 00 Sets the minimum value for the PARAMETER
263. IL remove the problem then a hardware failure is suspected 9 1 5 SELF TEST MESSAGE Integral armature current cal fail This alarm will appear at power up if the self calibration of the integral armature current amplifier has failed If INITIALISING turning the control supply off and on does not remove INT ARM CUR CAL FAIL the problem then a hardware failure is suspected MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 149 9 1 6 SELF TEST MESSAGE Stop drive to adjust parameter This message appears when attempting to alter a parameter which belongs to the class that is inadvisable to adjust while the motor is running STOP TO ADIUST The message will blink as the up down keys are pressed The parameter remains unaltered The drive must be stopped to adjust the parameter 9 1 7 SELF TEST MESSAGE Enter password This message appears when attempting to alter a Parameter name parameter before the correct password has been ENTER PASSWORD entered The message will blink as the up down keys are pressed See 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL 9 1 8 SELF TEST MESSAGE Enable GOTO GETFROM This message appears when attempting to configure connections before the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM mode has been enabled The message will blink as the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM up down keys are pressed 9 1 9 SELF TEST MESSAGE GOTO CONFLICT At the end of a configuration session the user must ENABLE GOTO GETFROM always proceed to the ENABLE
264. IN 553 MULTI FUNCTION 6 Function mode 6 554 MULTI FUNCTION 6 Output select 6 PIN 555 MULTI FUNCTION 7 Function mode 7 PIN 556 MULTI FUNCTION 7 Output select 7 PIN 557 MULTI FUNCTION 8 Function mode 8 PIN 558 MULTI FUNCTION 8 Output select 8 PIN 559 LATCH Latch output monitor PIN 561 LATCH Latch data input PIN 561 LATCH Latch clock input PIN 562 LATCH Latch set input PIN 563 LATCH Latch reset input PIN 564 LATCH Latch value for high output PIN 565 LATCH Latch value for low output PIN 566 FILTER 1 Filter1 output monitor 568 FILTER 1 Filter1 time constant PIN 569 FILTER 2 Filter2 output monitor PIN 573 FILTER 2 Filter2 time constant PIN 574 BATCH COUNTER Counter value monitor PIN 578 BATCH COUNTER Clock input PIN 579 BATCH COUNTER Reset enable input PIN 580 BATCH COUNTER Counter target number PIN 581 BATCH COUNTER Count gt than target flag PIN 582 INTERVAL TIMER Time elaosed monitor PIN 583 67 Range Default PIN Values 300 00 0 00 300 00 300 00 0 00 Ww 0 300 00 0 00 7 300 00 300 00 533 1 300 00 0 00 533 534 7535 7536 537 538 539 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 0 6 1 of 7 switch C 0 6 1 of 7 0 6 1 of 7 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 6 1 of 7 5 0 6 1 of 7 C O switch 552 0 6 1 of 7 0 6 1 of 7 C O switch 556 55 0 6
265. IN177 0 1 600 08 5 00 177 R 88 STALL TRIP MENU Stall trip enable PINT7Z8 Enabled 178 R 81 8 2 STALL TRIP MENU Stall current level PIN 179 0 180 00 95 00 179 R 8 18 3 STALL TRIP MENU Stall delay time PIN 180 0 1 600 08 10 0 secs 180 81 9 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 7 Active trip monitor PIN 181 0000 FFFF 0000 181 819 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Stored trip monitor PIN182 0000 FFFF_ o 182 18 1 10 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS External trip reset enable PIN 183 Enabled 222 PIN number tables 15 1 3 Serial links 187 249 SS A Ei 8 eS ee R 19 12 88232 PORT Portt Baud rate PINTS7 300 57660 9600 187 10 3 1 PORTI REF EXCHANGE 7 Ref exchange slave ratio 189 3 0000 1 0000 189 10 3 2 PORT REF EXCHANGE Ref exchange slave sign PIN 190 0 1 Nominvet 190 10 3 3 PORTI REF EXCHANGE Ref exchange slave monitor PIN 191 300 00 0 00 191 77777111034 PORTI REF EXCHANGE Ref exchange master monitor PIN 192 300 00 0 00 182 19 45 PORT 1 COMMS LINK 7 1 group 0 193 0 7 198 90 2 5 PORT 1 COMMS LINK Port PN194 0 15 Jo Mor 19 25 PORT 1 COMMS LINK Port 1 error code PINI9S re Ms FIELDBUS CONFIG Fieldbus data control PIN 199 FBUS ON LINE MON Hidden pin RESERVED 103 3 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker enable 240 on Disabed 2
266. IVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 See 8 1 4 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Digital OP short circuit trip enable PIN 174 8 1 11 15 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Bad reference exchange MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 See 8 1 6 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Reference exchange trip enable 176 Note There is a flag on hidden PIN 701 which warns of a bad reference exchange This flag is reset by a start or jog command MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 147 8 1 11 16 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Cannot autotune MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 During autotune the drive turns off the field to prevent shaft rotation An autotune error will be triggered by speed feedback being gt 20 of rated speed or field current feedback being gt 5 of rated field current during the autotune activity Note Speed feedback being gt 20 may be caused by residual field magnetisation resulting in shaft rotation If so retry the Autotune with the motor shaft mechanically locked 8 1 11 17 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Autotune quit MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 The controller will quit the autotune function if the coast stop start or run terminals are disabled taken low Alternatively if the autotune ENABLE DISABLE is instructed to be DISABLED during its autotune sequence then this message will appear See 6 8 9 CURRENT CONTROL Autotune enable PIN 92 A time out approx 2 mins will also cause an autotune quit 8 1 11 18 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Contactor lock out
267. Input When low the output follows the ramped reference input with a ramp time determined by the FORWARD up down and REVERSE up down ramp time parameters Introduction and Technical Data 29 Dual Current Clamp Enable Digital input DIO4 T21 This input alters the configuration of the current clamps When the input is low Analogue input T6 provides a symmetric bi polar current limit When high analogue input T6 is the positive current clamp and analogue input T5 is the negative current clamp Zero speed Digital Output DOP1 T22 The operating level of this output can be modified by 117 ZERO INTLK SPD to give the desired speed threshold of operation A high output 24V indicates Zero speed Ramping flag Digital Output DOP2 T23 This goes high when the Run Mode Ramp is ramping Used to prevent speed loop integration during ramp Drive healthy Digital Output DOP3 T24 This output is high when the controller is healthy This means that no alarms have tripped and the drive is ready to run OV terminal OV 25 DC Tachogenerator Input T26 Full speed setting range 10V to 200V Input impedance 150K Ohms Signal range OV to 200V User Reference 10V T27 User 10V Reference 10V T28 10 00V 0 5 10mA max Short circuit protection to OV Armature Current Output IARM T29 to 5V linear output for to 100 model current Output current capability 10 max Short circuit protection to OV Programmable Un
268. July 2001 4 04 blocks 4 05 5 01 DATA CORRUPTION possible if This was possible when using PL PILOT if PILOT left 9 1 1 Mar 5 01 control supply removed during active running and control supply removed Now OK 2002 ASCII COMMS transmission 5 01 DOP3 gives unwanted low to high DOP3 is default output of DRIVE HEALTHY FLAG so is 13 7 Mar 5 01 transitions if ASCII COMMS active normally high and causes trip on first low which masks 2002 bug Bug was more of a nuisance if DOP3 re configured for new task which requires normally low output AND ASCII COMMS was active Now OK 5 02 No bugs recorded in main drive July 5 02 blocks 02 5 12 No bugs recorded in main drive Jan O3 5 12 blocks 5 14 UIP3 malfunction when 8 MAX 13 3 1 Sep 04 5 14 TACHO VOLTS set below 30V Now OK SUMMER SUMMER2 subtotals description in manual and GETFROM list transposed Now OK Still transposed in PL pilot version up to 4 05 Apps man 64 SPD CUR REF 3 MON changed to 64 SPEED REF 3 MON Monitoring function inhibited in speed bypass mode 6 6 4 18 RATED ARM VOLTS feedback 6 1 15 scaling assumes value of 160V internally for entered values below 160V 126 ARM VOLTS MON assumed entered value Now OK 5 14 10 Amp 20 Amp 50 Amp Field For customers who require higher field current options 6 1 4 July 5 16 options Display reading made the displayed parameters now agree with the increased 08 compatible with these options capability 5 14 Field current loop becomes in Work rou
269. K 3 43 JOG SLACK RAMP Jog slack mode has this ramp time which overides any others PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN JOG SLACK RAMP 0 1 to 600 seconds 1 00 secs 43 Note The ramp time is the same for up down and forward reverse It is the time taken to reach 100 speed CHANGE PARAMETERS 81 6 4 CHANGE PARAMETERS MOTORISED POT RAMP PIN number range 45 to 54 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 54 MP MEMORY BOOT UP MOTORISED POT RAMP 45 MP OP MONITOR MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 This menu controls the parameters for the motorised 46 MP UP TIME pot MP function This is the default terminal function for terminals T7 T8 T9 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 The motorised pot is a ramp facility in addition to the SOME DOW NDIME normal reference ramp It may also be used to ramp a parameter other than MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 the speed reference by re configuring its output 48 MP UP COMMAND connection CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 Ld MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 49 MP DOWN COMMAND MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 50 MP MAX CLAMP MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 51 MP MIN CLAMP MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 52 MP PRESET MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 53 MP PRESET VALUE 82 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 4 1 MOTORISED POT RAMP Block diagram PIN 53 Preset Memory boot up 1 Preset disabled 2 Retain MOTORISED POT RAMP Value enabled PIN 52 PIN 54 Preset Motorised Motor
270. LED 6 4 5 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Maximum minimum clamps PINs 50 51 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 50 MP MAX CLAMP Sets the limit of positive cw rotation of the motorised pot MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 51 MP MIN CLAMP 51 MP MIN CLAMP 100 0096 Sets the limit of negative acw PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN rotation of the motorised pot MP MIN CLAMP 300 00 100 00 51 Note Clockwise rotation is towards the ve limit anticlockwise rotation is towards the ve limit Always ensure the clamps allow some movement between them do not let the clamps cross each other PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT MP MAX CLAMP 300 00 100 00 50 6 4 6 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP preset PIN 52 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 52 MP PRESET When enabled the output is PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN set to the MP PRESET VALUE MP PRESET ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 52 Default connection from terminal 7 UIP7 If a momentary preset at start of running is required connect a jumper from 720 SYSTEM RESET to 376 UIP7 LO VAL OP1 This causes the system reset pulse to be OR d with terminal 7 See 13 2 4 JUMPER connections 84 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 4 7 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Preset value PIN 53 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 53 MP PRESET VALUE 53 MP PRESET VALUE N 0 00 The output assumes this value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN if MP PRESET is high MP PRESET VALUE 300 00 0 00 53 N
271. LEVEL 1 right key again to enter the CHANGE CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 PARAMETERS RUN MODE RAMPS menu Then press the up key for the CHANGE PARAMETERS CALIBRATION menu Enter the CALIBRATION CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 menu by pressing the right key Once there use RUN MODE RAMPS 3 the up or down key to travel round the circular menu 3 Only 8 of the available parameters need to be CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 adjusted for QUICK START PINs 2 3 4 5 6 CALIBRATION 3 9 18 19 Skip the other windows 4 Select the quick start parameters by using the up down keys Press the right key to enter the parameter adjustment window for each in turn Modify each one to suit your system using the up down keys Use the left key to back out of each parameter adjustment window and return to the circular CALIBRATION menu When you have finished modifying the 8 quick start parameters it is time to save the changes you have made Use the left key to return to the ENTRY MENU CHANGE PARAMETERS menu Use the up key to arrive at ENTRY MENU PARAMETER SAVE Use the right key to enter the PARAMETER SAVE window Use the up key to save the parameters While the save is taking place the bottom line will read SAVING When the save is complete the bottom line will read FINISHED You can now return by holding down the left key This will take you to the default diagnostics and then one tap right to the ENTRY MENU Note For a description of the default diagnostics see 5 1 6 Defa
272. LL ENBL 6 10 8 1 Low speed performance When running at very low speeds the SPEED ADAPTION may need adjustment for optimum performance The SPEED PI ADAPTION default settings are designed to give lower gain with low error This provides smooth steady state performance However applications that require precise control at very low speeds may function better with the adaption disabled If the adaption is required to be on during normal running and off at low speeds then use a MULTIFUNCTION block to connect an inversion of 120 AT ZERO SPD FLAG to 79 SPD ADAPT ENABLE See 6 7 7 6 SPEED ADAPTION Speed loop adaption enable PIN 79 See 6 7 7 7 SPEED ADAPTION Using small speed inputs 6 5 1 4 Precise stopping 116 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE PINS used 122 and 240 to 244 Note It is only possible to use this function with SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 PLX models and PL models with the regenerative 244 IN POSITION FLAG stopping facility See 3 3 1 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATE 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK This sub is is used Jod dun SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 orientation t requires the mec anica system to be 240 MARKER ENABLE fitted with an incremental encoder with bi directional output to provide position feedback SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 If the encoder has been selected for a speed 241 MARKER OFFSET feedback option in the CALIBRATION menu then that fun
273. LOCK OP MONITOR 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE 134 DIAGNOSTICS 7 6 1 BLOCK OP MONITOR General description The majority of the functional blocks within the system are also provided with an output monitor in the block menu listing It is normally the first window The outputs are contained in each block listing because it is convenient to have the output monitor adjacent to the relevant adjustment parameters when programming In addition all the block outputs are grouped together in this menu for rapid sequential access if required The block output monitor order is the same as the order of the blocks in the BLOCK OP CONFIG configuration menu See 13 11 CONFIGURATION BLOCK OP CONFIG 7 7 DIAGNOSTICS EL1 2 3 RMS MON 169 DIAGNOSTICS 2 169 EL1 2 3 RMS MON 169 EL1 2 3 RMS MON Shows the rms AC supply voltage applied PARAMETER RANGE PIN to the EL1 EL2 EL3 terminals 5 EL1 2 3 RMS MON 0 0 to 1000 0 V 169 Note With no applied voltage there may be a small offset This does not affect the actual reading 7 8 DIAGNOSTICS KILOWATTS PIN 170 DIAGNOSTICS 2 170 DC KILOWATTS MON R 170 DC KILOWATTS MON R 0 0 Shows the output power at the drive PARAMETER RANGE PIN A A terminals in Kilowatts DC KILOWATTS MON 3000 0 KW 170 Note negative output power shows that the PL X is regenerating into the AC supply T
274. LT PIN be enabled or disabled FIELD ENABLE ENABLED OR DISABLED ENABLED 99 Note The field fail alarm is automatically inhibited if the field control is disabled 6 9 3 FIELD CONTROL Voltage output PIN 100 R FIELD CONTROL 3 R 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 90 00 Y Sets the DC field voltage clamp PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN as a 96 of the AC supply volts FIELD VOLTS OP 96 0 00 to 100 0096 90 0096 It may be necessary to set the field voltage instead of the field current E g There may only be a volts rating on the dataplate See 7 3 4 FLD LOOP MONITOR Field firing angle of advance monitor PIN 146 NOTE The value of this parameter is not restored to the default by a 4 KEY RESET It remains as calibrated This parameter allows voltage mode to be achieved by setting an upper clamp level to the field current loop Note The rated field amps current setting in the calibration menu will be a limiting value irrespective of this clamp voltage setting This is to provide protection to the drive and the motor Conversely this voltage clamp setting will be a limiting value irrespective of the rated field amps setting This means that in order to ensure that the field output voltage always remains at the clamp voltage it is necessary to set the rated field amps to a level that is slightly in excess of the cold field current Then as the field warms up any voltage rise need
275. MODE RAMPS Ramp external preset 75 6 2 12 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp preset value PIN 1 75 6 2 13 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp S profile PIN 32 0000 eae 75 6 2 14 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp hold enable PIN 33 sess 75 6 2 15 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping threshold PIN 34 sssssessssssssm mene 76 6 2 16 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag PIN 35 20020 0 0 0000707024 76 6 3 CHANGE PARAMETERS JOG CRAWL SLACK 20 0 2 20 7 7 7 7 24 244 77 6 3 1 JOG CRAWL SLACK Block diagram including RUN MODE 78 6 3 2 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog speed 1 2 PINS 37 38 0 0 0 22 79 6 3 3 JOG CRAWL SLACK Slack speed 1 2 PINS 39 40 2 79 6 3 4 JOG CRAWL SLACK Crawl speed PIN 41 000 79 6 3 5 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog mode select PIN 42 0 80 6 3 6 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog Slack ramp 43 0 0 0 22 22 2 80 6 4 CHANGE PARAMETERS MOTORISED POT 2 0 00 772 4 81 6 4 1 MOTORISED POT RAMP Block 2 0 0 82 6 4 2 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP output monitor PIN 45
276. MPING FLAG RUN MODE RAMPS 21 RAMP OP MONITOR R R RUN MODE RAMPS 22 FORWARD UP TIME RUN MODE RAMPS 3 3 3 23 FORWARD DOWN TIME R RUN MODE RAMPS 24 REVERSE UP TIME RUN MODE RAMPS 25 REVERSE DOWN TIME RUN MODE RAMPS 26 RAMP INPUT RUN MODE RAMPS 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED RUN MODE RAMPS 28 REVERSE MIN SPEED RUN MODE RAMPS 29 RAMP AUTO PRESET RUN MODE RAMPS 30 RAMP EXT PRESET RUN MODE RAMPS 31 RAMP PRESET VALUE RUN MODE RAMPS 32 RAMP S PROFILE 3 3 3 442544255246 72 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 2 1 RUN MODE RAMPS Block diagram including JOG PIN 27 Fwd min speed T4 Default PIN 28 Rev min speed PIN 37 JOG speed 1 PIN 38 JOG speed 2 PIN 39 SLACK speed1 PIN 40 SLACK speed2 Crawl speed T19 Default Jog Mode Select PIN 42 Jog speed 1 low low high Jog speed 1 Jog slack ramp Jog speed 2 high low high Jog speed 2 Jog slack ramp Crawl high high low Crawl speed Run mode ramp RUN MODE RAMP And JOG CRAWL SLACK Ramp Preset Run mode ramp OP Monitor PIN 21 PIN 34 Ramping Flag Threshold Ramping Flag output PIN 31 Value gate Ramp Preset Value input PIN 30 Ramp Ext Preset Permanent action in run mode momentary action at commencement of Jog PIN 29 Ramp Auto Preset System Reset Pulse PIN 720 PIN 43 Jog Slack Operating JOG MODE function SELECT T19 START T33 IP level JOG T32
277. MS LINK Please refer to the SERIAL COMMS MANUAL Note PORT 1 FUNCTION is not subject to password control for software versions 4 06 and above 2 For speed REFERENCE EXCHANGE to or from another unit in digital format during running This allows low cost digital speed accuracy ratio between drives especially when using encoder feedback Note Some computers may not be fitted with an RS232 COM port Instead they will possess a USB port In this case it is necessary to fit a USB RS232 convertor E g Single in line convertor type USB to serial male D9 or multiport type Belkin F5U120uPC After installation of the convertor drivers right click on the My Computer icon and select Properties Device Manager Ports to find the port allocations COM1 COM2 COMS etc Then you must use the nominated USB port allocation within Hyperterminal PL PILOT See 10 1 4 How to use USB ports SERIAL LINKS 153 10 1 1 RS232 PORT1 Connection pinouts The socket is type FCC68 4 way pin function D pin D5 RS232 PORT1 socket X 24V not connected located just above the transmit D2 centre terminal block Z receive D3 Unit to host 9 way female D type part no LA102595 Unit to unit 2 metre cable part number LA102596 See 10 2 3 2 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive to drive for connection details Warning the 24V supply on pin 2 may damage your PC or other instrument If in doubt do not connect it The
278. NCTION Block diagram Aux input PIN 544 Function mode GET FROM Function Enabled MULTI O FUNCTION O 1 Direct GO TO Disabled SIGN CHANGER V Main input Rectifier GET FROM PIN 545 Output select 52 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 10 2 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 Function mode PINs 544 6 8 550 2 4 6 8 MULTI FUNCTION 1 3 544 MULTIFUN1 MODE 544 MULTIFUN1 MODE n C O SWITCH Select 1 of 7 transfer functions PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN according the table below MULTIFUN1 MODE 1 of 7 functions C O SWITCH 544 Note that a linear signal will be treated as a logical O by a logical function if its value is zero any units any other value including negative values will be treated as a logical 1 Mode Function Function type OP Description for MULTIFUN1 OP SEL ENABLED 0 SWITCH Or JUMPER Linear or logical The value at the aux input Use this for connections if JUMPERS are all used 1 COMPARATOR 2 linear inputs logical output If MAIN gt AUX output 1 If MAIN lt AUX output O 2 AND GATE 2 logical inputs logical output MAIN AUX Output 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 3 OR GATE 2 logical inputs logical output MAIN AUX Output 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 4 INVERT 1 logical input logical output MAIN Output The invert function ouput is 0 1 also the EXOR exclusive 1 0 ofthe MAIN and OP SELECT 5 SIGN CHANGER 1 linear input linear output Output MAIN X
279. NT GAIN 0 00 to 200 00 3 00 94 This can be set by using the AUTOTUNE function Generally an increased integral gain will improve the response If you change your supply voltage current calibration or motor type then re adjust this parameter CHANGE PARAMETERS 105 6 8 12 CURRENT CONTROL Discontinuous current point PIN 95 R CURRENT CONTROL 95 CUR DISCONTINUITY Set to the discontinuous current PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN boundary level for your motor CUR DISCONTINUITY 0 00 to 200 00 13 00 95 This can be set by using the AUTOTUNE function The motor supply combination will possess a property called the discontinuous continuous current point which is important for optimum tuning of the current loop If you change your supply voltage current calibration or motor type then re adjust this parameter 6 8 12 1 Setting the current loop control terms manually As the current increases there comes a point when the current stops appearing in 6 discrete lumps per cycle and just starts going continuous At this point the natural gain of the system changes dramatically If the unit knows this point it can automatically compensate for the gain change and produce an optimum response The current level of rated motor current at which it occurs is entered here If you change your supply voltage current calibration or motor type the 3 values for PINs 93 94 95 must be adjusted accordingly To observe t
280. O Drive personality Fieldbus data control DRIVE PERSONALITY Jumper 1 to 8 GETFROM Bit Packed GOTO Passive motor set Jumper 1 to 8 GOTO PASSIVE MOTOR SET Rated armature amps Current limit Rated field amps Base rated RPM Desired maximum RPM Zero speed offset Max tacho volts Speed feedback type Quadrature enable Encoder lines Motor encoder speed ratio Encoder sign R compensation Field current feedback trim Armature volts trim Analog tacho trim Rated armature volts Forward up time Forward down time Reverse up time Reverse down time Jog speed 1 Jog speed 2 Slack speed 1 Recipe page Slack speed 2 Max current response Crawl speed ID monitor Unit Identity Jog mode select Jog slack ramp Conflict help menu Parameter save Armature current burden ohms CONFLICT HELP MENU Stop ramp time Drop out speed Internal speed reference 1 Speed reference 2 Speed current ref 3 mon Ramped speed reference 4 Number of conflicts Multiple GOTO on PIN Speed current reference 3 sign Speed current reference 3 ratio Maximum positive speed reference Maximum negative speed reference Speed proportional gain Speed integral time constant Current clamp scaler Curren
281. OG 10 MONITOR analogue output monitor PIN 161 11 300V 0 000V 161 R 75 DIGITAL IO MONITOR 7 UIPZ to 9 digital input monitor PIN 162 0 1 times 8 00000000 162 R 75 2 IGITALIO MONITOR DIP1 4 and DIO1 4 dig IP monitor PIN 163 0 1 times 8 00000000 168 R 75 3 DIGITAL 10 MONITOR DOPI 3 Control IPs dig OP mon PIN 164 0 1 times 8 00000000 164 754 bIGITALIO MONITOR Armature bridge flag PIN765 0 1 tow 165 R 755 DIGITALIO MONITOR Drive start flag 168 on 1161 R 756 DIGITAL IO MONITOR Drive run fag PIN 167 0 1 tow 167 R 767 DIGITAL 10 MONITOR Internal running mode monitor PIN 168 1 of modes Stop 168 R 77 PIAGNOSTICS ELUZ 3RMS monter PIN 169 1 oov 169 R 78 BIAGNOSTICS DCKILOWATTS monitor _PIN 169 3000 0Kw 0 0 170 R 81 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed fb mismatch trip enable PIN 171 0 1 Enabled 171 8 2 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed fb mismatch tolerance PIN 172 0 100 00 50 00 172 R 81 3 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Field loss trip disable PIN173 0 1 Enabled 173 814 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Dig OP short circuit trip enable PIN 174 0 1 Disabled 174 85 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Missing pulse trip enable PIN 175 0 1 Enabled 178 8 6 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Reference exhange trip enable PIN 176 0 1 Disabled 176 817 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Overspeed delay time P
282. OM RANGE DEFAULT Defines the source PIN for data to PARAMETER output via the TRANSMIT channel GET FROM PIN O00 to 720 400 This is the data that will be transmitted by a master and by a slave in response to receiving data Hence to cascade units there is one MASTER feeding the first SLAVE then the first SLAVE feeds the second SLAVE etc The data being received in each unit is connected internally by the REF EXCH SLAVE GOTO in the BLOCK OP CONFIG menu The data being sent to the next unit is determined by this GETFROM DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 163 11 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS This menu is used to alter the display R DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 2 presentation SOFTWARE VERSION ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 R DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 2 REDUCED MENU ENABLE DISPLAY FUNCTIONS The REDUCED MENU shows only the commonly R PASSWORD CONTROL 3 used selections and enables more rapid travel around the tree structure There are 2 sets of reduced menu parameter values that can be selected See 6 1 17 CALIBRATION Motor 1 or DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 2 select PIN 20 LANGUAGE SELECT If you see this symbol in the manual this indicates that the window is in the reduced and full menu 11 1 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Reduced menu enable R DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 2 REDUCED MENU ENABLE Enables the reduced menu PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT display format REDUCED MENU ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED See 6 1 17 CALIBRATION Motor 1
283. OM end can also connect onto PINs that have already been connected using a GOTO or GETFROM allowing the fan out of an output for example The JUMPER1 16 nomenclature is also independantly used in 13 12 CONFIGURATION FIELDBUS CONFIG Up to 16 JUMPER connections are available The 8 MULTI FUNCTION blocks may also be used as jumpers See the applications manual for a description of these blocks Each JUMPER is identified by a number and possesses its own configuration menu In the menu is a GOTO window and a GET FROM window to define the connections A JUMPER is a special class of connection that is normally reserved for making parallel connections or connections to the interior PINs inside blocks If a JUMPER is used to connect an APPLICATION block output it is not able to activate the block This is only possible using the block GOTO connection which is found within the BLOCK OP CONFIG menu See also 13 8 CONFIGURATION STAGING POSTS 13 2 5 Block Disconnect PIN 400 When you enter the GOTO or GETFROM windows the starting point is approximately midway at PIN 400 Block Disconnect This enables rapid access to either end of the range APPLICATION blocks are located above 400 and DRIVE control loop blocks below Connecting within a GOTO window of a block to a PIN other than 400 will activate the block Conversely connecting to 400 will de activate the block 13 2 6 Hidden parameters There are a small number of parameters that are availab
284. ON BLOCKS 2 C O SW1TCH 1 3 16 1 C O SWITCH Block diagram Switch 1 C O SWITCH 1 HI value Eu pesi O O z Control LO PIN 604 Output control PN Switch 1 LO value PIN 606 64 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 16 1 1 C O switch used as sample and hold function Note A sample and hold function can be implemented by connecting the output to 606 C O SW1 LO VALUE The value 605 SW1 VALUE will be transfered to 606 C O SW1 LO VALUE when 604 C O SW1 CONTROL is HIGH It will be held at the value pertaining when the control goes LOW 3 16 2 C O SWITCH 1 2 3 4 Control PIN 604 607 610 613 C O SW1TCH 1 3 604 C O SW1 CONTROL Sets the changeover switch PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN position to the LO or HI input C O SW1 CONTROL LOW or HIGH LOW 604 3 16 3 C O SWITCH 1 2 3 4 Inputs HI LO PIN 605 608 611 614 606 609 612 615 C O SW1TCH 1 3 505 SW1 HI VALUE 605 C O SW1 HI VALUE 0 00 Sets the level of the IP selected PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN by a logic HIGH control mode C O SW1 HI VALUE 300 00 0 00 605 Note 606 C O SW1 LO VALUE Sets the level of the IP selected by a logic LOW control mode 3 16 4 C O SWITCH 1 2 3 4 C O switch GOTO C O SW1TCH 1 3 GOTO Sets the PIN for the GOTO PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT connection target parameter GOTO 2 to 720 400 Block disconnect Note To activate the block the GOTO must be connected to a PIN other than 4
285. ONING PROCEDURES 2 2 42 4 5 1 Quick start Calibration re rRNA YR a UY VERSA TR RE RR RENE ER PER REFERS 42 4 5 2 Quick start calibration step by 02 2 2 2 44 1 1 nnne nnn nnns 43 4 5 3 Quick start current loop AUTOTUNE 2 2 2 1 7 2 0 70 11 nnn 43 4 5 4 PASSIVE MOTOR defaults Using passive motor menu for small test 44 Menu tree structure iicn Ri I e eh chen age abet eR 45 5 1 TUNCTIONS ee eee ok eoe ooo ERE ave cine Ox v Se cR ORO Seabees Ore Orr Or Ore bie Sencha 46 5 1 1 Incrementing and decrementing parameter values 2 47 5 1 2 PARAMETER SAVE tue en rs al dei Pod Del pere drops E e Aer ae Aes t Ere eo NOE qua 47 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default 1 2 0 47 5 1 4 Branch hopping between monitor WINKOWS 2 2 1211 47 521725 ube 47 5 1 6 Default DIAGNOSTIC summary windOWs ene hes sessi remises sre 48 5 1 7 Finding the software version number of the
286. OP MONITOR 3 qu OG 444422225 126 DIAGNOSTICS 7 2 1 ARM LOOP MONITOR Armature current demand monitor ARM LOOP MONITOR 3 133 ARM CUR DEM MON Shows the value of the total armature current demand as a of full scale 133 ARM CUR DEM 0 00 PIN 133 PARAMETER RANGE ARM CUR DEM MON 150 00 133 Note There is a hidden PIN 718 which contains an unfiltered version of current demand 7 2 2 ARM LOOP MONITOR Armature current monitor ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 H 134 ARM CUR 96 MON Shows the value of the average DC arm current as a 96 of rated arm amps PIN 134 R 134 ARM CUR MON 0 00 PARAMETER RANGE ARM CUR MON 150 00 Note There is an unfiltered version of this value on hidden PIN 719 7 2 3 ARM LOOP MONITOR Armature current amps monitor ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 H 135 ARM CUR AMPS MON Shows the value of the average DC armature current in amps 7 2 4 ARM I LOOP MONITOR Upper current ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 136 UPPER CUR LIM MN Shows the 96 value of the scaled upper current limit in the current clamp block PIN 135 PARAMETER RANGE PIN ARM CUR AMPS MON 3000 0 AMPS 135 limit monitor PIN 136 136 UPPER CUR LIM MN 0 0096 PARAMETER RANGE PIN UPPER CUR LIM MN 150 0096 136 This is the last stage clamp in
287. OR Stiction compensation PIN 502 40 3 7 5 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Stiction web speed threshold PIN 503 40 3 7 6 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Static friction compensation PIN 504 41 3 7 7 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Dynamic friction compensation PIN 505 41 3 7 8 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Friction sign 506 2 2022 42 3 7 9 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Fixed mass inertia 507 2 42 3 7 10 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Variable mass inertia 508 42 3 7 11 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Material width PIN 509 0 2 2 27 2 27 7 2 43 3 7 12 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel line speed input PIN 510 43 3 7 13 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel scaler PIN 511 02 2 22 2 2 44 3 7 14 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel input monitor 512 2 2 44 3 7 15 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel filter time constant PIN 513 44 3 7 16 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension demand input 514 44 3 7 17 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension scaler PIN 515 7 4 4 0 2 45 3 7 18 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torqe memory select 51
288. OSTICS menu can be used to monitor actual levels of feedback it can then be entered in the 18 RATED ARM VOLTS calibration parameter This trim may then be returned to 1 000 CHANGE PARAMETERS 69 6 1 14 CALIBRATION Analog tacho trim PIN 17 CALIBRATION 3 17 ANALOG TACHO TRIM n Sets a positive trim factor for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the analog tacho feedback ANALOG TACHO TRIM 1 0000 to 1 1000 1 0000 17 This trim factor may be applied during drive running The factor is always greater than unity hence can only increase the strength of the feedback The closed loop system then receives feedback that is too high and causes a reduction of the tacho voltage feedback and hence a reduction in speed This trim is useful if the precise 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS calibration parameter is not exactly known and must be discovered during running by starting with a higher than expected value Once the correct level of feedback has been determined using this trim monitor actual levels of feedback in the DIAGNOSTICS menu it can then be entered in the 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS calibration parameter and this trim returned to 1 000 6 1 15 CALIBRATION Rated armature volts PIN 18 QUICK START CALIBRATION 3 18 RATED ARM VOLTS Sets the desired max armature PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN voltage at 100 speed RATED ARM VOLTS 0 0 to 1000 0 VOLTS 460 0 V DC 18 Note This must not exceed the maximum rated armature v
289. OlS 12 o plein dee AERE IR cisicsacgiaiaseieidicieationeigitiogss 171 13 2 5 Block Disconnect PIN 400 iiis iil ure 171 13 2 0 Hidden parameters eicere e dene rae repe Aras ee rhe ra bana Ue RR ir Ra 171 13 2 7 CONFIGURATION ENABLE GOTO 172 13 3 CONFIGURATION UNIVERSAL 5 172 13 3 1 UNIVERSAL INPUTS Block diagram 2 40 174 13 3 1 1 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Input range PIN 3 2 0 to 3 9 0 174 13 3 1 2 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Input offset PIN 3 2 1 to 3 9 1 174 13 3 1 2 1 4 20mA loop input SETUP 2 sisse 175 13 3 1 3 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Linear scaling ratio PIN 3 2 2 to 3 9 2 175 13 3 1 4 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Maximum clamp level PIN 3 2 3 to 3 9 3 175 13 3 1 5 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Minimum clamp level 3 2 4 to 3 9 4 175 13 3 1 6 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Make analog GOTO destination connection 176 13 3 1 7 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Make digital output 1 GOTO destination connection 176 13 3 1 8 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Mak
290. PD CUR RF3 RATIO to 0 0000 6 7 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED CONTROL PIN number range 69 to 79 SPEED CONTROL 3 SPEED ADAPTION 4 CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 R SPEED CONTROL 3 SPEED CONTROL 3 69 MAX POS SPEED REF This menu allows parameter adjustment for the speed loop error amplifier It consists of this list R SPEED CONTROL 3 and a sub menu called SPEED PI ADAPTION This 70 MAX NEG SPEED REF menu refers to the block diagram below starting R SPEED CONTROL 3 71 SPEED PROP GAIN R SPEED CONTROL 3 72 SPEED INT T C then prevailing at the input This level will normally also be zero providing the run mode ramp block has also been reset The signal is then compared SPEED CONTROL 3 with the speed feedback and processed by the 73 SPEED INT RESET after the second summing junction The summed speed loop error amplifier value of all the references is subject to a maximum ve and ve clamp It then enters the stop mode ramp block This superimposes a ramp to zero at a programmed rate on the prevailing input signal during a stop command When a run command is received the output immediately assumes the level The basic gain and time constants are adjustable in this list and with further sophistication in the sub list SPEED PI ADAPTION After being output from the error amplifier the signal now represents current reference This current reference signal is then selected for output by the speed bypass change ov
291. PID2 POS CLAMP 100 00 96 AUX GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 467 PID2 NEG CLAMP 100 00 96 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 468 PID2 OUTPUT TRIM 0 2000 MULTI FUNCTION 7 3 SIENTE 330 UIP3 IP RANGE 0 331 UIP3 IP OFFSET 0 00 332 UIP3 CAL RATIO 1 0000 333 UIP3 CLAMP 100 00 334 UIP3 MIN CLAMP 100 00 96 UIP ANALOG GOTO 400 Disconnect 469 PID2 PROFL MODE 0 556 MULTIFUN7 MODE C O SWITCH or JUMPER UIP DIGITAL GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 470 PID2 MIN PROP GN 20 00 557 MULTIFUN7 OP SEL DISABLED UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 471 PID2 X AXIS MIN 0 00 96 400 Block Disconnect 335 0 VAL OP1 0 01 96 PID2 5 GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 400 Disconnect 336 UIP3 LO VAL 1 0 00 472 PID2 PROFILED GN 0 0 400 Block Disconnect 337 UIP3 VAL 2 0 01 96 473 PID2 CLAMP FLAG LOW 338 UIP3 LO VAL 2 0 00 96 474 PID2 ERROR 0 00 96 558 MULTIFUN8 MODE C O SWITCH or JUMPER PARAMETER PROFILER 3 559 MULTIFUNB OP SEL DISABLED 475 PROFILE Y OP MON 0 00 96 400 Block Disconnect 476 PROFILER MODE 0 400 Disconnect 339 UIP3 THRESHOLD 6 000 VOLTS UIP4
292. PIN1 396 PIN2 398 DOWN PIN 162 Dig mon GO TO OP2 p 7 PIN 251 AOP1 E 4 Current GET FROM 96 Loop off ES ee s m es 40 mode Current demand PIN 94 PIN 678 Warning Default Regen only PIN Integral Max curr Hidden Speed i Gain Response PIN 704 F back output Current Armature Demand Input from current control clamps PIN 254 AOP PIN 92 PIN 95 SET FROM CURRENT Armature Autotune Discontinuous Armature CONTROL enable Current point eedbac ubi uy ARA Current reference PIN 83 PIN 140 PIN 86 PIN 85 PIN 90 ON EL1 2 3 PIN 257 AOP3 e 4 e GET FROM T13 V terminal Common PIN 169 Default Total Current demand Master Monitor RS232 Port1 FCC68 socket Ratio Sign K ARMATURE BRIDGE TRANSMIT This is initiated by the drive when in MASTER mode and initiated by data receive when in SLAVE mode RS232 Getfrom PORT 1 1 192 RECEIVE This is active when MASTER mode and initiates a data transmit when in SLAVE mode monitor Slave PIN 191 189 190 Goto 40 20 Default Spare Digital t DIP monitor npu 14 FINS TGS PIN 310 DIP1 High value Encoder blocks Marker DIP monitor Input LE PIN 312 DIP2 AMR Default block diagram 3 PIN 311 Default Encoder pulses DC shunt wound motor PIN 143 PIN 3
293. PL X can measure the armature voltage even when the contactor is open It is dangerous to utilise a DC contactor when field weakening is employed without also connecting T41 and T43 to the motor armature See also 6 5 CHANGE PARAMETERS STOP MODE RAMP and 6 5 1 1 Block diagram of contactor control Basic application 39 4 3 4 Using pushbuttons for simple STOP START Coast to stop Internal contacts 24V coil energised by START or JOG AND CSTOP O Stop mode ramp delay INTERNAL CONTACTS COOC c CONTACTOR COIL SUPPLY COAST STOP Must be high prior to START RC SNUBBER across contactor coil Typical values are 100 Ohms 1W and 0 1uF both rated for the coil supply volts Auxiliary contact on main contactor in series with RUN for contactors with ON delay gt 75mS MAIN CONTACTOR Note This circuit will cause the contactor to drop out as soon as the STOP button contact is opened because the START input is opened together with the RUN input which over rides the STOP MODE RAMP function When the STOP button opens during running the main contactor will de energise within 100mS and the motor will coast to rest under the influence of external factors e g friction and inertia or by using an external dynamic braking resistor to dissipate the rotational energy Note The CSTOP must be high for at least 50mS prior to START going high In order to allow regeneration during the
294. PLACING A PRODUCT IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ALL USER DEFINED PARAMETERS THAT DEFINE THE PRODUCT S OPERATION ARE CORRECTLY INSTALLED BEFORE RETURNING TO USE FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CREATE HAZARD AND RISK OF INJURY PACKAGING The packaging is combustible and if disposed of incorrectly may lead to the generation of toxic fumes which are lethal WEIGHT Consideration should be given to the weight of the product when handling REPAIRS Repair reports can only be given if the user makes sufficient and accurate defect reporting Remember that the product without the required precautions can represent an electrical hazard and risk of injury and that rotating machinery is a mechanical hazard PROTECTIVE INSULATION 1 All exposed metal insulation is protected by basic insulation and user bonding to earth i e Class 1 2 Earth bonding is the responsibility of the installer 3 All signal terminals are protected by basic insulation and the user earth bonding Class 1 The purpose of this protection is to allow safe connection to other low voltage equipment and is not designed to allow these terminals to be connected to any un isolated potential APPLICATION BLOCKS 11 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 1 Table of contenisS TREE 3 2 MV APN et 7 2 1 General Warnings eie 7 2 2 Warnings and Instructions 8
295. POSTS Digital post 298 0 1 tow 298 13 82 STAGINGPOSTS Digtalpost4 PIN209 0 1 tow 299 13 82 STAGINGPOSTS Analgpost PIN300 30000 0 00 300 1382 STAGING POSTS Analog post 2 PIN301 300 00 0 00 301 13 82 STAGINGPOSTS Analogpost3 PIN302 300 009 0 00 302 13 82 STAGINGPOSTS Analogpost4 PIN303 300 009 0 00 308 e ciae L 1357 SOFTWARETERWINAST Amir 6 1 35 13 9 2 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded jog PIN 306 0 High 306 3 5 3 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded start PN307 High 207 13 94 SOFTWARE TERMINALS internal run PINS08 0 1 iow 308 pU AL Se ee I Otel DPT 1114 SETUP DIPT Input high value 1 300 00 0 01 310 _ 13 5 2 2 T14 SETUP DIP1 Input low value 311 135 21 DIP2 T15 SETUP DIP2 Input high value PIN 312 13 52 2 DIP2 T15 SETUP DIP2 Input low value PIN 313 300 00 0 00 300 00 0 0196 300 00 0 00 135 21 DIP3 T16 SETUP DIP3 Input high value PIN 314 300 00 0 0196 13 5 2 2 DIP3 T16 SETUP DIP3 Input low value PIN 315 300 00 0 00 135 21 4 17 SETUP DIP4 Input high value 316 300 00 0 01 13 5 2 2 T17 SETUP DIP4 Input low value PIN 317 300 00 0 00 13531 RUN INPUT SETUP RUN input
296. R DIN PL 20 Current fuses style PLX 40 AMPS max Up to Up to Up to Up to Up to 500V Up to Up to 500V IP OP Pt 250V ac 500V ac 500V ac 500V ac ac supply 250V ac ac supply AC DC supply supply supply supply supply PL X5 10 12 600 L25S 12 L50S 12 FWH 12 FWH20A14F XL50FO15 L350 12 661RF0025 PL X10 20 24 600 L25S 25 505 25 FWH 25 170L1013 XL50FO25 L350 25 661RF0025 PL X15 30 36 600 L25S 40 L50S 40 FWH 40 170L1013 XL5OFO40 L350 40 661RF0035 PL X20 40 51 5000 L25S 50 L50S 50 FWH 50 170 1564 XL50FO50 1350 50 661RFOO50 PL X30 60 72 5000 L25S 80 L50S 80 FWH 80 170M1566 XL50FO80 L350 80 661RFOO80 PL X40 80 99 5000 L25S 100 L50S 100 FWH 100 170M1567 XL50F100 L350 100 661RF00100 PL X50 100 123 11850 L25S 125 L50S 125 FWH 125 170M1568 XL50F125 L350 125 661RF00125 PL X65 124 155 60000 L25S 175 L50S 175 FWH 175 170M1569 XL50F175 L350 180 661RF00160 PL X85 164 205 60000 L25S 225 L50S 225 FWH 250 170M3816 XL50F250 T350 250 661RF00250 PL X115 216 270 128000 L25S 275 L50S 275 FWH 300 170M3816 XL50F300 T350 315 661RF00315 PL X145 270 330 128000 L25S 350 L50S 350 FWH 350 170M3818 XL50F350 T350 355 661RF00350 PL X185 350 430 240000 L25S 450 L50S 450 FWH 450 170M5809 XL5OF450 TT350 661RF00450 500 PL X225 435 530 240000 No fuse L50S 550 FWH 600 170 5811 XL5OF600 TT350 661RF2 630 available 630 PL 265 520 630
297. RAL 5 00 SECS 438 PID1 DERIV TC 0 000 SECS 439 PID1 FILTER TC 0 100 SECS 440 PID1 INT PRESET DISABLED 441 PID1 PRESET VAL 0 00 442 PID1 RESET DISABLED 443 PID1 POS CLAMP 100 00 444 PID1 NEG CLAMP 100 00 445 PID1 OUTPUT TRIM 0 2000 446 PID1 PROFL MODE 0 447 PID1 MIN PROP GN 20 00 448 PID1 X AXIS MIN 0 00 PID1 5 GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 449 PID1 PROFILED GN 0 0 450 PID1 CLAMP FLAG LOW 451 PID1 ERROR MON 0 00 3 452 PID2 OP MONITOR 0 00 453 PID2 INPUT1 0 00 454 PID2 RATION 1 0000 455 PID2 DIVIDER1 1 0000 m 456 PID2 INPUT2 0 00 457 PID2 RATIO2 1 0000 Menu List 227 ron 458 PID2 DIVIDER2 1 0000 553 MULTIFUN5 SEL DISABLED 459 PID2 PROP 1 0 400 Block Disconnect PETR 327 UIP2 HI VAL OP2 0 01 460 PID2 INTEGRAL 5 00 SECS 400 Block Disconnect 328 UIP2 LO VAL 2 0 00 96 461 PID2 DERIV TC 0 000 SECS ENT GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 329 UIP2 THRESHOLD 6 000 VOLTS 462 PID2 FILTERTC 0 100 SECS 463 PID2 INT PRESET DISABLED MULTI FUNCTION 6 3 554 MULTIFUN6 MODE C O SWITCH or JUMPER UIP3 T3 4 464 PID2 PRESET VAL 0 00 555 MULTIFUNG OP SEL DISABLED 465 PID2 RESET DISABLED GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 466
298. RANGE DEFAULT PIN Permanent connection to T3 64 SPEED REF 3 MON 105 00 0 00 64 T3 is internally connected via UIP3 to 64 SPEED REF 3 MON so this behaves as a monitor of T3 IP value This parameter is not adjustable from the keys It has the fastest sample rate for rapid response applications Note When 97 SPD BYPASS CUR EN is ENABLED this monitor is set to zero Use 133 ARM CUR DEM MON 6 6 5 SPEED REF SUMMER Ramped speed reference 4 PIN 65 R SPEED REF SUMMER 3 65 RAMPED SPD REF 4 eo Sets speed reference 4 level PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN Default via ramp block from T4 RAMPED SPD REF 4 105 00 0 00 65 The factory default is to the run mode ramp block output so this behaves as a monitor for this value 6 6 6 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed Current Reference 3 sign PIN 66 R SPEED REF SUMMER 3 66 SPD CUR REF3 SIGN Inverts the speed current PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN reference 3 SPD CUR REF3 SIGN INVERT NON INVERT NON INVERT 66 92 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 6 7 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed Current Reference 3 ratio PIN 67 SPEED REF SUMMER 3 67 SPD CUR RF3 RATIO iB 67 SPD CUR RF3 RATIO oe R 1 0000 Sets a scaling factor for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN Speed current reference 3 SPD CUR RF3 RATIO 3 0000 1 0000 67 The internal connection from UIP3 to 64 SPEED REF 3 MON is permanent However 64 SPEED REF 3 MON may be disconnected from the SPEED REF SUMMER by setting 67 S
299. RATION menu 6 9 6 8 FLD WEAKENING MENU Minimum field current PIN 110 FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 110 MIN FLD CURRENT 110 MIN FLD CURRENT p 10 00 k v PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN MIN FLD CURRENT O to 100 of rated IF 10 0096 Note When setting the minimum 96 allow an extra 596 margin below the desired minimum to accommodate a response transient If the minimum is below 1096 there may be a field failure alarm caused by undershoot WARNING The feedback loss protection afforded in field weakening mode is limited to total feedback loss only This is because the speed AVF relationship is not maintained in field weakening mode If a partial loss of feedback occurs the motor may run to excessive speed When the field has been completely weakened and is at its minimum level the armature overvoltage trip will come into operation This may only occur at a dangerous speed It is therefore recommended that a mechanical device and or back up system be utilised to protect against this possibility Correct setting of 110 MIN FIELD CURRENT will ensure that the overvolts TRIP occurs just above the maximum operating speed Sets the minimum field current as a 96 of the rated field amps 112 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 9 7 FIELD CONTROL Standby field enable PIN 111 FIELD CONTROL 3 111 STANDBY FLD ENBL 7 Enables the standby field PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN quench mode STANDBY FIELD ENBL ENABLED OR DISABL
300. RECTIFY ahai aiai aiae It is possible to use the block in up to 4 quadrants for specialist applications The input is connected by using the PRFL X AXIS GET FROM window in this menu 3 4 1 1 Profile for Y increasing with X PROFILER Xmax PROFLR Y AT Xmax The graph shows the positive quadrant only PROFLR Y AT Xmin EE PROFILER Xmin These X and Y axis values are always associated with each other These X and Y axis values are always associated with each other It is useful to consider each pair of min values as a coordinate and each pair of max values as a coordinate 28 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 4 1 2 Profile for Y decreasing with X PROFILER Xmin PROFLR Y AT Xmin PROFILER Xmax PROFLR Y AT Xmax The graph shows the positive quadrant only These X and Y axis values are always associated with each other These X and Y axis values are always associated with each other It is useful to consider each pair of min values as a coordinate and each pair of max values as a coordinate 3 4 1 3 Examples of general profiles X Rectify X Rectify DISABLED DISABLED Coord Xmax And Y at Xmax Coord Xmax And Y at Xmax Coord And at Xmin Coord And Y at Xmin Coord And Y at Xmax Coord And Y at Xmax X Rectify Coord DISABLED And Y at Xmin Coord And Y at Xmin X Rect
301. REF 3 0 00 96 ARM LOOP MONITOR 3 65 RAMPED SPD REF 4 0 00 133 ARM CUR DEM MON 0 00 96 66 SPD CUR REF3 SIGN NON INVERT 134 ARM CUR MON 0 00 96 67 SPD CUR RF3 RATIO 1 0000 135 ARM CUR AMPS MON 0 0 AMPS SPEED CONTROL 3 136 UPPER CUR LIM MN 0 00 69 POS SPEED REF 105 00 137 LOWER CUR LIM MN 0 00 70 MAX NEG SPEED REF 105 00 138 ACTUAL UPPER LIM 0 00 71 SPEED PROP 15 00 139 ACTUAL LOWER LIM 0 00 72 SPEED INT 1 000 SECS 140 0 LOAD LIMIT MON 150 00 73 SPEED INT RESET DISABLED 141 AT CURRENT LIMIT LOW SPEED ADAPTION 4 FLD LOOP MONITOR 3 74 SPD ADPT LO BRPNT 1 00 143 FIELD DEMAND MON 0 00 75 SPD ADPT HI BRPNT 2 00 144 FIELD CUR 0 00 76 LO BRPNT PRP GAIN 5 00 145 FLD CUR AMPS MON 0 00 AMPS 77 LO BRPNT INT 1 000 SECS 2 146 ANGLE OF ADVANCE 0 DEG 78 INT DURING RAMP 100 00 J 147 FIELD ACTIVE MON DISABLED 79 SPD ADAPT ENABLE ENABLED ANALOG IO MONITOR 3 CURRENT CONTROL 3 150 UIP2 T2 MON 0 000 VOLTS TUE 81 CUR CLAMP SCALER 150 00 96 151 UIP3 T3 MON 0 000 VOLTS CURRENT OVERLOAD 4 152 UIP4 T4 MON 0 000 VOLTS 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET 105 00 96 153 UIP5 T5 MON 0 000 VOLTS 83 0 LOAD RAMP TIME 20 0 SECS 154 UIP6 T6 MON 0 000 VOLTS i DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 155 UIP7 T7 MON 0 000 VOLTS TUS 84 1 PROFILE ENABLE DISABLED 156 UIP8 T8 MON 0 000 VOLTS 85 SPD BRPNT AT HI I 75 00
302. RESET or a DRIVE RECEIVE of a page 3 file is attempted AND the page has been locked by the supplier Page 3 may be locked because it contains a recipe that is required to be protected from being overwritten Please consult your supplier It may also appear if certain special parameters are altered however this is unlikely to happen in normal operation WARNING The lock status is also included in and travels with a page 3 file Receiving a page 3 file with locked status will automatically lock any unlocked page 3 See 10 2 1 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE with a locked recipe page 3 150 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 9 1 12 SELF TEST MESSAGE Memory write error Indicates a save problem PARAMETER SAVE 2 Usually occurs if the control supply is below 90V AC MEMORY WRITE ERROR 9 1 13 SELF TEST MESSAGE Memory version error It indicates that a file SAVED using PARAMETER PARAMETER SAVE SAVE with more recent software has been loaded MEMORY VERSION ERROR onto a unit with incompatible older software Either by host computer using parameter exchange To correct the problem press the left key and the drive will be returned to its factory default values Unfortunately any desired parameter changes will need to be re entered and SAVED Alternatively it may be possible to use PL PILOT to transfer the file See 9 1 13 1 Transferring files using PL PILOT below Or by transfer of EEPROM In this case the original file in the EEPROM will st
303. RESHOLD 6 000 VOLTS UIP7 T7 SETUP 4 370 UIP7 IP RANGE 0 371 0 7 IP OFFSET 0 00 372 0 7 CAL RATIO 1 0000 373 UIP7 MAX CLAMP 100 00 96 374 UIP7 MIN CLAMP 100 00 96 UIP ANALOG GOTO 400 Disconnect UIP DIGITAL GOTO 52 MP PRESET UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 375 UIP7 VAL 1 0 01 96 376 UIP7 LO VAL 1 0 00 377 UIP7 VAL 2 0 01 96 378 UIP7 LO VAL 2 0 00 379 UIP7 THRESHOLD 6 000 VOLTS UIP8 8 SETUP 4 492 DIA WEB BRK THR 7 50 gt poe GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 2493 DIA MEM BOOT UP DISABLED BATCH COUNTER 3 TAPER TENSION CALC 3 578 COUNTER COUNT 0 494 TOTAL TENSION MN 0 00 579 COUNTER CLOCK LOW 495 TENSION REF 0 00 580 COUNTER RESET LOW 496 TAPER STRENGTH 0 00 581 COUNTER TARGET 32000 497 HYPERBOLIC TAPER DISABLED 582 COUNTER TARGET LOW 498 TENSION TRIM IP 0 00 INTERVAL TIMER 3 2 499 TAPERED TENS MON 0 0096 ee 583 TMR ELAPSED TIME 0 0 SECS TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 584 RESET LOW nis 500 TORQUE DEMAND MN 0 00 96 585 INTERVAL 5 0 SECS
304. RIP EN ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 174 All digital outputs and the 24V user supply have been designed to withstand a direct short circuit to OV If this happens an internal alarm is raised The remaining digital outputs are also disabled resulting in a low output Short circuit current is approximately 350mA for digital outputs and 400mA for 24V If the alarm is disabled and the shorting fault has not interrupted the drive running normally then the drive will continue to run Note if any digital output is shorted the 24V terminal T35 will remain active with a capability of 50mA If the 24V output is shorted then all digital outputs will also go low and this alarm is activated In this case if the 24V is being used to enable CSTOP or START then the drive will stop 140 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 8 1 5 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Missing pulse trip enable PIN 175 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 175 MISSING PULSE EN Allows the missing pulse alarm trip to be disabled The controller continuously monitors the armature current waveform If a fault develops within the controller or the armature bridge it is possible that one or more pulses may be missing from the normal 6 pulse armature current waveform Although the controller may appear to function normally the motor will experience excess heating due to the distorted current waveform PARAMETER MISSING PULSE EN RANGE ENABLED OR DISABLED DEFAULT ENABLED
305. RR x RT ERR DRAK RUE IKNDAREEEMEIRADE AN REDE SPA e 7 lem NEM DIFTA 8 7 Product rating Table d cda 9 74 1 Product rating labels erri teet tek nr haa ga sa ra o gi aux ac ca cac escis usi Rd aus 9 7 2 Semiconductor f ses dave nte k anh a n TE vere URN ME EV MEE NM E ENESME canted NIE 9 7 2 1 PL Models AC fuses for Standard supply voltage Up to 480V AC 10 7 2 2 PLX Models AC fuses for Standard supply voltage Up to 480V 10 7 2 3 PLX Models DC fuses for Standard supply voltage Up to 480V 11 7 3 Terminal information X RR RC RE RT Rc 11 7 3 1 Control 2 0 0 700 4 0 4 nn nnn nnn 11 7 3 2 Powerboard Terminals 2 cass tune ce da ede aee de de aea eels eves veda wade 11 7 3 3 Terminal tightening torques 10 10 tre 12 7 3 4 Forces applied to the power terminals 1 2 022 0 1 1 66 nns 12 7 3 5 Avoid dropping small objects int
306. RS232 PORT1 PARAMETER 154 10 2 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive 1 2 12 2 154 10 2 1 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE with a locked recipe page 155 10 2 1 2 Transmitting parameter data file to a PC Windows 95 upwards 155 10 2 2 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive receive 2 142 4 40 0 ese nnns 156 Contents 9 10 2 2 1 Receiving parameter data file from PC Windows 95 upwards 156 10 2 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE menu list to host 2 222 157 10 2 3 1 Transmitting a menu list to PC Windows 95 upwards 157 10 2 3 2 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive to 4 2 158 10 2 3 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Eeprom transfer between 159 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software 2 0 2 22 159 10 2 5 Parameter exchange using ASCII 5 0 0001 160 10 2 5 1 PL PILOT and SCADA System Control Data Acquisition package 160 10 3 RS232 PORT PORT1 REF EXCHANGE 161 10 3 1 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exc
307. S Ramp output monitor PIN 21 Digital output DOP2 on terminal 23 is connected by default to the 35 RAMPING FLAG CHANGE PARAMETERS 77 6 3 CHANGE PARAMETERS JOG CRAWL SLACK JOG CRAWL SLACK PIN numbers range 37 to 43 JOG CRAWL SLACK 43 JOG SLACK RAMP CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 xd JOG CRAWL SLACK JOG CRAWL SLACK gt 37 JOG SPEED 1 This menu provides adjustment for parameters JOG CRAWL SLACK associated with jogging slack take up and R 38 JOG SPEED 2 crawling See 6 3 5 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog mode select PIN 42 This gives a table showing the 8 modes of im JOG CRAWL SLACK operation available 39 SLACK SPEED 1 Their are 2 hidden PINs that provide output flags JOG CRAWL SLACK as follows R 40 SLACK SPEED 2 689 IN JOG FLAG This is high during the jogging process it goes low after the ramp has returned to the prevailing run JOG CRAWL SLACK level 41 CRAWL SPEED 714 IN SLACK FLAG This is high during the slack take up process it goes low after the ramp has returned to the prevailing run level This flag is useful in centre winding applications for controlling the tension enable See APPLICATIONS MANUAL JOG CRAWL SLACK 42 JOG MODE SELECT 78 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 3 1 JOG CRAWL SLACK Block diagram including RUN MODE RAMPS PIN 27 Fwd min speed T4 Default Rev min speed JOG speed 1 JOG speed 2 SLACK speed1 SLACK speed2 Crawl speed T19 Default Jog M
308. S SUMMER 1 2 PIN number range 401 to 427 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 SUMMER 1 3 4 OS Summer 1 and 2 are identical apart from the PIN numbers The PIN numbers for both summers are in the section headings There are 2 hidden PINs in each block for CH2 and CH1 subtotal outputs SUMMER1 SUMMER2 Pins 691 Ch2 and 692 Ch1 Pins 693 Ch2 and 694 Ch1 This menu allows programming of a general purpose signal summing and scaling block SUMMER 1 3 413 SUMMER1 CLAMP SUMMER 1 3 401 SUMMER1 OP MON SUMMER 1 3 402 SUMMER1 SIGN1 SUMMER 1 3 403 SUMMER1 SIGN2 SUMMER 1 3 404 SUMMER1 RATIO1 SUMMER 1 3 405 SUMMER1 RATIO2 SUMMER 1 3 406 SUMMER1 DIVIDER1 SUMMER 1 3 407 SUMMER1 DIVIDER2 SUMMER 1 3 408 SUMMER1 INPUT1 SUMMER 1 3 409 SUMMER1 INPUT2 SUMMER 1 3 410 SUMMER1 INPUT3 SUMMER 1 3 411 SUMMER1 DEADBAND SUMMER 1 3 412 SUMMER1 OP INVRT 442545255 APPLICATION BLOCKS 15 3 2 1 SUMMER 1 2 Block diagram There are 2 identical independant SUMMER blocks No display PIN 408 413 m Subtotal Summer 1 PIN 413 PIN 401 PIN 413 Output Summer 1 No display IN 412 GO TO Subtotal display Subtotal Summer 2 7 output PIN 424 PIN 427 PIN 415 Input 3 PIN 427 Output i Summer 2 No display GO TO Subtotal p output Input 1 PIN 413 PIN 405 3 2 2 SUMMER 1 2 Total output monitor PIN 401 415 401 SUMMER1 OP
309. S The defaults will only be permanently retained however if they are then saved using the PARAMETER SAVE menu To revert to the last saved set simply turn the control supply off without doing a PARAMETER SAVE and on again Also the PASSWORD is reset to 0000 See 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL See also 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page 677 for details of 2 and 3 key reset operation and power up messages See 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition If your DESIRED MAXIMUM RPM is higher than the BASE RATED RPM then you will need to implement field weakening in the CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD CONTROL menu You must however verify that your motor and load are rated for rotation above base speed Failure to do so may result in mechanical failure with disastrous consequences If however your desired maximum rpm is low compared to the base rpm then you need to be aware of the heat dissipation in the motor at full torque Use motor force venting if necessary See 6 1 6 CALIBRATION Desired max rpm PIN 6 QUICK START WARNING Do not use AVF feedback mode with field weakening systems See 6 9 6 FIELD CONTROL FLD WEAKENING MENU for a note about AVF field weakening trip AVF feedback contains more ripple than tacho feedback It may be necessary for smooth operation to reduce the SPEED CONTROL loop gain with AVF See 6 7 4 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 See 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback typ
310. See 6 2 16 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag PIN 35 See 6 7 7 7 SPEED ADAPTION Using small speed inputs The default gives low gain for small inputs CHANGE PARAMETERS 95 6 7 7 1 SPEED ADAPTION Low break point 74 SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 74 SPD ADPT LO BRPNT 74 SPD ADPT LO BRPNT en 1 0096 Sets the low break point for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN commencement of gain change SPD ADPT LO BRPNT 0 00 to 100 0096 1 0096 74 6 7 7 2 SPEED PI ADAPTION High break point PIN 75 SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 75 SPD ADPT HI BRPNT 75 SPD ADPT HI BRPNT 2 0096 Sets the high break point for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN end of linear gain change SPD ADPT HI BRPNT 0 00 to 100 0096 2 0096 75 6 7 7 3 SPEED PI ADAPTION Low breakpoint proportional gain PIN 76 SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 76 LO BRPNT PRP GAIN Sets the prop gain of the error PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN amp below the low break point LO BRPNT PRP GAIN 0 00 to 200 00 5 00 76 6 7 7 4 SPEED PI ADAPTION Low breakpoint integral time constant PIN 77 SPEED PI ADAPTION 77 LO BRPNT INT T C 77 LO BRPNT INT T C 1 000 SECS Sets the integral time constant PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN below the low break point LO BRPNT INT T C 0 001 to 30 000 secs 1 000 secs 77 6 7 7 5 SPEED PI ADAPTION Integral 96 during ramp 78 SPEED PI ADAPTION 78 INT 96 DURING RAMP 78 INT 96 DURING RAMP 100 0096 Sets inte
311. T PIN contactor drop out command DROP OUT DELAY 0 1 to 600 0 secs 1 0 secs 60 This function is normally used to prevent frequent contactor dropouts during jogging It works by adding a time delay to the function that tells the main contactor to de energise The timer is started when the motor reaches 59 DROP OUT SPEED threshold If the drive is restarted before the contactor finally drops out then the timer is reset ready to start again If the RUN input goes low at any point during the stopping process either heading for zero speed or during the delay period then the contactor will drop out straight away During the timer sequence the drive loops are inhibited to prevent the motor from making small unwanted movements This can be over ridden using 58 LIVE DELAY MODE if the system is required to maintain power while waiting for drop out E g when an external force is trying to rotate the load and this is undesirable or a final shaft positioning routine is operating See 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE See also 6 10 CHANGE PARAMETERS ZERO INTERLOCKS for details of other zero speed functions 90 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 6 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED REF SUMMER PIN numbers range 62 to 67 SPEED REF SUMMER 3 iB 67 SPD CUR RF3 RATIO CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 iB SPEED REF SUMMER SPEED REF SUMMER 3 B G2 INT SPEED REF 1 The block diagram below shows the signal paths for th
312. TCH 12 1 General rules 12 1 1 Sample times When application blocks are being processed the workload on the internal microprocessor is increased With no application blocks activated the time taken to perform all the necessary tasks cycle time is approximately 5mS The input low The input high time must be at time must be at With all the application blocks activated the cycle time least 50mS least 50mS is approximately 10mS In the future the designers expect to add even more application blocks It is not expected however that the typical cycle time will ever be greater than 30mS Bear in mind that it would be highly unusual for all the application blocks to be activated With this in mind it is recommended that the system designer takes care that external logic signals are stable long enough to be recognised In order to achieve this the logic input minimum dwell time has been specified at 50mS However it will of course be possible to operate with much lower dwell times than this for specific installations where the cycle time is low There is then however the risk that a future re configuration of the blocks by the user would increase the cycle time sufficiently to cause sampling problems 12 1 2 Order of processing It may be useful for system designers to know the order in which the blocks are processed within each cycle O Analogue inputs 12 Torque compensator 1 Motorised pot 13
313. UICK 5 2 2 7 7 61 6 1 4 CALIBRATION Rated field amps PIN 4 QUICK 5 61 6 1 5 CALIBRATION Base rated motor rpm PIN 5 QUICK 62 6 1 6 CALIBRATION Desired max rpm PIN 6 QUICK 5 220 2 62 6 1 7 CALIBRATION Zero speed offset 7 00 2 0 0 tenen 62 6 1 8 CALIBRATION Max tacho volts PIN 8 0 20 20 0 070 00000042242 7 63 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PIN 9 QUICK 64 6 1 10 CALIBRATION ENCODER 5 1 000000000 65 6 1 10 1 ENCODER SCALING Quadrature enable PIN 10 2 66 6 1 10 2 ENCODER SCALING Encoder lines PIN 11 0 0 0 0 0 02 67 6 1 10 3 ENCODER SCALING Motor encoder speed ratio PIN 12 67 6 1 10 4 ENCODER SCALING Encoder sign PIN 13 20 0 0 02020270222 67 6 1 11 CALIBRATION IR compensation PIN 14 0 0 0 0 nan 68 6 1 12 CALIBRATION Field current feedback trim 15 000 ea eats 68 6 1 13 CALIBRATION Armature volts trim 16 2 0 0 0 200 0 7 2
314. UIP4 analog monitor UIP5 analog monitor UIP6 analog monitor UIP7 analog monitor UIP8 analog monitor UIP9 analog monitor AOP1 analog monitor AOP2 analog monitor Digital IO monitor AOP3 analog monitor DIGITAL IO MONITOR UIP 23456789 DIP 1234 1234 DIO DOP 123TRJSC CIP armature bridge flag Drive start flag Drive run flag Block OP monitor Running mode monitor BLOCK OUTPUT MONITOR Ramp output monitor Motorised pot output monitor Reference exchange output monitor Summer 1 output monitor EL1 2 3 RMS monitor Summer 2 output monitor PID 1 output monitor DC KILOWATTS monitor Continued on next page PID 2 output monitor 52 Menu tree structure 5 2 4 Full menu diagram Motor drive alarms serial links and display functions Continued from previous page Motor drive alarms Serial links Display functions Continued on next page MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Section 8 Speed trip enable Speed trip tolerance Field loss trip enable DOP short circuit trip enable Missing pulse enable Reference exchange trip enable Overspeed delay Stall trip menu Active trip monitor Stored trip monitor External trip reset Drive trip message SERIAL LINKS Section 10 RS232 port 1 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Section 11 Reduce
315. UP 4 320 UIP2 IP RANGE Sets the 100 voltage PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT range of the UIPX input signal UIP2 IP RANGE 1 5V 0 10V 2 20V 3 30V 0 10V The 5V and 10V ranges are the most accurate 0 4 typically 0 1 The 20V and 30V ranges use resistor divider networks and the absolute accuracy is 4 Also if the same signal is used externally elsewhere then it is important that the source impedance of the signal connected to the terminal is as low as possible This is because as the PL X scans the inputs the input impedance will vary between 100K and 50K for these ranges A source of signal with a high input impedance will be affected by the change in input resistance This will not affect the accuracy of the reading within the PL X but may cause an external measurement by another instrument to vary It is important to remember this when commissioning as readings at the control terminals with a voltmeter may show slight variations the source impedance is high The 5V and 10V ranges are not affected by source impedance 13 3 1 2UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Input offset PIN 3 2 1 to 3 9 1 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 321 UIP2 IP OFFSET 321 UIP2 IP OFFSET ah 0 0096 Sets the level of bi polar offset PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN to be added to the input signal UIP2 IP OFFSET 100 0096 0 0096 321 Note 100 always represents a 10Volts offset independant of the selected range So wh
316. VE ALARMS External trip reset enable PIN 183 143 8 1 11 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS DRIVE TRIP 55 0 0 2 2 2 143 8 1 11 1 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Armature 4 3 143 8 1 11 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Armature overvolts 2 4 1 6 3 143 8 1 11 3 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Field eene nans 143 8 1 11 4 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Field 1055 2 44 2 2 4 144 8 1 11 5 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE User 144 8 1 11 6 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Thermistor 30 00 0 2 2 2 222 144 8 1 11 7 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Overspeed 44 42 144 8 1 11 8 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Speed feedback mismatch 2 2 22 145 8 1 11 9 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Stall trip 4 145 8 1 11 10 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Missing 2 4 145 8 1 11 11 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Supply phase loss 2 21 7 01 2 2 2 145 8 1 11 12 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Synchronization 1055 2 0 2 004 02 2 42 22 146 8 1 11
317. able PIN 115 114 6 10 3 ZERO INTERLOCKS Zero reference start enable PIN 116 114 6 10 4 ZERO INTERLOCKS Zero interlocks speed level PIN 117 2 02 272 114 6 10 5 ZERO INTERLOCKS Zero interlocks current level PIN 118 eem 115 6 10 6 ZERO INTERLOCKS At zero reference flag PIN 119 ssssessssmIHe 115 6 10 7 ZERO INTERLOCKS At zero speed flag PIN 120 115 6 10 8 ZERO INTERLOCKS At standstill flag PIN 121 sese 115 Contents 7 6 10 8 1 Low speed performance 5 n ioi pg El EI RI Ri MDARIRAR REDE RD ELE TR 115 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE 0 2 22 116 6 10 9 1 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Block 0 117 6 10 9 1 1 Spindle orientate 1 6 61 66 nnn 117 6 10 9 2 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Zero speed lock 122 2 7 7 7 7 118 6 10 9 3 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker enable PIN 240 2 2 7 2 2 2 22 118 6 10 9 3 71 Hp RD LR PO 118 6 10 9 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker offset
318. amp from me Sets switch off spee EM when set to Zero dv dt PIN 509 gives accel PIN 511 Material PIN 512 Accel scaler Width accel IP monitor PIN 510 Accel line speed PIN 508 Variable Inertia 40 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 7 2 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque demand monitor PIN 500 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 500 TORQUE DEMAND 500 TORQUE DEMAND 0 00 Allows the torque demand PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN reference to be monitored TORQUE DEMAND MN 300 00 0 00 500 The torque demand reference is the sum of all the compensation components and the scaled tension demand This has a branch hopping facility to 3 7 22 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Inertia comp monitor PIN 520 3 7 3 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque trim input PIN 501 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 501 TORQUE TRIM IP 501 TORQUE TRIM IP 0 00 Allows a torque trim input to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN be added to the compensation TORQUE TRIM IP 150 00 0 00 501 3 7 4 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Stiction compensation PIN 502 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 502 STICTION COMP 502 STICTION COMP 0 00 Sets the level of compensation PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN required to overcome stiction STICTION COMP 300 00 0 00 502 See 3 7 5 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Stiction web speed threshold PIN 503 3 7 5 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Stiction web speed threshold PIN 503 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 503 STIC WEB SPD THR 503 STIC WEB SPD THR 5
319. amped to the maximum limit of the target PIN E g 129 TACHO VOLTS MON 190 00 VOLTS pure number 19 000 is connected to 24 REVERSE UP TIME This has a range of 0 1 to 600 0 SECONDS When the pure number of 19 000 arrives it will be clamped to 6 000 and displayed as 600 0 SECONDS 13 8 1 2 Connecting logic values with different messages In the system there are several parameters that have only 2 states and some that have more than 2 E g 64 SPD CUR REF 3 SIGN INVERT State O 2 states or NON INVERT State 1 29 RAMP AUTO PRESET DISABLED State 0 2 states or ENABLED State 1 9 SPEED FBK TYPE ARMATURE VOLTAGE State O 5 states TACHOGENERATOR State 1 ENCODER State 2 ENCODER AVF State 3 ENCODER TACHO State 4 When using 2 state logic parameters the system sees one state as 1 and the other as a O according to this table LOGIC 1 PARAMETER LOGIC 0 PARAMETER HIGH LOW ENABLED DISABLED MOTOR 2 MOTOR 1 INVERT NON INVERT Non zero or negative value in logic statement Zero value in logic statement If the value is connected from PIN which uses a binary or hexadecimal string e g digital IO monitor then the pure decimal equivalent is used When calculating the decimal equivalent the most significant bit is on the right and the least significant on the left 190 CONFIGURATION 13 8 1 3 Connecting to multi state logic parameters When connecting to multi state logic parameters E g SPEED F
320. an external resistor dropper network as follows Terminal 26 TACHO Terminal 25 OV The network shown will allow full scale voltages up to 400 Volts The number scrolled in the window should be set to half the full scale tacho volts Appropriate measures must be taken to dissipate the heat from the dropper resistors The total power in watts dissipated will be Tacho signal volts 20 000 There is a tacho failure detection system that may be configured to either trip the drive or automatically switch to AVF See 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 See also 3 4 4 Analogue tachogenerator input 64 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PIN 9 QUICK START CALIBRATION 3 9 SPEED FBK TYPE Selects the source of speed PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN feedback from 1 of 5 types SPEED FBK TYPE 1 of 5 TYPES 0 to 4 AVF 9 The speed feedback can be derived from 1 of 3 fundamental sources or a combination of them All 3 sources may be independently monitored See 7 1 DIAGNOSTICS SPEED LOOP MONITOR 9 SPEED FBK TYPE gt T ARMATURE VOLTS i gt 0 ARMATURE VOLTS AVF Internal isolated signal always available The 100 speed feedback volts must be calculated and entered into PIN 18 RATED ARM VOLTS Note 130 MOTOR RPM MON will only be accurate when 18 RATED ARM VOLTS corresponds to 6 DESIRED MAX RPM for 100 speed WARNING Do not u
321. and field current and voltage 5 The cables and termination should be rated to carry the rated current with no more than a 25C temperature rise and all terminations should be tightened to the correct torque See 14 10 Terminal tightening torques 6 The main contactor must be operated by the CON1 2 contact on terminals 45 and 46 7 The wiring should be checked for short circuit faults AC power to ground signal and control DC power to ground signal and control Signal to control and ground Disconnect the drive for wiring tests using a megger Control terminals are plug in type 8 The engineering standards employed must comply with any local national or international codes in force Safety requirements take priority 9 If the load regenerates or regenerative braking is employed then a DC rated armature fuse with the correct 121 rating in series with the motor armature is highly recommended See 14 3 3 DC semi conductor fuses 10 A substantial protective chassis earth connection in accordance with relevant codes should be made to the terminal bar provided at the bottom edge of the unit 11 A protective clean earth connection must be made to the control OV on T13 to ensure that the installation complies with protective class1 requirements 4 4 2 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 1 The motor and load if fitted must be free to rotate without causing damage or injury even in the event of incorrect rotation direction or loss of control
322. and wire terminations are as recommended and clamped to required torque Ensure that a competent person carries out the installation and commissioning of this product Ensure that the product rating is not exceeded APPLICATION RISK ELECTROMECHANICAL SAFETY IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER The integration of this product into other apparatus or systems is not the responsibility of the manufacturer or distributor of the product The applicability effectiveness or safety of operation of this equipment or that of other apparatus or systems is not the responsibility of the manufacturer or distributor of the product Where appropriate the user should consider some aspects of the following risk assessment RISK ASSESSMENT Under fault conditions or conditions not intended 1 The motor speed may be incorrect 2 The motor speed may be excessive 3 The direction of rotation may be incorrect 4 The motor may be energised In all situations the user should provide sufficient guarding and or additional redundant monitoring and safety systems to prevent risk of injury NOTE During a power loss event the product will commence a sequenced shut down procedure and the system designer must provide suitable protection for this case MAINTENANCE Maintenance and repair should only be performed by competent persons using only the recommended spares or return to factory for repair Use of unapproved parts may create a hazard and risk of injury WHEN RE
323. anual 69 7 Record of application blocks bug 2 70 8 Changes to product since manual publication 0 70 Warnings 7 2 Warnings 2 1 General Warnings READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL BEFORE APPLYING POWER TO THE PL X DRIVE UNIT This manual describes the application blocks available in the PL X The PL X motor drive controller is an open chassis component for use in a suitable enclosure Drives and process control systems are a very important part of creating better quality and value in the goods for our society but they must be designed installed and used with great care to ensure everyone s SAFETY Remember that the equipment you will be using incorporates High voltage electrical equipment Powerful rotating machinery with large stored energy Heavy components Your process may involve DANGER Hazardous materials ELECTRIC SHOCK RISK Expensive equipment and facilities Interactive components Always use qualified personnel to design construct and operate your systems and keep SAFETY as your primary concern Thorough personnel training is an important aid to SAFETY and productivity SAFETY awareness not only reduces the risk of accidents and injuries in your plant but also has a direct impact on improving product quality and costs If you have any doubts about th
324. apacitor makes a very effective high frequency ground loop and may have to be removed to prevent ground loop noise on the encoder signals Consult encoder supplier Ultimately it may be necessary to install an isolation link in the encoder loop Make sure the encoder cables are routed away from heavy current or other noise generating cables Use insulated screened cable with a separate screen for each encoder signal connected at the drive terminal T13 The encoder OV and 24V should also be screened within the cable CHANGE PARAMETERS 67 6 1 10 2 ENCODER SCALING Encoder lines PIN 11 ENCODER SCALING 4 11 ENCODER LINES R 11 ENCODER LINES gt Bi 1000 ie Inputs the encoder resolution in PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN pulses per rev b ENCODER LINES 1 to 6000 1000 The number of lines on the encoder dataplate should be entered Alternatively enter the number of cycles of high low for one pulse train during one revolution E G for a toothed gear wheel with 60 teeth and a magnetic pick up enter the number 60 Note that there is an upper frequency limit of 100 kHz 6 1 10 3 ENCODER SCALING Motor encoder speed ratio PIN 12 ENCODER SCALING 4 B 12 MOT ENC SPD RATIO Sets the motor revs as a ratio PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the encoder revs MOT ENC SPD RATIO 0 0000 to 3 0000 1 0000 12 Note The encoder is sometimes not fixed to the motor shaft and may rotate at an
325. armature bridge A loss of any line on port 3 will be recognised by the missing pulse detector A loss of any line on port 2 will be recognised by either field loss EL3 phase loss EL1 2 or synchronisation loss EL1 2 detectors Note Ports 2 and 3 are ultimately fed from the same supply although via different fuses or step up down transformers Hence a supply loss may simultaneously be recognised by port 2 and port 3 A total supply loss to the installation will occur on all 3 ports simultaneously See 8 1 11 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE A loss on port 1 will be recognised below approx 80V AC See also 9 1 10 SELF TEST MESSAGE Internal error code for details of dips on port 1 Effects of supply loss or dips The armature and field current will phase back to zero the contactor control will de energise Any valid trip message is permanently saved See also 5 1 2 PARAMETER SAVE In the case of a supply dip the message INTERNAL ERROR CODE SUPPLY PHASE LOSS will appear on the display to indicate that a supply DIP has occurred Press the left key to reset This message may be briefly visible at normal control supply turn off See 8 1 11 11 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Supply phase loss for details on ride through times Basic application 33 4 Basic application 4 Basic application ds e e tcd o e x ab e LO a 4 1 Basic speed or torque control 4 2 Main Contactor Operation
326. at the speed and current control terms are carefully set for optimum performance otherwise current overshoots or noisy feedback signals may cause instability When disabled the current response is similar to a standard performance DC controller which in most cases is completely acceptable also the PL X is more tolerant of poor feedback control term settings 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 DRIVE PERSONALITY 3 680 larm BURDEN OHMS This value must be the same PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN as the actual BURDEN Ohms larm BURDEN OHMS 0 00 to 320 00 According to MODEL 680 The burden resistors are on the lower edge of the power board to the right of the 8 way terminal block R100 R101 100 parallel back pair or R102 R103 50 parallel front pair selected by jumper Formula Combined value of BURDEN OHMS 2000 max model amps For PL X 5 145 Combined value of BURDEN OHMS 4000 max model amps For PL X 185 225 To larm input channel With jumper in this With jumper in this 100 position 50 position R102 R100 R101 are in parallel with and R103 are in R104 Result 100 current parallel with R104 Result 50 current Total Resistance is twice the 100 value With jumper parked on one pin only R104 is connected Result small motor current Effective burden value 330R gives 6A 5 50 models may be measured 82R gives 24A 65 145 models betwe
327. avoid the conflict This process is repeated until there are no conflicts Note that this tool is extremely helpful Without it there is the possibility that user GOTO configuration errors would cause multiple values to alternately appear at the conflict PIN resulting in unusual system behaviour 12 1 4 2 Application blocks PIN table The application blocks start at PIN 401 and continue up to approximately PIN 670 There is a complete numeric PIN table for these in the separate application blocks manual CONFIGURATION 167 13 CONFIGURATION 13 CONFIGURATION 4 ogee taunt oe 167 13 1 CONFIGURATION si essersi se sss sse se se 168 T3 T T PL PIEOT configuration tool i t te e eei Da see ee ES QR ends 168 13 2 Configurable 2 1 1 1 1 4 44 2 4 4 1 11 01 sense nnns 169 13 2 1 Key features of GOTO window 1 00 0 1 1 6 170 13 2 2 Key features of GET FROM 1 1 2 2 4 4 2 4 44 1110 nnn 170 13 2 3 Summary of GOTO and GET FROM 1 0 nnns 171 13 2 4 JUMPER CORMCCHONS Ere rex San Dunt rp Rep ERE EERE 171 13 2 5 Bl
328. b in or 3 9 N m L1L2L3 A A PL X 275 980 242 Ib in or 27 Fan supply terminals PL X 275 980 9 or 1 0 N m 7 3 4 Forces applied to the power terminals Avoid applying mechanical stress to the heavy current terminals L1 2 3 A A Please ensure that any cables or busbars that are bolted to these terminals are supported within the enclosure Do not rely on the drive terminals to support the weight of the external connections Do not use the connecting bolt to hold the terminal and the connecting cable or busbar in alignment otherwise if they have been levered into alignment prior to inserting the bolt there will be a permanent stress on the terminal Always support the connection to the terminal such that the only purpose of the terminal bolt is to tighten them together and not to maintain their relative position to each other The respective holes in the terminal and the connecting busbar should remain in alignment without the aid of the terminal bolt Then you can be sure that there is minimum stress on the drive terminal busbar When tightening the connecting bolts of the terminals L1 2 3 A A please ensure that the busbar is not subjected to a turning moment as the nut is torqued down To do this always use two spanners one on the bolt head to provide a counter torque and one on the nut to provide tightening torque 7 3 5 Avoid dropping small objects into unit If the unit is in the horizontal plane then there is a
329. bility of the user to ensure the compliance of the installation with any acts or bylaws in force Only skilled personnel should install and maintain this equipment after reading and understanding this instruction manual If in doubt refer to the supplier Note The contents of this manual are believed to be accurate at the time of printing The manufacturers however reserve the right to change the content and product specification without notice No liability is accepted for omissions or errors No liability is accepted for the installation or fitness for purpose or application of the PL X motor drive unit 14 Warnings 2 2 Warnings and Instructions WARNING Only qualified personnel who thoroughly understand the operation of this equipment and any associated machinery should install start up or attempt maintenance of this equipment Non compliance with this warning may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Never work on any control equipment without first isolating all power supplies from the equipment The drive and motor must be connected to an appropriate safety earth Failure to do so presents an electrical shock hazard CAUTION This equipment was tested before it left our factory However before installation and start up inspect all equipment for transit damage loose parts packing materials etc This product conforms to IPOO protection Due consideration should be given to environmental conditions of installation for
330. cceleration of the system is required in order to calculate the total inertia compensation There are two ways of arriving at a value for acceleration 1 Input the acceleration value directly from an external source to PIN 512 2 Let the block calculate the value by differentiating the line or web speed which is input to PIN 510 When using method 2 a line or web speed reference is input Note The line speed reference will usually come from an external source via an analogue input terminal 44 APPLICATION BLOCKS The input speed is scaled by PIN 511 ACCEL SCALER Note If PIN 511 ACCEL SCALER is set to 0 00 then an internal switch is opened to allow 512 ACCEL INPUT MON to become an input Otherwise it remains a monitor of the calculated accel The resulting value on 512 ACCEL INPUT MON should be arranged to be 100 00 for maximum acceleration by either method 3 7 13 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel scaler PIN 511 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 511 ACCEL SCALER Sets the scaling factor to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN normalise the accel calculation ACCEL SCALER 100 00 10 00 511 Typically set this value to equal the 100 ramp time E g Total ramp time equal 10 secs Set to 10 00 See 3 7 12 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel line speed input PIN 510 Note If PIN 511 ACCEL SCALER is set to 0 00 then an internal switch is opened to allow 512 ACCEL INPUT MON to become an input Otherwise it remains a monitor of the calculated accel
331. ccuracy and dynamic performance In typical systems there are numerous house keeping tasks and interface requirements For these the PL X series has a wealth of standard features to benefit the user A range of standard application blocks is included with a user friendly configuration facility that displays a description of the selected connection points The programming menu is designed for rapid travel to the desired parameter using 4 keys and a large backlit alphanumeric display A large number of monitoring facilities is available to enable display of all points in the block diagram The unit is supplied with a superb cross platform Windows OSX Unix configuration and monitoring tool An upgrade to savvy SFD generates a Signal Flow Diagram to document the drive s setup and programming Introduction and Technical Data 21 3 2 1 Useful things to know about the PL X 1 The unit comes from the factory with a built in default personality which will be suitable for most applications but may be re programmed by the user Up to 3 total instrument recipes can be stored 2 The default personality can be restored by holding down all 4 keys and applying the control supply but the calibration values relevant to the motor are unaffected by this procedure See 5 1 3 and 13 13 2 3 There are over 700 programmable parameters available but only a handful of these will need to be adjusted by most users 4 Internal connections between blocks an
332. comparator output PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT logic to be inverted for DIOX DIO1 INVERT MODE INVERT NON INVERT NON INVERT CONFIGURATION 185 13 6 1 5 DIOX SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 Make output GET FROM source connection DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 GET FROM Defines the target source PIN for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT connection to the DIOX GET FROM PINOOO to 720 400 The connection is made here for the digital PIN 271 PIN 272 0101 output block source It may be a linear logic 7O H m S Y BART E EI eT FROM value er processing by the rectifier box i gets compared to the threshold The comparator output state HIGH or LOW is then G old T18 Bot inverted or not inverted by the inverter mode box It then proceeds to the output stage IG PIN 276 80 TO through the digital output enable switch and becomes a 24V logic signal It is also available for internal connection See 3 4 2 Digital inputs and outputs 13 6 1 6 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 Make input GOTO destination connection DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 GOTO Defines the target destination PIN PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT for connection to the DIOX GOTO O00 to 720 See 13 6 1 9 The digital input mode detects whether the input is high or low and then selects an output value i PIN 272 DIO1 Rect Bipolar GET FROM PIN 27 If the input is h
333. conductor fuse ratings for component dissipation ratings 6 35 Cubic feet per minute is approximately equivalent to 1 cubic metre per minute 180 Cubic feet per minute is approximately equivalent to 6 cubic metres per minute 7 The output power rating shown is at the 10096 rating of the drive and is the power available at the shaft for a typical motor The actual power available will depend on the efficiency of the motor 8 The high power field output option is an extra cost facility and needs to be specified at the time of order 14 2 Product rating labels The product rating labels are located on the unit under the upper end cap The product serial number is unique and can be used by the manufacturer to identify all ratings of the unit The power ratings and model type are also found here along with any product standard labels applicable to the unit 14 3 Semiconductor fuse ratings WARNING All units must be protected by correctly rated semi conductor fuses Failure to do so will invalidate warranty In general the input AC supply current per phase is O 8 times the DC output current and the fuse rating should be approx 1 25 times the input AC current The fuses specified in this table have been rated to include the 150 overload capability and operate up to 50C ambient at the maximum drive rating To select a fuse at other ratings E g when using a motor rated at a lower power than the drive unit or operating at a reduced maximum current li
334. ction is not disturbed by this block being operational SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 The spindle orientation will function irrespective of 242 POSITION REF the speed feedback type The block utilises the encoder marker to provide SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 the controller with the absolute position angle of 243 MARKER FREQ MON the encoder The marker is input via terminal T15 PL models with the regenerative stopping facility can only orientate during the contactor drop out delay To maintain position lock during a contactor drop out delay ensure 6 5 4 STOP MODE RAMP Live delay mode 58 is set to ENABLED See also 6 5 6 STOP MODE RAMP Drop out delay PIN 60 The encoder pulses are input on terminals T16 and T17 Note Quadrature type encoders are recommended because they will usually provide more accurate counting during reversals than Pulse and direction types Terminals T15 T16 T17 are also used as standard logic inputs DIP 2 3 4 This function continues to operate However logic levels that are changing at a frequency of greater than 20 Hz will not necessarily be recognised by the standard logic input function The standard logic input function can be useful to check logic output levels of a slowly rotated encoder during commissioning mem MUR encoder input type and scaling is programmed by using T15 16 17 snore the CALIBRATION ENCODER SCALING menu to select the g PIN XXX encoder type sign encoder lin
335. current 6 Amps will be flowing in the armature but 110Amps will be displayed on 135 ARM CUR AMPS MON Table of burden resistor values for models with jumper selection R104 6A or 24Amp depending on model R103 R102 R104 50 R101 R100 R104 100 Amps Theoretical Burden Rt Fixed as shown R103 R102 R104 R101 R100 R104 Also 680 larm BURDEN for small motors 50 100 OHMS 1 0 6W 1 0 6W 100 50 R104 ohms R103 R102 ohms R101 R101 ohms 12 166 66 319 95 6Amps 330 10 500 empty 680 680 24 83 33 167 46 6Amps 330 680 680 220 220 36 55 55 110 44 6Amps 330 332 332 66 5 empty 51 39 21 78 21 6Amps 330 205 205 88 7 88 7 72 27 77 55 35 6Amps 330 66 5 empty 60 4 60 4 99 20 20 40 68 6Amps 330 46 4 empty 43 43 123 16 26 32 46 6Amps 330 36 empty 34 34 155 12 90 25 68 24Amps 82 37 4 empty 30 1 30 1 205 9 75 19 48 24Amps 82 51 1 51 1 22 1 22 1 270 7 41 14 76 24Amps 82 36 36 16 2 16 2 330 6 06 11 96 24Amps 82 28 28 13 13 430 9 30 18 50 24Amps 150 42 2 42 2 19 6 19 6 530 7 54 14 95 24Amps 150 33 2 33 2 15 8 15 8 630 6 35 12 55 24Amps 150 27 4 27 4 13 3 13 3 See 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 for burden formula 200 CONFIGURATION 13 13 4 2 WARNING about changing BURDEN OHMS It is important that
336. d 278 18 6 8 DIO2 119 SETUP DIO2 OP comparator threshold PIN 279 300 00 0 00 279 18 6 4 DIO2 119 SETUP DIO2 Output inversion mode PIN280 0 1 280 13 6 1 7 DIO2 T19 SETUP 0102 Input high value PIN 281 300 00 0 01 281 13 6 1 8 DIO2 T19 SETUP 0102 Input low value PIN 282 PIN number tables 223 13 6 2 D103 120 SETUP DIO3 Output value rectify enable PIN 284 O 1 Enabled 284 3 6 1 3 D103 720 SETUP DIO3 OP comparator threshold PIN 285 800 00 0 00 285 136 14 D103 720 SETUP DIO3 Output inversion mode 286 0 1 Non invert 286 3 6 1 7 103 720 SETUP DIO3 Input high vale PIN 287 30050 0 01 287 3 6 1 8 01031720 SETUP DIO3 Input low value PIN 288 300 00 0 00 288 13 6 1 2 0104 T21 SETUP 0104 Output value rectify enable 290 Enabled 3 6 1 3 5104 721 SETUP 0104 OP comparator threshold 291 800 00 0 00 291 136 14 104 721 SETUP DIO4 Output inversion mode PIN292 0 1 Non invert 292 13 61 7 2104 721 SETUP DIO4 Input high vele PIN 293 800 00 0 01 293 3 6 1 8 2104 721 SETUP 104 Input low value PIN 294 300 00 0 00 294 a ET 1382 STAGNGPOSTS Digtapost PIN206 tow 296 13 82 STAGINGPOSTS Digtalpost2 PIN297 fon 287 1382 STAGING
337. d EMC of the whole system WARNING Safety earthing always takes precedence over EMC earthing Installation 216 Earthing diagram for typical installation 14 11 3 HOLOIN SaNa H109 LV HIHV3 38 GINOHS G3GN3WINO23H SI HO SNIN33HO2S 1 3SVO YOLOW JHL OL Y3HLO JHL LV SISSVHO 1 AHL OL SI LVHL YALONGNOOD TVNHW3INI 31VH3d3S V LSNW S318 VO HO LOW L HOLOIN TIVNIIAH3I AO V OL JINGOW JAYA LY AINO Q3 1L93NNOO N33HOS HI3H L Q3N33HOS 38 GINOHS S318VO IWNOIS ANY TOHINOO Hluv3 Ald4vS 9NWOONI LNIOd SIHL LV LON SH1HV3 HOLOW STVNIIAH3 L 3184 2 YOLOW SNIODLNO l3NI8VO NI S318VO JAYA 3GISDNO TV NOH YOLOW AlddNS S3 18VO YOLOW S3 18VO YAHLO WWOOE lt LINGNOOD Q31V93H93S SIVNINYAL 318 2 ONIODLNO YIFHL OL 31815504 SV 35012 SV 38 GINOHS SnivHvddV YAHLO 006 lt Qq31v93u893S GINOHS SFINGOW JAYA 1 i 7 renee LNIOd YVLS LI I 1 DaS RIRIN 1 OL ATLOSHIC Q3193NNOO 1 SH1uva 1 qavd HOLOIN 31Vd 5va 1 ASVO Hall STVNDIS TOYLNOD
338. d by START T33 PARAMETER RANGE PIN JOG T32 and MODE SELECT PIN 42 RUNNING MODE 1 of 7 modes displayed 168 Note MODE SELECT PIN42 has a default connection from T15 The 7 modes with their numeric codes displayed are O or 1 STOP 4 JOG SPEED 1 b JOG SPEED 2 2 RUN 6 SLACK SPEED 1 7 SLACK SPEED2 3 CRAWL DIAGNOSTICS 133 BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 7 6 DIAGNOSTICS BLOCK OP MONITOR RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 21 RAMP OP MONITOR BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 45 MP OP MONITOR BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 192 REF XC MASTER MN BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 401 SUMMER1 OP MON BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 415 SUMMER2 OP MON BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 DIAGNOSTICS BLOCK OP MONITOR Y BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 560 LATCH OUTPUT MON BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 568 FILTER1 OP MON BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 573 FILTER2 OP MON BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 578 COUNTER COUNT 429 PID1 OP MONITOR BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 583 TMR ELAPSED TIME BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 452 PID2 OP MONITOR BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 475 PROFILE Y OP MON BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 483 DIAMETER OP MON BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 494 TOTAL TENSION MN BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 500 TORQUE DEMAND BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 RESERVED FOR FUTURE BLOCK OP MONITOR 523 PRESET OP MON B
339. d feedback to produce a speed error This is then processed in the speed loop P error amplifier The output of this block is the current reference that is sent to the current control blocks during normal running See 6 7 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED CONTROL 6 6 1 SPEED REF SUMMER Block diagram 4 62 SPEED Spd Int Int Ref 1 CONTROL Reset Default i PIN Motorised pot i 73 Sae Speed Error Space loop Dora amplifier Default Terminal 2 i PIN 713 PIN 64 A Speed Speed error Ref 3 Mon monitor Def Terminal 3 125 i Cur reference Internal O Total Speed O O Current Run mode ramp Speed Ref demand reference to current loop monitor monitor PIN 123 PIN 124 block output CHANGE PARAMETERS 91 6 6 2 SPEED REF SUMMER Internal speed reference 1 PIN 62 SPEED REF SUMMER 3 62 INT SPEED REF 1 Sets internal reference 1 level PARAMETER INT SPEED REF 1 Default connection to the motorised potentiometer output RANGE 105 00 DEFAULT 0 00 6 6 3 SPEED REF SUMMER Auxiliary speed reference 2 PIN 63 R SPEED REF SUMMER 3 63 SPEED REF 2 63 SPEED REF 2 0 00 Sets aux speed reference 2 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN level Default connection to T2 SPEED REF 2 105 00 0 00 63 6 6 4 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed reference 3 monitor PIN 64 R SPEED REF SUMMER 3 64 SPEED REF 3 MON Monitors speed ref 3 level PARAMETER
340. d menu enable Password control Language select Software version STALL TRIP MENU Stall trip enable Stall current level Stall delay time RS232 PORT 1 Port 1 baud rate Port 1 function Parameter exchange PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive transmit Drive receive Reference exchange Port 1 comms link PASSWORD CONTROL Menu list to host REFERENCE EXCHANGE Ref exch slave ratio Ref exch slave sign Ref exch slave monitor Ref exch master monitor Get from PORT 1 COMMS LINK Port 1 unit ID Port 1 group ID Port 1 error code display Port 1 DOP3 RTS mode Enter password Alter password Menu tree stucture 53 5 2 5 Full menu diagram Application blocks and configuration Continued from previous Application blocks Configuration Continued on next page APPLICATION BLOCKS Section 12 Summer 1 Summer 2 PID 1 PID 2 Parameter profile Reel diameter calculator Taper tension calculator Torque compensator Preset speed Multi function 1 Multi function 2 Multi function 3 Multi function 4 Multi function 5 Multi function 6 Multi function 7 Multi function 8 Latch Filter 1 Filter 2 Batch counter Interval timer Comparator 1 Comparator 2 Comparator 3 Comparator 4 C O Switch 1 C O Switch 2 C O Switch 3 C O Switch 4 Note Further application blocks may be available
341. d parameters are easily altered to suit special applications 5 All parameters have a unique identification number called a PIN Parameter Identification Number 6 When parameters are altered by the user they become effective immediately However the alterations will be lost if the control supply is removed prior to performing a parameter save 7 Most parameters may be adjusted while the drive is running to assist commissioning If this is not advisable the unit requests a stop condition 8 There is a built in meter which allows monitoring of all relevant inputs and outputs including power connections in engineering units and percentages There are also default diagnostic summary windows 9 There is a large selection of robust inputs and outputs to interface with typical systems 10 The drive personality is stored in one memory device which is designed to be transportable to another unit in the event of a breakdown See 10 2 3 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Eeprom transfer between units 11 All the drive parameter values may be listed out on a printer Parameters that have been altered from the default are identified in the listing They may also be sent to or received from another unit or computer 12 The unit contains standard special applications blocks that are normally switched off unless activated by the user These include signal processors PIDs etc They do not take part in the prime control of the motor but may be used to con
342. danger that objects may be accidentally dropped into the air intake grille when connecting the busbars to the terminals Or when the unit is vertical dropping washers into the fin section at the top or objects dropping through the upper air intake grill As a precaution it is advised that a temporary cover be utilised over these areas when working on the unit e g a piece of cardboard Do not forget to remove the temporary cover prior to starting the unit If anything is dropped into the unit then it may interfere with the fan rotation PLX275 980 13 7 4 Line reactors Only use UL certified line reactors for installations complying with UL codes These line reactors are not certified Refer to supplier for certified alternatives Model Max continuous Line reactor Line reactor PL 20 Current AMPS Type Type PLX 40 480V AC 690V AC Supply Supply Input Output AC DC PL X275 530 650 LR650 LR650HV PL X315 615 750 LR750 LR750HV PL X360 700 850 LR850 LR850HV PL X400 780 950 LR950 LR950HV PL X440 860 1050 LR1050 LR1050HV PL X520 1025 1250 LR1250 LR1250HV PL X600 1190 1450 LR1450 LR1450HV PL X700 1350 1650 LR1650 LR1650HV PL X800 1520 1850 LR1850 LR1850HV PL X900 1680 2050 LR2050 LR2050HV PL X980 1845 2250 LR2250 LR2250HV To obtain line reactor dimensions please refer to supplier 7 b Lifting the unit Use the lifting points provided There are lifting holes at each end of t
343. de mechanical isolation of the motor armature from the power supply In the event of an emergency it must be possible for the supply to be removed electromechanically without the aid of semiconductor electronics This requirement is usually mandated by safety codes Under normal operation the contactor is controlled by the PL X according to the programmed requirements of the user See 6 5 CHANGE PARAMETERS STOP MODE RAMP The CSTOP coast stop terminal T34 goes directly to the 24V coil of the internal contactor control relay Relay contact is T45 and T46 If this terminal is provided with 24V then the relay and hence the main contactor is ready to be controlled by the PL X If the CSTOP terminal is opened then the relay will either not energise or de energise and release the main contactor There is a capacitor across the relay coil which causes it to have a defined drop out time of approx 100mS This ensures that the PL X has time to commutate the armature current to zero before the contacts open It may be necessary for installations to have over riding external independent systems for de energising the main contactor In this case it is recommended that the CSTOP terminal be opened 100mS in advance of the main contacts opening Failure to achieve this may result in damage to the unit Note If the users main contactor has a closing time delay of greater than 75mS then it is essential that steps are taken to delay the release of armature c
344. degree of displacement Hence if offset required is 56 8 degrees Then enter counts of 56 8 X 40 2272 E g Encoder has 2048 lines Encoder type is SINGLE LINE PLUS DIRECTION This gives 2048 X 2 counts per rev 4096 That is 4096 360 11 378 counts per degree of displacement Hence if offset required is 56 8 degrees Then enter counts of 56 8 X 11 378 646 If the encoder is mounted on the motor shaft but the spindle that requires orientation is connected to the motor via a gearbox such that the motor shaft and hence encoder is rotating faster than the spindle Then the number of counts per rev of the spindle will be increased by a factor equal to the gear box ratio 120 CHANGE PARAMETERS E 9 Counts per degree at the motor shaft 40 Reduction gearbox ratio 3 1 Then counts per degree at the spindle 120 Note In systems with reduction gearboxes the motor encoder will provide more than one marker per rev of the spindle There are 2 ways of overcoming this problem For non integer ratio and integer ratio gearing 1 Provide another marker which only occurs once per rev of the spindle E g A magnetic pick up MARKER ENABLE sensing a tab on the spindle OR For integer ratio gearing only 2 Use 240 MARKER ENABLE parameter to select the required marker at the appropriate position This Desired marker may be achieved by using a microswitch that operates while the required marker is present but not M with the other markers
345. deo ise T 165 Sample 165 12 1 2 Order of processing ite ead een ie tes 165 12 13 Eogic levels i2 did Seth Eoo UOS pA OL BE Ri nie bees exa 166 1251 4 Activating blocks pice Se haha ay 166 12 1 4 1 Conflicting GOTO COnneCtions 0 cece eee 166 12 1 4 2 Application blocks PIN 4444 4 4 166 13 CONFIGURATION demu 167 13 1 GONFIGURATION io er ex SEDE 168 PLE PILOT 168 13 2 Configurable 1 1 444 41 41 4 1 1 1 1 1 nnns 169 13 2 1 Key features of GOTO window 4 0 annees 170 13 2 2 Key features of GET FROM 0 1 0 4 1 1 5 1 nnne 170 13 2 3 Summary of GOTO GET FROM 2 1 6666 66 171 13 2 4 JUMPER GoOFnectI
346. e 2 gt gt gt e Back plate 100mm min intake extension minimum gap 50mm Pe standoff pillars Airflow 42 HI Back plate Drive on 50mm e a Door mounted air filter Airflow 1 xi 1 eo Airflow 2 4 2 7 4 Ed 2 wd 2254 i intake i 7 7 2 212 Installation 14 8 Line reactors Only use CSA UL certified line reactors for installations complying with CSA UL codes These line reactors are not certified Refer to supplier for certified alternatives Model Output power Max continuous Line reactor PL 20 At At Current AMPS Type PLX 40 460V 500V Input Output Kw HP HP AC DC PL X5 5 7 7 5 10 12 LM18 PL X10 10 13 15 20 24 LM18 PL X15 15 20 20 30 36 LM37 PL X20 20 27 30 40 51 LM52 PL X30 30 40 40 60 72 LM67 PL X40 40 53 60 80 99 LM82 PL X50 50 67 75 100 123 LM120 PL X65 65 90 100 124 164 LM150 PL X85 85 115 125 164 205 LM195 PL X115 115 155 160 216 270 LM240 PL X145 145 190 200 270 330 LM300 PL X185 185 250 270 350 430 LM375 PL X225 225 300 330 435 530 LM480 PL 265 265 360 400 520 630 LM60
347. e There is a separate window for each input The PINs 150 to 157 for UIP2 to UIP9 The monitoring range depends on the UIP range selected 5 10 20 or 30V R 150 UIP2 T2 MON 0 000 VOLTS Range for 5V is 5 3V Absolute accuracy worst case 0 4 typically 0 1 Range for 10V is 10 4V Absolute accuracy worst case 0 4 typically 0 1 Range for 20V is 20 6V Absolute accuracy worst case 4 typically 1 Range for 30V is 30 8V Absolute accuracy worst case 4 typically 1 7 4 2 ANALOG IO MONITOR AOP1 2 3 analogue output monitor PINs 159 160 161 ANALOG IO MONITOR 3 159 AOP1 T10 MON Shows the analogue output voltage for PARAMETER RANGE PINs AOP1 2 3 PIN numbers 159 160 161 AOPX TXX MON 11 300 volts 159 161 Note The analogue output monitor for AOP1 2 3 shows the value written to that output If the output is overloaded or shorted then the value shown will not agree with the actual output DIAGNOSTICS 131 7 5 DIAGNOSTICS DIGITAL IO MONITOR PIN number range 162 169 DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 B G9 RUNNING MODE MON DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 H 162 UIP 23456789 R DIAGNOSTICS DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 163 DIP 12341234 DIO This menu allows monitoring of the digital input and output functions DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 Universal inputs are UIP2 to UIP9 UIP1 is used 164 DOP 123TRJSC CIP internally and
348. e but must not normally be higher However see also 6 8 3 1 2 How to get overloads greater than 15096 using 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET See 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 CHANGE PARAMETERS 61 6 1 3 CALIBRATION Current limit PIN 3 QUICK START CALIBRATION 3 CURRENT LIMIT This is the desired current limit PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN 96 of 2 ARM AMPS CURRENT LIMIT O to150 of rated motor amps 150 0096 3 This parameter may be adjusted whilst the PL X is running If a 150 overload limit is too low for your application then it is possible to cater for larger overload percentages on motors smaller than the PL X model armature current rating See 6 8 3 1 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload target PIN 82 If the current exceeds the level set by the overload target then after an appropriate dwell time it is progressively reduced to the overload target level Table showing maximum overloads according to Full load motor current as a 96 of 22RATED ARM AMPS Full load motor current Maximum available Maximum overload 96 available 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET as With respect to full load motor current a 96 of 22RATED ARM AMPS 10096 15096 150 100 15096 9096 15096 150 90 166 80 150 150 80 187 75 150 150 75 200 60 150 150 60 250 50 150 150 50 300 37 5 150 150 37 5 400 30 150 150 30 50
349. e PIN 9 QUICK START When the drive is first being commissioned it is recommended that the AVF mode be used initially This allows any other speed feedback transducers to be examined for correct outputs prior to relying on them for control safety For systems employing a DC contactor you must use T41 and T43 for remote AVF See 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PIN 9 QUICK START Current loop control terms If you change your supply voltage current calibration or motor type the 3 values for PINs 93 94 95 must be adjusted accordingly Either by using the AUTOTUNE function or manually See 6 8 9 CURRENT CONTROL Autotune enable PIN 92 See 6 8 12 1 Setting the current loop control terms manually Warning Field reversal or disconnection Due to the high inductance of motor fields it may take several seconds for the field current to decay to zero after the field output has been inhibited by the PL X Do not open circuit the field unless the field current has reached zero See 6 9 CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD CONTROL WARNING When using field weakening and a DC side power contactor the motor armature must be connected to the REMOTE AV sensing terminals T41 and T43 Failure to do this will cause flashover of the commutator because the AVF feedback is lost when the contactor opens See 6 9 6 FIELD CONTROL FLD WEAKENING MENU 18 Warnings WARNING All these alarms are generated by semiconductor electronics Local safety codes may manda
350. e SAFETY of your system or process consult an expert immediately Do not proceed without doing so HEALTH AND SAFETY AT WORK Electrical devices can constitute a safety hazard It is the responsibility of the user to ensure the compliance of the installation with any acts or bylaws in force Only skilled personnel should install and maintain this equipment after reading and understanding this instruction manual If in doubt refer to the supplier Note The contents of this manual are believed to be accurate at the time of printing The manufacturers however reserve the right to change the content and product specification without notice No liability is accepted for omissions or errors No liability is accepted for the installation or fitness for purpose or application of the PL X motor drive unit 8 Warnings 2 2 Warnings and Instructions WARNING Only qualified personnel who thoroughly understand the operation of this equipment and any associated machinery should install start up or attempt maintenance of this equipment Non compliance with this warning may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Never work on any control equipment without first isolating all power supplies from the equipment The drive and motor must be connected to an appropriate safety earth Failure to do so presents an electrical shock hazard CAUTION This equipment was tested before it left our factory However before installation and start up inspec
351. e automatically sets the following parameters 93 CUR PROP GAIN is set to 1 00 94 CUR INT GAIN is set to 7 00 95 CURRENT DISCONTINUITY is set to 0 00 2 The autotune will find that the current goes continuous at a high level in stage 1 During stage 2 the induced perturbations cause a current overload to occur Then the routine is aborted and the old parameter values are left intact In this case it is suggested that the following parameters are set manually 93 CUR PROP GAIN is set to 1 00 94 CUR INT GAIN is set to 7 00 95 CURRENT DISCONTINUITY is set to 0 00 This is a good starting point although the current loop response may be slow when the armature current is high above the discontinuous current point Note There is a hidden PIN which contains 707 AUTOTUNE MONITOR flag High for start 6 8 10 CURRENT CONTROL Current amp proportional gain PIN 93 CURRENT CONTROL 3 H 93 CUR PROP GAIN 7 Sets the proportional gain of PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the current error amplifier CUR PROP GAIN 0 00 to 200 00 30 00 93 This can be set by using the AUTOTUNE function Increase to improve response too much may cause instability If you change your supply voltage current calibration or motor type then re adjust this parameter 6 8 11 CURRENT CONTROL Current amp integral gain PIN 94 CURRENT CONTROL 3 iB 94 CUR INT GAIN co Sets the integral gain of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN current error amplifier CUR I
352. e bottom which blows air over a high dissipation heatsink Cool air is drawn in both at the top and bottom of the unit and after travelling over the internal heatsink fins is exhausted at the top of the unit From here the warm air must be vented from the enclosure used to house the drive See 4 Mechanical Dimensions PL X 275 440 and 5 Mechanical Dimensions PL X 520 980 for diagram of air exhaust flow The unit will run cooler and hence be less stressed if the warm exhaust air is prevented from mixing with the intake air This can be achieved by the use of the optional venting kit See below 6 1 1 When venting kit impractical Models PL X 275 315 360 520 600 For these models it is usually sufficient to ensure that the enclosure is fitted with exhaust fans that can evacuate air from the enclosure at a rate at least as high as the drive fan but within the capacity of the enclosure inlet filter See 3 Rating Table for airflow ratings When fitting enclosure fans ensure they are placed in the roof of the enclosure directly above the exhaust outlet of the PL X 6 1 2 When venting kit impractical Models PL X 400 440 700 800 900 980 For these models it is necessary to keep the exhaust air that is emitted from the top end of the fin section seperated from the rest of the enclosure by constructing a duct that can evacuate the exhaust air from the enclosure If this requires an indirect route then you may need to use external fans to maintain the requi
353. e digital and analogue posts are allocated PIN numbers and are used as virtual wiring nodes They can contain a value or act as constants for STAGING POSTS 3 setting a value 300 ANALOG POST 1 1 When receiving values via a serial link the posts can store the data and are then connected STAGING POSTS 3 by the user to the desired destinations 301 ANALOG POST 2 2 Blocks in the applications menu are normally dormant Connecting the output to a PIN STAGING POSTS 3 destination other than 400 activates them Using 302 ANALOG POST 3 a software post is extremely useful during system commissioning if a block output needs to be examined prior to incorporation into a system The block output will be activated by connecting it to one of these posts It may then be monitored via the display and if required connection to an analogue output terminal using the terminals GET FROM link allows monitoring with an oscilloscope See also 13 4 3 ANALOG OUTPUTS Scope output select PIN 260 When satisfied with the output functionality you can then connect it to the final system destination The analogue posts are used for linear values The digital posts are used for logic values a zero value is a logic low a non zero value is a logic high 442252 Note Staging posts also used for making connections between GOTO GETFROM Note Any unused settable PIN may perform the function of a staging post A convenient cluster of 8 PINs can be f
354. e digital output 2 GOTO destination connection 176 13 3 1 9 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Digital input high value for output 1 PIN 3 2 5 to 3 9 5 177 13 3 1 10 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Digital input low value for output 1 PIN 3 2 6 to 3 9 6 177 13 3 1 11 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Digital input high value for output 2 PIN 3 2 7 to 3 9 7 177 13 3 1 12 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Digital input low value for output 2 PIN 3 2 8 to 3 9 8 177 13 3 1 13 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Threshold PIN 3 2 9 to 3 9 9 177 10 Contents 13 4 CONFIGURATION ANALOG OUTPUTS 178 13 4 1 ANALOG OUTPUTS AOP4 larm output rectify enable PIN 250 178 13 4 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS AOP1 2 3 4 178 13 4 2 1 SETUP AOP1 2 3 Dividing factor PINs 251 254 257 179 13 4 2 2 SETUP AOP1 2 3 Offset PINs 252 255 258 179 13 4 2 3 SETUP AOP1 2 3 Rectify mode enable PINs 253 256 259 179 13 4 2 4 SETUP AOP1 2 3 Make output GET FROM source connection 179 13 4 2 5 Default connections for 1 2 3 272 0 0 2 179 13 4 3 ANALOG OUTPUTS Scope output select 260
355. e input 161 AOP3 T12 MON and output functions ANALOG IO MONITOR 3 IB 150 UIP2 T2 MON R DIAGNOSTICS 2 ANALOG IO MONITOR 3 Analogue inputs are UIP2 to UIP9 The UIP number corresponds to its terminal number UIP1 is used internally and not available on a terminal UIP2 to 9 are universal inputs and can be used as digital and or analogue inputs The analogue value appears in this menu and the digital logic level will simultaneously appear in the digital IO menu ANALOG IO MONITOR 3 151 UIP3 T3 MON 3 R ANALOG IO MONITOR 152 UIP4 T4 MON Note that the analogue output monitor for ANALOG IO MONITOR 3 AOP1 2 3 shows the value written to that output 153 to160 UIP5 to11 MON If the output is overloaded or shorted then the value shown will not agree with the actual output The PL X possesses a very useful commissioning tool 260 SCOPE OP SELECT When enabled this automatically configures AOP3 on terminal 12 as an oscilloscope probe output See 13 4 3 ANALOG OUTPUTS Scope output select PIN 260 The output is automatically connected to whatever parameter is being displayed and reconnected to its original source after the function is no longer enabled 7 4 1 ANALOG IO MONITOR UIP2 to 9 analogue input monitor PINs 150 to 157 R ANALOG IO MONITOR 3 150 UIP2 T2 MON Shows the analogue voltage for the PARAMETER RANGE PINs universal inputs 2 to 9 UIPX TX MON 30 800 volts Not
356. e of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN calculator on power up DIA BOOT UP MODE ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 493 This may be used to retain the calculator value in the event of a power loss 1 DISABLED Used to set the value of the calculator on control supply power up to the MIN DIAMETER 2 ENABLED Used to retain the current value of the calculator during control supply power off APPLICATION BLOCKS 35 3 6 APPLICATION BLOCKS TAPER TENSION CALC PINs used 494 to 499 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 TAPER TENSION CALC 3 This block allows the introduction of positive or negative taper to a tension reference and the ability to externally trim the final output The taper profile can be selected to be hyperbolic or linear to suit most types of winding requirements Note This block has internal connections to the diameter calculator block which must also be activated to allow the taper calculation 3 6 1 TAPER TENSION CALC Block diagram 495 Tension ref l Min dia Diameter PIN 499 internal connections Tapered Tension Monitor Total PIN 497 The diameter calculator Taper mode block must be actived Tension Taper strength Monitor PIN 498 Taper calc TAPER TENSION Tension trim IP CALCULATOR GO TO 3 6 1 1 Linear taper equation TAPER TENSION CALC 3 499 TAPERED TENS MON TAPER TENSION CALC 3 494 TOTAL TENSION MN TAPER TENSION CALC 3 495 TENSION REF TAPER T
357. e speed loop error amplifier There are 4 speed reference inputs SPEED REF SUMMER 3 B 63 SPEED REF 2 Connections 62 63 65 may be re programmed Motorised potentiometer to 62 INT SPEED REF 1 UIP2 T2 To 63 SPEED REF 2 UIP4 T4 Run mode ramp to 65 RAMPED SPD REF 4 UIP3 T3 Internally connected to 64 SPEED REF3 MON SPEED REF SUMMER 3 la 64 SPEED REF MON SPEED REF SUMMER 3 B G5 RAMPED SPD REF 4 64 SPEED REF 3 MON is a monitor of UIP3 only when it is being used as a speed ref with speed bypass disabled It may be inverted and or scaled if desired It is sampled rapidly to give maximum response See 6 8 14 CURRENT CONTROL Speed bypass current reference enable PIN 97 Note The STOP command overides and disables the speed bypass mode This ensures a controlled stop to zero speed when using the speed bypass mode SPEED REF SUMMER iB G6 SPD CUR REF3 SIGN 3 The inputs are summed and then subjected to programmable maximum ve and ve clamps The output after the clamps is the final speed reference which is available to be monitored This is selected during normal running During a stop sequence this is reset to zero at the programmed STOP rate See 6 2 CHANGE PARAMETERS RUN MODE RAMPS for information about the run mode ramp resetting functions The stop ramp is released immediately when running is resumed The output after this selection is the speed demand and is summed with negative spee
358. e speed reference 70 93 6 7 4 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 4 22 93 6 7 5 SPEED CONTROL Speed integral time constant PIN 72 94 6 7 6 SPEED CONTROL Speed integral reset enable 73 94 6 7 7 SPEED CONTROL SPEED PI ADAPTION 2 94 6 7 7 1 SPEED ADAPTION Low break point 74 0 112 95 6 7 7 2 SPEED PI ADAPTION High break point PIN 7 5 4 1022 12 95 Contents 6 7 7 3 SPEED ADAPTION Low breakpoint proportional gain PIN 76 95 6 7 7 4 SPEED ADAPTION Low breakpoint integral time constant PIN 77 95 6 7 7 5 SPEED ADAPTION Integral during ramp 78 2 272 202 02 0202022 95 6 7 7 6 SPEED PI ADAPTION Speed loop adaption enable 79 96 6 7 7 7 SPEED ADAPTION Using small speed inputs 0 0 0 020202 2020222 96 6 8 CHANGE PARAMETERS CURRENT 0 0 0 0 nan 97 6 8 1 CURRENT CONTROL Block diagram 2 7 2 0
359. e system is running at full capacity The enclosure must be fitted with air filters suitable for the airbourne pollutants encountered within its environment Together they must have a rated throughput of sufficient capacity for all of the exhaust fans used in the enclosure If the PL X is fitted with a venting kit and there is another exhaust fan also operating for cooling other components it is essential that the auxiliary fan does not starve the PL X of its air supply This should be avoided if the input filters have sufficient capacity It is recommended that the PL X is provided with its own filters and an enclosure partition used to isolate it from the influence of the rest of the enclosure cooling arrangements There should be 2 filters for the PL X One to provide air to the lower input port and one for the upper port The inlet filters should be fitted to the enclosure adjacent to the input ports at the lower and upper ends of the unit to ensure that the air drawn in is close to where it is needed The reason for using filters at the top and bottom of the unit is because if only one filter is provided then when the enclosure door is shut the airpath from top to bottom may become throttled if the door is close to the face of the unit 6 5 Exhaust air After leaving the enclosure containing the PL X the heated exhaust air will need to be prevented from elevating the ambient temperature of the room that is housing the enclosure by using sufficie
360. e the synchronisation circuits establish a lock onto the supply prior to the application of power to the motor Also the field cannot remain energised after contactor drop out which prohibits dynamic braking and or condensation prevention in standby field mode 4 3 3 Main contactor isolating DC armature Main Contactor With aux contact Auxiliary T41 T43 AV sensing inputs only used with DC side contactors DC Semiconductor fuse for regenerative applications Wire the auxiliary N O contact in series with RUN T31 24V T35 Advantages The auxiliary supplies are permanently energised This allows the synchronisation circuits to lock onto the supply prior to the application of power to the motor This results in a fast release of current to the armature because it avoids the synchronisation delay Also the field can remain energised after contactor drop out allowing dynamic braking and or condensation prevention in standby field mode Disadvantages The field winding is not electromechanically isolated by the main contactor which may contravene safety codes without additional measures The field standby level may not be set to a low enough level by the user and could cause overheating of the field winding The AC supply is permanently connected to the PL X unless further provision is made to isolate the supplies Note The armature must be connected to the remote sense terminals T41 and T43 This ensures that the
361. e to prevent pollutants from dropping into the outlet The cowl is supplied with 4 off 70mm mounting pillars and 4 M6 holes must be drilled in the roof of the enclosure to allow the mounting pillars to be fixed such that the cowl is positioned centrally over the duct The cowl will overhang the duct by 70mm all the way round If there is a danger of birds or vermin entering the exhaust port then it is recommend that a suitable grille is added round the edge of the cowl Hole in enclosure roof 100mm x 252mm 6 PL X275 980 Cowl mounted 6 2 1 PL X 275 440 venting kit diagram on enclosure roof using 70mm pillars provided The cowl must be fitted with this lip facing forward to direct exhaust air away from the air intakes Upper duct slides over lower duct Select fixing hole to attach to lower duct Upper lower duct fixing hole M5 Lower duct fits within exhaust port of drive It is 270mm long Lower duct M5 fixing hole aligns with hole in drive side cheek 6 3 Venting kit for PL X 520 980 The venting kit comprises a cowl and 2 pairs of steel ducts each pair being designed to telescope together Hence the duct length from the top of the drive is adjustable between 270mm to 535mm There is also an enclosure roof cowl Each pair is the same unit as described in 6 2 Venting kit for PL X 275 440 There are 2 exhaust ports at the top of the PL X and each pair of ducts is used with one o
362. ead of travelling After the value has been changed it will be retained simply by backing out of that menu location using the left key Note Values that are very large can be changed quickly by holding the key down which will introduce an accelerated change rate Releasing the key returns it to a one shot mode When running most windows will allow a parameter change to occur as the value is changing as if a potentiometer was being adjusted Some windows will request STOP DRIVE TO ADJUST if an immediate change is preferable at standstill 5 1 2 PARAMETER SAVE Storing the altered values in the drive so that they are retained when the control supply is removed This is achieved by travelling to the PARAMETER SAVE location in the main menu Press the right key to enter the PARAMETER SAVE window Once there using the UP key saves all the presently prevailing parameter values The bottom line of the display will read SAVING and then FINISHED If you wish to abandon changes made since the last save simply remove the control supply WITHOUT having performed parameter save See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 Note If the control supply dips below 80V AC without going totally off then an automatic save of the last DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE occurs Any other parameters with the power loss memory facility are also saved E g MOTORISED POT output There is a hidden PIN 681 Power SAVED ONCE MON which is set high to indicate this has occurred This
363. ear change between min coords and max coords Yaxis output Cubic law change between min coords and max coords 0 1 2 Yaxis output Square law change between min coords and max coords 3 4 Yaxis output 4 power law change between min coords and max coords 3 4 4 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile Y at Xmin PIN 477 PARAMETER PROFILER 477 PROFLR Y AT Xmin 477 PROFLR Y AT Xmin 0 0096 Sets the corresponding value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for the Y axis at Xmin PROFLR Y AT Xmin 300 00 0 00 477 3 4 5 PARAMETER PROFILER Profiler Y at Xmax PIN 478 PARAMETER PROFILER 478 PROFLR Y AT Xmax 478 PROFLR Y AT Xmax 0 00 Sets the corresponding value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for the Y axis at Xmax PROFLR Y Xmax 300 00 100 00 478 30 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 4 6 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile X axis minimum 479 PARAMETER PROFILER 3 479 PROFILER Xmin 479 PROFILER Xmin aD 0 0096 Sets the minimum value for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN X axis input PROFILER Xmin 300 00 0 00 479 If the value for Xmin is greater or equal to Xmax then Y is constant and equal to PROFLR Y AT Xmax 3 4 7 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile X axis maximum PIN 480 PARAMETER PROFILER 3 480 PROFILER Xmax 480 PROFILER Xmax 100 00 Sets the maximum value for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the X axis input PROFL X AXIS MAX 300 00 100 00 480 If the val
364. ecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 13 5 3 2 RUN INPUT SETUP RUN input LO value PIN 319 RUN INPUT SETUP 4 319 RUN IP LO VALUE 319 RUN IP LO VALUE 0 00 Sets the level of the value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN selected by a low RUN input RUN IP LO VALUE 300 00 0 00 319 Note You can make a simple OR gate by selecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 13 5 3 3 RUN INPUT SETUP Make input value GOTO destination connection RUN INPUT SETUP 4 GOTO Defines the target PIN for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT connection to RUN IP GOTO PIN O00 to 720 308 CONFIGURATION 13 6 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL 2 2 IN OUTPUTS vel CONFIGURATION DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS 3 DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 ee DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS 3 ao 4 digital input output terminals DIO1 DIO2 T19 SETUP 4 digital output function is connected to the terminal via a diode which is shown in the block DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS 3 When the output is low then the diode is reverse DIO3 T20 SETUP 4 biased and the terminal may be taken high if desired Note The PL X must be stopped in order to implement a DIOX OP MODE change 13 6 1 DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS DIOX SETUP DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 PINs used 271 to 294 276 DIO1 IP LO VALUE DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 DIO1 T18 SETUP 271 DIO 1 OP MODE By selecting DISABLED in 271 DIO OP MODE DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 window the output switch is permanently
365. ective for loss of EL1 However 8 1 11 12 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Synchronization loss will detect loss on EL 1 5 See 4 3 Main contactor wiring options for details of wiring to L1 2 3 according to contactor requirements 14 10 Terminal tightening torques Terminals Model Tightening torque Terminals 1 to 100 PL X 5 265 4 0 5 N m EL1 EL2 EL3 F F PL X 5 145 9 16 or 1 0 N m EL1 EL2 EL3 F F PL X 185 265 35 Ib in or 3 9 N m L1 L2 L3 A A PL X 5 50 35 Ib in or 3 9 N m L1L2 L3 A A PL X 65 265 242 Ib in or 27 N m Fan terminals PL X 185 265 9 b in or 1 0 N m Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives Installation 215 14 11 Installation guide for EMC Special consideration must be given to installations in member states of the European Union regarding noise suppression and immunity According to IEC 1800 3 EN61800 3 the drive units are classified as Basic Drive Modules BDM only for professional assemblers and for the industrial environment Although CE Marking is made against the EMC Directive application of EN 61800 3 means that no RF emission limits apply The drive manufacturer is responsible for the provision of installation guidelines The resulting EMC behaviour is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or installation The units are also subject to the LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73 23 EEC and are CE marked acc
366. ectly to T26 with respect to T25 See 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PIN 9 QUICK START to select tach feedback and 6 1 8 CALIBRATION tacho volts PIN 8 to match the 100 feedback voltage and sign on T26 For forward motor rotation corresponding to a positive reference signal the tachogenerator feedback voltage sign at terminal T26 with respect to T25 OV must correspond to the sign selected in the calibration menu The programming facility allows selection of feedback voltages down to OV however it is not advisable in the interest of accuracy and smooth operation to use tachos with a voltage less than 10V at full speed 3 4 5 Signal test pins There is a row of test pins just behind the middle control terminal used to monitor certain feedback signals The larm signal is an attenuated unfiltered inverted version of terminal 29 and may be used to observe the current response of the PL X See 13 13 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY Maximum current response PIN 678 See 13 4 1 ANALOG OUTPUTS AOP4 larm output rectify enable PIN 250 Signal sign and amplitude is to 2V linear output for to 100 model rating current inverted for unrectified mode or to 2V linear output for to 100 model rating current for rectified mode The other signals are intended for factory use only 3 5 Control terminal default functions When the drive is shipped the control terminals are allocated with default functions These are chosen to be
367. ed by the field current loop will be clamped to the level set The clamp will work with the rated field amps set to maximum however this may not afford sufficiently safe protection to the motor if a problem occurs in the field winding that results in overcurrent See also 14 9 1 Wiring diagram for AC supply to L1 2 3 different to EL1 2 3 E g Low voltage field 6 9 4 FIELD CONTROL Field proportional gain PIN 101 FIELD CONTROL 3 101 FIELD PROP GAIN Sets the proportional gain of PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the field current control loop FIELD PROP GAIN 0 to 1000 10 101 Increase to improve response too much may cause instability in the field current 6 9 5 FIELD CONTROL Field integral gain PIN 102 FIELD CONTROL 3 102 FIELD INT GAIN Sets the integral gain of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN field current control loop FIELD INTEGRAL O to 1000 100 102 Increase to improve response too much may cause overshoot CHANGE PARAMETERS 109 6 9 6 FIELD CONTROL FLD WEAKENING MENU FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 110 MIN FLD CURRENT FIELD CONTROL FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 103 FLD WEAK ENABLE The function must be ENABLED to control field FLD WEAKENING 4 104 FLD WK PROP GAIN There are 5 control terms that can be adjusted FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 These are 3 error terms derivative proportional 105 FLD WK INT TC ms and integral plus 2 feedback terms derivative and
368. ed to ensure correct reconnection WARNING During IC insertion avoid bending the control card and causing damage This is best achieved by removing the control card and supporting it on a suitable surface Special attention must be paid to providing support to the card in the area of the IC being inserted to avoid stressing the surrounding components See 13 13 4 3 Changing control or power cards IC is Component legend 17 It is located in dual in line socket on the control board Remove the one from the new unit first Then remove the one from the old unit and insert it in the new unit without letting the pins fold under or mislocate in the socket It is advisable to label the ICs prior to removal Make sure that the IC is inserted without rotation with PIN 1 in the correct position Summary Take out IC17 of the new PL X and replace with IC17 from the old PL X Maintain correct orientation do not allow pins to fold under or mislocate Do not bend the control card during this process This process must be documented to retain correct version control for future maintenance procedures WARNING Check the CALIBRATION parameters are correct after this process 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software version The rules governing the ability of a parameter file to be transferred to a PL X are very simple 1 A parameter set generated on older software versions is allowed to be transferred to newer versions but not fro
369. eed Current Firing circuit and reference error error 3 phase bridge from user amplifier amplifier AC in DC out Speed Current feedback feedback scaling scaling The signal here represents armature current demand Outer speed loop This shows the basic arrangement of the drive control loops The 3 phase thyristor bridge is a phase controlled rectifier which delivers power to the motor armature The armature current and hence the motor torque is sensed to provide feedback to the inner current loop After being scaled this is compared to the current demand The current error amplifier is able to detect any difference and then act in such a way that the current feedback remains identical to the current demand during normal operation This inner loop monitors the armature current and delivers more current or less current as required The outer speed loop works in the same way as the inner current loop but uses different parameters In the above example the demand is provided by the user in the form of a speed reference and the speed feedback is derived from a shaft mounted tachometer Any difference is detected and translated into a new current demand level This level provides the right amount of current and hence torque to reduce the speed error to zero This new demand level is presented to the inner current loop which obeys as rapidly as possible The whole process is performed on a continuous basis giving superb speed a
370. elay mode PIN 58 0000 89 6 5 5 STOP MODE RAMP Drop out speed PIN 59 89 6 5 6 STOP MODE RAMP Drop out delay PIN 60 89 6 6 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED REF 5 2 2 2 45 90 6 6 1 SPEED REF SUMMER Block diagram 0 0 0 rese snas 90 6 6 2 SPEED REF SUMMER Internal speed reference 1 PIN 62 91 6 6 3 SPEED REF SUMMER Auxiliary speed reference 2 63 91 6 6 4 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed reference monitor PIN 64 91 6 6 5 SPEED REF SUMMER Ramped speed reference 4 PIN 65 91 6 6 6 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed Current Reference sign PIN 66 91 6 6 7 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed Current Reference ratio PIN 67 92 6 7 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED 92 6 7 1 SPEED CONTROL Block diagram 4 6 2 2 2 sisse 93 6 7 2 SPEED CONTROL Max positive speed reference PIN 69 93 6 7 3 SPEED CONTROL Max negativ
371. en enabled the ramp is held PARAMETER RANGE in preset mode RAMP EXT PRESET ENABLED or DISABLED A logic high enables the preset It is also OR d with 29 RAMP AUTO PRESET if this is enabled See 6 2 1 RUN MODE RAMPS Block diagram including JOG PIN 30 DEFAULT DISABLED 30 6 2 12 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp preset value PIN 31 31 RAMP PRESET VALUE 0 0096 RUN MODE RAMPS 3 31 RAMP PRESET VALUE PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT RAMP PRESET VALUE 300 00 0 00 When the ramp is preset this is the value it goes to 6 2 13 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp S profile PIN 32 RUN MODE RAMPS 32 RAMP S PROFILE 32 RAMP S PROFILE 2 50 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN This value sets the of the S ramp shape at each end RAMP S PROFILE 0 00 to 100 00 2 50 32 Note A value of 0 00 will produce a linear ramp The ramp time will be become longer when the S shape is increased This is because the rate of change in the remaining linear portion is maintained 6 2 14 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp hold enable 33 RUN MODE RAMPS 33 RAMP HOLD When ENABLED the ramp is PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN held at the present value RAMP HOLD ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 33 Note the 30 RAMP EXT PRESET function will overide the 33 RAMP HOLD function 76 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 2 15 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping threshold 34 RUN
372. en the range selected is either 5V 20V or 30V the offset addition remains at 10V for 100 and hence no longer represents a true percentage of the range Whereas for the default 10V input range the offset percentage represents the volts and the true percentage E g for a 2V offset to a signal using the 30V range enter the value 20 00 The offset is added or subtracted prior to the scaling function This offset does not affect the signal used for the digital threshold comparison CONFIGURATION 175 13 3 1 2 1 4 20mA loop input SETUP UIP When using 4 20mA loop signals all that is required is to fit an external burden resistor of 220 Ohms between the input and OV The resulting voltage signal generated by passing the signal current through the burden will be 0 88V for 4 mA represents 0 and 4 4V for 20mA represents 100 Using the appropriate UIPX SETUP block select the following 5V range Max voltage generated by loop across burden 4 4V 8 8 offset 4mA gives 0 88V offset is always 100 10V 1 420 scaling factor 4 4 0 88 X 1 420 5V i e 100 For burden resistors of other values the range offset and scale will differ accordingly DONN 13 3 1 3 UIPX SETUP UIP 2 to 9 Linear scaling ratio PIN 3 2 2 to 3 9 2 UIP2 T2 SETUP 4 322 UIP2 CAL RATIO Allows linear scaling of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN signal on the UIPX input UIP2 CAL RATIO 3 0000 1 0000 322
373. en this pad and OV 150R gives 24A 185 265 models This is also usable to observe armature current Note After parameter 680 larm BURDEN OHMS has been altered it will only apply after the following steps 1 Save the new value using the PARAMETER SAVE function 2 Turn the unit control supply off then back on again 3 Adjust 22RATED ARM AMPS parameter in the CALIBRATION menu first to its maximum setting 100 and then to its minimum setting 33 Note that the values are 100 Amps 33 Amps of new ratings with changed burden Finally return it to the desired value for your motor 4 Save the new desired 22RATED ARM AMPS parameter with another PARAMETER SAVE CONFIGURATION 199 13 13 4 1 50 100 rating select The burden resistors AND a selection jumper are on the power board to the right of the 8 way terminal block The left hand position of the jumper sets the actual burden resistance to twice the standard value and hence reduces the model rating to 50 Higher burden values give lower model ratings Using this with DRIVE PERSONALITY 680 larm BURDEN OHMS provides a 6 1 calibration range To measure the actual burden resistance use ohmmeter across the pad marked and the right hand end of the front resistor R103 OV The pad marked l is a square pad adjacent to terminal 48 The jumper has a third operating mode If the jumper is parked on one pin then the actual burden resistance will be high to allow the use o
374. enable PIN 95 Discontinuous Current point Armature Bridge Flag PIN 165 CURRENT urrent CONTROL Feedback 1 6 8 2 CURRENT CONTROL Current clamp scaler PIN 81 Sets the clamp scaling value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for the upper lower clamps CUR CLAMP SCALER 0 00 to 150 00 150 00 81 6 8 3 CURRENT CONTROL CURRENT OVERLOAD CURRENT OVERLOAD 82 TARGET CURRENT OVERLOAD 4 83 0 LOAD RAMP TIME CHANGE PARAMETERS 99 6 8 3 1 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload target PIN 82 CURRENT OVERLOAD 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET 82 96 TARGET 105 00 96 Sets the current limit target PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN level after excessive overload O LOAD 96 TARGET 0 00 TO 105 00 96 105 0096 82 This CURRENT OVERLOAD menu allows the final current 96 target limit to be set by this parameter This would normally be the full load current of the motor Having the facility to set this parameter independantly of 2 RATED ARM AMPS allows further flexibility This block allows the load current to span up to 150 of 2 RATED ARM AMPS If any other lower limits are prevailing they will of course determine the current limit See 6 8 1 CURRENT CONTROL Block diagram An internal integrator with a finite capacity fills up when the armature current exceeds PIN 82 it empties for armature current less than PIN 82 The unused capacity of the integrat
375. ent response to be enabled 4 ID ABCXRxxx is used by the unit suppliers to identify the power chassis and is not intended to be used for any other purpose A binary code is displayed 5 larm BURDEN OHMS is used along with the actual burden derate the model armature current DRIVE PERSONALITY 3 679 ID ABCXRxxx MON 13 13 1 DRIVE PERSONALITY PASSIVE MOTOR SET DRIVE PERSONALITY PASSIVE MOTOR SET PASSIVE MOTOR SET PIN Description of parameter Allows viewing and alteration PARAMETER RANGE PIN of the passive reduced menu PASSIVE MOTOR SET Reduced menu parameters XXX See 6 1 17 CALIBRATION Motor 1 or 2 select PIN 20 The passive motor set parameters are the ones used in the REDUCED Menu The PASSIVE MOTOR SET is also useful for a rapid review of the alterable parameters in the CHANGE PARAMETERS reduced menu or setting these parameters for a second system while the existing system is running a motor See 11 1 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Reduced menu enable The power up default function See 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition is applied to both sets of values However each set preserves its prevailing CALIBRATION parameters See chapter 15 PIN number tables to identify the members of the CHANGE PARAMETERS reduced menu CONFIGURATION 197 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 DRIVE PERSONALITY 677 RECIPE PAGE 677 RECIPE PAGE NORMAL RESET Sets the recipe page
376. er signal may be used with the system but some types are less prone to noise than others CHANGE PARAMETERS 119 Logic Threshold Logic Threshold Logic Threshold Point of position measurement Point of position measurement Type 1 is the preferred marker signal This is because for most of the time the signal is well away from the logic threshold and noise is very unlikely to cause a false marker reading Types 2 and 3 however spend significant time near the logic threshold level and therefore noise is more likely to produce a false marker reading 6 10 9 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Marker offset PIN 241 SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 241 MARKER OFFSET PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT MARKER OFFSET 15 000 Counts 0 241 Note This offset is only added once at the commencement of orientation It may be changed prior to the next orientation sequence without affecting the existing position The sign of the offset determines the rotation direction when seeking the offset Used to offset an arbitrary marker to a defined position The count value needed for any offset angle depends on the resolution of the feedback encoder and the type of encoder output Quadrature encoders provide 4 counts per line Single pulse and direction encoders provide 2 counts per line E g Encoder has 3600 lines Encoder type is QUADRATURE This gives 3600 X 4 counts per rev 14400 That is 14400 360 40 counts per
377. er switch If the speed bypass mode is enabled then input reference 3 is selected Note The default values in this menu have been chosen to suit tacho or encoder feedback AVF feedback usually contains more ripple than tacho or encoder feedback hence it is advisable to reduce the SPEED CONTROL loop gains whenever AVF or ENCODER ARM VOLTS feedback is selected See 6 7 4 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 In the case of AVF it is suggested that the values for the following parameters are changed as follows 6 7 4 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 set to 7 00 6 7 7 6 SPEED ADAPTION Speed loop adaption enable 79 set to DISABLED These are suggested starting points for smooth responsive control however it may be possible to make improvements with further experimentation CHANGE PARAMETERS 93 6 7 1 SPEED CONTROL Block diagram SPEED CONTROL PIN 62 Int Ref 1 25 Motorised pot PIN 63 Spd Ref 2 Default Terminal 2 PIN 64 Speed Ref 3 Mon Def Terminal 3 PIN 65 Ref 4 Default From Run mode ramp block output Current eference Total Speed Ref monitor PIN 123 Speed Error amplifier Speed demand monitor PIN 124 O Current reference 69 MAX POS SPEED REF gt 1 105 0096 i gt Spd Int Reset PIN 73 Speed loop PI No display PIN 713 Speed error monitor PIN 125 Cur reference Internal connection to current loop
378. er the password has been restored to OOOO on recipe page NORMAL RESET using a 4 KEY RESET See 5 1 3 Restoring the drive parameters to the default condition 164 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 11 2 1 PASSWORD CONTROL Enter password Enter the correct password PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT here to alter parameters ENTER PASSWORD 0000 to FFFF 0000 If the entered password is correct then the ALTER PASSWORD window will show the password If it is incorrect then the ALTER PASSWORD window will show Each recipe page may have its own password See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 11 2 2 PASSWORD CONTROL Alter password To alter the password scroll PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT the new password here ALTER PASSWORD 0000 to FFFF 0000 To alter the password enter the existing password in the ENTER PASSWORD window first Then using this window change to the new desired password The altered password is immediately effective and copied to the ENTER PASSWORD window but only retained for the next power up if a PARAMETER SAVE is performed otherwise the previous password will be required again 11 3 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Language select DEFAULT 0 PARAMETER LANGUAGE SELECT This window shows the version PARAMETER RANGE number of the installed code SOFTWARE VERSION Version number See 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relat
379. es 2 20 models PL400 440 700 800 900 980 have a regenerative stopping capability 3 The EL1 2 3 connections require auxiliary fuses max ratings 80A 121 5000 Bardac Fuse Kit F3 80 When selecting alternative types the fuse current rating must typically be 1 25 X the field current rating of the motor Max ratings 80A 121 5000 4 Please consider the total component dissipation within the enclosure when calculating the required air throughput This includes the fuses line reactors and other sources of dissipation 5 400 Cubic feet per minute is approximately equivalent to 12 cubic metres per minute 6 The output power rating shown is at the 10096 rating of the drive and is the power available at the shaft for a typical motor The actual power available will depend on the efficiency of the motor 7 The high power field output option is an extra cost option and needs to be specified at the time of order 8 The 690V AC supply is an extra cost option and needs to be specified at the time of order Suffix HV 9 The bottom entry AC supply option needs to be specified at the time of order Suffix BE 10 Models PL X 900 980 have maximum ambient temperature rating of 35C Derate by 100 Amps for 40C 11 Derate by 196 per Deg C for ambient temperatures above 40C up to 50C 7 1 Product rating labels The product rating labels are located on the unit under the upper end cap The product serial number is unique and can be used by the manufacture
380. es and rpm The SPINDLE ORIENTATE block counts the pulses from the encoder in a bi directional counter It counts forward or backward depending on rotation direction This count represents the amount of angular rotation of the encoder and hence the motor shaft The position count is compared with the required spindle orientation position reference to develop an error signal which is employed in a negative feedback loop in the drive Thus the motor will rotate in such a direction as to reduce the error to zero and hence bring the encoder marker to the spindle position reference The marker uniquely defines the absolute position of the rotating encoder to the machine If 241 MARKER OFFSET and 242 POSITION REF are both zero then the encoder shaft will be positioned at the marker However it is more than likely that the marker will be in an arbitrary position To overcome this problem 241 MARKER OFFSET is provided to perform a one off positioning of the shaft to a known position every time the spindle orientate is actioned E g to top dead centre 242 POSITION REF is then always referred to this known position CHANGE PARAMETERS 117 To summarise The orientation function is activated by dropping below the zero speed threshold 241 MARKER OFFSET is actioned only once at the commencement of orientation and 242 POSITION REF is then followed with respect to the 241 MARKER OFFSET position The orientation function is de activated by increasing
381. eturn to the same page if it is received by any unit See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes 1 Connect the PL X to the host using the appropriate lead See10 1 1 RS232 PORT1 Connection pinouts 2 Using a standard communications package prepare the host to receive an ASCII file Remember to set up the host s serial port first See 10 2 1 2 Transmitting parameter data file to a PC Windows 95 upwards 3 Make sure that the PORT1 FUNCTION has been set to PARAM EXCH SELECT 4 Get the host ready to receive a file use the file extension TXT Suggest using TX2 page 2 TX3 for page 3 TXL for Locked page 3 5 Start transmitting on the PL X by selecting DRIVE TRANSMIT followed by the up key 6 The file ends in a CTRL Z With some packages this automatically closes the file If this is not the case when the PL X says it has FINISHED and the host has stopped scrolling text or printing close the file manually The last line should read FF 7 The file can now be saved for back up SERIAL LINKS 155 10 2 1 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE with a locked recipe page 3 Page 3 may be locked by the factory to prevent overwriting To find out if page 3 is locked first do a 3 KEY RESET and then perform a PARAMETER SAVE If the message AUTHORISATION NEEDED appears then page 3 is locked The lock status is included in and travels with a page 3 file to a host computer Receiving a page 3 file with locked status from a computer will
382. example above for 9 amp motor Set 8 1 8 2 STALL TRIP MENU Stall current level PIN 179 to a value less than 82 0 LOAD TARGET If 3JCURRENT LIMIT 96 or 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET level is set to 0 then no current will flow 6 8 3 2 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload ramp time 83 CURRENT OVERLOAD 83 0 LOAD RAMP TIME Sets the time taken to reduce PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the current limit by 100 RAMP TIME 0 1 to 20 0 secs 20 0secs 83 E g For Limit 15096 time 20 secs target 10596 Then ramp time to target 9 secs ie 45 of 20 secs CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 8 4 CURRENT CONTROL DYNAMIC PROFILE DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 i 87 CUR LIMIT AT LO This function works for both directions of rotation CURRENT CONTROL DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 DYNAMIC PROFILE 84 1 PROFILE ENABLE DYNAMIC PROFILE This clamp is used to change the current limit according to speed E g DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 1 To protect motors that have problems 85 SPD BRPNT AT HI I commutating current at high speeds in field weakening mode of operation 2 To prevent motors overheating at low speeds DYNAMIC PROFILE 4 86 SPD BRPNT AT LO An upper current limit of fixed value 150 is used in the calculation If 3 CURRENT LIMIT is set lower than 150 then 3 CURRENT LIMIT will prevail If current limits in the other current limit blocks are lower then they will prevail SPD BRPNT HI I This speed a
383. extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives 208 Installation 14 5 Mechanical dimensions PL X 5 50 Unit weight 5Kg Air flow Symbolic drawing shown with end caps removed direction 228mm 8 98in Mounting centres 258 10 16in International ground symbol black on green background Control identifies main equipment terminals around connection on heatsink 175mm 6 89 216mm 8 5in L4 174mm 6 85in 1 14 5 1 1 Mounting PL X 5 50 Four corner slots are provided to mount the unit Use M6 1 4 in screws All mounting hole dimensions are 2 mm A substantial earth connection should be made to the busbar provided Nominal cooling air throughput is specified in the rating table Use cool clean dry filtered air Do not block the heatsink fins Allow at least 50mm 2 in space above and below the unit Ensure connections to power terminals are tight Power terminal fastenings are M6 See 14 10 Terminal tightening torques The units must be orientated vertically as shown The dimensions on this drawing are for the footprint Overall dimensions are Width 216 Height 289 Depth 174 Unit weight 5Kg Installation 209 14 6 Mechanical dimensions PL X 65 145 Unit weight 11Kg Symbolic drawing shown with end caps removed 32 50 50 72 EL EL EL F F L3 2 Auxiliary terminals
384. f small test motors Model Left hand jumper position Right hand jumper position Parked jumper position Amps and Actual Burden Ohms PL X 5 50 5096 of max model rating 10096 of max model rating 6 Amps max 330R PL X 65 145 5096 of max model rating 10096 of max model rating 24 Amps max 82R PL X 185 265 5096 of max model rating 10096 of max model rating 24 Amps max 150R See also 4 5 4 PASSIVE MOTOR defaults Using passive motor menu for small test motors This is used to test small motors without changing the actual burden resistor value Note When using the parked position for small test motors you may choose to set CONFIGURATION DRIVE PERSONALITY 680 larm BURDEN OHMS to the parked value or leave it at the prevailing model rating If you set it to the parked value in the normal way then the armature current calibration range of the PL X will reflect the parked position for small motors If you leave it set to the prevailing model rating then the PL X parameters will assume the normal full ratings despite the actual current being scaled to the parked position range for small motors This may be useful if the configuration involves armature current related parameters that need testing at full value despite the fact that only a small current is flowing E g A PLX50 is calibrated for 110Amps The jumper is parked and a 6 Amp motor is used to test the unit without altering 680 larm BURDEN OHMS At 100
385. f the ports Please read section 5 2 for details about each pair The ducts must be inserted through a tight fitting rectangular hole in the roof of the enclosure hole size 100mm x 504mm and protrude above it by 10 20mm Then the gap between the duct and the roof must be sealed e g using tape or flexible filler to ensure that the exhaust air and pollutants cannot enter into the enclosure Also the interface between each pair of ducts must be sealed at the top where it protrudes from the roof PLX275 980 7 The cowl is fixed on top of the enclosure to prevent pollutants from dropping into the exhaust outlet of the drive The cowl is supplied with 6 off 50mm mounting pillars and 6 M6 holes must be drilled in the roof of the enclosure to allow the mounting pillars to be fixed such that the cowl is positioned centrally over the duct The cowl will overhang the duct by 7Omm all the way round If there is a danger of birds or vermin entering the exhaust port then it is recommend that a suitable grille is added round the edge of the cowl Hole in enclosure roof 100mm x 504mm 6 4 Air supply to enclosure It is essential that the enclosure which houses the PL X is supplied with sufficient cool clean air to satisfy the throughput requirements of the PL X and any other devices within the enclosure Do not forget that the current carrying components associated with the drive will be dissipating a considerable amount of heat especially when th
386. for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN PARAMETER SAVE function RECIPE PAGE NORMAL 2 3 or 4 KEY RESET NORMAL RESET 677 If left unchanged the window will show which instrument recipe page has been called To make a recipe permanently operative it must be SAVED in the NORMAL page To re call any page requires the appropriate power up reset choice Pressing keys during the application of the control supply Selected page Type of POWER UP SOURCE page DESTINATION FOR SAVE OPERATIONS NORMAL RESET No keys NORMAL page PARAMETER SAVE overwrites NORMAL page 2 KEY RESET Up Down Page 2 PARAMETER SAVE overwrites page 2 3 KEY RESET Up Down Right Page 3 PARAMETER SAVE overwrites page 3 4 KEY ROM RESET All 4 keys Factory Defaults PARAMETER SAVE overwrites NORMAL page Note Any parameters that are memorised during a power off sequence will be saved on the selected page After a 2 3 or 4 key power up reset the display confirms the type of reset and asks for LEFT KEY TO RESTART The left key must be pressed within 15 seconds otherwise the unit reverts to the NORMAL page Note If when SAVING the message AUTHORISATION NEEDED appears then this means that the page is LOCKED and is read only Please refer to your supplier or system integrator he may have installed a special recipe in this particular page that prevents itself from being over written Each page may have its own password but be awa
387. fter the control supply has been removed 1 If the main contactor is energised at the time of failure then it will be de energised after the ride through time of 2 seconds has elapsed If the supply is restored before the ride through time has elapsed then normal running will resume During the temporary supply loss period the PL X will shut the armature current demand off until it is safe to restore it The unit measures the back emf to calculate a safe start into the rotating load 2 If the main contactor is de energised at the time of the supply loss then a Start command will allow the contactor to energise but inhibit armature current After a few seconds the contactor will be de energised The Control Supply on T52 T53 can tolerate a supply loss for 300mS at 240V AC and 30mS at 110V AC before requesting permanent shut down See also 6 1 16 CALIBRATION EL1 2 3 rated AC volts PIN 19 QUICK START The controller will detect total failure of the supply A missing phase is detected under most circumstances However the controller may be connected to the same supply as other equipment that is regenerating a voltage onto the supply lines during the missing phase period Under these circumstances the SUPPLY PHASE LOSS alarm may be unable to detect failure of the incoming supply and hence not operate In the case of a supply phase loss alarm the supply to the controller should be checked The auxiliary and the main high speed semi conductor fuses
388. fy the problem before trying to proceed with commissioning The best way of checking the output is to use a high quality oscilloscope and observe both pulse trains for good phase holding and no interference Do this with the drive rotating to 100 speed using AVF as the feedback source Low frequency feedback may give poor results at low speed Hence for encoders or other types of pick up providing less than 15KHz at full speed it is recommended that mode 3 or mode 4 combined feedback type is utilised See 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PIN 9 QUICK START The encoder inputs have to be able to deal with and recognise very short pulses This means that it is not possible to provide heavy noise filtering on these inputs Therefore it is very important that the signals input on terminals 16 and 17 are clean and noise free One of the prime causes of unwanted noise on encoder signals is ground loops If the encoder electronics is earthed at the motor end then this may cause problems Make sure the encoder electronics OV is separately wired back to DOV on terminal 13 with no other earth connections at the motor end The encoder casing will probably be earthed by virtue of its mechanical connection to the motor or machine This is usually acceptable as long as the internal electronics OV has a separate connection Some encoder manufacturers provide a by pass capacitor inside the encoder between the electronics OV and the casing Unfortunately the c
389. g feedback integral time constant PIN 108 DIO1 2 3 4 Input low value PINs 276 282 288 294 2 111 ave Y p dede Field weakening integral time constant 105 110 DIO 1 2 3 4 Internal output result PINs 685 6 7 8 Field weakening proportional gain PIN 104 110 DIO 1 2 3 4 Make input GOTO destination connection 185 FLD WEAKENING MENU 17 64 68 109 186 Minimum field current PIN 110 18 111 DIO1 2 3 4 Make output GET FROM source connection 185 Quench delay 113 i112 DIO1 2 3 4 OP comp threshold PINs 273 279 285 290 Spillover armature voltage PIN 109 2 111 LEE 184 Standby field current PIN 112 112 DIO1 2 3 4 OP inversion PINs 274 280 286 291 184 Standby field enable PIN 111 112 220 Index 231 Voltage output 100 108 220 PIN number tables 21 70 196 219 File transfer using PL 150 159 PL PILOT configuration tool 56 160 168 Full menu diagram Power windows 47 Application blocks and 2 53 Product rating labels 2 2 2 44 4
390. g is not exceeded APPLICATION RISK ELECTROMECHANICAL SAFETY IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER The integration of this product into other apparatus or systems is not the responsibility of the manufacturer or distributor of the product The applicability effectiveness or safety of operation of this equipment or that of other apparatus or systems is not the responsibility of the manufacturer or distributor of the product Where appropriate the user should consider some aspects of the following risk assessment RISK ASSESSMENT Under fault conditions or conditions not intended 1 The motor speed may be incorrect 2 The motor speed may be excessive 3 The direction of rotation may be incorrect 4 The motor may be energised In all situations the user should provide sufficient guarding and or additional redundant monitoring and safety systems to prevent risk of injury NOTE During a power loss event the product will commence a sequenced shut down procedure and the system designer must provide suitable protection for this case MAINTENANCE Maintenance and repair should only be performed by competent persons using only the recommended spares or return to factory for repair Use of unapproved parts may create a hazard and risk of injury WHEN REPLACING A PRODUCT IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ALL USER DEFINED PARAMETERS THAT DEFINE THE PRODUCT S OPERATION ARE CORRECTLY INSTALLED BEFORE RETURNING TO USE FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CREATE HAZARD AND RISK
391. gral time constant 96 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN scaler if RAMPING flag is high INT 96 DURING RAMP 0 00 to 100 0096 100 0096 78 See 6 2 16 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag PIN 35 Note a level of 100 results in the integrator being un affected by 35 RAMPING FLAG See also 6 2 16 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag PIN 35 and 6 5 1 4 Precise stopping 96 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 7 7 6 SPEED PI ADAPTION Speed loop adaption enable PIN 79 SPEED PI ADAPTION 4 79 SPD ADAPT ENABLE C UN Enables the mode that varies PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the terms between break points SPD ADAPT ENABLE ENABLED or DISABLED ENABLED 79 The X axis internal connection is the speed error signal The default values in this SPEED ADAPTION sub menu are chosen as a starting point The most frequently encountered requirement is for the gain term of the speed loop error amplifier to be high for large speed errors and low for small errors When the function is enabled the default values of prop gain are 5 for errors below 1 0096 and 15 for errors above 2 0096 with a linear change from 5 to 15 between 1 0096 and 2 0096 A decreasing gain with error is also possible by choosing appropriate term values in this and the upper SPEED CONTROL menus Graph of adaption profile for default values Y axis is P and terms LOW BREAK POINT of 1 0096 Set in UPPER MENU Speed Prop gain of 15 Speed Int TC of 1 000 HIGH BREAK POINT of
392. h a suitable control supply which is applied by the controller to the contactor coil using terminals 45 and 46 If for safety reasons it is mandated that the contactor coil must be able to be de energised externally to the drive then it must be arranged that the CSTOP terminal 35 is opened at least 100mS prior to the opening of the main contactor Failure to achieve this will prevent the armature current from being able to commutate to zero prior to supply removal and may result in damage to the unit Failure to heed this warning will invalidate warranty See 4 3 Main contactor wiring options for advice on using DC side contactors or other power sequencing options 5 For contactor coils with a VA rating that exceeds the ratings of terminals 45 and 46 it is necessary to utilise a slave relay of suitable rating to drive the contactor coil Note If the users main contactor has a final closing time delay of greater than 75m S then it is essential that an auxiliary normally open contact on the main contactor is inserted in series with the RUN input on T31 alternatively use contactor wiring method shown in 4 3 2 This will prevent the unit from trying to deliver power until the main contact has closed 6 A 3 phase line reactor must be in series with the AC supply between the contactor and power terminals This also helps to avoid main contactor mechanical operating shock being transmitted to PL X busbars 7 The phase rotation of the 3 phase supply
393. h the protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC as follows 14 12 1 CE Immunity The unit complies with the following standards EN 50082 2 1995 generic immunity standard industrial environment EN 50082 1 1997 generic immunity standard residential commercial and light industry EN 61800 3 1996 and prA 1 1 1999 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems EMC product standard including specific test methods first and second environments Performance criteria No change of state or stored data temporary variation in analogue input or output level 196 14 12 2 CE Emissions Control supply port and control signal port Conducted and radiated emissions comply with the following standards EN 50081 2 1993 generic emissions standard industrial environment EN 55011 Class A EN 5008 1 1 1992 generic emissions standard industrial environment EN 55022 Class EN 61800 3 1996 and prA 1 1 1999 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems EMC product standard including specific test methods first and second environments restricted or unrestricted distribution Mains harmonics The control supply port active input power is less than 5OW with the class D waveshape and therefore meets EN 61000 3 2 1995 with no limits applied 3 phase motor supply port Class B EN 61800 3 unrestricted distribution industrial environment limits No filter required In order to meet Class A EN 61800 3 restricted
394. hange slave ratio PIN 189 162 10 3 2 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange slave sign PIN 190 162 10 3 3 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange slave monitor PIN 191 162 10 3 4 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange master monitor 192 162 10 3 5 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange master GET 162 11 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS coi otii ete eon a 163 11 1 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Reduced menu 163 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD 163 11 2 1 PASSWORD CONTROL Enter password 6 6 164 11 2 2 PASSWORD CONTROL Alter password 4 164 11 3 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Language 2 4 0 0 need 164 11 4 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Software 21 0 1 2 2 1 1 1 4444 164 11 5 Remotely mounted display Unit 164 12 APPLICATION BLOCKS resale en En ee Catus 165 12 1 General rules s oer i
395. he current signal you must use the signal test pin provided and a quality storage oscilloscope See 3 4 5 Signal test pins Monitor 134 ARM CUR MON to monitor the value at the boundary Use the table to determine the other current loop control terms 134 ARM CUR MON Suggested value for Suggested value for at boundary point 93 CUR PROP GAIN 94 CUR INT GAIN 10 00 40 00 4 00 20 00 20 00 2 00 40 00 10 00 1 00 60 00 10 00 1 00 80 00 10 00 1 00 100 00 10 00 1 00 6 8 13 CURRENT CONTROL 4 quadrant mode enable PIN 96 CURRENT CONTROL 3 96 4 QUADRANT MODE 96 4 QUADRANT MODE ENABLED Allows models with regenerative PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN capability to be 2 quadrant 4 QUADRANT MODE ENABLED or DISABLED ENABLED 96 If 96 4 QUADRANT MODE is enabled then the regenerative capability will be determined by the model See 3 3 General Technical Data Note PL models with regenerative stopping This feature is also dis enabled 6 8 14 CURRENT CONTROL Speed bypass current reference enable PIN 97 CURRENT CONTROL 3 97 SPD BYPASS CUR EN 97 SPD BYPASS CUR EN DISABLED Allows a current reference input PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN which by passes the speed loop SPD BYPASS CUR EN ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 97 There is an internal connection from T3 via UIP3 to 64 SPEED REF3 MON This parameter determines whether T3 is a speed or current reference If enabled the speed
396. he power available at the motor shaft will depend on the motor efficiency Typically 90 to 95 To convert Kilowatts to Horsepower multiply by a scaling factor of 1 34 Note for the PL XD stack driver which may be used in applications in excess of 3000Kw then this parameter is clamped at 3000Kw This equates approx to 7500A at 400V armature or 4000A at 750V armature See separate PL XD Stack Driver manual for further details of this unit MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 135 8 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 A ccc 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS ERO ase ra 135 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 0 2 sse ses sessi ae snas 136 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 137 2 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch tolerance PIN 172 139 3 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Field loss trip enable 173 4 0 0 22 139 4 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Digital OP short circuit trip enable PIN 174 139 5 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Missing pulse trip enable 175 140 6 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Reference exchange trip enable 176 140 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Overspeed delay time 177
397. he source PIN for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT connection to AOPX GET FROM O00 to 720 See 13 4 2 5 13 4 2 5 Default connections for AOP1 2 3 AOPX Function Terminal GET FROM AOP1 Unfiltered total speed feedback T10 PIN 715 AOP2 Unfiltered total speed reference T11 PIN 123 AOP3 Unfiltered armature current demand T12 PIN 718 Note The function 260 SCOPE OP SELECT described below uses AOP3 Any internal GETFROM connection made to AOP3 is left intact but ignored by 260 SCOPE OP SELECT function 180 CONFIGURATION 13 4 3 ANALOG OUTPUTS Scope output select PIN 260 ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 260 SCOPE OP SELECT Enables AOP3 to output the value of the PARAMETER RANGE parameter in any display window SCOPE OP SELECT ENABLED or DISABLED The signal output is automatically switched to the displayed parameter and provides a linear signed signal The output scale may be changed by using 257 AOP3 DIVIDER default 100 gives 10V This allows very rapid selection of the signal source for display on an oscilloscope Note Any internal GETFROM connection made to AOP3 is left intact but ignored by 260 SCOPE OP SELECT function 13 5 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL INPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS 3 RUN INPUT SETUP 4 ins 310 to 319 CONFIGURATION 2 DIGITAL INPUTS 3 DIGITAL INPUTS 3 714 SETUP 4 DIP monitor T14 PINGS 310 DIPX High value NSS PIN 311 GO TO Encoder blocks
398. he unit Attach a loop of suitable rope approx 1 2m for PL X275 440 and 1 5m for PL X520 980 between the lifting holes at each side at the top end and a similar loop at the bottom end to assist in lifting the unit out of its container When lifting the unit keep it in either the horizontal or vertical plane to avoid deforming the side cheeks at the lifting points Use the top end lifting loop to assist in presenting the unit onto the back panel The fixing holes at the top of the unit are designed with a keyhole shape to allow the unit to be initially hung on the securing bolts These should be fixed on the back panel prior to presenting the unit into the enclosure Alternatively a small fork lift may be employed if the wheel has access under the door of the enclosure It is usually possible to have access for one fork from the side of a typical enclosure with the side panel removed If access can be gained this way then you will need to bolt some temporary wooden extensions to the lifting holes at the bottom of the unit in order to stand the unit on the fork which will enter the enclosure 7 5 1 Unit weight The PL X 275 440 weighs 45Kg The PL X 520 980 weighs 90Kg Bardac Corporation 40 Log Canoe Circle Stevensville MD 21666 USA International 410 604 3400 Toll Free 888 ON SPEED Facsimile 410 604 3500 Email info bardac com Ba cl www bardac com dri ve 5 1 Default block diagram 1 1 Default Block Diagram
399. his application must be deliberately set higher than the normal full load motor current 9 amps 2 The parameter 82 O LOAD 96 TARGET is set at a level equivalent to the normal full load motor current 9 amps Here this is equivalent to 7596 of 2 ARM AMPS 12 amps 3 The 15096 limit 18 amps is now double the 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET 7596 which represents a 20096 overload capability with respect to the full load motor current 9 amps AUTOTUNE with 2 RATED ARM AMPS 12A See 6 8 9 CURRENT CONTROL Autotune enable PIN 92 Set 8 1 8 2 STALL TRIP MENU Stall current level PIN 179 to a value less than 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET 6 8 3 1 3 Maximum overload table Table showing maximum overloads according to Full load motor current as a 96 of 22RATED ARM AMPS Full load motor current Maximum available Maximum overload 96 available 82 0 LOAD 96 TARGET as With respect to full load motor current a 96 of 2 ARM AMPS 10096 15096 150 100 150 90 150 150 90 166 80 150 150 80 187 75 150 150 75 200 60 150 150 60 250 50 150 150 50 300 37 5 150 150 37 5 400 30 150 150 30 500 There are 2 overcurrent trip mechanisms 1 A software threshold which is set at 300 of 2 RATED ARM AMPS 2 A hardware threshold which activates in excess of 15096 of the maximum PL X model rating AUTOTUNE with 2 RATED ARM AMPS set to its final value See
400. hyristors then become permanently shorted and the next time that the contactor closes the supply fuses will blow Solution Always let the PL X control the contactor It has been designed to hold the contactor in while it safely quenches the armature current Use the CSTOP for emergency opening of the contactor via the PL X This terminal is electromechanical but also lets the PL X quench the current in time If safety codes prevent the PL X from being used in the emergency stop sequence ensure that the is opened 100mS prior to the main contactor opening 36 Basic application Answer 2 Making current If the PL X has been instructed to start making current but the main contactor has not yet closed then the motor will not be able to rotate This will cause the PL X to phase further forward in an attempt to produced the desired speed If the contactor then closes it will present a stationary motor armature on a fully phased forward stack straight on to the supply producing destructive current All this will occur in a few cycles of current which is far too fast for the speed loss alarms to operate Solution 1 Insert an auxiliary normally open contact on the main contactor in series with the RUN input on T31 2 Alternatively use contactor wiring method shown in 4 3 2 Question Plenty of systems do not appear to suffer from failures due to opening the contactor incorrectly so why is it so important Answer If the armature c
401. i polar or Bi polar output mode Motor thermistor input THM T30 It is good practice to protect DC motors against sustained thermal overloads by fitting temperature sensitive resistors or switches in the field and interpole windings of the machine These devices have a low resistance typically 200 Ohm up to a reference temperature 125 C Above this temperature their resistance rises rapidly to greater than 2000 Ohms Motor over temperature sensors should be connected in series between terminals T30 and T36 A motor over temperature alarm will be displayed if the external resistance between T30 and T36 exceeds 1800 Ohms 200 Ohms See 8 1 11 6 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Thermistor on T30 Terminals T30 and T36 OV COM must be linked if external over temperature sensors are not used 3 5 1 Run Jog Start Cstop Run Digital input T31 The RUN Input provides a means of electronically inhibiting controller operation If the RUN input is low all control loops will be inhibited and the motor stops RUN also controls the field See 6 9 CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD CONTROL If the contactor is being held in by a The zero speed detector while the motor is decelerating or b The contactor drop out delay then this will be terminated by RUN going low and will result in immediate contactor drop out The RUN input terminal may also be used as a programmable digital input if it is not required as a RUN function WARNING Do not rely on any drive function to
402. iately seeks the new 242 POSITION REF target 9 When the shaft reaches the new 242 POSITION REF target then 244 IN POSTION FLAG goes high again 10 The sequence of 8 and 9 may be repeated as many times as desired as long as the speed demand remains below 117 ZERO INTLK SPD 11 The speed demand rises above 117 ZERO INTLK SPD and the block is turned off Note Both 241 MARKER OFFSET and or 242 POSITION REF may be positive or negative giving a choice of clock anti clockwise search This is used if the speed direction changes and shaft reversal is undesirable To provide smoother stopping it may be helpful to use position references that include extra complete turns The block waits for approximately 400mS before activating to allow undisturbed speed traverse through zero There are 2 hidden PINs which allow access to the position counter e g with serial link PIN 710 gives a running total 4 counts per line in quadrature mode or 2 counts per line in single pulse train mode PIN 711 Is a decimal number input in the range 1 to 30 000 which is usually sent by a host computer This is used to divide the total position count so that the receiving host does not have to poll at a high rate 6 10 9 2 SPINDLE ORIENTATE Zero speed lock PIN 122 R SPINDLE ORIENTATE 4 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK m Sets the position control gain PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN for zero speed shaft lock ZERO SPEED LOCK 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 122 Note If this value is non zero
403. ic high above 16V DIO2 19 DIO1 DIO4 Overvoltage protection to 50 Input impedance 10K Ohms DIO3 20 When used as digital outputs the spec is the same as DOP1 3 DIO4 21 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 3 outputs for 4 more outputs with this spec use DIO 1 2 3 4 DOP1 22 Short circuit protected Range 22 to 32 Volts for OP high DOP2 23 DOP1 DOP3 Over temperature and over voltage protected to 50V DOP3 24 Each output can deliver up to 350mA Total for all outputs of 350mA This spec also applies to DIO1 2 3 4 when they are programmed as outputs This connector is devoted to essentially fixed function controls OV 25 TACH INPUT 200V range Input impedance 150K Ohms TACH 26 10 27 REFERENCE OUTPUTS 10 00V 0 5 10mA max Short circuit protection to OV 10 28 IARM 29 ARMATURE CURRENT 5V linear output for 100 model rating current THM 30 Output current capability 10mA max Short circuit protection to OV RUN 31 IARM Programmable Uni polar or Bi polar output mode tolerance 5 JOG 32 START 33 THERMISTOR INPUT Motor temperature thermistor If unused then connect to OV CSTOP 34 THM OK lt 200 Ohms Overtemp gt 2K Ohms Connect from THM to OV 24V 35 OV 36 CONTACTOR control 24V Logic inputs Logic low below 6V logic high above 16V Input impedance 10K Ohms Overvoltage protection to 50V RUN Drive enable Electronic enable for current loop and contactor drop out delays JOG Jog input with programmable contactor drop o
404. ical spec of the control terminals The function that each terminal has may depend on the programmed choice of the user The units are shipped with a set of default terminal functions which are described later Although the function of the terminal may change its electrical specification does not UNIVERSAL INPUTS 8 analogue inputs with up to 5mV sign resolution 0 4 OV 1 4 input voltage ranges 5 10 20 30V on each input UIP2 2 UIP2 UIP9 8 digital inputs with settable thresholds Good noise immunity UIP3 3 Overvoltage protected to 50V UIP4 4 Input impedance 100K for input scaling at 5 and 10V range UIP5 5 Input impedance for input scaling above 10V range UIP6 6 UIP7 7 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS 4 analogue outputs 0 4 UIP8 8 3 programmable 1 committed to output armature current signal UIP9 9 AOP1 AOP2 AOP3 2 5mV plus sign resolution AOP1 10 and IARM on T29 Short circuit protection to OV Output current maximum AOP2 11 Output range O to 11V AOP3 12 DIGITAL INPUTS 4 digital inputs OV 13 Logic low below 2V Logic high above 4V Low noise immunity DIP1 14 DIP1 DIP4 Overvoltage protection to 50V Input impedance 10K Ohms DIP2 15 DIP3 and DIP4 may also be used for encoder quadrature signals DIP3 16 See sections 3 4 2 1 6 1 9 and 6 1 10 for encoder information DIP4 17 DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS 4 digital inputs Also programmable as outputs see digital outputs 0101 18 Logic low below 6V Log
405. ided to protect the thyristor stack Alarm delay time Alarm will allow 300 loading for around 10 msecs and 400 for 5 msecs 8 1 11 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Armature overvolts DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 ARMATURE OVERVOLTS If the motor armature voltage feedback exceeds 18 RATED ARM VOLTS by more than 2096 then this alarm will operate 18 RATED ARM VOLTS may be lower than the dataplate maximum This alarm operates with any source of speed feedback The alarm can be caused by a badly adjusted field voltage setting field current loop field weakening back emf loop or speed loop overshooting Alarm delay time 1 5 secs 8 1 11 3 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Field overcurrent DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 FIELD OVERCURRENT The controller checks that the field current does not exceed 115 of 4 RATED FIELD AMPS This alarm could become active due to regulator failure or a badly tuned control loop causing overshoots Alarm delay time 15 secs 144 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 8 1 11 4 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Field loss MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 See 8 1 3 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Field loss trip enable PIN 173 Alarm delay time 2 secs 8 1 11 5 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE User trip MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 There is a hidden PIN 712 that will cause a trip after going high Use a jumper to connect to flag source See 13 2 4 JUMPER connections Alarm delay time O 5 secs 8 1 11 6 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Thermistor on T30
406. ify DISABLED Coord Xmax And Y at Xmax Coord Xmax And Y at Xmax Coord And Y at Xmin Coord And Y at Xmin X Rectify X Rectify ENABLED ENABLED 1 The above graphs show some of the possibile profiles X Rectify DISABLED Coord Xmax And Y at Xmax Coord And Y at Xmin Coord Xmax And Y at Xmax X Rectify i Coord DISABLED And Y at Xmin 4 Coord And Y at Coord And Y at Xmin X Rectify ENABLED 2 When using 27 34 or 4 order modes the curve always approaches the Xmin coordinate asymptotically 3 If the value for Xmin is greater or equal to Xmax then Y is constant and equal to PROFLR Y AT Xmax 4 If the PROFILER MODE is set to 0 then Y is constant and equal to PROFLR Y AT Xmax APPLICATION BLOCKS 29 3 4 2 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile Y output monitor PIN 475 PARAMETER PROFILER 3 475 PROFILE Y OP MON 475 PROFILE Y OP MON 0 00 This is the final output monitor PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the parameter profiler block PROFILE Y OP MON 300 00 0 00 475 3 4 3 PARAMETER PROFILER Profiler mode 476 PARAMETER PROFILER 476 PROFILER MODE Sets the mode of the profile PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN curve between min and max PROFILER MODE 1 of 5 modes 0 476 Mode Law of profile curve Yaxis output Y at Xmax Yaxis output Lin
407. igh then the HI value is selected If the input is low_then the LO value is selected 3 Threshold PIN 275 0101 connection is made here for the digital MEM ilr input LO or HI result GOTO destination PIN 163 The LO and HI values can be entered using the display and keys To switch dynamically changing values connect them using jumpers to the LO HI value PINS For logic only usage a value of 0 0096 is read as a low Any non zero value is read as a high Logic inversion is accomplished by entering 0 00 in the value for HI window and 0 01 in the value for LO window 13 6 1 7 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 Input high value PINs 275 281 287 293 275 DIO1 IP HI VALUE 0 0196 Sets the level of the value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN selected by a high DIOX input DIO1 IP HI VALUE 300 0096 0 01 275 See 13 6 1 6 DIOX SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 Make input GOTO destination connection Note You can make a simple AND gate by selecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 186 CONFIGURATION 13 6 1 8 DIOX SETUP DIO1 2 3 4 Input low value PINs 276 282 288 294 DIO1 T18 SETUP 4 276 DIOX IP LO VALUE 276 DIOX IP LO VALUE 0 00 Sets the level of the value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN selected by a low DIOX input DIO1 IP LO VALUE 300 0096 0 0096 276 See 13 6 1 6 DIOX SETUP DIO 1 2 3 4 Make input GOTO destination connection Note You can make a simple OR gate by selecting
408. ilable to drive high inductance loads Allows high powered fields to be driven by armature output Factory enabled function 5 12 Default 96 Diagnostic summary windows added mproved functionality 5 1 6 Jan 03 5 12 5 12 8 ANALOG TACHO VOLTS changed to mproved functionality more descriptive of 6 1 8 Jan 03 5 12 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS actual function 5 14 Addition of index mprove manual 16 Sep 04 5 14 Allow 2 RATED ARM AMPS and 4 RATED FIELD mproved functionality 6 1 AMPS to be written to by Driveweb ethernet system Remove 1 second filter from standstill logic mproved functionality 6 10 2 Allow 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK alteration during run mproved functionality 6 10 2 Improve stall trip for resistive load applications mproved functionality 8 1 8 5 15 Combine Main Frame 4 5 and Apps manual mprove manual Nov 09 5 15 Cosmetic mods addition of Frame 4 5 section 234 Record of modifications 16 2 Record of bug fixes See Apps manual for bug fixes relevant to applications blocks topics Manual Function with Bug Comments Paragraph Date Software Version reference version 2 03 Refer to supplier 2 XX 3 01 Refer to supplier 4 00 No bugs recorded in main drive Sept 4 01 blocks 2000 4 03 JOG SLACK RAMP Did not unlatch at the end of SLACK operation Now OK 6 3 6 Feb 4 03 67 SPD CUR RF3 RATIO Did not scale correctly Now OK 6 6 7 2001 4 05 No bugs recorded in main drive
409. ill be intact and will still work with the original younger version of software Transferring IC15 and IC16 aswell as the EEPROM may resolve the problem See 10 2 3 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Eeprom transfer between units See 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software version 9 1 13 1 Transferring files using PL PILOT For software versions 4 01 and above the PL X can be configured using PL PILOT This tool works with the parameters in volatile RAM Recipes stored from any PL X may be transferred to any other PL X Hence a recipe generated on newer software versions may be sent to a PL X with older software versions Any parameters that do not exist on the older version will merely produce a comms warning and may be skipped See 10 2 5 1 PL PILOT and SCADA System Control And Data Acquisition package See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes Note PL PILOT is not subject to PASSWORD control See 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL SERIAL LINKS 151 10 SERIAL LINKS RS232 and FIELDBUS 10 SERIAL LINKS RS232 and FIELDBUS 151 10 1 SERIAL LINKS RS232 1 0 152 10 1 1 RS232 PORT Connection pinouts 72 2 4 44 4 00 0 0 0 153 10 1 2 RS232 PORT Port1 Baud rate 187 22 153 10 1 3 5232 PORT Port1 function PIN 188
410. ime 15 secs 8 1 11 7 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Overspeed MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 OVERSPEED If the speed feedback signal exceeds 11096 of rated speed for longer than the alarm delay time then the overspeed alarm is activated This alarm is likely to be caused by a badly adjusted speed loop or overhauling of motors controlled by 2 Quadrant models Alarm delay time 0 5 secs 8 1 7 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Overspeed delay time PIN 177 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 145 8 1 11 8 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Speed feedback mismatch MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 See 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 This message will also appear if a trip is caused by trying to field weaken with AVF feedback 8 1 11 9 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Stall trip MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 See 8 1 8 1 STALL TRIP MENU Stall trip enable PIN 178 8 1 11 10 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Missing pulse MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 See 8 1 5 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Missing pulse trip enable PIN 175 8 1 11 11 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Supply phase loss MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 The controller continuously monitors the incoming supply of the ELI EL2 connections If either are lost the alarm will operate The subsequent control action depends on the running condition at the time the alarm is triggered The message will also briefly appear a
411. ime limit PIN 57 Contactor control questions and answers 35 Control terminal default functions 16 27 Control terminals 29 Control terminals overview 221 25 Crawl speed 41 79 219 CURRENT CONTROL 4 quadrant mode enable PIN 96 105 Autotune enable PIN 92 17 44 100 103 147 220 Block oo o eor edes 97 98 99 Current amp integral gain PIN 94 44 104 220 Current amp proportional gain PIN 93 44 104 220 Current clamp scaler PIN 81 44 98 220 CURRENT 2 2 2 98 current reference PIN 91 103 220 current reference enable PIN 97 90 105 Discontinuous current point 95 44 103 105 220 Dual current clamps enable PIN 88 102 220 I DYNAMIC PROFILE PIN 87 it e beer ete 102 230 Index DYNAMIC PROFILE Speed break point for high current DIO1 2 3 4 OP val rectify enable PINs 272 278 284 limit PIN 85 2 nie eerte nv cedi PE Ee 102 1290 5 voee e ee ae 184 I DYNAMIC PROFILE Speed break point for low current DIO1 2 3 4 Output mode enable PINs 271 277 283 limit
412. ing drive running The factor is always greater than unity hence can only increase the strength of the feedback The closed loop system then receives feedback that is too high and causes a reduction of the controlled field current This trim is useful if the precise 4 RATED FIELD AMPS calibration parameter is not exactly known and must be discovered during running by starting with a higher than expected value Once the correct level of feedback has been determined using this trim the DIAGNOSTICS menu can be used to monitor actual levels of feedback it can then be entered in the 4 RATED FIELD AMPS calibration parameter This trim may then be returned to 1 000 6 1 13 CALIBRATION Armature volts trim PIN 16 CALIBRATION 3 16 ARM VOLTS TRIM Sets a positive trim factor for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the armature volts feedback ARM VOLTS TRIM 1 0000 to 1 1000 1 0000 16 This trim factor may be applied during drive running The factor is always greater than unity hence can only increase the strength of the feedback The closed loop system then receives feedback that is too high and causes a reduction of the armature voltage feedback and hence a reduction in speed This trim is useful if the precise 18 RATED ARM VOLTS calibration parameter is not exactly known and must be discovered during running by starting with a higher than expected value Once the correct level of feedback has been determined using this trim the DIAGN
413. ing external independent systems for de energising the main contactor In this case it is recommended that the terminal be opened 100mS in advance of the main contacts opening Failure to achieve this may result in damage to the unit Note If the users main contactor has a closing time delay of greater than 75mS then it is essential that steps are taken to delay the release of armature current until the main contact has closed 1 Insert an auxiliary normally open contact on the main contactor in series with the RUN input T31 2 Alternatively use contactor wiring method shown in 4 3 2 See 4 2 Main Contactor operation It is dangerous to utilise a DC contactor when field weakening is employed without also connecting T41 and T43 to the motor armature This ensures that the PL X can measure the armature voltage even when the contactor is open See 4 3 3 Main contactor isolating DC armature This is a summary of the essential parameters that should be checked prior to allowing power to the motor You must be able to put a tick against every section Failure to comply with these requirements may cause incorrect functioning or damage to the drive and or installation and will invalidate any warranty See 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks All external fuses must be of the correct rating and type The 121 rating must be less than the rating specified in the rating tables This includes main and auxiliary fuses See 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start chec
414. ing to software version 11 5 Remotely mounted display unit There is a family of proprietary Terminal Interface Units TIU available that are compatible with the PL X The font contains a bright and clear dispay with an adjustable backlight All the PL X parameters are accessible by the TIU which can support up to 300 menu and sub menu pages Each page can display up to 8 parameters including numeric alphanumeric and bit status Parameters can be displayed and or altered and users can attach their own display messages to status bits The TIU is configured with a windows based software The supply and comms connection to the TIU is from the PL X RS232 PORT1 Please refer to your supplier for further information APPLICATION BLOCKS 165 12 APPLICATION BLOCKS The PL X contains a comprehensive range of extra system application blocks These are described in a separate accompanying manual At the time of publication the list of blocks is as follows APPLICATION BLOCKS SUMMER 1 2 APPLICATION BLOCKS PID 1 2 APPLICATION BLOCKS PARAMETER PROFILER APPLICATION BLOCKS REEL DIAMETER CALC APPLICATION BLOCKS TAPER TENSION CALC APPLICATION BLOCKS TORQUE COMPENSATOR APPLICATION BLOCKS PRESET SPEED APPLICATION BLOCKS MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 APPLICATION BLOCKS LATCH APPLICATION BLOCKS FILTER 1 2 APPLICATION BLOCKS BATCH COUNTER APPLICATION BLOCKS INTERVAL TIMER APPLICATION BLOCKS COMPARATOR 1 to 4 APPLICATION BLOCKS C O SWI
415. ing when personnel are undertaking maintenance or when machine guards are open Electronic control is not accepted by safety codes to be the sole means of inhibition of the controller Always isolate the power source before working on the drive or the motor or load See 3 5 Control terminal default functions The CSTOP must be high for at least 50mS prior to START going high See 3 5 Control terminal default functions Contactor coils usually have a high inductance When the contactor is de energised it can produce high energy arcing on the internal PL X control relay This may degrade the life of the relay and or produce excessive EMC emissions Ensure that the contactor coil is snubbered Refer to contactor supplier for details See 4 2 Main Contactor operation The essential elements of controlling the contactor are as follows 1 It must be possible to release the contactor without relying on electronics 2 The contactor must not break current To obey this rule the following applies a The PL X must not attempt to deliver armature current until after the contactor has closed b The armature current must be brought to zero before the contactor has opened 3 The contactor control circuit must be compatible with all likely application requirements Follow the instructions and all the above requirements are under the control of the PL X automatically See 4 2 Main Contactor operation It may be necessary for installations to have over rid
416. iously controlled the contactor via a PLC or Drive healthy relay These control systems may not be interfaced correctly with PL X and situations occur that drop out the contactor too quickly or bring it in too late Another common problem is that the contactor is controlled correctly for normal running but incorrectly during jogging or emergency stopping Another instance is the installation is designed correctly but the commissioning engineer uses a local op station to get each PL X going that has an in built control problem Summary Use the PL X to control the main contactor for STOP START jogging and emergency stop All sequencing occurs automatically Fit semiconductor fuses in the AC supply and armature circuits The cost of a fuse is marginal compared to the cost of repairing a damaged drive and suffering machine downtime and engineer call out costs Basic application 37 4 3 Main contactor wiring options There are various ways of implementing contactor control Each method has advantages and disadvantages Please study the rest of this section carefully before choosing the control method See also 14 9 1 Wiring diagram for AC supply to L1 2 3 different to EL1 2 3 E g Low voltage field 4 3 1 Main contactor isolating AC stack supply EL1 2 3 are wired after the main fuses to ensure the phase loss function works if a main fuse blows Contactor Auxiliary Advantages The auxiliary supplies are permanently energised
417. is not important However it is essential that there is phase equivalence for L1 to EL1 L2 to EL2 and L3 to EL3 Particular care must be taken if L1 2 3 and EL1 2 3 are fed from different sides of a transformer If the transformer is star delta then there will be a phase mismatch and the unit will fail to operate correctly Only use star star or delta delta transformers 8 For PLX units used in applications in which regeneration occurs for most or all of the time it is recommended to also fit a DC side semi conductor fuse This will further protect the unit in the event of an unsequenced power loss when regeneration is taking place 9 All connections to control terminals 1 to 36 must be referred to earth 10 If it is necessary to perform high voltage or dielectric tests on the motor or wiring then the drive unit must be disconnected first Failure to do so will invalidate warranty 14 9 1 Wiring diagram for AC supply to L1 2 3 different to EL1 2 3 E g Low voltage field It is not uncommon for the armature voltage and the field voltage of motors to be sufficiently different to merit supplying them with different levels of AC voltage This is particularly true for old motors The PL X is provided with independent control bridges and supply inputs for the armature L1 2 3 and field EL1 2 3 Normally the L1 2 3 and EL1 2 3 ports are fed with the same AC supply voltage and if for example the field voltage is lower than would normally be
418. is the ability of the equipment to survive a harsh environment The most frequent types of problem are short circuits and excessive voltages being applied to the digital inputs and outputs All the digital inputs and outputs can withstand up to 50 applied continuously All digital outputs including the 24V customer supply have been designed to withstand a direct short circuit to OV If a short circuit or overload occurs on one or more of the digital outputs then all digital outputs are disabled and the short circuit condition is flagged It is possible to enable or disable a drive trip in this event Providing the fault has not caused external user relay logic to interrupt normal running then the drive will continue to run if the trip is disabled The short circuit condition may be signalled on one of the outputs by a low state if desired If the short circuit is removed the digital outputs will recover to their original state See 8 1 4 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Digital OP short circuit trip enable PIN 174 and 8 1 11 14 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Short circuit digital outputs and 7 5 DIAGNOSTICS DIGITAL IO MONITOR Note The DIP digital inputs on T14 17 are also characterised for use as encoder inputs hence low noise immunity The DIO digital input outputs on T18 21 are characterised for 24V logic standard noise immunity The UIP analogue inputs on T2 9 can also be used as digital inputs optimum noise immunity 26 Introduction and Technical Data 3
419. ised Enable potentiometer Pot Default T 7 Output PIN 45 50 PIN 51 Min clamp Max clamp PIN 51 PIN 50 6 4 2 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP output monitor PIN 45 GO TO Up Command Default T 8 Default T 9 45 MP OP MONITOR 0 0096 Allows the output value of the PARAMETER RANGE PIN motorized pot to be monitored MP OP MONITOR 300 00 45 Default connection to speed reference summer See 6 6 2 SPEED REF SUMMER Internal speed reference 1 PIN 62 6 4 3 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Up Down time PINs 46 47 46 MP UP TIME ei __ gt PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN MP UP TIME 0 1 to 600 0 10 0 secs Sets the ramp time for 100 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN anticlockwise ve rotation MP DOWN TIME 0 1 to 600 0 10 0 secs 47 CHANGE PARAMETERS 83 6 4 4 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP Up Down command PINs 48 49 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 R 48 MP UP COMMAND Enables the motorised pot to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN rotate toward the positive limit MP UP COMMAND ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 48 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 R 49 MP DOWN COMMAND Enables the motorised pot to PARAMETER rotate toward the negative limit MP DOWN COMMAND Default connections to terminal 8 Up and terminal 9 Down Note There is no ramping with Up and Down enabled together RANGE ENABLED or DISABLED DEFAULT DISAB
420. ivate the Start controls Slowly increase the speed control potentiometer whilst observing the shaft rotation If there are any drive problems that are detectable by the on board alarms they will be annunciated Any alarm conditions must be resolved prior to running Note it may be necessary to reduce the speed loop gain for smooth running See 6 7 4 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 10 Make use of this quick start mode to check as much of the system as possible prior to further configuration 4 5 4 PASSIVE MOTOR defaults Using passive motor menu for small test motors The PL X has the facility to be used with 2 different motors See 6 1 17 CALIBRATION Motor 1 or 2 select PIN 20 The default values for the passive motor this is motor 2 from the factory are set at a level to suit very small motors Making these values the active set during a system test with a small motor will save time altering and then re setting the control terms on motor 1 The dynamic performance of the test motor by making the default passive motor settings the active set will not be as good as a correctly calibrated motor but should be sufficient for most purposes The parameters that have been set at a different default level for the passive motor are as follows 25 Amps lamp 4 6 74 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional PIN71 0 20000 1500 500 7i 68 2 CURRENT CONTROL Current clamp scaler _PIN81 0 150009 150 00
421. k The gain of this input is proportional to 1 DIA It is unity for minimum diameter and 1 build up ratio at maximum diameter To arrive at a suitable value to enter here you must perform a measurement of armature current with a separate empty reel running in speed control mode First reprogram the reel drive speed ramp to the same ramp time as the web speed Then set the speed to a constant 95 and note ARM CUR 96 MON in the diagnostics menu Increase the speed reference to 10096 while the reel is ramping up to the new speed measure the increased ARM CUR 96 MON in the diagnostics menu The change is the current required to accelerate the fixed mass to the new speed at the normal maximum acceleration rate Enter this change in current96 in the FIXED INERTIA window If differing reel core sizes or masses are to be used the fixed mass inertia value must be determined and then used for each reel core for complete accuracy The fixed inertia compensation has the greatest influence on tension accuracy for empty reels In this case the speeds are higher and the ratio of fixed mass to variable mass is also higher Hence for good results it is important to make accurate measurements to determine the compensation 3 7 10 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Variable mass inertia 508 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 508 VARIABLE INERTIA 508 VARIABLE INERTIA 0 00 Compensation required to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN overcome variable inertia VARIABLE INERTIA
422. ks Check the 3 phase auxiliary supply phasing on ELI 2 3 equates to the phasing of the main stack supply on LI 2 3 and the 1 ph control supply on T52 53 is correct See 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks Disconnect the drive for wiring tests using a megger See 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks Warnings 17 If the load regenerates or regenerative braking is employed then a DC rated armature fuse with the correct 21 rating in series with the motor armature is highly recommended See 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks A protective clean earth connection must be made to the control OV on T13 to ensure that the installation complies with protective class1 requirements See 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks The emergency stopping and safety procedure including local and remote actuators must be checked prior to applying power to the motor See 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks If you wish to abandon changes made since the last save simply remove the control supply WITHOUT having performed parameter save See 5 1 2 PARAMETER SAVE Sometimes it is useful to return a unit to its default setup condition E g a trial configuration may prove to be unworkable and it is easier to start again If all 4 keys are held down during the application of the control supply then the drive will automatically display the default parameters and connections EXCEPT those in the CALIBRATION menu and 100 FIELD VOLTS OP for MOTOR 1 and MOTOR 2 and 680 larm BURDEN OHM
423. l in excess of 117 ZERO INTLK SPD 96 and hence the stall alarm will not operate Set 14 IR COMPENSATION as accurately as possible and then test the alarm with a stalled motor Disable the field Progressively increase current limit to above the 179 STALL CUR LEVEL to check that the AV speed feedback remains below 117 ZERO INTLK SPD It may be necessary to increase 117 ZERO INTLK SPD to ensure tripping See 8 1 8 1 STALL TRIP MENU Stall trip enable PIN 178 After a DATA CORRUPTION message Check that the calibration parameters and drive personality larm burden value are correct See 9 1 1 SELF TEST MESSAGE Data corruption Warning the 24V supply on pin 2 may damage your PC or other instrument If in doubt do not connect it The transmit must be connected to the receive on each port See 10 1 1 RS232 PORT Connection pinouts Parameter exchange general WARNING Check the CALIBRATION parameters are correct after any process of PARAMETER EXCHANGE See 10 2 RS232 PORT PARAMETER EXCHANGE And 10 2 3 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Eeprom transfer between units WARNING about changing BURDEN OHMS It is important that 680 larm BURDEN OHMS is set as closely as possible to the actual resistance used on the power board DO NOT ALLOW THE MODEL RATING TO EXCEED THE VALUES IN THE RATING TABLE AND ON THE RATING LABEL FOUND UNDER THE UPPER END CAP FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING WILL INVALIDATE ANY WARRANTY AND VIOLATE APPROVAL STANDARDS NO LIABILITY IS ACC
424. l need setting however is the CALIBRATION values These are special because they are used to set the maximum ratings for the motor and drive The absolute maximum available armature current of any particular model will not normally exceed the CALIBRATION menu setting If the control card is transferred to a different power chassis it will automatically interrogate the chassis to determine the frame size The user must make sure that if the armature burden resistor value is different then the new value is entered into the unit See 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 This allows owners of large numbers of drives to hold minimal spares Sometimes it is useful to return a unit to its default parameter condition E g a trial configuration may prove to be unworkable and it is easier to start again If all 4 keys are held down during the application of the control supply then the drive will automatically refer to the default parameters and internal connections 2 R CALIBRATION 3 2 R RUN MODE RAMPS 3 R 2 JOG CRAWL SLACK 3 R CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 STOP MODE RAMPS 3 R CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 SPEED REF SUMMER 3 2 H SPEED CONTROL 3 2 H CURRENT CONTROL 3 2 H FIELD CONTROL 3 2 H ZERO INTERLOCKS 3 CHANGE PARAMETERS CHANGE PARAMETERS CHANGE PARAMETERS CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 MOTORISED POT RAMP 3 CHANGE PARAMETERS CHANGE PARAMETERS CHANGE PARAMETERS CHANGE PARAMETERS 2444555
425. l prevent re starting after a trip DO NOT RELY ON THIS FOR SAFETY 8 1 11 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE If an alarm is triggered a displayed message showing which alarm caused the drive to shut down will It can be removed from the display by tapping the left key or starting the drive It may be re examined using the DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE window The message will be memorised if the control supply is removed To remove the message from the memory go to this window and tap the down key Note If when trying to enter the DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE window no alarms have been detected then the MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS window will show the message NO ALARMS DETECTED and the DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE window is closed 8 1 11 1 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Armature overcurrent An armature current trip is provided This is set to operate for current feedback values exceeding 170 of the maximum model current 300 of 2 ARM AMPS whichever is reached first Motor Faults If the motor armature windings fail the armature impedance may drop sharply This may cause excessive armature current which will activate the current trip If this occurs the motor armature should be checked Meggered for insulation resistance which should be above acceptable limits Disconnect the drive when using a megger If the motor becomes completely short circuited the current trip will not protect the controller High speed semi conductor thyristor fusing must always be prov
426. lag PIN 586 3 14 3 INTERVAL TIMER Timer reset enable PIN 584 When enabled the timer is reset PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN to and held at zero TIMER RESET ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 584 The timer commences timing when disabled The timer is reset if the input is enabled prior to timing out APPLICATION BLOCKS 61 3 14 4 INTERVAL TIMER Time interval setting PIN 585 INTERVAL TIMER 3 585 TIMER INTERVAL Sets the time delay for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN interval timer TIMER INTERVAL 0 1 to 600 0 SECS 5 0 SECS 585 When the time delay has elapsed the block output goes high It stays high until the next disable input 3 14 5 INTERVAL TIMER Timer expired flag PIN 586 INTERVAL TIMER 3 586 TMR EXPIRED FLAG Allows the interval timer PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN expired flag to be monitored TMR EXPIRED FLAG LOW or HIGH LOW 586 This window has a branch hopping facility to 3 14 2 INTERVAL Time elapsed monitor 583 Note By connecting this flag to 584 TIMER RESET using a jumper it is possible to make the timer roll over and continue timing from O again 62 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 15 APPLICATION BLOCKS COMPARATOR 1 to 4 Pins 588 to 603 There are 4 identical comparators each with adjustable hysterisis and a window mode option COMPARATOR 1 3 This description applies to all 4 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 COMPARATOR 1 3 COMPARATOR 1 588
427. lculated and entered into 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS Note 130 MOTOR RPM MON will only be accurate when 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS corresponds to 6 DESIRED MAX RPM for 100 speed See also 3 4 4 Analogue tachogenerator input Note With an additional bi directional shaft mounted encoder it is possible to lock and or orientate the shaft at zero speed See 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE There is a tacho failure detection system that may be configured to either trip the drive or automatically switch to AVF See 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 2 ENCODER This shaft mounted transducer provides a stream of pulses with a frequency proportional to speed The pulses can be a single stream with a separate direction logic output Low for reverse high for forward or a dual stream of pulses in phase quadrature The quadrature information is decoded by the PL X to determine the rotation direction Either type may be selected for use in the ENCODER sub menu Note Low frequencies give poor performance The lower limit for reasonable performance is a 100 input frequency ie at full speed of encoder of 15Khz 450 lines at 2000 rpm single pulse train or 225 lines at 2000 rpm for quadrature type With more lines performance improves with less dynamic stability degrades The 100 speed feedback RPM is determined from 6 DESIRED MAX RPM For lower full scale frequencies see type 3 or 4 feedback modes below Note With bi direc
428. le COMPENSATOR PIN 501 PIN 517 PIN 518 PIN 514 Rice X PN515 _ By Tension Tension Scaler demand input Diameter TORQUE TORQUE T COMP Connect to Memory demand cur lim PIN 89 PIN 502 125 Select monitor GO TO ned PIN 516 PIN 500 Block activate Upper clamp Stiction comp threshold 150 limit Curr limit Enable 150 PIN 504 To current 0150 OVerwind control curr limit Static friction 150 1 limit PIN 519 By rectified Overwind Reel speed Underwind Internal connection Enable select PIN 520 Inertia comp monitor PIN 505 Dynamic friction Underwind PIN 506 Friction b Sign for T rren FWD REV O 150 BOUM t Curr limit control PIN 507 PIN 514 Accel filter time constant T COMP Connect to cur lim PIN 90 GO TO Lower clamp PIN 508 PIN 513 Variable Inertia Calculated from line Sets switch off f speed when set to Zero PIN 509 Material PIN 512 Width accel IP monitor gives accel PIN 511 Accel scaler L PIN 510 Accel line speed 48 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 9 APPLICATION BLOCKS PRESET SPEED Pin numbers used 523 to 534 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 PRESET SPEED 3 This block provides a versatile preset value selection machine The primary use is for preset speeds By defining output values for each one of 8 possible input combinations various types of prese
429. le for connection but not provided with an adjustment display window in the menu tree For example unfiltered or rectified versions of displayed parameters They are all grouped together in the PIN table from 720 downwards They are also shown on the relevant block diagrams with a grey IO arrow instead of a black arrow PIN number and description of these hidden parameters appears as normal when using the GOTO or GET FROM windows 172 CONFIGURATION 13 2 7 CONFIGURATION ENABLE GOTO GETFROM ENABLE GOTO GETFROM DISABLED CONFIGURATION 2 ENABLE GOTO GETFROM Used to allow configuration of PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT the internal system connections ENABLE GOTO GETFROM ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED Note To start a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to ENABLED Note To end a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to DISABLED When the window is set to DISABLED the automatic conflict checker starts checking to see if more than one GOTO connection has been made to any PIN More than one GOTO would lead to a unwanted values at the target PIN If it finds a conflict the alarm message GOTO CONFLICT will appear on the bottom line To help find the conflict See 13 14 CONFLICT HELP MENU 13 3 CONFIGURATION UNIVERSAL INPUTS Pin numbers 320 to 399 CONFIGURATION UNIVERSAL INPUTS The PL X series not only possesses 8 analogue inputs but also
430. le inertia The fixed inertia compensation is used to accelerate all fixed mass components of the system e g motor gearbox reel former etc The variable inertia compensation is used to accelerate the process material the mass of which is changing as the reel diameter changes There is also provision for compensating for different material widths The compensation factors may be found by pure calculation or empirically The descriptions here outline empirical methods that may be utilised using only the reel drive and a full and empty reel 3 7 1 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Block diagram Torque Torque uw win mem TORQUE PIN 514 input input Tension enable x PINS15 PIN 501 PIN 517 PIN 518 COMPENSATOR By e Diameter Tension Tension Scaler demand input TORQUE TORQUE T COMP Connect to Memory demand lim PIN 89 PIN 502 503 Select monitor GO TO Stiction comp A Web speed PIN 516 PIN 500 Block activate Upper clamp Stiction comp threshold 150 limit Memory Curr limit Enable 9 504 QR O 0150 Overwind curr limit Static friction PIN 505 150 I limit PIN 519 By rectified Overwind Dynamic Reel speed Underwind Internal connection Enable select friction PIN 520 Inertia comp monitor PIN 506 Underwind Friction Sign for FWD REV 150 Curr limit PIN 507 Fixed PIN 513 Accel Inertia filter time constant T COMP Connect to cur lim PIN 90 GO TO Lower cl
431. lict PIN identifier 1 201 14 tees att eine 203 14 1 Product rating table eoe esie oi tee E Re 204 14 2 Product rating labels i o di UR pi RI ck Jac I Rc RE Ri EYE ERI ERO 204 14 3 Semiconductor fuse 665 111111 204 14 3 1 Proprietary ced ce wage eee RS oa ee egos ee tended i rere ds 205 14 3 2 stock fuse Sr A AEA EER a LAEE TEAR ETE ETEA 205 14 3 3 DC semi conductor f ses 22 i AEE E E OEE eee 206 TAA PEX familly cover dirmehsloris 2 207 14 5 Mechanical dimensions PL X 0 71 7 7 2 44 444 4 4 4 40 4 44 4 01 0 4 enna 208 14 5 1 1 Mounting PL X sisse ili aUe Ronda 208 14 6 Mechanical dimensions PL X 65 145 2 22 42 4 4 2 4 44 4 0 0 nnn nnn 209 14 6 1 1 Mounting PL X 65 145 209 14 7 Mechanical dimensions PL X 185 265 0 210 14 7 1 1 M o nting PE X 185b 205 iit erexit Re eru exuere iuge amas dee 210 14 7 1 2 Venting models PL X 185 265 using back
432. ll be no need to repeat the above It is now necessary to save the captured PL X data in a format that can be transmitted to this or another drive at a later date Click on Transfer then Capture text and you will be asked for a folder and file for the captured data to be stored in Choose an appropriate destination and name using the default file extension TXT Suggest using TX2 page 2 TX3 for page TXL for Locked page 3 When you are finished click Start HyperTerminal now returns to the main screen and is ready for reception You will notice that the bottom menu bar now highlights Capture Proceed to transmit drive data as outlined in PARAMETER EXCHANGE Once transmission is complete and the drive reports FINISHED click on the disconnect icon or click on Call then Disconnect to finish You may now exit from HyperTerminal by clicking on File then Exit or by pressing Alt and F4 or by closing the window It is not necessary to save the session if your personalised Hyperterminal has been saved as 156 SERIAL LINKS described above The file of received data has now been saved ready for transmission to another or the same drive See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes 10 2 2 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive receive PARAMETER EXCHANGE 4 DRIVE RECEIVE 5 DRIVE RECEIVE 5 UP KEY TO CONTINUE Starts the process of serial transmission PARAMETER RANGE of parameter values from the host DRIVE RECEIVE RECEIVING then LEFT KEY TO RESTART
433. llows the field control circuit to continue to sense the back emf of the motor after the contactor has opened and hence prevent a sudden dangerous strengthening of the field current Note the AVF is increased by 3 396 when using remote sensing this causes a 3 396 speed scale change Unconnected terminal Leave this terminal free of connections NC T42 Introduction and Technical Data 31 Remote AVF negative input from motor armature See T41 Unconnected terminal Leave this terminal free of connections Volt free contact for main contactor coil Rating up to 240V 500VA Volt free contact for latching contactor push button Rating up to 240V 500VA See 4 3 4 Using pushbuttons for simple STOP START Coast to stop EARTH on 51 is a dirty earth connection to the control supply L and N is for control power 100 240V 50 60Hz 10 50VA RA 143 NC 144 CON1 T45 CON2 T46 LAT1 T47 LAT2 T48 EARTH T51 N T52 L T53 If the voltage falls below 80V AC the unit will commence an orderly shutdown sequence See 3 6 Supply loss shutdown 3 5 2 Summary of default terminal functions OV terminal OV T1 Aux Speed Reference Analogue Input UIP2 2 Speed Reference Current Demand Analogue Input UIPP3 Ramped Speed Reference Analogue Input UIP4 4 Lower Current Clamp ve Analogue Input UIP5 T5 Main Cur Limit Upper Current Clamp ve Analogue Input UIP6 T6 Motorised pot simulator preset enable Digital Input UIP7 7 Motorised pot si
434. locks It is not expected however that the typical cycle time will ever exceed 30mS Bear in mind that it would be highly unusual for all the application blocks to be activated With this in mind it is recommended that the system designer takes care that external logic signals are stable long enough to be recognised In order to achieve this the logic input minimum dwell time has been specified at 50mS It will of course be possible to operate with much lower dwell times than this for simpler installations where the cycle time is low There is then the risk that a future re configuration of the blocks by the user would increase the cycle time sufficiently to cause sampling problems 12 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 1 2 Order of processing It may be useful for system designers to know the order in which the blocks are processed within each cycle 0 Analogue inputs 12 Torque compensator 1 Motorised pot 13 Zero interlocks 2 Digital inputs 14 Speed control 3 Reference exchange 15 Preset speed 4 Jumpers 16 Parameter profile 5 Multi function 17 Latch 6 Alarms 18 Batch counter 7 PID1 2 19 Interval timer 8 Summer 1 2 20 Filters 9 Run mode ramps 21 Comparators 10 Diameter calc 22 C O Switches 11 Taper tension 23 All terminal outputs 3 1 3 Logic levels Logic inputs will recognise the value zero any units as a logic low All other numbers including negative number
435. loit it as desired For all 7 outputs together there is a maximum allowable limit of 350mA Any one output is allowed to output up to 350mA Any spare capacity within this limit is also available to the 24V output which also has its own 5OmA capability giving a maximum total to the 24V output of 400mA if no digital output is being used Internal current limited 350mA 24V External load E g relay coil This shows the output configuration for each digital output DOP1 to and DIO1 to 0104 All digital outputs share this rail Flywheel diode The digital outputs are also designed to be OR d together or with outputs from other drives if desired This is sometimes useful if an external event must wait for several outputs to go low Each output is fitted with a flywheel diode to allow the safe driving of inductive loads and because of the current limiting it is possible to drive lamps that may have a low cold resistance 3 4 3 Analogue inputs UIP2 to UIP9 The analogue inputs are required to accurately measure 10V signals The resolution minimum recognisable steps must be as small as possible and the conversion to a number must be as fast as possible to give good response times The PL X series not only possesses 8 analogue inputs but also measures all of these with up to 5mV plus sign resolution and with excellent response time In addition it is possible to programme the voltage range of each input to
436. lready high has a momentary action at the commencement of a JOG request The 29 RAMP AUTO PRESET input is ANDED with 720 SYSTEM RESET pulse which is simultaneous with the release of the current loop CHANGE PARAMETERS 73 R RUN MODE RAMPS 3 21 RAMP OP MONITOR 21 RAMP OP MONITOR 0 00 Allows the output level of the ramp block PARAMETER RANGE PIN to be monitored RAMP OP MONITOR 100 00 21 This monitoring window is able to branch hop to 6 2 16 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag PIN 35 Note that the RUN MODE RAMP may be active when the unit is in stop mode See 6 2 1 RUN MODE RAMPS Block diagram including JOG 6 2 3 RUN MODE RAMPS Forward up time PIN 22 Sets the ramp time for 0 100 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the forward ve reference FORWARD UP TIME O 1 to 600 0 seconds 10 0 secs 22 6 2 4 RUN MODE RAMPS Forward down time PIN 23 Sets the ramp time for 100 096 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the forward ve reference FORWARD DOWN TIME O 1 to 600 0 seconds 10 0 secs 23 6 2 5 RUN MODE RAMPS Reverse up time PIN 24 Sets the ramp time for O 10096 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the reverse ve reference REVERSE UP TIME O 1 to 600 0 seconds 10 0 secs 24 6 2 6 RUN MODE RAMPS Reverse down time 25 Sets the ramp time for 100 096 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN of the reverse ve reference REVERSE DOWN TIME O 1
437. lt terminal 401 2 41 44 4441 31 3 6 056 6 si cie exer ex eg CERIS 32 20 Introduction and Technical Data 3 1 Introduction The PL X DC motor controller uses closed loop control of armature current and feedback voltage to give precise control of motor torque and speed The unit also controls the motor excitation field The closed loop parameters are programmable by the user and a wealth of inputs and outputs are provided to allow very complex motion control processes to be achieved The series is comprised of 5 frame variants each with 2 and 4 quadrant models Selected 2 quadrant models also offer a unique regenerative stopping facility Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives Programming the unit is designed to be simple A large backlit alphanumeric display guides the user through a friendly menu structure to select options and parameter changes Built in application software blocks are provided to be connected up as desired Comprehensive fault monitoring and serial communications allow off site programming and remote diagnostics All models are stock items These units are very compact The savings made possible in panel space and enclosure costs may be significant 3 2 How do they work Speed Sp
438. ly and observe local safety codes The suggested strategy is to start in the safest possible mode of operation and progressively exercise each element of the system until full functionality has been achieved This chapter is a step by step approach up to 4 in this list 1 Check installation and supplies L1 2 3 EL1 2 3 and control supply and all safety systems 2 Calibrate PL X to match motor Use Armature voltage feedback below base speed for first run Save calibration parameters 3 Insert firebar electric heating element high wattage resistor e g 4 Ohms 1Kw in series with armature and check operation of contactor and field 4 Remove firebar perform AUTOTUNE and run motor up to base speed Check operation of feedback transducers and mechanical components 5 Introduce tacho or encoder feedback and proceed to field weakening if required 6 Start implementing more complex applications blocks 7 Check safety systems thoroughly and observe local safety codes INCORRECT CONTROL OF THE MAIN CONTACTOR IS THE MOST COMMON FORM OF PROBLEM PLEASE SEE SECTIONS 4 2 and 4 2 1 FOR FURTHER HELP 34 Basic application 4 1 Basic speed or torque control This section shows the essential requirements for a very basic speed or torque control application Note that the arrangement of the contactor shown here allows continuous phase sensing on EL1 2 3 VERY IMPORTANT see 4 2 Main Contactor operation 4 3 Main contactor wiring opti
439. ly prevailing parameters Then go to the PARAMETER SAVE menu and save these parameters so that the bad data held in the target recipe page is overwritten Unfortunately the desired new file cannot be used If the message occurs at power up then the left key restores factory defaults IMPORTANT WARNING Check that the calibration parameters and drive personality larm burden value are correct These may also need re entering See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 See 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 9 1 2 SELF TEST MESSAGE Disable GOTO GETFROM The ENABLE GOTO GETFROM configuration selection has been left in the ENABLE state This needs to be Parameter name disabled in order to run the drive DISABLE GOTO GETFROM 9 1 3 SELF TEST MESSAGE Self cal tolerance This alarm will appear at power up if the self calibration of the analog inputs has exceeded their INITIALISING This tolerance can be relaxed by 0 1 with each press SELF CALTOLERANCE normal tolerance of the left key to enable the unit to operate although possibly at reduced accuracy It indicates an aged component that has drifted slightly or a pollution problem 9 1 4 SELF TEST MESSAGE Proportional armature current cal fail This alarm will appear at power up if the self calibration of the proportional armature current amplifier has INITIALISING failed If turning the control supply off and on does not PRP ARM CUR CAL FA
440. m newer to older However see 9 1 13 1 Transferring files using PL PILOT E g A file generated using version 2 12 software may be used on units employing version 2 12 2 13 3 01 software etc but not on units employing 2 11 2 10 2 01 etc The system is designed in this way because a replacement unit is more likely to have newer software A newer version of software may possess parameters that did not exist on earlier versions When an earlier version file is transmitted to the newer version it automatically uses the default values for any parameters it cannot find in the older version file Once the new parameters have been adjusted and a PARAMETER SAVE performed then they will become permanently memorised These rules apply for all modes of file transfer See 11 5 Remotely mounted display unit If the message MEMORY VERSION ERROR appears it indicates that an incompatible newer software file has been loaded onto a unit with older software See 9 1 13 SELF TEST MESSAGE Memory version error See 9 1 13 1 Transferring files using PL PILOT 160 SERIAL LINKS 10 2 5 Parameter exchange using ASCII COMMS ASCII COMMS is an ANSI multi drop protocol for use with a host refer to SERIAL COMMS manual or for interface with a PC based configuration tool PL PILOT See below and 13 1 1 PL PILOT configuration tool See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes See also 11 5 Remotely mounted display unit Note The PL X uses an RS232 port to tran
441. matically provided by the tacho and T16 digital input is made free for other uses Unless zero speed lock is required See 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE In this case 16 is still required for direction An encoder and or tacho failure detection system may be configured to either trip the drive or automatically switch to AVF See 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 The final steady state 100 speed feedback RPM is determined from 6 DESIRED MAX RPM The dynamic scaling is derived from 8 MAX TACHO VOLTS These 2 full scale settings must correspond 6 1 10 CALIBRATION ENCODER SCALING The ENCODER SCALING screen is the entry point to a further sub menu which performs the process R CALIBRATION ENCODER SCALING of setting the encoder parameters Note See 7 1 9 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Encoder RPM monitor PIN 132 which shows the encoder RPM irrespective of whether the encoder is being used for feedback or not Note With no encoder fitted you may ignore this sub menu 66 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 1 10 1 ENCODER SCALING Quadrature enable PIN 10 ENCODER SCALING 4 R 10 QUADRATURE ENABLE Programmes the encoder inputs PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN 16 and 17 QUADRATURE ENABLE ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED 10 The encoder inputs on T16 and T17 can be programmed to accept 2 types of encoder pulse trains 0 Pulse with sign QUADRATURE DISABLED single trai
442. mit setting select a fuse with a current rating closest to the armature current and with an l t rating less than the maximum shown in the table If a DC fuse is fitted in series with the armature it must be a DC rated semiconductor type with current rating 1 2 times the motor full load current DC voltage rating suitable for the maximum armature voltage and with an 124 rating less than the maximum shown in the table See 14 3 3 DC semi conductor fuses Installation 205 The rated current for semiconductor fuses is normally given by the fuse manufacturers for copper conductors that have a current density in the order of 1 3 1 6 A mm IEC 269 4 This low utilisation results in extra copper costs during the installation of high current systems but helps to prevent overheating of the fuses Alternatively it is possible to use a fuse of a higher rating and derate it for use in standard fuseholders and installations This derating factor is only applied to large fuses for the models PL X 185 225 265 Hence the fuses in the table for these models have been selected with a further derating to approx 80 in order that they may be used in a standard fuseholder No derating is required for installations that do comply with IEC 269 4 and in this case a smaller fuse could be selected in accordance with the recommendations given above 14 3 1 Proprietary fuses Model Max cont Main LITTLEFUSE BUSS BUSS EU IR American IR BS88 I
443. mulator Increase Digital Input UlPP8 8 Motorised pot simulator Decrease Digital Input UIP9 Speed feedback Analogue Output AOP1 T10 Total speed reference Analogue Output AOP2 T11 Total current demand Analogue Output AOP3 T12 OV terminal Protective clean earth connected here OV T13 Spare input Digital Input DIP1 T14 Marker input Digital Input DIP2 T15 Encoder B train or sign Digital Input DIP3 T16 Encoder A train Digital Input 117 Zero reference interlock Digital Input 0101 T18 Jog mode select Digital Input DIO2 1719 Ramp hold Digital Input DIO3 1720 Dual current clamp enable Digital Input 0104 1721 Zero speed Digital Output DOP1 722 Ramping flag Digital Output DOP2 T23 Drive healthy Digital Output DOP3 T24 OV terminal OV T25 DC Tachogenerator input TACH 726 User 10V reference 10V T27 User 10V reference 10V T28 Armature current output IARM T29 Motor thermistor input THM T30 Run Digital Input RUN T31 Jog Digital Input JOG T32 Start stop contactor control Digital Input START T33 Coast stop contactor control Digital Input CSTOP T34 24V Supply Output 24V T35 OV terminal OV T36 32 Introduction and Technical Data 3 6 Supply loss shutdown There are 3 supply ports to the unit Port 1 Control supply 1ph Provides power for the internal control electronics Port 2 EL1 2 3 Auxiliary supply 3ph Provides power for the field and is used for synchronisation Port 3 L1 2 3 Main supply 3ph Provides power for the
444. n ENABLED it presets the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN calculator to the preset value DIAMETER PRESET ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 490 3 5 10 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter preset value PIN 491 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 491 DIA PRESET VALUE 491 DIA PRESET VALUE 10 00 The calculator is preset to this value by DIAMETER PRESET 3 5 11 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter web break threshold PIN 492 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 492 DIA WEB BRK THR 492 DIA WEB BRK THR 7 50 Sets the threshold for the web PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN break flag to be activated DIA WEB BRK THR 0 00 to 100 00 7 50 492 A break in the web will cause a sudden change in the diameter calculation due to the breakdown of the speed relationship Hence if the raw calculation value changes at a rate that causes it to differ from the filtered calculation result by more than this threshold value then the web break flag on hidden PIN 690 will be set high See 3 5 8 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter filter time constant PIN 489 PARAMETER DIA PRESET VALUE RANGE 0 00 to 100 00 DEFAULT 10 00 Note This flag will also go high if the calculator output is preset to a value which differs from the calculated value derived from the prevailing web and reel speeds by more than the threshold 3 5 12 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter memory boot up 493 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 493 DIA MEM BOOT UP Used to select the valu
445. n connection DIP1 T14 SETUP 4 GOTO Defines the target source PIN for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT the connection to DIPX GOTO PIN 000 to 720 See 13 5 2 4 13 5 2 4 Default connections for DIP1 2 3 4 DIPX Terminal Function Terminal High value Low value GO TO DIP1 Spare input T14 0 01 High 0 00 Low Unconnected DIP2 Marker input T15 0 01 High 0 00 Low Unconnected DIP3 Encoder input B train T16 0 01 High 0 00 Low Unconnected DIP4 Encoder input A train T17 0 01 High 0 00 Low Unconnected 182 CONFIGURATION 13 5 3 DIGITAL INPUTS RUN INPUT SETUP RUN INPUT SETUP 4 Pins 318 and 319 GOTO RUN INPUT SETUP 4 318 RUN IP VALUE 3 RUN INPUT SETUP 4 Digit I 319 RUN IP LO VALUE PIN 319 Terminal In the unlikely event that there is a shortage of digital inputs the RUN input may be used The default GOTO PIN normally used by the RUN input is called 308 INTERNAL RUN IP and must be set to a logic high when the RUN input terminal is disconnected See 13 9 4 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Internal run input PIN 308 13 5 3 1 RUN INPUT SETUP RUN input HI value PIN 318 RUN INPUT SETUP 4 318 RUN IP HI VALUE 318 RUN IP HI VALUE 0 01 Sets the level of the value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN selected by a high RUN input RUN IP HI VALUE 300 0096 0 01 318 Note You can make a simple AND gate by sel
446. n is the last one to be input prior to the speed falling below 117 ZERO INTLK SPD threshold This is normally within 1 revolution of the shaft prior to the threshold When the speed falls below 117 ZERO INTLK SPD then the spindle orientate function will operate providing 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK is set to a non zero value and 240 MARKER ENABLE is enabled Once the block has commenced functioning it will continue as long as the speed demand is below 117 ZERO INTLK SPD The actual speed may exceed 117 ZERO INTLK SPD without turning the block off The sequence of operation is as follows 1 Speed demand and feedback fall and remain below 117 ZERO INTLK SPD 96 for 400mS Includes Stopping sequences using terminals T33 or T32 PL models can only orientate when stopping 2 Spindle orientation block is activated 3 The shaft position at the last marker to be input prior to the speed falling below 117 ZERO INTLK SPD 96 is calculated by the PL X 4 The shaft seeks the 241 MARKER OFFSET position 5 As the shaft approaches the marker offset position the block checks for the 242 POSITION REF target 118 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 If the position reference is non zero the shaft immediately seeks the position reference with respect to the marker offset without waiting to stop at the marker offset position 7 When the shaft reaches 242 POSITION REF target 244 IN POSTION FLAG goes high 8 If anew 242 POSITION REF is entered the shaft immed
447. n locked ON THE RECEIVING unit and cannot be overwritten See 13 13 2 1 Recipe page block diagram or refer to supplier When the messages change to FINISHED press the left key on the target PL X Look at the calibration parameters and other unique parameters to ascertain with confidence that the configuration has been transferred then turn off both the control supplies Remove the interconnecting lead The target PL X is now loaded with the parameter file from the source PL X SERIAL LINKS 159 10 2 3 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Eeprom transfer between units STATIC SENSITIVE This equipment contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts Observe static control precautions when handling installing and servicing this product In an emergency break down situation it is possible to transfer the Eeprom IC This IC contains all 3 recipe page parameters and connection details See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 677 See 9 1 13 SELF TEST MESSAGE Memory version error See 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software version before proceeding To gain access to the Eeprom IC it is necessary to remove the plastic cover from the unit To do this first remove the end caps then remove the 4 corner fixing screws that retain the cover When removing the cover please take care not to stress the display and key connection ribbons Unplug the ribbons from the control card to completely remove the top cover The plugs are key
448. n of pulses T17 with a rotation direction logic signal on T16 low for reverse high for forward The logic level may be inverted using the 13 ENCODER SIGN parameter Note When this type of encoder is used in conjunction with AVF or tacho the feedback sign is automatically provided by the analog feedback and T16 digital input is made free for other uses Unless zero speed lock is required See 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE In this case T16 is still required for the encoder direction See 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PIN 9 QUICK START 1 2 pulse trains in phase quadrature QUADRATURE ENABLED The encoder provides 2 pulse trains phase shifted by 90 degrees They are nominated the A train on T17 and the B train on T16 The A train should lead the B train for forward rotation positive demand and B leads A for reverse The drive automatically decodes the quadrature information to produce a rotation direction sign This may be inverted using the 13 ENCODER SIGN parameter Note When using encoders with quadrature outputs it is very important that the phase difference between the 2 pulse trains remains as close to 90 degrees as possible If the encoder is not mounted and centered accurately on the shaft it can cause skewing of the internal optics as the shaft rotates This produces a severe degradation of the phase relationship on a cyclical basis If the encoder appears to gyrate as the shaft rotates you must recti
449. nally clamped at 105 00 This window has a branch hopping facility to 3 3 2 PID 1 2 PID output monitor 429 452 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 4 APPLICATION BLOCKS PARAMETER PROFILER PINs used 475 to 481 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 PARAMETER PROFILER 3 3 4 1 PARAMETER PROFILER Block diagram PIN 475 Y at Xmax Mode PIN 476 PIN 478 Yaxis output Y at Xmin PIN 477 Parameter profiler X min X max PIN 479 PIN 480 GET X axis Input This block is used when it is desirable to modulate one parameter according to the magnitude of another A typical example is changing the gain of a block as the error increases X RECTIFY GO TO The block symbol shows the profiler working in the positive quadrant by using a rectified version of the input signal to indicate the position on the profile X axis The related Y axis amplitude is then sent to the block output Both axes are able to impose maximum and minimum levels to the profile translation The profile curve is able to adopt several different modes 27 PARAMETER PROFILER 3 PRFL X AXIS GET FROM PARAMETER PROFILER 3 475 PROFILE Y OP MON PARAMETER PROFILER 3 476 PROFILER MODE PARAMETER PROFILER 477 PROFLR Y Xmin PARAMETER PROFILER 3 478 PROFLR Y AT Xmax PARAMETER PROFILER 479 PROFILER Xmin PARAMETER PROFILER 3 480 PROFILER Xmax PARAMETER PROFILER 3 481 PROFLR X
450. nd For field currents above 31 2596 of model 6 1 4 Oct 08 5 16 operative for 4 RATED FIELD AMPS rating use 100 FIELD VOLTS OP to set field current to 9 3 set above 31 25 of max rating the correct level For field weakening applications Bug fixed for software version 5 17 Upgrade software and above 5 15 Fixed above bug with field current All units traced and memo issued to users Oct 08 5 17 17 Changes to product since manual publication Any new features that affect the existing functioning of the unit that have occurred since the publication the manual will be recorded here using an attached page 08 03 11 of Bardac Corporation 40 Log Canoe Circle Stevensville MD 21666 USA International 410 604 3400 Toll Free 888 ON SPEED Facsimile 410 604 3500 Email info bardac com Ba cl www bardac com dri ve 5 1 Bardac drives PL PLX Digital DC Drive Part 2 Application Blocks HG501442 v5 15h Part 1 Basic Product Manual Part 2 Application Blocks Part 3 High Power Modules Contents 3 Bardac un drives NOTE These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations equipment or to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation operation or maintenance Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser s purposes the matter sho
451. nd current are always associated i 15096 CURRENT LIMIT Wit each other m x NE E SPD BRPNT AT LO I x RR CUR LIMIT AT LO I The 15096 CURRENT LIMIT is available until the speed demand reaches the SPD BRPNT AT HI I The current limit then reduces linearly as the speed increases towards the SPD BRPNT AT LO 1 After passing the SPD BRPNT AT LO it remains at the level set in CUR LIMIT AT LO I This gives reducing current limit with speed This speed and current are always associated with each other The CUR LIMIT AT LO I This speed and current prevails until the speed are always associated demand reaches the SPD with each other BRPNT AT LO I The current limit then increases linearly as the speed increases towards the SPD BRPNT AT HI I After passing the SPD BRPNT AT HI I then 15096 CURRENT LIMIT remains available This gives an increasing current limit with speed This speed and current are always associated with each other Note The SPEED breakpoints may be set so that the profile starts low and goes high if required If you try to bring the two speed breakpoints closer than within 1096 of each other then the higher speed breakpoint is internally assumed to be equal to the lower speed breakpoint 10 6 8 4 1 DYNAMIC PROFILE Profile enable 84 Enables or disables the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN dynamic profile function PROFILE ENABLE ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED
452. ng data and handshaking Port The physical connector for the serial link RS232 RS422 RS485 Electrical specification standards for serial transmission RS Recommended Standard Baud rate The rate at which the data is sent which must be matched for all parties ASCII American standard code for information interchange ANSI American national standards institute 10 1 SERIAL LINKS RS232 PORT1 PINs used 187 to 192 The RS232 PORT is located just above the middle set of control terminals RS232 PORT1 It is a female 4 way FCC 68 type socket PORT1 COMMS LINK This port can be used in 2 ways R SERIAL LINKS 2 5232 PORT1 3 RS232 PORT1 3 187 PORT1 BAUD RATE 1 For PARAMETER EXCHANGE with other devices RS232 PORT1 188 PORT1 FUNCTION a From another computer or drive in ASCII b To another computer or drive in ASCII c To another computer or printer in the form of a text list of display windows and their parameters R5232 PORTI 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE 4 This function may be used to keep records and files of parameter settings or allow the transfer of parameter settings from an old control board to a new one RS232 PORT1 3 REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 There is also an option to select ASCII COMMS in 188 PORT1 FUNCTION to implement a full duplex ANSI communications protocol for use with a host computer or for interface with a PC based configuration tool The sub menu for this function is PORT1 COM
453. ng factor AOP1 T10 SETUP 251 AOP1 DIVIDER PINs 251 254 257 179 Divides the GET FROM signal PARAMETER source by a signed factor RANGE DEFAULT PIN DIVIDER 3 0000 1 0000 251 This factor is normally set to provide a maximum amplitude of 10V for the terminal signal voltage The PL X default 100 00 voltage is 10 00V Hence a dividing factor of 1 000 gives 10 00V amplitude for 100 00 signals This factor is arranged as a divider function to allow high gains if required by dividing by numbers less than 1 0000 This scaling takes place prior to the addition of an offset in the next window 13 4 2 2 AOPX SETUP AOP1 2 3 Offset AOP1 T10 SETUP 252 AOP1 OFFSET PINs 252 255 258 252 AOP1 OFFSET 0 00 Sets the level of bi polar offset PARAMETER to be added to the final signal Note 100 00 is equivalent to 10 00V Changing the divider factor will not affect the offset value 13 4 2 3 AOPX SETUP AOP1 2 3 Rectify mode enable RANGE DEFAULT PIN AOP1 OFFSET 100 0096 0 00 252 AOP1 T10 SETUP 253 AOP1 RECTIFY EN PINs 253 256 259 Allows the output mode to be PARAMETER rectified when enabled RANGE DEFAULT AOP1 RECTIFY EN ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 13 4 2 4 AOPX SETUP AOP1 2 3 Make output GET FROM source connection AOP1 T10 SETUP GET FROM Defines t
454. nnect UIP ANALOG GOTO 63 SPEED REF 2 400 Block Disconnect UIP DIGITAL OP1 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 400 Block Disconnect UIP DIGITAL OP2 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 325 UIP2 VAL 1 0 01 96 Pus 552 MULTIFUN5 MODE C O SWITCH or JUMPER 326 UIP2 LO VAL 1 0 00 96 NUES 399 UIP9 THRESHOLD 6 000 VOLTS ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 250 larm OP RECTIFY DISABLED AOP1 T10 SETUP 4 251 1 DIVIDER 1 0000 252 AOP1 OFFSET 0 00 253 AOP1 RECTIFY DISABLED 228 Menu List GET FROM 715 SPD FBK UNF JUMPER 3 4 2 711 SETUP 4 GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 254 AOP2 DIVIDER 1 0000 na GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 255 AOP2 OFFSET 0 00 JUMPER 4 4 256 AOP2 RECTIFY DISABLED n GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect FROM 123 TOTALSPD REF MN GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 712 SETUP 4 JUMPER 5 4 257 AOP3 DIVIDER 1 0000 fetes GET FROM 400 Block Disconnect 258 AOP3 OFFSET 0 00 96 GOTO 400 Block Disconnect 259 AOP3 RECTIFY
455. nnected e g armature current loop Application blocks however are only functioning when their output is connected using a GOTO DIAGNOSTICS 2 See 13 2 1 Key features of GOTO window R ANALOG MONITOR 3 The diagnostics menu is provided for monitoring the important parameters within the permanently functioning blocks as listed in this menu R DIAGNOSTICS 2 DIGITAL IO MONITOR 3 The Application and some other block outputs are all gathered together in the BLOCK OP MONITOR For most blocks the monitoring points are also R DIAGNOSTICS 2 found within the block menus themselves BLOCK OP MONITOR 3 Also there are some less important parameters that 5 to SU be found in R DIAGNOSTICS 2 their block menu rather than the diagnostics 169 EL1 2 3 RMS MON menu Note When you travel right by tapping the right key in the diagnostics menu you will eventually come to the end of a branch which will display the parameter to be monitored The UP key hops to the end of the branch above and the DOWN key hops to the end of the branch below giving rapid access to the monitored parameters within each sub menu It also provides a reminder that you are not in a parameter changing menu where this branch hopping feature is not available DIAGNOSTICS menu PIN number range 123 to 170 The diagnostics menu provides a monitoring facility for all the main drive parameters ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 iB DIAGNOSTICS aa GS 122
456. nstant in milliseconds FLD WK FB DRV ms 10 to 5000 ms 100 107 This affects the armature voltage overshoot when accelerating rapidly through base speed An increasing ratio of 107 FLD WK FB DRV ms parameter to 108 FLD WK FB INT ms parameter tends to reduce overshoots A ratio of unity has no affect and a ratio of 3 or more tends to instability The absolute values of the 2 parameters have only a 2 order effect on the response 6 9 6 6 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening feedback integral time constant PIN 108 FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 108 FLD WK FBK INT ms Sets the feedback integral time PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN constant in milliseconds FLD WK FBK INT ms 10 to 5000 ms 100 108 This affects the armature voltage overshoot when accelerating rapidly through base speed An increasing ratio of 107 FLD WK FB DRV ms parameter to 108 FLD WK FB INT ms parameter tends to reduce overshoots A ratio of unity has no affect and a ratio of 3 or more tends to instability The absolute values of the 2 parameters have only a 2 order effect on the response 6 9 6 7 FLD WEAKENING MENU Spillover armature voltage 109 FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 109 SPILLOVER AVF 109 SPILLOVER AVF 100 0096 Sets armature voltage at PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN which field weakening begins SPILLOVER AVF 96 to 100 of rated AV 100 0096 109 Note The rated armature voltage is set in the CALIB
457. nt ventilation Alternatively the supply of cooling air may be obtained from outside and ducted to the enclosure 6 6 Venting summary Ensure a clean un interruptible supply of cool filtered air is available for the PL X and that the exhaust air is adequately and safely disposed of Use the venting kit to keep the hot exhaust air separate from the cooling input air within the enclosure Ensure the cooling air is available at the top and bottom of the unit The PL X will survive running at high ambient temperatures but possibly at the expense of its potential lifespan Observe good engineering practice and keep all the components within the enclosure as cool as possible consistent with avoiding condensation For installations subjected to high ambient temperatures consider the use of air conditioning to achieve these requirements 8 PL X275 980 6 6 1 Diagram of air flow This diagram shows a side view of a unit in an enclosure This is the recommended method for arranging the flow of cooling air The fan in the PL X will draw air into the top and bottom air intakes of the unit There are 2 air inlet filters mounted on the door One adjacent to the lower air intake of the unit and the other adjacent to the upper air intake of the unit Air Intake The exhaust air is exiting the enclosure via the venting kit assembly which is shown with the cowl fitted on the roof of the enclosure If this hot exhaust air is likely to raise
458. ntroduction and Technical Data General Technical Data Rating table Maximum continuous shaft ratings Model kW HP HP 100 100 Dimensions mm PL 2 quadrant at 460V at 460V at 500V Armature Field PLX 4 quadrant Current Amps force vented fv DC Amps WxH x D PL and PLX 5 5 6 6 7 5 12 8 216 x 289 x 174 PL and PLX 10 10 13 3 15 24 8 216 x 289 x 174 PL and PLX 15 15 20 20 36 8 216 x 289 x 174 PL and PLX 20 20 26 6 30 51 8 216 x 289 x 174 PL and PLX 30 30 40 40 72 8 216 x 289 174 fv PL and PLX 40 40 53 3 60 99 8 216 x 289 174 fv PL and PLX 50 50 66 6 75 123 8 216 x 289 174 fv PL and PLX 65 65 90 100 164 16 216 x 378 x 218 fv PL and PLX 85 85 115 125 205 16 216 x 378 x 218 fv PL and PLX 115 115 155 160 270 16 216 x 378 x 218 fv PL and PLX 145 145 190 200 330 16 216 x 378 x 218 fv PL and PLX 185 185 250 270 430 32 50 216 x 378 x 294 fv PL and PLX 225 225 300 330 530 32 50 216 x 378 x 294 fv PL only 265 265 350 400 630 32 50 216 x 378 x 294 fv Please also refer to Part 3 PL X 275 980 for extra details of frame 4 and 5 high power drives 3 3 1 Regenerative stopping with PL models Starred models PL 2 Quadrant models have electronic regenerative stopping See 6 5 2 STOP MODE RAMP Stop ramp time 56 3 3 2 Supply voltages required for all models The supplies provided must be suitable for the motor em
459. number 6 Record of applications manual modifications Manual Description of change Reason for change Paragraph Date Software Version reference version 3 01 Applications manual First public issue of applications manual March 3 01 31 2000 3 02 Update manual mods record no product changes manufacturing rationalisation N A June 3 02 2000 4 00 Add new blocks Comparators 1 4 Improved functionality 3 15 Aug 4 01 2000 4 00 Add new blocks C O Switch 1 4 Improved functionality 3 16 Aug 4 01 2000 4 01 No functional modifications Sept 4 01 2000 4 02 No functional modifications Dec 4 02 2000 4 03 No functional modifications Feb 4 01 2001 4 05 Hidden PIN 714 IN SLACK FLAG added Facilitate the control of 518 TENSION 3 7 July 4 05 ENABLE 2001 5 02 No functional modifications Note about using preset speed PINs as staging 3 9 Feb 5 02 posts and making EXOR gate with 3 10 3 2002 Multifunction block 5 12 No functional modifications Front page note about PLA unit Jan 5 12 2003 5 14 Summer channel 1 2 sub total Pin numbers Typo correction 3 2 Sept 5 14 transposed in manual 2004 70 APPLICATION BLOCKS 7 Record of application blocks bug fixes Manual Description of change Reason for change Paragraph Date Software Version reference version 3 01 Applications manual First public issue of applications manual March 3 01 2000 3 02 Applications manual N
460. o 2 2 3 nennen 12 Jud SUR veda ge ester E d ARRA M EUN E ERE CE INR EU 13 7 9 Lifting the Unit E 13 PEE hnnc 13 2 PL X275 980 2 Introduction These additional models have all the functionality as described in the PL PLX Digital DC Drive Product Manual They also have the option of being supplied as HV units that are able to accept AC supply voltages up to 690 Volts for motors with armatures of 750 Volts DC All models are available with the high current 3 phase supply terminals in standard top entry or bottom entry as an option Rating Table Nominal maximum continuous shaft ratings Model kW HP HP HP 100 100 Dimensions mm PL 2 quadrant at at at 500V at 750V Armature Field PLX 4 quadrant 460 460 690V AC Current Amps Suffix HV for 690 VAC Volt Volt HV models DC Amps Suffix BE for bottom entry 3 phase power WxH x D PL and PLX 275 275 370 400 600 650 32 50 253 700 x 350 PL and PLX 315 315 425 460 690 750 32 50 253 700 x 350 PL and PLX 360 360 485 520 780 850 32 50 253 700 x 350 PL and PLX 400 400 540 580 875 950 32 50 253 700 x 350 PL andPLX 440 440 590 640 970 1050 32 50 253 700 x 350 PL and PLX 520 520 700 760 1140 1250 64 506 x 700 x 350 PL and PLX 600 600
461. o 100 00 1 00 117 The signals being detected are total speed reference and speed feedback The input depends on the function total speed reference for standstill and total speed inputs prior to the normal ramp for zero reference start This speed level also sets the threshold for 120 AT ZERO SPD FLAG CHANGE PARAMETERS 115 6 10 5 ZERO INTERLOCKS Zero interlocks current level PIN 118 R ZERO INTERLOCKS 3 118 ZERO INTLK CUR 118 ZERO INTLK CUR eh 1 5096 Sets current 96 for the zero ref PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN start and standstill blocks ZERO INTLK CUR 96 0 00 to 100 0096 1 5096 118 6 10 6 ZERO INTERLOCKS At zero reference flag PIN 119 ZERO INTERLOCKS 3 119 ZERO REF FLAG Allows the total speed reference PARAMETER RANGE PIN zero status to be monitored AT ZERO REF FLAG HIGH at zero or LOW 119 Branch hopping facility to next window 6 10 7 ZERO INTERLOCKS At zero speed flag PIN 120 ZERO INTERLOCKS 3 120 AT ZERO SPD FLAG Allows the zero speed PARAMETER RANGE PIN status to be monitored AT ZERO SPD FLAG HIGH at zero or LOW 120 Branch hopping facility to adjacent windows 6 10 8 ZERO INTERLOCKS At standstill flag PIN 121 ZERO INTERLOCKS 3 p 121 AT STANDSTILL 777 Allows the standstill function PARAMETER RANGE PIN status to be monitored AT STANDSTILL HIGH at standstill or LOW 121 This flag operates irrespective of the state of 115 STANDSTI
462. o changes June 3 02 2000 4 00 SUMMER 1 Ch1 Ch2 divider and sign The dividers and signs for Ch1 are transposed 3 2 3 4 7 8 Sept 4 01 with those for Ch2 NOW OK 2000 4 01 2 3 No bugs recorded See main manual 4 02 3 4 4 05 No bugs recorded See main manual June 4 05 2001 to 5 01 5 02 No bugs recorded See main manual June 5 02 2002 5 15 No bugs recorded Nov 09 5 21 This record only applies to application blocks Please refer also to the product manual for other bug fixes 8 Changes to product since manual publication Any new features that affect the existing functioning of the APPLICATIONS BLOCKS in the unit that have occurred since the publication of the manual will be recorded here using an attached page 08 03 11 Bardac Corporation 40 Log Canoe Circle Stevensville MD 21666 USA International 410 604 3400 Toll Free 888 ON SPEED Facsimile 410 604 3500 Email info bardac com Ba cl www bardac com dri ve 5 1 Bardac drives PL PLX Digital DC Drive Part 3 High Power Modules HG502571 Mar 2011 V5 15h Part 1 Basic Product Manual Part 2 Application Blocks Part 3 High Power Modules PLX275 980 1 Bardac M drives TE This manual should be read in conjunction with the PL PLX Digital DC Drive Manual Part 1 Important See section 2 in main PL PLX Digital DC Drive Manual for WARNINGS 1 Table of contents 1 Table Di euius
463. o vots 4 20020 60 00V s RPs 6 1 9 CALIBRATION Speed feedback type PINS QUICKSTART 0 1 2 3 4 0 AVF R P S 6 1 10 1 ENCODER SCALING Quadrature enable PIN10 O 1 Disabled 10 R PIS 6 1 10 2 ENCODER SCALING Encoder lines PINTI 1 6000 1000 12 CALIBRATION Rated armature volts PIN 18 QUICK START 0 1000 0 V 18 CALIBRATION MOTOR 1 or 2 select PIN 20 R 622 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp output monitor PIN21 m00 00 0 00 21 623 RUN MODE RAMPS Forward up time PIN22 0 1 6000s 100 22 R 6 2 4 RUNMODERAMPS Forwarddowntime PIN23 A 0 1 6000s 100 23 R 6 2 5 RUN MODE RAMPS Reverse up time 24 0 1 600 0s 10 0 24 626 RUN MODE RAMPS Reverse down time PIN 25 0 1 6000s 100 25 627 RUNMODERAMPS Rampinput PIN26 105 005 0 00 26 6 28 RUN MODE RAMPS Forward minimum speed PIN27 0 10500 0 00 27 629 RUN MODE RAMPS Reverse minimum speed PIN 28 O 105 00 0 00 28 62 0 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp automatic preset enable PIN29 o 1 Enabed 29 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp external preset enable PIN 30 o 1 Disabled 30 6 2 12 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp preset value PIN31 300 00 0 00 31 62 43 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp S profile 32 62 4 RUNMODERAMPS Ramphold enable PIN33 Disabed 33 6 2 15 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramping flag threshold PIN34 0 0 100 00 0 50 934
464. o zero Also it may be useful to have 6 7 7 1 SPEED ADAPTION Low break point 74 set to 0 2 6 7 7 3 SPEED ADAPTION Low breakpoint proportional gain PIN 76 set low 5 00 to minimise the effects of tacho noise at the stopping point See also 6 10 8 1 Low speed performance 6 5 2 STOP MODE RAMP Stop ramp time 56 R STOP MODE RAMP 3 56 STOP RAMP TIME Sets the 100 0 down ramp PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN time in normal stop mode STOP RAMP TIME 0 1 to 600 0 secs 10 0 secs 56 A standard 4 quadrant drive can motor and brake in both forward and reverse It can also stop very quickly by returning mechanical rotational energy to the supply It does this by effectively using the motor as a generator and the supply as a load to dump the energy in A standard 2 quadrant drive can only motor in the forward direction and cannot regenerate when stopping Selected models in the PL 2 quadrant range have a special feature which allows them to regenerate when stopping This feature not only saves considerable amounts of energy but also eliminates the requirement for dynamic braking resistor systems See 3 3 1 Regenerative stopping with PL models 6 5 3 STOP MODE RAMP Stop time limit PIN 57 STOP MODE RAMP 3 57 STOP TIME LIMIT 57 STOP TIME LIMIT 7 60 0 SECS Sets the max time limit before PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN contactor drop out in stop mode STOP TIME LIMIT 0 0 to 60
465. ock Disconnect 40055 5555 ee thee rene ee ER 171 1 3 2 6 Hidden parameters oor doe e ora e Eee vr ese ee tee ae 171 13 2 7 CONFIGURATION ENABLE GOTO 0 0 0 02222 172 13 3 CONFIGURATION UNIVERSAL 5 172 13 3 1 UNIVERSAL INPUTS Block IH nemen sess rennen nan 174 13 4 CONFIGURATION ANALOG 5 0 178 13 4 1 ANALOG OUTPUTS AOP4 larm output rectify enable 250 178 13 4 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS AOP1 2 3 4 SETUP 0 178 13 4 3 ANALOG OUTPUTS Scope output select 260 2 2 2 180 13 5 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL 5 180 13 5 1 Using DIP inputs for encoder signals isses mnes mene nen nns 180 13 5 2 DIGITAL INPUTS DIPX SETUP iced cede betes duet ac e E readies si 181 13 5 3 DIGITAL INPUTS RUN INPUT SETUP sisse se rere an 182 13 6 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL 5 183 13 6 1 DIGITAL IN OUTPUTS DIOX rises serre anna 183 13 7 CONFIGURATION DIGITAL 5 186 1
466. ode Select PIN 42 Rev min Ramp Preset Value gate RUN MODE RAMP And JOG CRAWL SLACK Run mode ramp Monitor PIN 21 PIN 34 Ramping Flag Threshold Ramping Flag output PIN 31 Ramp Preset Value input PIN 30 Ramp Ext Preset Permanent action in run mode momentary action at commencement of Jog PIN 29 Ramp Auto Preset System Reset Pulse PIN 720 PIN 43 Jog Slack Operating function JOG MODE SELECT T19 START T33 IP level JOG T32 IP level Ramp input Total value Applied ramp time Ramp PIN 689 Contactor state Stopped low low low reference Stop ramp time OFF In Jog flag Stopped high low low reference Stop ramp time PIN 714 Running low high low reference Run mode ramp In Slack fla Slack 1 takeup low high high ref slack1 Jog slack ramp Slack 2 takeup high high high ref slack2 Jog slack ramp Time Also in Speed Control Jog speed 1 low low high Jog speed 1 Jog slack ramp Jog speed 2 high low high Jog speed 2 Jog slack ramp Crawl high high low Crawl speed Run mode ramp PIN 65 MOde RAMP AUTO PRESET RAMP EXT PRESET RUN MODE RAMP action JOG MODE RAMP action 1 DISABLED DISABLED Held at zero when stopped Held at zero when stopped Starts from zero Starts from zero 2 DISABLED ENABLED Held at PRESET VALUE Held at PRESET VALUE when
467. olts defined on the motor dataplate The armature volts is approximately proportional to the motor speed Example A motor rated at 400 volts 2000 rpm is required to run at a maximum speed of 1000 rpm Therefore 200 volts will be the rated armature volts at 1000 rpm This represents 100 speed Note At low speeds be aware of heat dissipation in the motor at full torque Use force venting of the motor if necessary If desired maximum rpm is higher than the base rpm then implement field weakening the CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD CONTROL menu You must however verify that your motor and load are rated for rotation above base speed Failure to do so may result in mechanical failure with disastrous consequences In this mode the rated armature volts is usually set to the dataplate value in order to fully exploit the motor ratings Further speed increase is provided by field weakening and hence the armature voltage remains clamped at the max rated value This is referred to in the Field weakening menu as the spillover voltage 6 1 16 CALIBRATION EL1 2 3 rated AC volts PIN 19 QUICK START CALIBRATION 3 ge 19 EL1 2 3 RATED AC H 19 EL1 2 3 RATED AC R 415 0 VOLTS Enter the 3 phase AC supply PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN volts connected to EL1 2 3 EL1 2 3 RATED AC O to 1000 0 VOLTS 415 0 VOLTS 19 Note the actual AC volts may be monitored See 7 7 DIAGNOSTICS EL1 2 3 RMS MON PIN 169 The SUPPLY PHASE LOSS alarm uses this parameter to
468. oming parameter PARAMETER for use within the unit REF XC SLV RATIO 3 0000 1 0000 189 Note In SLAVE mode when data is received it initiates an immediate transmit of its own GETFROM data 10 3 2 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange slave sign PIN 190 REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 190 REF XC SLV SIGN RANGE DEFAULT PIN Used to invert the incoming PARAMETER parameter REF XC SLV SIGN NON INVERT or INVERT NON INVERT 190 Note In SLAVE mode when data is received it initiates an immediate transmit of its own GETFROM data 10 3 3 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange slave monitor PIN 191 REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 191 REF XC SLAVE MON 191 REF XC SLAVE MON 0 00 RANGE PIN Monitors the RS232 port 1 PARAMETER incoming data in both modes REF XC SLAVE MON 300 00 191 In MASTER mode the receive channel still accepts data E g A MASTER unit can borrow a SLAVE unit block 10 3 4 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange master monitor PIN 192 192 REF XC MASTER MN REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 192 REF XC MASTER MN 0 00 RANGE PIN Monitors the outgoing data PARAMETER prior to RS232 port 1 transmit REF XC MASTER MN 300 00 192 Note In MASTER mode the unit initiates transmission In SLAVE mode transmission is initiated by reception 10 3 5 REFERENCE EXCHANGE Reference exchange master GET FROM REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 GET FR
469. omp monitor FIN520 30000 0 00 52 E a a a MENGE ee ID 39 3 PRESET SPEED 1158 PINS24 2 PRESET SPEED Digital input 2 525 25 APPLICATION BLOCKS Paragraph 93 394 94 94 394 394 394 394 p 1 3102 3402 3103 3403 3 10 2 sus 3 10 2 55 s02 sss 3 10 2 3 10 3 3192 _ 163 788 3413 414 3 11 5 3 11 6 3 11 7 3 11 7 3 12 2 3 12 3 3 12 2 3 12 3 3 13 2 3 13 3 ELEM 3 14 2 Menu Description PRESET SPEED Digital input 3 MSB PIN 526 PRESET SPEED Value for PIN 527 PRESET SPEED Value for 001 PIN 528 PRESET SPEED Value for 010 PIN 529 PRESET SPEED Value for 011 PIN 530 PRESET SPEED Value for 100 PIN 531 PRESET SPEED Value for 101 PIN 532 PRESET SPEED Value for 110 PIN 533 PRESET SPEED Value for 111 534 MULTI FUNCTION 1 Function mode 1 PIN 544 MULTI FUNCTION 1 Output select 1 PIN 545 MULTI FUNCTION 2 Function mode 2 PIN 546 MULTI FUNCTION 2 Output select 2 PIN 547 MULTI FUNCTION Function mode PIN 548 MULTI FUNCTION 3 Output select 3 PIN 549 MULTI FUNCTION 4 Function mode 4 PIN 550 MULTI FUNCTION 4 Output select 4 PIN 551 MULTI FUNCTION 5 Function mode 5 PIN 552 MULTI FUNCTION 5 Output select 5 P
470. on input and the diameter are divided by the factor entered here 3 7 18 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torqe memory select 516 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 516 TORQUE MEM SEL Selects an external torque PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN source TORQUE MEM INPUT TORQUE MEM SEL ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 516 This is useful if the torque is required to be held at a memorised value while the input speeds are not available at the levels required to provide a calculated output Eg During a reel changeover sequence The memorised value may be obtained using a sample and hold See 3 10 APPLICATION BLOCKS MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 3 7 19 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Torque memory input PIN 517 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 517 TORQUE MEM INPUT 517 TORQUE MEM INPUT 0 0096 Sets the input value for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN 516 TORQUE MEM SELect TORQUE MEM INPUT 300 00 0 00 517 This is useful if the torque is required to be held at a memorised value while the input speeds are not available at the levels required to provide a calculated output Eg During a line stopping sequence The memorised value may be obtained using a sample and hold See 3 10 APPLICATION BLOCKS MULTI FUNCTION 1 to 8 3 7 20 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Tension enable PIN 518 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 518 TENSION ENABLE Selects the torque reference or PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the prevailing current limit TENSION ENABLE ENABLED or DISABLED ENABLED 51
471. one group of 8 way bit packed logic value GET FROMs 1 word Any legal PL X parameter is available for selection as a target by each one of 8 GOTOs 1 word each one group of 8 way bit packed logic value GOTOs 1 word 2 The PL X GOTO conflict checker automatically checks to see if the GOTO connections are accidently configured by the user to another PL X GOTO 3 Reconfiguring the FIELDBUS for any PL X without stopping the master or other PL X units is possible 4 The FIELDBUS configuration for each PL X is held within the unit itself and is also retained in the parameter exchange file 3 FIELDBUS configurations can be saved in each PL X by using the 3 recipe pages 13 13 CONFIGURATION DRIVE PERSONALITY PIN numbers used 677 to 680 This menu is used to modify or monitor various DRIVE PERSONALITY 3 aspects of the PL X personality 680 larm BURDEN OHMS CONFIGURATION DRIVE PERSONALITY 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY PASSIVE MOTOR SET 4 1 PASSIVE MOTOR SET contains all the windows used by the CHANGE PARAMETERS DRIVE PERSONALITY 3 reduced menu in ascending PIN order to set the 677 RECIPE PAGE passive reduced values for motor 1 or 2 2 RECIPE PAGE is used to set the target page for a PARAMETER SAVE operation There are 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY 3 separate pages that each allow a total instrument to 678 MAX CUR RESPONSE be stored To re call any page requires the appropriate power up reset choice 3 MAX CUR RESPONSE allows a super fast curr
472. ons 14 Installation Note B1 B2 Fan supply is 110V AC 50VA for PL X185 265 and 240V AC 100VA for PL X 275 980 circuit breaker L3 L2 O Isolator WARNING Do not allow coil supply to be i 3 phase externally interrupted otor Retro fit relay logic is blower often the main culprit AC1 rated main main contactor contact coil Control supply dirty earth Use DC semiconductor fuse for contactor regen coil supply applications 110V AC AC Control O Supply Inputs 110 240V or armature e p2pspapopop ua pipers dl Symbolic connection block TERMINALS 1 12 FUNCTION Zero reference interlock Motorised Pot decrease Total Speed Reference Motorised Pot Increase Speed Feedback o a wn wn OV Terminal Speed Reference Speed ref Current ref Lower Current Clamp Main Upper Current Clamp Motorised Pot Preset Total Current Demand OV Terminal Spare input Spare input Feedback encoder Feedback encoder Jog Speed Select co Seas For Torque control enter Torque ref into T6 0 10V For speed control Protective clean earth link T6 to 10V on T27 10K speed pot cw Ramp Hold Current Clamp Select Terminals shown on the top edge are located on the lower level power board B1 B2 on top edge of 185 225 265 models TERMINALS 13 24 FUNCTION Zero Speed Ramping flag mem N 5665 aja
473. ons REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 4 192 REF XC MASTER This function could of course be implemented by using an analogue signal connection between the drives However if the system requires greater speed and accuracy then this method may be employed TRANSMIT Initiated by the PL X in Master mode or by receiving data in SLAVE mode See 10 1 1 RS232 PORT1 Connection pinouts M for details of the transmit receive connections aster Getfrom Monitor PORT 1 Daisy chain When using more than 2 units i 192 connect RS232 PORT 1 external terminal block to separate the transmit and receive connections E g from MASTER transmit to SLAVE1 receive and from SLAVE1 transmit to SLAVE 2 receive etc The last SLAVE transmit Slave Ratio Sign Ref exch can connect to the MASTER receive if desired monitor Slave PIN 191 PIN 189 PIN 190 Goto With 2 units the MASTER may use spare SLAVE blocks Send an input and receive the output For information about transmission errors see 8 1 11 15 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Bad reference exchange RECEIVE In SLAVE mode receiving data triggers an immediate transmission sequence Multi Drive Digital speed locking Daisy chain using reference exchange and encoder feedback for each drive When using this for digital speed accuracy it is important that the remaining analogue inputs do not inject small errors into the loop when they are dormant See 6 7 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED
474. op ramp OFF Stopped high low low reference Stop ramp OFF Running low high low reference Run mode ramp ON Slack 1 takeup low high high ref slack 1 Jog slack ramp ON Slack 2 takeup high high high ref slack 2 Jog slack ramp ON Jog speed 1 low low high Jog speed 1 Jog slack ramp ON Jog speed 2 high low high Jog speed 2 Jog slack ramp ON Crawl high high low Crawl speed Run mode ramp ON This table shows when the STOP MODE RAMP is applied Contactor Stop mode Control Ramp time Ra PIN 56 Contactor drop Out Stop mode TIMER Ramp time Control To speed enable Enable PIN 58 Control Live delay logic control block gh PIN 131 Speed Feedback Rect 86 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 5 1 1 Block diagram of contactor control PIN 120 PIN 116 Zero speed Zero ref flag Start enable Total speed Ref ref prior to the Run Mode Ramp Zero ref start To current control logic control logic PIN 131 ZERO PIN 118 Interlock 21 current level Feedback PIN 123 Standstill and position lock PIN 121 At Reference control logic S still flag To firing ccts PIN 117 PIN 119 PIN 115 PIN 122 Zero interlocks Zero ref flag Standstill Zero speed Speed level enable lock CONTACTOR CONTROL INTERNAL zero interlock The contactor RUN control relay has PIN 308 a 24V coil with a 100mS hardware ANDED off delay The RUN coil is only PIN 305 energised with CSTOP at 24V
475. opening the field circuit Failure to observe this warning may cause flashover of the field circuit and result in damage to the system CHANGE PARAMETERS 107 6 9 1 FIELD CONTROL Block diagram FIELD Arm Voltage Feedback PIN 107 conditioning 2 o PIN 101 Prop PIN 102 Integral Gain PIN 99 Field enable Field angle of advance Monitor PIN 146 Field active monitor PIN 147 Field Current error amp gt PIN 109 Spillover Max Arm Voltage Field delay and quench PIN PIN 104 PIN 105 106 Weakening 100 Fid wk Prop Fid wk Int Fld wk deriv Enable Volts96 4 F ms TC i PIN 103 OP r 1 Voltage output clamp This is an open loop setting of the field bridge firing angle allowing the DC output voltage to be set between O to 9096 of the incoming supply voltage E g for an AC supply of 400V the 9096 output voltage is 360V DC Note if the AC supply varies then the field output voltage will vary in proportion Also if the field resistance changes then the resulting output current will change Quench Del Standby En PIN PIN 113 111 If you know the rated field voltage you can set 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 96 clamp parameter value in this menu Adjust the field output voltage to the dataplate value as a 96 of the applied AC supply Note Please ensure that 4 RATED FIELD AMPS is sufficiently high to force the 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 96 clamp into ope
476. or determines the time remaining before automatic reduction of the current limit commences A 150 limit is available until the integrator becomes full Then the current limit is linearly reduced in this block from 15096 towards PIN 82 Note The limit reduction always starts from 15096 and ramps down towards 82 96 TARGET See 6 8 3 2 CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload ramp time PIN 83 If the load continues to require current in excess of PIN 82 level then it will remain limited to PIN 82 level NOTE this implies the speed loop is not getting the current it demands and hence there will be speed error If the load subsequently falls beneath PIN 82 level then the internal integrator starts to de integrate back to its empty state Ready for next overload The overload available will start increasing However full de integration is required before the full overload capacity is once more available Note For small overloads the time prior to limit reduction can be very long but the integrator is still filling up Hence after a long small overload any excursion to the 15096 limit will very quickly precipitate a reduction 6 8 3 1 1 Diagram showing O LOAD 96 TARGET set to 10596 DWELL TIME 25 secs if If larm 127 5096 then time If larm 116 25 then time larm 150 0096 See formula to limit reduction 50 secs to limit reduction 100 secs 83 0 LOAD a 82 TARGET NE 2 RATED ARM AMPS RAMP TIME set to 105 0096 Equivalent
477. ordingly Following the procedures outlined will normally be required for the drive system to comply with the European regulations some systems may require different measures Installers must have a level of technical competence to correctly install Although the drive unit itself does not require control of RF emissions it has been designed and tested to comply with the most stringent emissions and immunity requirements on all ports 14 11 1 3 phase power supply port The 3 phase power supply port is subject to alternative guidelines as described below Compliance with emissions limits on this port may or may not be required depending on the environment If required then compliance can be achieved by fitting a separate filter unit contact supplier for details EN61800 3 specifies 2 alternative operating environments These are the domestic 1 environment industrial 274 environment There are no limits specified for conducted or radiated emissions in the Industrial environment hence it is usual for the filter to be omitted in industrial systems Definition of an industrial environment Includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes In order to meet mains conducted emissions limits on this port for the 15 environment a separate filter is required Please refer to supplier for a suitable filter to meet the Class A EN 61800
478. ot employed T16 digital input is made free for other uses 68 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 1 11 CALIBRATION IR compensation PIN 14 R CALIBRATION 3 14 IR COMPENSATION Sets compensation of the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN AVF signal due to IR drop IR COMPENSATION 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 14 This parameter is used when armature voltage speed feedback type is selected or in field weakening mode Note Speed is proportional to the back EMF of the motor Back EMF AVF IR drop Hence when the armature current is high the IR drop is high At zero armature current the IR drop is zero To set this parameter with AVF feedback arrange if possible to apply a significant load change to the system Slowly increment the parameter until the load change has minimum effect on the speed holding Alternatively calculate the parameter using the formula below and initially enter this value 14 IR COMPENSATION 0 00 IR COMPENSATION RATED MOTOR AMPS X Armature resistance X 100 RATED ARM VOLTS Note Excessive compensation may lead to instability See also 6 9 6 FIELD CONTROL FLD WEAKENING MENU for field weakening systems 6 1 12 CALIBRATION Field current feedback trim PIN 15 CALIBRATION 3 15 FIELD CUR FB TRIM 3 Sets a positive trim factor for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the field current feedback FIELD CUR FB TRIM 1 0000 to 1 1000 1 0000 15 This trim factor may be applied dur
479. ote 50 MP MAX CLAMP and 51 MP MIN CLAMP will overide the output value if it lies outside the clamps 6 4 8 MOTORISED POT RAMP MP memory boot up PIN 54 MOTORISED POT RAMP 54 MP MEMORY BOOT UP Selects the preset output value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN on control supply application MP MEMORY BOOT UP ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 54 A motorised pot is a device that may be used to remember its setting in the event of a power loss DISABLED Used to set the value of the output on control supply power up to 53 MP PRESET VALUE ENABLED Used to memorise the value of the output during loss of the control supply and preset the output with this value on power up of the control supply CHANGE PARAMETERS 85 6 5 CHANGE PARAMETERS STOP MODE RAMP STOP MODE RAMP 3 60 DROP OUT DELAY R STOP MODE RAMP 3 56 STOP RAMP TIME STOP MODE RAMP 3 57 STOP TIME LIMIT STOP MODE RAMP 3 58 LIVE DELAY MODE R STOP MODE RAMP 3 59 DROP OUT SPEED PIN numbers range 56 to 60 This menu allows setting of the contactor drop out behaviour CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 STOP MODE RAMP See 6 7 1 SPEED CONTROL Block diagram 6 5 1 STOP MODE RAMP Block diagram Operating JOG MODE START T33 JOG T32 Ramp input Applied ramp Contactor function SELECT T19 IP level IP level Total value time state IP level Stopped low low low reference St
480. ound in the PRESET SPEED application block for example CONFIGURATION 189 13 8 1 Connecting PINs with different units When using the available methods of connection it is perfectly feasible indeed likely that an output PIN scaled in one set of units will be linked to another PIN normally scaled in a different set of units E g The output of analogue input terminal scaled in may be connected to the ramp parameter called FORWARD UP TIME which is scaled in seconds This is no problem for the system because when it is processing the blocks it works in an internal system of pure numbers This allows PINs of any type of units and scaling range to be inter connected To do this it follows a simple set of rules The internal pure number range is a 5 digit number equal to 30 000 counts All linear parameters work with numbers that lie within this range 13 8 1 1 Connecting linear values with different units The pure number for any parameter can be found by stripping out the decimal point and the units 0 1 1 5 00 500 200 00 20 000 E g 60 DROP OUT DELAY range 0 1 to 600 0 seconds In this case the pure number range is 1 to 6000 59 DROP OUT SPEED range 0 00 to 100 00 In this case the pure number range is to 10 000 When a connection is made the pure number is transferred from the output to the input during processing If the pure number that arrives at a PIN lies outside the range of that PIN then it will automatically be cl
481. ource Page Page Page lock mode CHANGE PARAMETERS 57 6 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 CHANGE PARAMETERS 1 raro ooh de eeu 57 6 1 CHANGE PARAMETERS CALIBRATION 1001 senes esee esee 59 6 2 CHANGE PARAMETERS RUN MODE 5 0000 seen 71 6 3 CHANGE PARAMETERS JOG CRAWL SLACK 77 6 4 CHANGE PARAMETERS MOTORISED POT 000022222 2 81 6 5 CHANGE PARAMETERS STOP MODE sene enne nes 85 6 6 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED REF 5 2 90 6 7 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED 92 6 8 CHANGE PARAMETERS CURRENT 97 6 9 CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD 106 6 10 CHANGE PARAMETERS ZERO INTERLOCKS mese eese nene nnns 113 58 CHANGE PARAMETERS CHANGE PARAMETERS menu ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 There are a very large number of parameters that can be altered by the user All the alterable parameters have a factory default setting that in most cases will provide a perfectly workable solution and will not need altering One class of parameters that wil
482. ously shorted to OV Programmable Uni polar or Bi polar output mode Total Speed Reference Analogue Output 2 11 to 10V linear output for to 100 total speed reference Output current capability 5mA max Short circuit protection to OV AOP1 or 2 or 3 must not be simultaneously shorted to OV Total current demand Analogue output AOP3 T12 to 10V linear output for to 100 current demand Output current capability 5mA max Short circuit protection to OV AOP1 or 2 or 3 must not be simultaneously shorted to OV Programmable Unipolar or Bi polar output mode OV on T13 must be used for protective clean earth connection OV 13 Spare input Logic low below 2V high above Digital input DIP1 114 Marker input Logic low below 2V high above Digital input DIP2 T15 Encoder B train or sign Logic low below 2V high above Digital input DIP3 T16 Encoder A train Logic low below 2V high above 4V Digital input DIP4 117 Zero reference interlock Digital input DIO1 T18 This input selects an interlock that will prevent the main contactor from energising if the speed reference is not first returned to less than the 117 ZERO INTLCK SPD setting Jog mode select Digital input DIO2 T19 When low jog slack speed 1 is selected When high jog slack speed 2 is selected Ramp Hold Digital input DIO3 T20 If the input is high the RUN MODE RAMP output is held at the last value irrespective of the Ramped Reference
483. ow gain for small inputs Lower Current Clamp ve Analogue Input UIP5 T5 to 10V linear input for to 150 armature current clamp level Overvoltage protected to 50V Input impedance 100K Note When negative it operates as a clamp on the current demand generated by the speed loop When positive it drives the demand and ignores the speed loop Note a demand level cannot override a clamp level See also T21 Main Current Limit Upper Current Clamp ve Analogue Input UIP6 T6 10V linear input for to 150 armature current clamp level Overvoltage protected to 50V Input impedance 100K Note When positive it operates as a clamp on the current demand generated by the speed loop When negative it drives the demand and ignores the speed loop Note a demand level cannot override a clamp level See also T21 Motorised pot simulator preset value enable Digital Input UIP7 7 While this terminal is held high the motorised pot simulator is moved immediately to 0 00 default preset value When it is taken low the motorised pot simulator output moves according to the Increase Decrease inputs on terminals T8 T9 Motorised pot simulator Increase Digital input UIP8 8 Motorised pot simulator Decrease Digital input UIP9 79 Speed Feedback Analogue Output AOP1 T10 to 10V linear output for to 100 speed feedback Output current capability 5mA max Short circuit protection to OV AOP1 or 2 or 3 must not be simultane
484. ow hopping to the adjacent branch This removes the need to travel back to the previous level and allows rapid observation of multiple parameters Branch hopping also occurs anywhere there are two or more adjacent monitoring windows 5 1 5 Power up windows A few seconds after the control supply is applied the ENTRY MENU window is shown after a further brief pause with no keystokes two default DIAGNOSTIC summary windows are activated See 5 1 6 The control card interrogates the power chassis during power up to find out the model type This allows the transference of the control card to a different power chassis See 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 See also 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page 677 By tapping the right key you will enter the first of the menu levels of the menu tree PRESS RIGHT KEY FOR ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 CHANGE PARAMETERS 72 Tap the left key to return to the previous menu level Tap right key This number This number to proceed to shows the next shows which next menu menu level you menu level level will proceed to you are in 48 Menu tree structure 5 1 6 Default DIAGNOSTIC summary windows R SPD larm R 0 0 0 0000 Two default DIAGNOSTIC windows toggle every R Sref llim llim mode 0 150 150 0000 PRESS RIGHT KEY FOR ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 5 seconds The linear parameters
485. p enable PIN 174 25 139 146 CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD CONTROL 17 29 61 62 69 DRIVE TRIP 32 143 106 Field loss trip enable PIN 173 139 144 CHANGE PARAMETERS JOG CRAWL SLACK p CS 18 136 CHANGE PARAMETERS MOTORISED POT RAMP Missing pulse trip enable PIN 175 44 140 145 221 CHANGE PARAMETERS RUN MODE RAMPS 43 71 90 122 Overspeed delay time PIN 177 140 144 221 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED CONTROL 90 92 161 Reference exchange trip enable PIN 176 140 146 CHANGE PARAMETERS SPEED REF SUMMER 90 Speed feedback mismatch tolerance PIN 172 138 139 CHANGE PARAMETERS ZERO INTERLOCKS 113 147 Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 18 63 64 COMMISSIONING 65 137 145 Stall current level PIN 179 100 141 221 Stall time 180 erret ero tne a 141 Stall trip enable PIN 178 18 141 145 221 STALL TRIP 04000000 2 141 Trip monitors PINS 181 182 142 Trip reset enable PIN 183 143 221 ANALOG OUTPUTS AOP1 2 3 Dividing factor PINs 251 254 257 179 AOP1 2 3 Make output GET FROM source connection 179 AOP1 2 3 Offset PINs 252 255 258 179 AOP1 2 3 Rectify mode enable PIN
486. pe and observe both pulse trains for good phase holding and no interference Do this with the drive rotating to 10096 speed using AVF as the feedback source Note If a logic input with high noise immunity is required it is recommended to use a UIP See 6 1 10 CALIBRATION ENCODER SCALING for more information about encoder feedback CONFIGURATION 181 13 5 2 DIGITAL INPUTS DIPX SETUP T14 SETUP 4 DIGITAL INPUTS 3 DIP1 T14 SETUP 4 DIP1 T14 SETUP 4 310 DIP1 IP HI VALUE Pins used 310 to 317 DIP1 T14 SETUP 4 311 DIP1 IP LO VALUE DIP1 is shown in this menu list 13 5 2 1 DIPX SETUP DIP1 2 3 4 Input high value PINs 310 312 314 316 DIP1 T14 SETUP 4 310 DIP1 IP HI VALUE 310 DIP1 IP HI VALUE 0 0196 Sets the level of the value PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN selected by a high DIP1 input DIP1 IP HI VAL 300 0096 0 0196 310 Note You can make a simple AND gate by selecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO 13 5 2 2DIPX SETUP DIP1 2 3 4 Input low value PINs 311 313 315 317 DIP1 T14 SETUP 4 311 DIP1 IP LO VALUE 311 DIP1 IP LO VALUE 0 0096 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT DIP1 IP LO VALUE 300 0096 0 0096 Note You can make a simple OR gate by selecting this as the target PIN of a logical GOTO Sets the level of the value selected by a low DIPX input 13 5 2 3 DIPX SETUP DIP1 2 3 4 Make input value GOTO destinatio
487. ped out Motor unable to slow down fast enough 88 CHANGE PARAMETERS The configuration of the PL X power terminals using L1 2 3 for stack and EL1 2 3 for field and synchronisation is very versatile This allows the main contactor to be arranged in numerous ways 1 EL1 2 3 permanently energised with contactor on L1 2 3 gives very fast starting and allows the field to remain energised Required for dynamic braking or to prevent condensation in cold climates 2 EL1 2 3 and L1 2 3 energised with main contactor allows total electrical isolation of the motor 3 Main contactor on armature terminals for dynamic braking isolation of motor 4 L1 2 3 may be used at a very low voltage E g using drive as battery charger See 4 3 Main contactor wiring options 6 5 1 4 Precise stopping For very precise performance at the ramp end points e g stopping it is useful to be able to RESET the SPEED LOOP integrator during the ramping process By holding it in RESET during the ramping process there is no undesirable integral term history to intefere with the loop at the end of the ramp This RESET can be achieved by connecting a JUMPER from 35 RAMPING FLAG to 73 SPEED INT RESET See 13 2 4 JUMPER connections In addition ensure that there are no small demand signals entering the speed loop by disconnecting unwanted inputs to the SPEED REFERENCE SUMMER and setting 6 6 7 SPEED REF SUMMER Speed Current Reference 3 ratio PIN 67 t
488. pensation as low as possible compared with that required to make tension E g The torque required to overcome the losses are 10 of the torque required to provide the desired web tension Then a drift of 25 in the losses results in a tension error of 2 5 However if the torque required to overcome the losses is the same as the torque required to provide the desired web tension then a drift of 25 in the losses results in a tension error of 25 Also it will be much more difficult to estimate the absolute magnitude of the losses if they are large 32 APPLICATION BLOCKS Some systems require the tension of the web to be tapered according to the reel diameter This technique is used to prevent reel collapse or damage to delicate materials A taper control block is available for this function 3 6 APPLICATION BLOCKS TAPER TENSION CALC If the diameter calculation is held then it is still possible to connect to a hidden PIN 697 which contains the unheld diameter calculation Two other hidden PINs contain the rectified web and reel speeds 3 5 1 REEL DIAMETER CALC Block diagram Warning If due to the mechanical arrangement of the machine it is impossible to PIN 695 ied P achieve sufficiently low losses then a closed loop Rectified s Web speed pns system of tension control must be employed Hidden pin zs Unfiltered D b 4 Diameter Hidden pin This could be by dancing arm methods or a tension transducer loadcell feedback system
489. ployed Note The 3 phase Field and Armature supplies are input through separate terminals and may be at different levels if Main 3 phase 50 60Hz Any supply from 12 to 480V AC 10 for armature power Auxiliary 3 phase 50 6OHz desired See 14 9 1 Wiring diagram for AC supply to L1 2 3 different Any supply from 100 to 480V AC 10 for field Y SUpp y to EL1 2 3 E g Low voltage field Control 1 phase 50 60Hz They must however be in phase Any supply from 110 to 240V AC 10 This is required to power the PL X electronic circuits PL X 185 225 265 models also need 50VA 110V 50 60Hz ac fan supply PL X 650 980 frame 4 and 5 high power drives are available as HV versions for supplies up to 690V AC OUTPUT VOLTAGE RANGE Armature PLX and O to 1 2 times AC supply PL Oto 1 3 times AC supply Note 1 1 times AC supply is recommended if supply variations exceed 696 Field O to 0 9 times AC supply on auxiliary terminals EL1 EL2 EL3 OUTPUT CURRENT RANGE Armature O to 10096 continuous 15096 for 25 seconds for PLX Field programmable minimum to 10096 continuous with fail alarm Note There is a factory option to allow high inductance loads to be driven by the armature output Introduction and Technical Data 23 Control Circuits Control Action Speed Control Steady State Accuracy Protection Diagnostics Temperature Humidity Atmosphere
490. prevent the motor from operating when personnel are undertaking maintenance or when machine guards are open Electronic control is not accepted by safety codes to be the sole means of inhibition of the controller Always isolate the power source before working on the drive or the motor or load If the RUN input goes low at any point during the stopping process either heading for zero speed or during the delay period then the contactor will drop out straight away 30 Introduction and Technical Data Jog Digital input JOG T32 When the Jog Input is held high the drive jogs rotates slowly while requested to provided input Start T33 is low When the Jog Input is removed the drive will ramp down to zero obeying the Jog Slack Ramp time Jog speeds can be selected by input T19 See the description of the start input below for further information about the jog control See 6 3 5 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog mode select PIN 42 Start stop main contactor control Digital input START T33 When a high input is applied to this terminal the controller will operate provided there are no alarms the coast stop input T34 is already high the controller run input T31 is high and the Jog input is low When the input is removed the controller will perform a ramped stop to zero speed The rate of deceleration will be set according to the programmed stop ramp time The PLX models will regenerate if necessary to maintain the ramp rate So will the PL models that have the
491. process equipment are that apart from performing their intrinsic function they must interface with external systems The most common requirements are for 4 types of interface Analogue inputs able to accept linear bi polar reference or feedback signals Analogue outputs able to provide linear bi polar signals Digital inputs able to recognise logic levels using 24V logic Digital inputs for encoders signals of various amplitudes and type Digital outputs able to drive 24V relays lamps sensors etc System requirements are variable Some require a lot of one type of interface others a selection of all types The designers of the PL X series of drives have attempted to provide sufficient of all types to meet all conceivable requirements This has been achieved by making many of the terminals dual function The possible boundaries are as follows Up 17 digital inputs 8 analogue inputs 7 digital outputs 4 analogue outputs This is achieved by allowing the 8 analogue inputs to also be used as digital inputs and 4 digital outputs that can be independently programmed as inputs The analogue outputs do not usually need to be so numerous as software connections can be made by the user Even so 4 analogue outputs are available of which 3 are programmable The analogue outputs are individually short circuit protected to OV However they are not protected for simultaneous shorts 3 4 2 Digital inputs and outputs An important consideration
492. r lower PINs 138 139 Mechanical dimensions PL X 185 265 210 ETE 127 Mechanical dimensions PL X 5 50 208 DC KILOWATTS MON 170 134 Mechanical dimensions PL X 65 145 209 DIGITAL IO 25 131 PL X family cover dimensions 2 207 DIP1 to 4 and DIO1 to 4 digital input monitor PIN 163 131 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 17 47 48 149 150 153 160 163 183 164 168 196 218 226 DOP1 to 3 Control IPs digital monitor PIN 164 132 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL 17 47 149 EL1 2 3 RMS MON 169 Encoder RPM monitor PIN 132 Field active monitor PIN 147 Field current 96 monitor PIN 144 150 153 160 163 168 DRIVE PERSONALITY 196 199 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 42 47 58 Field current amps monitor 145 128 60 104 148 149 198 199 Field demand monitor PIN 143 128 Maximum current response PIN 678 21 27 97 198 Field firing angle of advance monitor PIN 146 108 129 PASSIVE MOTOR SET 70 196 FLD LOOP MONITOR sem Overload limit monitor PIN 140 RPM monitor PIN 130
493. r PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN clamp level for the calculator DIAMETER MIN 0 00 to 100 00 10 00 486 This value is also used as a scaling factor for the diameter calculation Result Web Reel X Dia min 3 5 6 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter calculation min speed PIN 487 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 487 DIA MIN SPEED 487 DIA MIN SPEED 5 00 If the web speed goes below PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN this 96 the calculation is held DIA MIN SPEED 0 00 to 105 0096 5 0096 487 3 5 7 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter hold enable PIN 488 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 488 DIAMETER HOLD N When high this logic input will PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN cause the calculation to hold DIAMETER HOLD ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 488 3 5 8 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter filter time constant PIN 489 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 489 DIA FILTER TC Sets the filter time constant for PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the diameter calculation DIA FILTER TC 0 00 to 200 00 SECS 5 00 SECS 489 This value applies a filter to the output to remove small transients in the raw calculation The difference between the input and output of the filter also provides a comparison measurement for the web break detector See 3 5 11 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter web break threshold PIN 492 34 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 5 9 REEL DIAMETER CALC Diameter preset enable PIN 490 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 490 DIAMETER PRESET Whe
494. r feedback There are 3 monitoring functions for all 16 alarms 1 An active monitor prior to the latch 2 A monitor of the latched status of the alarm 3 A displayed message showing which alarm caused the drive to shut down The displayed message will automatically appear whenever the drive is running and can be removed from the display by tapping the left key or starting the drive It may be re examined using the DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE menu The message will be memorised if the control supply is removed oS R MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE 3 2 R MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 171 SPD TRIP ENABLE MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 172 SPEED TRIP TOL R MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 173 FLD LOSS TRIP EN MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 174 DOP SCCT TRIP EN MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 175 MISSING PULSE EN MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 176 REF EXCH TRIP EN MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 177 OVERSPEED DELAY MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 R STALL TRIP MENU 3 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 181 ACTIVE TRIP MON MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 182 STORED TRIP MON MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 The PL X alarms have a delay timer associated with 183 EXT TRIP RESET them such that they only become latched if the fault condition persists for the whole of the delay period Values of this delay period are given for the individual alarms The quoted times are typical since the delay is implemented in microprocessor cycle time units which vary with microprocessor loading The arrival of the
495. r fuses secondary is floating fitted on the secondary of the transformer See note 5 The advantages of this method are 1 Only requires low cost easily available single phase transformer 2 The EL1 2 connections do not suffer any phase lags or leads because they are still connected as per standard schemes This is important because the synchronisation is sensed through EL 1 2 3 This scheme works equally well for step up or down transformers 4 The phase equivalence of EL1 2 3 must always relate to L1 2 3 5 The inrush current of the transformer will probably blow the semi conductor fuses Hence they should be fitted on the secondary of the transformer for EL2 3 HRC fuses should be fitted in the primary feeds 6 The field voltage required in the above example is 100 probably originally designed to be operated from a rectified 110V supply However with the ability to control the field current available within the PL X it is preferable to feed the field supply with a higher voltage e g 130V This provides the control loop with a supply margin in order to control more effectively WARNING The field to earth voltage of the motor must be rated for the voltage applied to EL2 4 See 6 1 16 CALIBRATION EL1 2 3 rated AC volts PIN 19 QUICK START This must be set to the lower of the two AC voltages which would be 130V AC in the above example WARNING 8 1 11 11 DRIVE TRIP MESSAGE Supply phase loss This detector may then be ineff
496. r to identify all ratings of the unit The power ratings and model type are also found here along with any product standard labels applicable to the unit 7 2 Semiconductor fuses WARNING All units must be protected by correctly rated semi conductor fuses Failure to do so will invalidate warranty For semi conductor fuses please refer to supplier Model Main fuses Main fuses Main fuses Main fuses PL 20 Max 121 121 121 121 PLX 40 480V AC 480V AC 690V AC 690V AC 50Hz AC 60Hz AC 50Hz AC 60Hz AC Standard Standard High Voltage High Voltage PL X275 1 170 000 1 170 000 810 000 770 000 PL X315 1 170 000 1 170 000 810 000 770 000 PL X360 1 170 000 1 170 000 810 000 770 000 PL X400 1 304 000 1 290 000 1 260 000 1 200 000 PL X440 1 304 000 1 290 000 1 260 000 1 200 000 PL X520 3 240 900 3 240 900 2 243 700 2 132 900 PL X600 3 240 900 3 240 900 2 243 700 2 132 900 PL X700 4 212 000 4 212 000 2 916 000 2 772 000 PL X800 4 694 400 4 694 400 2 916 000 2 772 000 PL X900 4 694 400 4 694 400 2 916 000 2 772 000 PL X980 4 694 400 4 694 400 2 916 000 2 772 000 10 PL X275 980 7 2 1 PL Models AC fuses for Standard supply voltage Up to 480V AC PL AC Fuses Bardac PART SIZE CURRENT MOUNTING DEPTH FERRAZ PART NUMBER AND REFERENCE No RATING A mm PL275KW 650A CH103
497. r zero speed shaft position lock In addition to the adjustable parameters there are 4 diagnostic monitoring flags 114 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 10 1 ZERO INTERLOCKS Block diagram PIN 120 Total speed 2 Ref ref prior n spee to the Run lag Rect E PIN 116 Zero ref Start enable To current control logic PIN 118 Zl current level Mode Ramp PIN 131 Speed Y Feedback Rect PIN 123 Total Speed Reference Rect PIN 117 Zero interlocks Speed level b 4 Standstill and position lock PIN 121 At S still flag To firing ccts PIN 115 PIN 122 Standstill Zero speed enable lock 4 control logic Allows the standstill function PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN to be enabled STANDSTILL ENBL ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 115 If enabled the standstill function will inhibit the stack firing when there is zero reference AND zero speed This parameter must be DISABLED for 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE operation 6 10 3 ZERO INTERLOCKS Zero reference start enable PIN 116 Allows the zero reference start PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN function to be enabled ZERO REF START ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED 116 6 10 4 ZERO INTERLOCKS Zero interlocks speed level PIN 117 Sets speed level for the zero PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN ref start and standstill blocks ZERO INTLK SPD 0 00 t
498. rate The JOG button operates as a JOG function when the drive is stopped START open and as the SLACK 1 take up function when the drive is running START closed With the STOP button held open no running button is operative JOG SLACK or START Basic application 41 4 4 ESSENTIAL pre start checks This is a summary of the essential parameters that should be checked prior to allowing power to the motor You must be able to put a tick against every section Failure to comply with these requirements may cause incorrect functioning or damage to the drive and or installation and will invalidate any warranty 4 4 1 POWER ENGINEERING You must be able to put a tick against every section 1 All external fuses must be of the correct rating and type The 1 rating must be less than the rating specified in the rating tables This includes main and auxiliary fuses See 14 3 Semiconductor fuse ratings 2 Check that the motor armature resistance is about 2 Ohms 1 over 360 deg rotation Check that the field resistance in Ohms field dataplate volts field dataplate current Look inside the motor terminal box to verify correct wiring 3 Check the 3 phase auxiliary supply phasing on ELI 2 3 equates to the phasing of the main stack supply on LI 2 3 and the 1 ph control supply T52 53 is correct 4 The drive and 3 phase supply current and voltage ratings should be compatible with the motor and load requirements Both armature
499. ration at the desired voltage under all conditions 4 RATED FIELD AMPS scaled 114 FIELD REFERENCE sets the demand for the field current control loop and 100 FIELD VOLTS OP operates as a clamp on the field bridge firing angle If the current demand is satisfied at a voltage output below the clamp level then the current loop will prevail 2 Current control The range of output voltage is the same in this mode as in the voltage output clamp mode however the control loop operates on the actual current flowing in the field and works to maintain this at the desired value Providing that the output voltage is not clamped by the 9096 natural limit or by 100 FIELD VOLTS OP 96 and is able to move around then the current delivered will always be controlled irrespective of supply and resistance changes This is the preferred control strategy Hence it is possible to operate with the field current control prevailing and the voltage 96 as a higher safety clamp or the voltage 96 clamp prevailing and the field current control as a higher safety level The back emf of a motor is a good linear representation of its speed This is significantly improved if the field current and hence flux is kept constant Hence with the field in current control mode AVF speed control accuracy is improved It is good practice in control engineering to minimise the error correction requirements of any loop hence having a current controlled field is also recommended when
500. rce PIN for the PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT connection to DOPX OP GET FROM PIN 000 to 720 400 connection is made here for the digital output block source It may be a linear or logic value After processing by the rectifier box it gets compared to lt DOP Digital USE the threshold The comparator output state HIGH or OP terminal LOW is then inverted or not inverted by the inverter mode box and becomes a 24V logic signal For comparing logic values always put 0 00 in the threshold window The comparator output is low for identical inputs 188 CONFIGURATION 13 7 1 5 Default connections for DOP1 2 3 DOPX Terminal Function Terminal Threshold Getfrom source GET FROM Pin DOP1 Zero speed T22 0 00 Low Zero speed flag PIN 120 DOP2 Ramping flag T23 0 0096 Low Ramping flag PIN 35 DOP3 Drive healthy T24 0 0096 Low Drive healthy flag PIN 698 13 7 1 6 DOP1 2 3 Internal output result PINs 682 3 4 The binary result of these outputs is available for internal use on PINs 682 DOP1 683 DOP2 684 DOP3 13 8 CONFIGURATION STAGING POSTS PIN number range 296 to 303 STAGING POSTS 3 These staging posts are like virtual wire wrap 303 ANALOG POST 4 posts CONFIGURATION STAGING POSTS 3 STAGING POSTS 296 DIGITAL POST 1 STAGING POSTS 3 297 DIGITAL POST 2 STAGING POSTS 3 mes 298 DIGITAL POST 3 96 DIGITAL POST STAGING POSTS 3 PIN 2 299 DIGITAL POST 4 Th
501. re you might overwrite the password when saving parameters from a different recipe page For this reason it is recommended that the same password is used in each page 1313 221 Recipe page block diagram PC running PL PILOT See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes Contains recipes DRIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM AND POWER CONTROL RS232 PORT1 ASCII COMMS to PL PILOT VOLATILE MEMORY This holds the working set of drive parameters and internal connections SAVE Os Recipe Page Recipe Page Recipe Page Recipe Page NORMAL RESET 2 KEY RESET 3 KEY RESET 4 KEY ROM RESET Non volatile memory Non volatile memory Non volatile memory Factory defaults Normally called With LOCK facility USER CALIBRATION RS232 PORT1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE to from host computer Recipe file in PC Recipe file in PC Recipe file in PC Hyperterminal Hyperterminal Hyperterminal Contains source Contains source Contains source Page Page Page lock mode 198 CONFIGURATION 13 13 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY Maximum current response 678 DRIVE PERSONALITY 3 678 MAX CUR RESPONSE When enabled this activates PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN a super fast current response MAX CUR RESPONSE ENABLED or DISABLED DISABLED 678 The PL X is capable of providing a super fast current response When enabled the current loop algorithim is internally adjusted to provide a very rapid response with no dead band when switching bridges When enabled it is important th
502. red airflow See 3 Rating Table for airflow ratings Ensure against pollutants entering the port and you may need to use a suitable grill if there is a danger of birds or vermin making it their home 6 2 Venting kit for PL X 275 440 The venting kit comprises two steel ducts which are designed to telescope together Hence the duct length from the top of the drive is adjustable between 270mm to 538mm It consists of three main components 1 A lower duct which fits within the side cheeks directly above the heatsink exhaust area This is secured with 2 M5 screws See 4 Mechanical Dimensions PL X 275 440 for fixing point drawing The lower duct is 270mm long from the top edge of the PL X 2 The upper duct which fits over the lower duct section to extend the total length of the assembly It has a series of Mb side holes to allow adjustment Once the desired height is established the upper duct can be screwed to the lower duct through the selected hole one screw per side The useful length of the extended duct may be adjusted in steps of approx 20mm from 270mm to 535mm The duct must be inserted through a tight fitting rectangular hole in the roof of the enclosure hole size 100mm x 252mm and protrude above it by 10 20mm Then the gap between the duct and the enclosure roof must be sealed e g using tape or flexible filler to ensure that the exhaust air and pollutants cannot enter into the enclosure 3 A cowl which is fixed on top of the enclosur
503. rent limit to above the 179 STALL CUR LEVEL to check that the AV speed feedback remains below 117 ZERO INTLK SPD It may be necessary to increase 117 ZERO INTLK SPD to ensure tripping 8 1 8 2 STALL TRIP MENU Stall current level PIN 179 STALL TRIP MENU 3 179 STALL CUR LEVEL B 179 STALL CUR LEVEL R 95 00 Sets the stall alarm trip LEVEL PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN as a of rated motor amps STALL CUR LEVEL 0 00 to 150 00 95 00 179 See 6 8 3 1 2 How to get overloads greater than 150 using 82 0 LOAD TARGET 8 1 8 3 STALL TRIP MENU Stall time PIN 180 STALL TRIP MENU 3 R 180 STALL DELAY TIME Sets the delay time between PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN stall start and alarm trigger STALL DELAY TIME 0 1 to 600 0 seconds 10 00 secs 180 142 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 8 1 9 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Active and stored trip monitors PINS 181 182 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 181 ACTIVE TRIP MON Shows the status of the 16 active alarms 4 groups of 4 in HEX code Prior to latch MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 182 STORED TRIP MON Shows the status of the 16 latched PARAMETER RANGE PIN alarms 4 groups of 4 in HEX code STORED TRIP MON See table below 182 Branch hopping facility between these two windows The 4 characters in the window are hex codes The table below shows how to decode them to binary logic The codes 0 1 2 4 8 are the most likely The others only occur with 2 or more alarms high in any g
504. resistance PIN 680 The parameters that will be selected for quick start calibration are as follows See 6 1 CHANGE PARAMETERS CALIBRATION for a full explanation of these parameters 5 BASE RATED RPM 0 6000 1500 maximum armature volts your desired max speed 9 SPEED FEEDBACK TYPE Armature voltage select this one Armature Armature voltage plus 4 other choices voltage 18 RATED ARM VOLTS 0 1000 0 VOLTS DC 19 EL1 2 3 RATED AC 0 to 1000 0 415V Volts AC By selecting Armature Voltage a quick start is more easily achieved 1 The speed feedback is always present and in the correct polarity 2 The motor and or load can be seen to be rotating correctly and at approximately the correct speed 3 If a tachogenerator or encoder is fitted then it can be checked for the correct polarity and output levels prior to including it in the feedback loop 4 Other parameters such as ramp rates and stopping modes can be checked and or set before proceeding to final accurate calibration 5 The system may need pre test prior to shipping and no tachogenerator is available For this quick start procedure it is only necessary to set the above parameters Basic application 4 5 2 Quick start calibration step by step PRESS RIGHT KEY FOR 1 Turn on the control supply and press the right ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 key to exit diagnostics for the ENTRY MENU 2 Press the right key to enter the ENTRY MENU CHANGE PARAMETERS window Press the ENTRY MENU
505. ription assumes you have created and are using a personalised Hyperterminal If you have not already created a personalised Hyperterminal please see 10 2 1 2 Transmitting parameter data file to a PC Windows 95 upwards You now have a choice regarding what will happen once your personalised HyperTerminal receives data Click on Transfer then Capture to Printer if you want the file sent automatically to your default printer Note The listing sent by the drive cannot be looked at whilst you are running HyperTerminal The personalised Hyperterminal is only used to handle the list not to store it Click on Transfer then Capture text and you will be asked for a folder and file for the data to be captured Chose an appropriate destination and name and use a file extension appropriate to the word processor you intend using The defaults PRN or PR2 or PR3 can be used by most another example is DOC for Microsoft Word etc When you are finished click on Start HyperTerminal now returns to the main screen and is ready for reception You will notice that the bottom menu bar now highlights Capture and or Print echo depending on which of the above you have selected Proceed to transmit data as outlined in PARAMETER EXCHANGE The source of the settings depends on the power up reset type that occured on the last application of the control supply and any changes that have been made prior to transmission See 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page PIN 67
506. rogramming procedure or is using its default value it is important to understand how it is affected after connection to another source using the GOTO function In this case the value is solely determined by the source The parameter can be used as a diagnostic monitor of that source If the connection from the source is then removed the default or desired value of the target must be re entered and saved via the keys or PL PILOT APPLICATION BLOCKS from the applications menu are normally dormant Connecting the output of a block using its GOTO to a PIN other than 400 activates it See also 10 2 5 Parameter exchange using ASCII COMMS and 10 2 5 1 PL PILOT and SCADA System Control And Data Acquisition package 13 1 1 PL PILOT configuration tool PL PILOT a self installing PC based graphical configuration monitoring and recipe manipulation tool which allows fast and easy adjustment is supplied with the unit on a CD It may also be used for up to 10 PL Xs on one multidrop serial link There is a suitable cable supplied to connect the PC COM 1 serial port to PL X RS232 PORT1 187 PORT1 BAUD RATE Set it to 19200 on the target PL X and in Options Setup COM Port in PL PILOT 188 PORT1 FUNCTION Set it to ASCII COMMS on the target PL X PL PILOT can configure and monitor See 10 1 4 How to use USB ports and 10 2 5 1 PL PILOT and SCADA System Control And Data Acquisition package For PL PILOT version compatibility see 5 1 7
507. roup PARAMETER RANGE ACTIVE TRIP MON See table below 181 HEX CODE BINARY HEX CODE BINARY 0 0000 8 1000 1 0001 9 1001 2 0010 A 1010 3 0011 B 1011 4 0100 1100 5 0101 D 1101 6 0110 E 1110 7 0111 F 1111 Note If this value is connected to another PIN then the pure hexadecimal to decimal equivalent is used Most significant character on the right least significant on the left You can decode the HEX into 16 flags from right to left in 4 groups of 4 HEX HEX HEX HEX using the above table as an aid Example 0005 shows ARMATURE OVERCURRENT and OVERSPEED rarer mie dne Example 0060 shows MISSING PULSE and FIELD LOSS List of motor alarms display location 0000 0000 0000 0000 ARMATURE OVERCURRENT 000 SPEED FBK MISMATCH OVERSPEED ARMATURE OVER VOLTS 000 FIELD OVERCURRENT 000 FIELD LOSS OOO MISSING PULSE Ooo STALL TRIP 000 THERMISTOR T30 000 HEATSINK OVERTEMP OOO SHORT CCT DIG OP 0 00 BAD REFERENCE EXCH 000 CONTACTOR LOCK OUT 000 USER ALARM INPUT PIN 712 ooo SYNCHRONIZATION LOSS 000 SUPPLY PHASE LOSS 000 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 143 8 1 10 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS External trip reset enable PIN 183 Allows the trip to be reset by PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN START on T33 going low EXT TRIP RESET ENABLED OR DISABLED ENABLED 183 When DISABLED wil
508. rpnt at LO Dual current clamp enable Upper current clamp Lower current clamp Extra current reference Autotune enable Current proportional gain Current integral gain Current discontinuity 4 Quadrant mode Speed bypass current enable FIELD CONTROL Field enable Field volts output Field proportional gain Field integral gain Field weakening menu Cur limit at LO I FIELD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening enable Field weakening proportional gain Field weakening integral time constant Field weakening derivative time constant Field weakening feedback derivative Field weakening feedback integral time constant Standby field enable Spillover armature volts 96 Standby field current Field quench delay Zero interlocks Field reference ZERO INTERLOCKS Standstill enable Zero ref start Zero interlock speed 96 Zero interlock current 96 At zero ref flag At zero spd flag At standstill Calibration Continued on next page Spindle orientate CALIBRATION Minimum field current SPINDLE ORIENTATE Zero speed lock Marker enable Rated armature amps Marker offset Current limit 96 Position reference Rated field amps Marker frequency monitor Base rated RPM Desired max RPM Zero speed offset
509. s For terminals T41 to T53 refer to main manual Part 1 section 3 3 3 for power terminals section 3 3 2 7 3 2 1 Remove busbar cover plate to reveal powerboard terminals The fan supply input terminals are located on the lower left hand edge of the powerboard marked AC FAN SUPPLY B1 N 2 L Fan supply input Internal Fan supply PL X 275 315 360 400 440 models need a separate 1 240V 50 60Hz ac supply for the fan PL X 520 600 700 800 900 980 models need a separate 200VA 240V 50 60Hz ac supply for the fan Note If the fan supply fails or is not present on power up then a warning message HEATSINK OVERTEMP is displayed on the front of the unit and operation of the motor will be prevented See also the main manual section 8 1 11 13 for further details of this message related to actual overtemp events 12 PL X275 980 7 3 2 2 Field supply input and output Remove busbar cover plate to reveal powerboard terminals The terminals EL1 EL2 EL3 F F are M6 stud types found on the bottom right hand corner of the powerboard Further information on utilising these terminals is in Section 4 Basic Application and Section 14 9 Wiring instructions in the main manual Also section 3 3 2 for specification See section 7 Product rating table in this Part 3 7 3 3 Terminal tightening torques Terminals Model Tightening torque Terminals 1 to 100 PL X 275 980 4 Ib in 0 5 N m EL1 EL2 EL3 F F PL X 275 980 35 I
510. s will be recognised as a logic high 3 1 4 Activating blocks In order to activate a block it is necessary to configure its GOTO window to a PIN other than 400 Block disconnect In the CONFIGURATION menu first enter the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM window and set it to ENABLED Then staying in the CONFIGURATION menu proceed to BLOCK OP CONFIG to find the appropriate GOTO Note The GOTO windows for Multi function 1 8 Comparator 1 4 and C O switch 1 4 are contained within each block menu for convenience After completing the connection return to the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM window and set it to DISABLED 3 1 5 CONFLICT HELP MENU CONFIGURATION CONFLICT HELP MENU CONFLICT HELP MENU NUMBER OF CONFLICTS CONFLICT HELP MENU MULTIPLE GOTO ON PIN If there has been an accidental connection of more than one GOTO to PIN then when the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM is set to DISABLED this is done at the end of a configuration session the automatic conflict checker will give the alarm message GOTO CONFLICT This menu is provided to assist the user in locating the PIN with the GOTO conflict Proceed to the CONFLICT HELP MENU in the CONFIGURATION menu see product manual to find the number of conflicting GOTO connections and the target PIN that causes the conflict One of the GOTO connections must be removed to avoid the conflict This process is repeated until there are no conflicts Note that this tool is extremely helpful Without it there is the pos
511. s 253 256 259 179 1 2 3 425 esercito ep eere ee ust 178 Scope output select PIN 260 130 180 188 Analogue inputs 2b 26 130 165 Analogue tachogenerator 27 63 64 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 165 168 226 APPLICATION BLOCKS Activating blocks oer eee teas 166 Application blocks PIN table General rules S Eoo eA E TA Order of processing ete ee Sample times Approvals UL cUL CE Archiving PL X recipes 168 197 Basic speed or torque 34 Block Disconnect PIN 400 E Branch hopping between monitor windows 47 Breakdown isime en a ea a a laisa 3 218 CALIBRATION Analog tacho trim PIN 17 Armature volts trim PIN 16 si Base rated motor rpm PIN 5 60 Current limit 96 0 0 61 Desired max rpm 6 17 62 219 EL1 2 3 rated AC volts PIN 19 69 145 214 Encoder lines PIN 1T ere 67 219 ENCODER 26 65 116 180 Encoder sign PIN 13
512. s per PARAMETER RANGE PIN minute independently of feedback type ENCODER RPM MON 7500 RPM 132 There is a equivalent of this signal on hidden pin 709 MOTOR RPM See also 6 1 10 3 ENCODER SCALING Motor encoder speed ratio PIN 12 7 1 10 SPEED LOOP MONITOR Speed feedback monitor PIN 131 SPEED LOOP MONITOR 3 131 SPEED FBK MON R 131 SPEED FBK MON R 0 00 7 e Shows the value of the speed feedback as PARAMETER RANGE PIN a 96 of full scale SPEED FBK 96 MON 300 00 131 Note There is an unfiltered version of this value on hidden PIN 715 DIAGNOSTICS 125 7 2 DIAGNOSTICS ARM LOOP MONITOR PIN number range 133 to 141 ARM LOOP MONITOR 3 141 AT CURRENT LIMIT R ARM LOOP MONITOR 3 133 ARM CUR DEM MON ARM LOOP MONITOR 3 This menu allows monitoring of the parameters R 134 ARM CUR MON associated with the inputs to the current loop ARM LOOP MONITOR 3 The feedback current can be read in amps which R 135 ARM CUR AMPS MON alleviates the need to undertake difficult readings with an ammeter during commissioning ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 For convenience the armature current is also 136 UPPER CUR LIM MN shown as a 96 of max rated value in a dedicated window ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 137 LOWER CUR LIM MN R ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 138 ACTUAL UPPER LIM R ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 139 ACTUAL LOWER LIM ARM I LOOP MONITOR 3 140 O LOAD LIMIT MON R DIAGNOSTICS 2 ARM I LO
513. se this feedback mode with field weakening systems See 6 9 6 FIELD CONTROL FLD WEAKENING MENU for a note about AVF field weakening trip AVF feedback contains more ripple than tacho feedback It may be necessary for smooth operation to reduce the SPEED CONTROL loop gain with AVF See 6 7 4 SPEED CONTROL Speed proportional gain PIN 71 The accuracy of AVF is about 2 of full speed it can be improved in 2 ways a By applying IR compensation to the feedback This IR drop is an element within the AVF that is created by the armature current flowing through the armature resistance This element is not part of the back EMF of the motor and therefore if it is removed from the AVF signal the feedback is more accurate See 6 1 11 CALIBRATION IR compensation PIN 14 b By running the field control in CURRENT mode This forces the field current and hence flux to remain constant which in turn makes the relationship between speed and AVF more accurate See also 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 When the drive is first being commissioned it is recommended that the AVF mode be used initially This allows any other speed feedback transducers to be examined for correct outputs prior to relying on them for control safety For systems employing a DC contactor you must use T41 and T43 for remote AVF 1 ANALOG TACHO This transducer provides a DC voltage proportional to speed The 100 speed feedback volts must be ca
514. sfying conditions of zero speed reference and zero speed feedback are fulfilled 117 ZERO INTLK SPD sets the ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE ZERO INTERLOCKS R 115 STANDSTILL ENBL ZERO INTERLOCKS 116 ZERO REF START ZERO INTERLOCKS R 117 ZERO INTLK SPD ZERO INTERLOCKS 118 ZERO INTLK CUR ZERO INTERLOCKS 119 AT ZERO REF FLAG ZERO INTERLOCKS 120 AT ZERO SPD FLAG ZERO INTERLOCKS 121 AT STANDSTILL threshold for both the zero speed ref and feedback decisions 3 3 ii 116 ZERO REF START This prevents the current control being enabled after a start command if the total speed reference to the drive or the input to the RUN MODE RAMPS is not at zero It is used if starting the motor inadvertently may be undesirable The message CONTACTOR LOCK OUT will appear after approximately 2 seconds if this function is not satisfied The contactor is de energised E g If an extruder is full of cold plastic then starting it may damage the screw By implementing this function the operator has to deliberately set the references to zero before he can commence running For these functions to work the zero threshold levels 117 ZERO INTLK SPD and 118 ZERO INTLK CUR need to be defined All the threshold levels are symmetrical for reverse rotation and have hysterisis of 0 5 around the chosen level For systems employing a shaft encoder there is a sub menu for implementing spindle orientation and o
515. shed it drops out the main contactor sets the required parameters and then automatically DISABLES itself You can check that it has finished by looking in the display window and waiting for the DISABLED comment to re appear on the bottom line This is a stationary test There is no need to remove the load 44 Basic application If the routine is interrupted by a power loss or alarm then the routine is aborted and the old parameter values are left intact This also occurs after a time out of 2 minutes which indicates that the load inductance supply relationship was outside its range of safe operation In this case you must enter the current loop terms manually See 6 8 9 CURRENT CONTROL Autotune enable PIN 92 6 With the RUN terminal T31 low activate the Start control and check the operation of the main contactor If there are any drive problems that are detectable by the on board alarms they will be annunciated Any alarm conditions must be resolved prior to running Now take the RUN terminal high to commence AUTOTUNE Note if a contactor drop out occurs then the AUTOTUNE will have to be re enabled before commencing 7 When you have successfully performed a current loop autotune it is time to save these changes 8 Provided you correctly adjusted the CALIBRATION parameters the unit is now calibrated to run in armature voltage feedback mode with the motor ratings you entered and the current loop tuned 9 Act
516. sibility that user GOTO configuration errors would cause multiple values to alternately appear at the conflict PIN resulting in unusual system behaviour APPLICATION BLOCKS APPLICATION BLOCKS menu The application blocks can be used to create complex control applications APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 SUMMER 1 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 SUMMER 2 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 FILTER 2 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 PID 1 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 BATCH COUNTER 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 PID 2 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 INTERVAL TIMER 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 PARAMETER PROFILE 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 3 COMPARATORS 1 to 4 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 C O SWITCH 1 to 4 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 TAPER TENSION CALC 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 PRESET SPEED 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 MULTI FUNCTION 1 to8 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 LATCH 3 APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 FILTER 1 3 FEE PP APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE oS oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe 14 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 2 APPLICATION BLOCK
517. sion The losses in the winding system are friction and inertia When winding the drive system relies on arranging the speed loop to saturate This means that under all running conditions the speed demand remains unsatisfied and hence is always asking for more current than the clamps will allow Hence the current is operating at the limit determined by the torque compensator The speed loop saturation may be accomplished by utilising the SLACK take up function See JOG CRAWL SLACK in the main manual There is a hidden PIN 714 IN SLACK FLAG which stays high during the slack take up mode including the ramp up down periods This FLAG can be used to operate 518 TENSION ENABLE Friction The block provides compensation for stiction static friction and dynamic friction Stiction compensation is applied only if the web speed exceeds its programmed threshold e g 5 and the reel speed remains below 2 This compensation is used to get the system moving Static friction compensation is applied at a constant level throughout the speed range Dynamic friction compensation is applied throughout the speed range and linearly increases with speed Inertia When accelerating positively or negatively decelerating torque is required to overcome the mechanical inertia of the total load Without compensation this torque is no longer available to provide tension Hence to control the tension more accurately the block provides compensation for both fixed and variab
518. smit serial data Some computers may not be fitted with an RS232 COM port Instead they will probably possess a USB port In this case it is necessary to fit a USB RS232 convertor to the computer Eg Single in line convertor type USB to serial male DY or multiport type Belkin F5U120uPC These are supplied with the required driver utilities After installation of the convertor right click on the My Computer icon and select Properties Device Manager Ports to find the port allocations COM1 COM2 etc Then you must use the nominated USB port allocation when setting up comms utilities Eg Hyperterminal or PL PILOT 10 2 5 1 PL PILOT and SCADA System Control And Data Acquisition package There is a proprietary PC based SCADA System Control And Data Acquisition package available which is fully configured to communicate with the PL X range This package provides many features including PL X Configuration Data logging Alarm logging Recipe management Multi drop capability Bar charts Drawing package Full parameter monitoring Chart recording Multi instument views Multiple comm ports Bit map graphics import The SCADA package is designed by SPECVIEW and forms the platform for the PL PILOT config tool Further details about this package are accessible from the entry page of the PL PILOT configuration tool PL PILOT runs on a standard PC Windows 95 upwards It can set any parameter value make any legal internal connection and
519. st be set to DISABLED Some functions being Pressing and holding connected are also shown the up or down key here for extra clarity will cause accelerated scrolling PROFL X AXIS GET FROM PIN Description of function ROFL X AXIS GET FROM For simple blocks the block description appears here PARAMETER PROFILE PROFL X AXIS GET FROM DEFAULT 000 400 Defines the target source PIN for connection to PROFL X AXIS A default of 400 shows that there is no connection made The PIN of the target source connection will scroll here The description of the target source connection will scroll on the bottom line CONFIGURATION 171 13 2 3 Summary of GOTO and GET FROM windows Note To start a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to ENABLED Note To end a connection configuration session ENABLE GOTO GETFROM must be set to DISABLED The above ENABLE DISABLE is done automatically when working from the PL PILOT configuration tool These windows make configuration connections really fast and simple You do not have to work with lists of numbers and undecipherable codes in order to make connections The UP DOWN keys have an accelerating action for rapid arrival at the desired target The block PINs are arranged in adjacent groups You only need to know one PIN in the target block to easily find all the others Alternatively just scroll thro
520. stopped permanently Starts from PRESET VALUE 3 ENABLED DISABLED Ramp continues to follow input Ramp continues to follow input reference when stopped reference when stopped Starts from PRESET Starts from PRESET VALUE VALUE 4 ENABLED ENABLED Held at PRESET VALUE Held at PRESET VALUE when stopped permanently Starts from PRESET VALUE Mode 1 ensures that the ramp output is reset to 0 00 during all stopping modes Modes 2 3 4 have an active ramp output during all stopping modes which is useful in cascaded systems The action of starting momentarily presets the ramps Default value 0 00 Note 30 RAMP EXT PRESET has permanent action the RUN MODE RAMP if already high has a momentary action at the commencement of a JOG request The 29 RAMP AUTO PRESET input is ANDED with 720 SYSTEM RESET pulse which is simultaneous with the release of the current loop CHANGE PARAMETERS 79 6 3 2 JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog speed 1 2 PINs 37 38 37 JOG SPEED 1 5 00 Sets the value of jog speed 1 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT Usually used for forward jog JOG SPEED 1 100 00 5 00 37 38 JOG SPEED 2 5 00 Sets the value of jog speed 2 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN Usually used for reverse jog JOG SPEED 2 100 00 5 00 38 6 3 3 JOG CRAWL SLACK Slack speed 1 2 PINs 39 40 R 39 SLACK SPEED 1 5 00 Sets the value of slack speed 1 PARAMETER RAN
521. struct more complex systems at no extra cost 13 There is a facility to provide a super fast current response for high performance applications See 13 13 3 DRIVE PERSONALITY Maximum current response 678 3 2 2 Tips for using the manual This is a version 5 15 manual Version 5 17 and above software has all the functions described See 5 1 7 Finding the software version number of the unit 11 5 Remotely mounted display unit 1 Do not be intimidated by the size of the manual Important facts are frequently mentioned more than once to avoid excessive cross referencing 2 The manual looks large because it contains many graphics For instance every parameter is described showing a picture of the actual display as the user will see it 3 The sequence of the chapters flows in a similar sequence to the drive block diagram 4 Every parameter has its own paragraph number which makes it easy to find 5 There is a set of PIN number tables at the back which cross reference to the paragraph number for every parameter 6 There is a complete contents listing at the front of the manual giving paragraph and page numbers Each chapter also has its own contents listing There is also an index in section 16 at the back of the manual 7 There will always be typing and technical errors in a complex document Please inform your supplier of any errors you find The authors are grateful for any information that will allow improvements to be made 22 I
522. t PIN706 706 6 8 9 AUTOTUNE MONITOR Autotune in progress flag PIN 707 0 707 10 4 2 REMOTE PARAM RCV Remote receive input PIN 708 Jon lw 708 MOTOR RPM Encoder RPM 96 mon PIN 709 scaled by 12 MOT ENC ratio 300 00 o 1709 12 14 1 POSITION COUNT Running position counter 70 1 0 J710 1214 1 POS CNT DIVIDER Position count divider input PIN711 8 1 1 5 USERALARMINPUT PIN7I2 Jon ow 712 SPD FBK 96 UNF Unfiltered total speed feedback 96 mon PIN 715 TACHO 96 UNF Unfiltered analog tacho 96 mon PIN 716 7 1 8 MOTOR RPM UNF Unfiltered motor RPM monitor 717 o 717 CUR FBK 96 UNF Unfiltered current feedback 96 monitor PIN 719 226 Menu List 15 2 Menu list PRESS RIGHT KEY FOR ZERO INTERLOCKS 3 Issue 5 12 115 STANDSTILL ENBL DISABLED ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 116 ZERO REF START DISABLED CHANGE PARAMETERS 2 117 ZERO INTLK SPD 1 00 170 DC KILOWATTS MON 0 0 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 2 171 SPD TRIP ENABLE ENABLED RUN MODE RAMPS 3 118 ZERO INTLK CUR 1 50 172 SPEED TRIP TOL 50 00 96 21 RAMP OP MONITOR 0 00 96 119 AT ZERO REF FLAG HIGH 173 FLD LOSS TRIP ENABLED 22 FORWARD UP TIME 10 0 SECS 120 AT ZERO SPD FLAG HIGH 74 DOP SCCT TRIP EN DISABLED
523. t all equipment for transit damage loose parts packing materials etc This product conforms to IPOO protection Due consideration should be given to environmental conditions of installation for safe and reliable operation Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the wiring without first disconnecting the product from the circuit being tested STATIC SENSITIVE This equipment contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts Observe static control precautions when handling installing and servicing this product THESE WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS ARE INCLUDED TO ENABLE THE USER TO OBTAIN MAXIMUM EFFECTIVENESS AND TO ALERT THE USER TO SAFETY ISSUES APPLICATION AREA Industrial non consumer Motor speed control utilising DC motors PRODUCT MANUAL This manual is intended to provide a description of how the product works It is not intended to describe the apparatus into which the product is installed This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to design an application install service or come into direct contact with the product APPLICATIONS ADVICE Applications advice and training is available from Bardac Corporation Warnings 9 2 3 General Risks INSTALLATION THIS PRODUCT IS CLASSIFIED AS A COMPONENT AND MUST BE USED INA SUITABLE ENCLOSURE Ensure that mechanically secure fixings are used as recommended Ensure that cooling airflow around the product is as recommended Ensure that cables
524. t clamp 90 2 7 7 7 7 2 103 6 8 8 CURRENT CONTROL Extra current reference PIN 91 0 0 0 103 6 8 9 CURRENT CONTROL Autotune enable PIN 92 0 0 22 2 103 6 8 10 CURRENT CONTROL Current amp proportional gain PIN 93 104 6 8 11 CURRENT CONTROL Current amp integral gain PIN 94 2 2 0202022 104 6 8 12 CURRENT CONTROL Discontinuous current point PIN 95 4 1 105 6 8 12 1 Setting the current loop control terms manually essen 105 6 8 13 CURRENT CONTROL 4 quadrant mode enable PIN 96 105 6 8 14 CURRENT CONTROL Speed bypass current reference enable PIN 97 105 6 9 CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD 22 4 2 2 106 6 9 1 FIELD CONTROL Block diagram 1 000 00 107 6 9 2 FIELD CONTROL Field enable PIN 99 22 2 0 0 70 7 0 0 4 2 2 2 24 108 6 9 3 FIELD CONTROL Voltage output PIN 100 0 00 0 22222 108 6 9 4 FIELD CONTROL Field proportional gain PIN 101 0 00 0 0 108 6 9 5 FIELD CONTROL Field integral gain PIN 102 0 000 0022 10
525. t control software and therefore it will not change at all with the drive stopped or the current loop quenched by RUN T31 being low 148 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS 9 SELF TEST MESSAGE There is a group of self test messages that provide information about problems occuring in the drive itself which are not related to the motion control system These will appear when the problem occurs and are not saved for later access They will disappear when the appropriate action is taken to cure the problem 9 1 1 SELF TEST MESSAGE Data corruption The PL X has facilities to allow all the parameter settings to be transferred serially from another source INITIALISING using PARAMETER EXCHANGE This may be from DATA CORRUPTION another drive unit or from a computer The process is called DRIVE RECEIVE Sending the parameter values to another destination is called a DRIVE TRANSMIT This alarm will appear at the end of DRIVE RECEIVE parameter transfer if the drive parameters have been corrupted The most likely cause for this problem is DRIVE RECEIVE of a corrupted parameter file The contents of the target recipe page will have been corrupted However the volatile memory will still hold the values pertaining at the time of the corruption If the previously prevailing parameters had been sourced from the now corrupted target recipe page then it is possible to restore the original recipe To do this press the left key and the drive will display the previous
526. t mode are possible E g Input priority input summing BCD thumbwheel code This block contains 8 consecutive PINs with a range of 300 00 527 to 534 If the block is not being used for its intended function then these PINs are ideal as extra STAGING POSTS lt 4 OG PRESET SPEED 3 534 PR VALUE FOR 111 PRESET SPEED 3 523 PRESET OP MON PRESET SPEED 3 524 PRESET SEL1 LSB PRESET SPEED 3 525 PRESET SELECT2 PRESET SPEED 3 526 PRESET SEL3 MSB PRESET SPEED 3 527 PR VALUE FOR 000 PRESET SPEED 528 PR VALUE FOR 001 PRESET SPEED 3 529 PR VALUE FOR 010 PRESET SPEED 3 530 PR VALUE FOR 011 PRESET SPEED 3 531 PR VALUE FOR 100 PRESET SPEED 3 532 PR VALUE FOR 101 PRESET SPEED 3 533 PR VALUE FOR 110 245544222255 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 9 1 PRESET SPEED Block diagram PIN 524 Logic Input SEL1 LSB PIN 525 Logic Input SELECT 2 PIN 526 SEL Logic IPs PIN number SEL3 2 1 to set value 000 PIN 527 001 N 528 N 529 N 530 N 531 N 532 N 533 PRESET SPEED PRESET SPEED GO TO PIN 523 Preset output PIN number To set value Actual value PIN 527 0 0096 PIN 528 W PIN 529 X PIN 530 X PIN 531 Y PIN 532 Y PIN 533 Y PIN 534 Y 2 Binary coded decimal PIN number OP value Actual
527. t or special factory parameters It is ideal for local archiving of working parameters It is possible to archive the file on other computers details in PILOT tool HELP button or email the file however the Hyperterminal tool is a better suited for file transfer between directories or via email Advantages Very easy to use and allows editing of recipes Sections of recipes may be saved Versatile monitoring and diagnostics included Very useful commissioning tool when used with Laptop PC Disadvantages Will not overwrite 680 larm BURDEN OHMS 2 RATED ARM AMPS and 4 RATED FIELD AMPS which will then need entering by hand using drive keys Awkward to transfer files to other PC PC running PL PILOT Contains recipes RS232 PORT 1 ASCII COMMS to PL PILOT VOLATILE MEMORY This holds the working set of drive parameters and internal connections Vv See also 13 13 2 DRIVE PERSONALITY Recipe page 677 DRIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM AND POWER CONTROL eoa Recipe Page Recipe Page Recipe Page Recipe Page NORMAL RESET 2 KEY RESET 3 KEY RESET 4 KEY ROM RESET Non volatile memory Non volatile memory Non volatile memory Factory defaults With LOCK facility USER CALIBRATION 4 RS232 PORT1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE to from host computer Recipe file in PC Recipe file in PC Recipe file in PC Hyperterminal Hyperterminal Hyperterminal Contains source Contains source Contains s
528. t proportional gain Current integral gain Current discontinuity 4 Quadrant mode Field enable Field volts output Standstill enable Zero interlock speed Zero interlock current 56 Menu tree structure 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes After a working set of parameters and configuration connections has been created it is recommended that an archive of the recipe be made for back up purposes There are 2 tools available for creating an archive 1 Hyperterminal in windows accessories See 10 2 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive transmit Hyperterminal loads or saves a file directly to from the NON volatile memory of the PL X in binary form This un editable file is a complete set of SAVED parameters ideal for e mail and archiving Advantages Very compact file Complete record of every parameter including motor and model ratings Easy to archive and identify files Disadvantages Not editable Will overwrite 680 larm BURDEN OHMS 2 RATED ARM AMPS and 4 RATED FIELD AMPS which will then need re entering for models and or motors of different rating to source file 2 PL PILOT running on windows See 10 2 5 Parameter exchange using ASCII COMMS And 13 1 1 PL PILOT configuration tool PL PILOT loads or saves a file directly to from the volatile memory of the PL X in editable form This editable file is the displayed parameters and configurable connections but does not include Armature current or Field curren
529. t pulse sign detector and freq measurement Quadrature Encoder PIN 117 PIN 119 PIN 115 Zero interlocks Zero ref flag Standstill Speed level Mot Enc Encoder PIN 116 Zero speed Zero ref flag Start enable Zero ref start control logic Interlock Standstill and position lock control logic PIN enable Zero speed lock To current control logic level PIN 121 At S still flag To firing ccts 122 Desired PIN 129 Tacho Volt Unfiltered 96 Tacho mon PIN 716 PIN 131 Speed Fb Monitor Unfiltered PIN 715 RPM Pins 130 717 enable lines Speed sign MAX PIN 132 PIN 10 PIN 11 Ratio PIN 13 RPM Encoder PIN 12 PIN 6 Rpm Monitor Unfiltered Below Zero Interlock Speed 96 PIN 117 Threshold MARKER OFFSET One shot Terminal 16 BIDIRECTIONAL FB PULSE B PULSE COUNTER Shaft position feedback count Terminal 17 FB PULSE A PIN 242 PIN 244 Position IN Position Ref FLAG ANALOG POST4 DIGITAL POST4 PIN 303 PIN 299 SPINDLE ORIENTATE PIN 287 DIO3 PIN 131 High vain gt PIN 243 Speed Marker DIO Monitor PIN 118 PIN 288 GO TO Feedback 163 ZI current Freq OP Output To position Control loop PIN 122 ZERO SPEED LOCK Default block diagram 4 IN 261 DOP1 Rect Bipolar GET FROM Digital PIN 262 Threshold OP terminal Active trip moni
530. t ramp Jog slack ramp MOTORISED POT RAMP Output monitor Up time Down time Up command Down command Maximum clamp Minimum clamp Preset Preset value Stop mode ramp Memory boot up STOP MODE RAMP Stop ramp time Stop time limit Live delay mode Speed reference summer Drop out speed SPEED REFERENCE SUMMER Internal speed reference 1 Speed reference 2 Speed current ref 3 mon Ramped speed reference 4 Speed current reference 3 sign Speed control Continued on next page Speed current reference 3 ratio SPEED CONTROL Maximum positive speed reference Maximum negative speed reference Speed proportional gain Speed integral time constant Speed integral reset Speed adaption SPEED PI ADAPTION Low breakpoint High breakpoint Low breakpoint proportional gain Low breakpoint integral time constant Integral during ramp Speed adaption enable 50 Menu tree structure 5 2 2 Full menu diagram Change parameters continued Continued from previous Current control Field control CURRENT CONTROL Current clamp scaler Current overload CURRENT OVERLOAD Overload target dynamic profile Overload ramp time DYNAMIC PROFILE Profile enable Spd brpnt at Spd b
531. table Note when calculating the required air throughput it is necessary to consider the dissipation of all heat generating components The dissipation in watts for the PL X main fuses and line reactors is provided in the relevant sections See 14 1 Product rating table 14 7 1 3 Venting models PL X 185 265 using standoff pillars This method of mounting may be the only practical technique in retrofit installations where cutting an aperture in the back panel is not possible The unit is provided with a mounting kit consisting of four 50mm pillars The maximum enclosure ambient temperature using this method is 35C There must be no obstructions to the flow of air on its journey to the rear of the PL X The reason for the reduced ambient rating is that some of the exhaust air may be recirculated over the heatsink leading to a loss of efficiency Any steps that can be taken to minimise this are advantageous The 35C rating applies to installations where there is not complete separation of the incoming air from the cooling air If it is possible to provide an air duct with an aperture area of greater than 180 sq cm that can transport air unimpeded to the rear of the PL X then this solution is as effective as the back panel aperture method described above Door mounted air filter Airflow ee 58 29 a Airflow ween 100mm min extension Back plat
532. tables 13 3 1 1 UIPB 5 SETUP UIP5 Input range PIN350 Vf Arranges 10V range 350 13 3 1 2 UIP5 T5 SETUP UIPS Input offset PIN351 100 009 0 00 13 3 1 3 UIP5 T5 SETUP UIP5 Linear scaling factor PIN 352 113 3 1 4 UIPB 5 SETUP UIP5 Max clamp level PIN 353 300 00 100 00 353 18 3 8 UIP5 5 SETUP UIPS Min clamp level PIN354 _ 300 00 100 009 amp 354 13 3 18 UIPS 5 SETUP Digital IP high value for output 1 PIN 355 300 00 0 01 355 133 110 UIPS T5 SETUP Digital IP low value for output PIN 356 300 00 0 00 356 13 31 11 UIPS T5 SETUP Digital IP high value for output 2 PIN 357 300 00 0 01 387 13 8 12 UIPS T5 SETUP Digital IP low value for output 2 PIN 388 300 00 0 00 S58 13 3143 UIPS 5 SETUP Threshold _PIN 359 30 000 6 000V 359 13 314 UIP6iT6 SETUP UIP6 Input range PIN360 1of4 ranges 10V range 360 13 8 2 UIP6 T6 SETUP Input offset PIN361 100 00 0 00 361 13 3 3 UIP6 6 SETUP Linear scaling factor PIN362 3 0000 1 0000 362 13 3 4 UIP6 6 SETUP Max clamp level PIN 363 300 00 100 00 363 13 8 5 UIP6 T6 SETUP Min clamp level PIN364 300 00 100 00 364 3 3 1 9 UIP T6 SETUP UIP6 Digital IP high value for output PIN 365 300 00 0 01
533. te electro mechanical alarm systems All alarms must be tested in the final application prior to use The suppliers and manufacturers of the PL X are not responsible for system safety See 8 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS menu WARNING The feedback loss protection afforded in field weakening mode is limited to total feedback loss only This is because the speed AVF relationship is not maintained in field weakening mode If a partial loss of feedback occurs the motor may run to excessive speed When the field has been completely weakened and is at its minimum level the armature overvoltage trip will come into operation This may only occur at a dangerous speed It is therefore recommended that a mechanical device and or back up system be utilised to protect against this possibility See 6 9 6 8 FLD WEAKENING MENU Minimum field current 110 And 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 WARNING For rated field currents that are less than 2596 of model rating the alarm threshold may be too low to trigger The alarm must be tested To overcome this problem 4 RATED FIELD AMPS may be set to a higher level and 114 FIELD REFERENCE set lower This has the effect of raising the threshold E g Set 4 RATED FIELD AMPS to twice motor rating and 114 FIELD REFERENCE to 50 00 See 8 1 3 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Field loss trip enable PIN 173 WARNING When using armature voltage feedback the IR drop may be sufficient to provide a signa
534. tees cec um Ee 1 2 TION 2 3 L RERE 2 4 Mechanical Dimensions PL X 275 440 0 0 0 0 0 0 nnns 3 5 Mechanical Dimensions PL X 520 980 ere IMMER 4 Venting E 5 6 1 General venting lt lt lt lt lt 5 6 1 1 When venting kit impractical Models PL X 275 315 360 520 600 5 6 1 2 When venting kit impractical Models PL X 400 440 700 800 900 980 5 6 2 Venting kit for PL X 275 440 tere EMEN NUEVE 5 6 2 1 PL X 275 440 venting kit diagram 1 6 6 3 Venting kit for PL X 520 980 2 eee eoka tatu i D ERURERARRAI A T NERURPDRRIPADE DNA RARE 6 6 4 Airsupply to enclosure osiesoiesectse e acre see ieu Ie I a D A KR APA FR E MEA RR S RP ERI RS A PRA DR RR DA dscns 7 6 959 M 7 6 6 Venting summary 2 RR
535. terminal is T6 If 88 DUAL CLAMP ENBL default terminal T21 is enabled then the upper input is default T6 and the lower input is default 5 Each clamp can work in each polarity provided the upper is algebraically above the lower However If the upper clamp is set negative and the lower clamp set positive than the result is 0 00 If the lower clamp is more positive than the upper clamp in the positive region the upper clamp behaves as a current demand If the upper clamp is more negative than the lower clamp in the negative region the lower clamp behaves as a current demand CHANGE PARAMETERS 103 6 8 6 CURRENT CONTROL Upper current clamp 89 CURRENT CONTROL 3 89 UPPER CUR CLAMP 89 UPPER CUR CLAMP in 100 0096 Modifies the upper current limit PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN 96 UPPER CUR CLAMP 100 00 100 00 89 The product of this parameter 81 CLAMP SCALER sets the limit If the upper clamp is set negative and the lower clamp set positive than the result is 0 00 If the lower clamp is more ve than the upper in the ve region the upper behaves as a current demand 6 8 7 CURRENT CONTROL Lower current clamp PIN 90 CURRENT CONTROL 3 90 LOWER CUR CLAMP 90 LOWER CUR CLAMP 100 00 Modifies the lower current limit PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN LOWER CLAMP 100 00 100 00 90 The product of this parameter and 81
536. that can be selected using DISPLAY FUNCTIONS REDUCED and FULL ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 H The reduced menu shows only the commonly used SERIAL LINKS selections and enables more rapid travel around the tree structure ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 If the display is shown in this manual with 9 R DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 2 next to it then this indicates that it is in both the reduced AND the full menu Note There are about 50 adjustable parameters in ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 the reduced menu There is also a facility for storing APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 a second set of reduced menu parameters which can be called into use using a digital input See 6 1 17 CALIBRATION Motor 1 or 2 select PIN 20 ENTRY MENU LEVEL 1 See also 11 5 Remotely mounted display unit CONFIGURATION 2 Menu tree stucture 49 5 2 1 Full menu diagram Change parameters ENTRY MENU Section 5 Change parameters CHANGE PARAMETERS Section 6 Run mode ramps RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp output monitor Forward up time Forward down time Reverse up time Reverse down time Ramp input Forward minimum speed Reverse minimum speed Ramp auto preset Ramp external preset Ramp preset value Ramp S profile Ramp hold Ramping threshold Jog crawl slack Ramping flag JOG CRAWL SLACK Jog speed 1 Jog speed 2 Slack speed 1 Slack speed 2 Crawl speed Jog mode select Motorised po
537. the pins have fully withdrawn from their sockets hinge the card gently away to an angle of about 30 degrees At this point the upper hinges are open and the card can be eased out of them Side view First lift up control card to about 30 degrees then withdraw it from hinges Pair of hinges at top Control card hinged edge with release gap away from normal plane at about 30 degrees by about 30 degrees To re assemble perform the above procedure in reverse order The control card is guided by the hinges back onto the interconnect pins It is not possible to screw the control card flat unless the interconnect pins are all correctly located WARNING During IC insertion avoid bending the control card and causing damage This is best achieved by removing the control card and supporting it on a suitable surface Special attention must be paid to providing support to the card in the area of the IC being inserted to avoid stressing the surrounding components CONFIGURATION 201 13 14 CONFLICT HELP MENU CONFIGURATION 2 3 CONFLICT HELP MENU 3 This menu is used as an aid to find accidental user connections of more than one GOTO to any PIN CONFLICT HELP MENU 3 MULTIPLE GOTO ON PIN There is an automatic conflict check when the ENABLE GOTO GETFROM is set to DISABLED This is done at the end of a configuration session If a conflict is found the display will give the alarm message GOTO CONFLICT See 13 2 7 CONFIGURATION
538. the reel of material is accelerating Make a note of this value and then subtract an amount equal to 507 FIXED INERTIA and the result represents the current required to accelerate the mass of the material Enter this value 3 7 11 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Material width PIN 509 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 509 MATERIAL WIDTH 509 MATERIAL WIDTH 100 00 Sets a ratio to accomodate PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN material width or mass changes MATERIAL WIDTH 200 00 100 00 509 The material used during empirical measurement of inertia compensation currents is the 100 width mass E g For material twice as wide as the measurement material this value should be set to 200 00 For material of a specific gravity which is 80 of the measurement material set the value to 80 00 For material of a specific gravity which is 80 of the measurement material and twice as wide set the value to 160 00 Note The formula used by the block assumes an air core The mass of the reel core is accomodated in the value for fixed mass inertia compensation If the reel mass changes aswell as the material then both FIXED INERTIA and MATERIAL WIDTH parameters will need adjusting 3 7 12 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Accel line speed input PIN 510 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 510 ACCEL LINE SPEED 510 ACCEL LINE SPEED 0 00 The web speed reference is PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN input here to calculate accel ACCEL LINE SPEED 105 00 0 00 510 The a
539. tion compensation PIN 505 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 505 DYNAMIC FRICTION 505 DYNAMIC FRICTION 0 00 Compensation factor required PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN to overcome dynamic friction DYNAMIC FRICTION 300 00 0 00 505 This compensation is applied at a level proportional to speed With an empty reel running at 100 speed observe the ARM CUR MON in the diagnostics menu Enter the difference between the monitored value and 504 STATIC FRICTION The block automatically adjusts the compensation by scaling it according to web speed Arm current Stiction current at start of motion Dynamic friction current at full reel speed Static friction current at all reel speeds Reel speed 42 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 7 8 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Friction sign PIN 506 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 506 FRICTION SIGN 506 FRICTION SIGN NON INVERT Sets total friction compensation PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN polarity for forward or reverse FRICTION SIGN INVERT or NON INVERT NON INVERT 506 3 7 9 TORQUE COMPENSATOR Fixed mass inertia PIN 507 TORQUE COMPENSATOR 3 507 FIXED INERTIA 507 FIXED INERTIA 0 00 Compensation required to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN overcome fixed mass inertia FIXED INERTIA 300 00 0 00 507 The compensation applied depends on reel diameter The diameter calculator block must be activated in order for the diameter value to be acquired by this bloc
540. tional encoder feedback it is possible to lock and or orientate the shaft at zero speed See 6 10 9 ZERO INTERLOCKS SPINDLE ORIENTATE Note DIP3 T16 and DIP4 T17 are designed to accept bi directional encoder pulse trains The encoder outputs must be able to provide a logic low below 2V a logic high above 4V may range up to 50V max and up to 100KHz These 2 inputs are single ended and non isolated For other types of encoder electrical output CHANGE PARAMETERS 65 the user must provide some external conditioning circuitry The output format may be pulse only for single direction pulse with sign or phase quadrature See 6 1 10 CALIBRATION ENCODER SCALING There is an encoder failure detection system that may be configured to either trip the drive or automatically switch to AVF See 8 1 1 MOTOR DRIVE ALARMS Speed feedback mismatch trip enable PIN 171 3 ENCODER ARM VOLTS In this mode the AVF provides the main dynamic feedback and the encoder feedback is used to trim the accuracy to an extremely high level Note Low frequencies give poor performance The lower frequency limit of reasonable performance with encoder AV feedback is a 100 input frequency of 2Khz g 60 lines at 2000 rpm single pulse train or 30 lines at 2000 rpm for a quadrature encoder With more lines the performance improves with less the dynamic stability degrades particularly at low speeds In this mode when using a non quadrature single line encoder
541. to 600 0 seconds 10 0 secs 25 74 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 2 7 RUN MODE RAMPS Ramp input PIN 26 RUN MODE RAMPS 3 26 RAMP INPUT 26 RAMP INPUT P 0 0096 Sets the run mode ramp input PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN value RAMP INPUT 105 00 0 00 26 The factory default connects 4 to PIN 26 This allows external analogue reference to enter the ramp input value and then this parameter behaves as a monitor of the ramp input value 6 2 8 RUN MODE RAMPS Forward minimum speed 27 RUN MODE RAMPS 3 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED m 0 0096 Supports the forward ve PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN ramp output at a minimum level FWD MIN SPEED 0 00 to 105 0096 0 0096 27 Note that when this parameter is set between and 0 596 then the ramp output follows the input at the desired ramp rates through zero i e there are no min speeds operating and there is no hysterisis around zero Note also that another mode of operation exists when the 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED is greater than 0 5 AND 28 REVERSE MIN SPEED is between O and 0 5 See below In this case the 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED is operative and the ramp output will not go negative This facility may be used to prevent accidental negative rotation With 27 FORWARD MIN SPEED and 28 REVERSE MIN SPEED outside a band of 0 5 then both minimum speeds will be active with O 596 hysterisis around zero 6 2 9 RUN MODE RAMPS
542. tor Stored trip monitor Motor PIN 181 PIN 182 Drive SSS Alarms cm latching High for circuit Alarm enable selector Healthy DOP2 OP Speed feedback trip enable TY PIN 698 PIN 171 Rect Bipolar GET FROM Speed feedback mismatch tol PIN 172 ti PIN 265 Threshold BINA x Digital OP short cct trip enable 33 P N 174 Missing pulse trip enable N 175 B DOP monitor PIN 164 Stall trip enable PIN 178 Stall current level PIN 179 Stall delay time Default ana DOP2 Digital ramping PIN 164 OP terminal Flag Output PIN 180 Reference exchange trip enable Ext trip reset 4 176 enable 183 Overspeed delay time User Alarm PIN 177 Hidden PIN 712 lt lt DOP3 Rect Bipolar GET FROM Default DOP3 Digital PIN 268 Threshold DOP monitor Drive PIN 164 OP terminal Healthy Output T 25 OV COMMON T 26 TACHO INPUT 10 VOLTS T29 IARM Rectify Enable PIN 250 FIELD CONTROL Arm Voltage Feedback PINAG PIN 101 PIN 102 PIN 99 Integral Field THERMISTOR Bg wie Ebr SIONAL Gain Gain enable conditioning PIN 108 Fld wk Fb PIN 109 Spillover Max Arm Voltage Field Current Field angle of advance error amp Monitor PIN 146 Field active monitor 1 147 RUN RUN monitor PIN 318 Digital PIN 164 CIP
543. trip Low break point PIN 74 Supply phase 1055 32 47 69 145 214 Low breakpoint integral time constant PIN 77 95 Synchronization loss 146 214 Low breakpoint proportional gain PIN 76 Thermistor ori ener nav 144 Max negative speed reference PIN 70 US OREN Disa etek 144 Max positive speed reference PIN 69 UL 217 Speed integral reset enable PIN 73 94 UNIVERSAL INPUTS Speed integral time constant PIN 72 94 220 4 20mA loop input 27 175 Speed loop adaption enable 79 92 96 Analog GOTO destination 176 Speed proportional gain PIN 71 17 44 64 65 92 93 Block diagram a a E aa a aaa 174 220 Digital input high value for output 1 PIN 3 2 5 to 3 9 5177 SPEED CONTROL SPEED PI 94 Digital input high value for output 2 PIN 3 2 7 to 3 9 7177 SPEED REF SUMMER Block 90 Digital input low value for output 1 PIN 3 2 6 to 3 9 6 177 Speed reference Ramped 4 PIN 65 91 220 Digital input low value for output 2 3 2 8 to
544. ts There is a system block diagram at the back of the manual also available for downloading from the web site www bardac com Warnings 13 2 Warnings 2 1 General Warnings READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL BEFORE APPLYING POWER TO THE PL X DRIVE UNIT The PL X motor drive controller is an open chassis component for use in a suitable enclosure Drives and process control systems are a very important part of creating better quality and value in the goods for our society but they must be designed installed and used with great care to ensure everyone s SAFETY Remember that the equipment you will be using incorporates High voltage electrical equipment Powerful rotating machinery with large stored energy Heavy components Your process may involve DANGER Hazardous materials ELECTRIC SHOCK RISK Expensive equipment and facilities Interactive components Always use qualified personnel to design construct and operate your systems and keep SAFETY as your primary concern Thorough personnel training is an important aid to SAFETY and productivity SAFETY awareness not only reduces the risk of accidents and injuries in your plant but also has a direct impact on improving product quality and costs If you have any doubts about the SAFETY of your system or process consult an expert immediately Do not proceed without doing so HEALTH AND SAFETY AT WORK Electrical devices can constitute a safety hazard It is the responsi
545. uals or exceeds the target value the equal output goes high Note By using a jumper to connect this flag to 580 COUNTER RESET it is possible to make the counter roll over at the counter target number and continue counting from O again Branch hopping facility to 3 13 2 BATCH COUNTER Counter count monitor PIN 578 60 APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 14 APPLICATION BLOCKS INTERVAL TIMER PINs used 584 to 586 INTERVAL TIMER 586 TMR EXPIRED FLAG INTERVAL TIMER 3 583 TMR ELAPSED TIME INTERVAL TIMER INTERVAL TIMER 3 584 TIMER RESET 3 14 1 INTERVAL TIMER Block diagram INTERVAL TIMER fae 600 0 Secs INTERVAL TIMER 3 585 TIMER INTERVAL PIN 584 timer reset Enable PIN 583 Elapsed time mo PIN 585 Timer INTERVAL interval TIMER GO TO The INTERVAL TIMER may be used to control event sequencing in systems applications E g If a motion control sequence must wait before starting or a relay changeover delayed 3 14 2 INTERVAL TIMER Time elapsed monitor PIN 583 Allows the interval timer PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN elapsed time to be monitored TMR ELAPSED TIME 0 1 to 600 0 SECS 0 0 SECS 583 Note This value is the output of the block GOTO connection When the total interval time has elapsed the block output goes high until the next disable enable sequence This window has a branch hopping facility to 3 14 5 INTERVAL TIMER Timer expired f
546. ue for Xmin is greater or equal to Xmax then Y is constant and equal to PROFLR Y AT Xmax 3 4 8 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile X axis rectify PIN 481 PARAMETER PROFILER 3 481 PROFLR X RECTIFY Enables the X axis input be PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN rectified prior to profiling PROFLR X RECTIFY ENABLED OR DISABLED ENABLED 481 3 4 9 PARAMETER PROFILER Profile X axis GET FROM PARAMETER PROFILER 3 PRFL X AXIS GET FROM Sets the PIN for the profile X PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT axis input signal source PRFL X AXIS GET FROM 000 to 720 400 Block Disconnect APPLICATION BLOCKS 3 5 APPLICATION BLOCKS REEL DIAMETER CALC PINs used 483 to 493 For a constant web speed the reel shaft slows down as the reel diameter increases Dividing the web speed by the shaft speed gives the reel diameter APPLICATION BLOCKS 2 REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 This block performs reel diameter calculation and provides a diameter output for control of web winding tension systems The diameter value can be independantly preset to any value to allow seamless take up for winding or unwinding applications There is provision made to suspend diameter calculation if the speed falls below a user preset threshold The diameter can be programmed to be retained indefinitely during power loss if desired A filter with adjustable time constant is included which will smooth the calculation output The block provides a
547. ugh any GETFROM window from one end to the other to see all the PINs with their descriptions or use the PIN table at the back of each manual The description of the target connection is usually unambiguous E g there are many PROPORTIONAL GAINS within the drive that can be accessed but all are preceded with an indication of their block location This can usually be read even if you are scrolling at high speed The GOTO window automatically skips over illegal connections e g other outputs If more than one GOTO connection is accidently made to any PIN then the conflict checker will warn and assist in finding the PIN Note It is not possible to connect a GOTO directly to a GETFROM To do this first connect the GOTO to a STAGING POST or other unused PIN then connect the GETFROM to the same STAGING POST Remember when a GOTO connection is made the target parameter can not be adjusted using the keys Its value is determined by the source of the GOTO connection It becomes a value monitor for the GOTO If the connection from the source is then removed the default or desired value of the target must be re entered and saved via the keys or PL PILOT 13 2 4 JUMPER connections There are 16 virtual wires called JUMPER1 16 with a GOTO at the output end and a GETFROM at the input JUMPER connections can join any legal pair of PINs including outputs inputs and PINs within blocks GOTO to output connections are automatically avoided The GETFR
548. uld be referred to the local Supplier sales office The contents of this instruction manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement commitment or relationship The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Bardac Corporation The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Bardac Corporation Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty IMPORTANT MESSAGE This is a version 5 15 applications manual Units with software version 5 17 upwards contain all the functions described Part 2 Application Blocks describes the application blocks available in the PL X The application blocks are normally dormant and may be activated by using the GOTO function Please refer to section 13 CONFIGURATION in the main manual The application blocks consist of various inputs processing functions and outputs that are found to be useful in typical industrial motion control and process industries There is a self contained unit called the PLA which is available It contains all of the applications blocks described plus and comms facilities It is intended for general purposes signal processing See the PLA manual available on www sprint electric com 1 Table of contents 1 Table 0f CONTENTS PR RN T MTM 3 2 6 lt TID EE AE e OENE nea 7 2 1 General Warming
549. ult DIAGNOSTIC summary windows Now the PL X is calibrated to match your motor it is time to apply 3 phase power for the first time to establish correct functioning of the main contactor and that the field current is correct Remember that there should be a fire bar inserted in the armature circuit to protect against fault currents See 4 2 Main Contactor operation and 7 3 DIAGNOSTICS FLD LOOP MONITOR Once you have established correct functioning of the main contactor and that the armature and field are receiving power as expected then you must remove the fire bar in readiness for the quick start procedure 4 5 3 Quick start current loop AUTOTUNE 5 The next step is to set up the armature current loop response The unit is provided with an autotune facility that will perform this function automatically Using the keys go to CHANGE PARAMETERS CURRENT CONTROL and then to CURRENT CONTROL AUTOTUNE ENABLE CURRENT CONTROL 3 92 AUTOTUNE ENABLE 92 AUTOTUNE ENABLE gt DISABLED Enables the autotune function PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN to start It turns itself off AUTOTUNE ENABLE ENABLED OR DISABLED DISABLED Note The autotune function makes adjustments to the current loop error amplifier PID terms to achieve optimum performance When ENABLED it will wait until the main contactor is energised and the drive run before starting its autotune routine It may take from a few seconds up to about 1 minute typically When it has fini
550. ure logic value of O arrives at a DIGITAL SOFTWARE POST the display will show LOW When a pure logic value of 1 arrives it will show HIGH STAGING POSTS 3 300 ANALOG POST 1 300 ANALOG POST 1 0 0096 Used as storage point for linear PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN values and or connecting point ANALOG POST 1 300 00 0 00 300 CONFIGURATION 191 13 9 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TERMINALS PIN numbers used 305 to 308 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TERMINALS The 3 drive control functions are ANDED with their respective hardware equivalent input terminal and the resulting output controls the drive This allows the local terminal function to be over ridden by a remote command OR a remote command to be over ridden by a local terminal 13 9 1 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded PIN 305 PIN ae 305 ANDED RUN is normally used by a serial link RUN to control the drive The local hardware terminal in system the LOW position will defeat the serial link From ANDED The serial link in the OFF position will defeat the RUN PIN 305 local hardware terminal HIGH or LOW Note If the RUN terminal has been used as a general digital input then 308 INTERNAL RUN IP must be set HIGH for the drive to run Sets a logic input to an internal PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN AND gate to control RUN ANDED RUN HIGH or LOW HIGH 305 13 9 2 SOFTWARE TERMINALS Anded jog PIN 306 306 ANDE
551. urrent is discontinuous which is very common then there is much less stored inductive energy and the current also goes to zero every current cycle This makes it highly unlikely that a destructive situation occurs The high risk situations are regenerative applications and continuous current modes Even in these cases it does not always result in a destructive sequence Question Even if the contactor operates according to the recommendations how is protection afforded if the contactor coil supply is lost Answer This is a difficult problem to solve using electronics The only reliable insurance is to insert a DC semiconductur fuse in the armature circuit This fuse should open before the thyristor junction fails Question What if the grid system fails totally Answer This is not as bad as losing the contactor coil supply Most installations naturally have other loads that provide a safe discharge path before the contactor opens Question What if the grid system fails for a few cycles Brown outs Answer The PL X is designed to ride through these kinds of supply dips As soon as it loses synchronisation the armature current is quenched The armature voltage is then monitored so that when the supply returns the PL X picks up into the rotating load at the correct speed Question What other sorts of problems occur Answer Most problems occur when users are retro fitting the PL X into an existing system Sometimes these systems have prev
552. urrent until the main contact has closed 1 Insert an auxiliary normally open contact on the main contactor in series with the RUN input T31 2 Alternatively use contactor wiring method shown in 4 3 2 Contactor coils usually have a high inductance When the contactor is de energised it can produce high energy arcing on the internal PL X control relay This may degrade the life of the relay and or produce excessive EMC emissions Ensure that the contactor coil is snubbered 4 2 1 Contactor control questions and answers Question Why is it so important to prevent the contactor 1 Breaking current or 2 Making current Answer 1 Breaking current The motor armature is an inductive load This helps to smooth the current by storing electrical energy during a charging period and releasing it during a discharging period However if the circuit is suddenly broken then the stored energy has nowhere to go This results in a rapid rise in voltage as the inductor motor armature seeks to find a discharge path This rapid transient may cause thyristors in the armature bridge to avalanche on and become conductive If this happens to a pair of thyristors then an effective short circuit may be formed across the armature Then a second effect occurs If the motor is rotating and is suddenly shorted then the mechanical energy stored in the rotation of the motor and load is then generated into the short circuit This could be a destructive amount of energy The t
553. using a tachogenerator Field weakening in current mode is required where the speed of the motor exceeds its base speed The field current is held at its rated value until the armature voltage reaches its spillover value Reducing the field current rather than increasing the armature voltage then satisfies any further increase in speed demand Further consideration must be given to the field quenching modes If dynamic braking is required then the field must be maintained after the drive armature output is halted Without the field the motor would not be able to act as a generator and dissipate its rotational energy into the braking resistor When motors are standing still for extended periods it is useful to apply a reduced field current to prevent overheating save energy and in cold climates prevent condensation or freezing For any non running mode the field will be quenched If the RUN input goes low at any point during the stopping process either heading for zero speed or during the delay period then the contactor will drop out straight away and the field quenched The quenched condition is determined by 111 9 TANDBY FIELD 112 STANDBY FLD CUR and 113 FLD QUENCH DELAY See also 14 9 1 Wiring diagram for AC supply to L1 2 3 different to EL1 2 3 E g Low voltage field 108 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 9 2 FIELD CONTROL Field enable PIN 99 R FIELD CONTROL 3 99 FIELD ENABLE 2 7 This allows the field output to PARAMETER RANGE DEFAU
554. ust be orientated vertically as shown A template is provided to assist in cutting the venting aperture These models require an additional 110V AC 50VA fused supply for the main fan The connection terminals are at the top left hand corner of the unit The first time the unit is used and the main contactor energised confirm that the internal fan is operating This will be evident by a strong airflow over the top and bottom busbars towards the front of the enclosure Unit weight 17Kg Installation 211 14 7 1 2 Venting models PL X 185 265 using back panel aperture Use the template provided to assist in cutting the aperture in the back panel This is the preferred method of mounting because it allows the maximum amount of cool air to flow over the heatsink of the drive For installations requiring a 50C internal enclosure ambient this method is necessary The source of clean filtered cool dry air for venting the unit must arrive at the bottom of the enclosure It must then be able to flow freely to the rear of the backplate as shown There must be no obstructions to the flow of air on its journey to the back aperture There is a very powerful fan integral to the PL X which will suck this air into the rear of the unit After passing over the heatsink it is exhausted at the top and bottom of the unit The exhaust air must then be extracted from the enclosure via roof mounted fans capable of a throughput rate specified in the rating
555. ut delay START Start stop Drops contactor out at zero speed The drive will not start unless all alarms are clear The drive will not restart after alarm induced contactor drop out unless START is removed for at least 50mS and re applied CSTOP Coast stop Drops contactor out immediately 100ms Input impedance 10K Ohms 24V 24V output for external logic Range 22 to 32 Volts Short circuit protected Overvoltage protection to 50V Shares total current capability of Digital Outputs plus extra 5OmA of its own Total maximum available 400mA Introduction and Technical Data 25 Control terminals on lower power board numbers 41 to 53 NC signifies no connection RA 41 NC 42 REMOTE AVF RA RA used for remote sensing of armature volts RA 43 Note when using remote AVF the Armature volts signal is read 3 3 high NC 44 CON1 and CON2 Volt free contact for main contactor coil up to 240V 500VA CON1 45 Operated by START JOG function when CSTOP is high CON2 46 LATCH1 and LATCH2 Volt free contact operates at same time as CON1 2 240V 500VA LAT1 47 LAT2 48 EARTH on 51 is used for dirty earth connection of control supply EARTH 51 N 52 L and N are for control power 100 240 50 6 10 50VA L 53 Note The control supply is required to power the PL X electronics and must be applied before running 3 4 Control terminals overview 3 4 1 General requirements The general requirements of industrial
556. vertor Eg Single in line convertor type USB to serial male D9 or multiport type Belkin F5U120uPC These are supplied with the required driver utilities software which needs to be installed on the computer first After installation of the driver software right click on the My Computer icon and select Properties DeviceManager Ports to find the port allocated to the convertor COM1 COM2 COM3 or COM4 Then you must use the nominated USB port allocation when setting up Hyperterminal or PL PILOT To select the COM port within PL PILOT go to the Options menu in the top task bar It will offer COM1 COM2 COM3 It may need its baud rate setting to 19 200 in the Setup COM Port option Note When using USB to RS232 converters always boot up the PC with the converter already plugged into the PC so that it gets properly initialised 154 SERIAL LINKS 10 2 5232 PORT1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE The RS232 PORT1 can be used to transfer a file of the PL X settings between the PL X and a host The transfer uses an ASCII binary file structure and XON XOFF protocol See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes The purpose of this facility is to allow the parameter settings to be recorded or parameter transfer from an old to new control board RS232 PORT1 3 PARAMETER EXCHANGE 4 a From another computer or drive in ASCII b To another computer or drive in ASCII c To another computer in the form of text list of displa
557. voltage and possible over volting of the commutator 6 9 6 3 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening integral time constant FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 105 FLD WK INT TC ms This sets the integral time constant of the weakening loop PIN 105 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN FLD WK INT TC ms 20000 ms 4000 105 Generally an increased integral time constant will slow the response of the armature voltage when operating around the spillover voltage point and a decrease will improve the response Decreasing the value too far may cause instability of the armature voltage and possible over volting of the commutator 6 9 6 4 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening derivative time constant FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 106 FLD WK DRV TC ms This sets the derivative time constant of the weakening loop PIN 106 PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN FLD WK DRV TC ms 10 to 5000 ms 200 106 In general keep this parameter between 5 and 10 of the setting of 105 FLD WK INT TC ms This gives good attenuation to the response of the weakening loop at high frequencies A higher setting may cause instability of the armature voltage and possible over volting of the commutator CHANGE PARAMETERS 111 6 9 6 5 FLD WEAKENING MENU Field weakening feedback derivative time constant PIN 107 FLD WEAKENING MENU 4 107 FLD WK FB DRV ms a Sets the feedback derivative PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN time co
558. w The application blocks have many parameters to adjust and it is convenient to define their individual connections within this BLOCK DIAGRAM menu Connecting the GOTO to a PIN other than 400 Block disconnect causes activation of the block All GET FROM windows are found within their block menus 13 12 CONFIGURATION FIELDBUS CONFIG This section outlines the FIELDBUS CONFIG menu It is used to select parameters for transmitting to or receiving from the host controller using for example PROFIBUS protocol BLOCK OP CONFIG FIELDBUS CONFIG For a full description refer to the SERIAL COMMS manual Download from www bardac com Other protocols may be used depending on which comms option card is fitted to the PL X Do not confuse FIELDBUS CONFIG jumpers with CONFIGURATION JUMPER CONNECTIONS They are independantly useable tools It was convenient for the designers to use the same nomenclature Each parameter selected for transmission from the PL X is configured using a GET FROM Each parameter selected for receiving by the PL X is configured using a GOTO There is also DATA ON DEMAND providing a roaming read write facility to any PIN 196 CONFIGURATION There are many advantages to providing FIELDBUS configuration on the PL X itself rather than relying on the host system to control the configuration 1 Any PL X parameter is available for selection as a source by each one of 8 GET FROMs 1 word each
559. web break alarm flag output with adjustable threshold that compares the input and output of the smoothing filter With this measure of the reel diameter it is possible to control the torque of the reel shaft to give constant tension in the web This method of tension control is an open loop technique and relies on the system properties remaining constant over time Not all the torque at the shaft goes into web tension Some of it is used to overcome losses in the mechanical system These can be caused by Static or starting friction Dynamic friction due to windage etc The fixed inertia of the motor and transmission The varying inertia of the increasing reel A torque compensation block 3 7 APPLICATION BLOCKS TORQUE COMPENSATOR is available to provide a compensatory signal which adds just sufficient torque to overcome the losses For good Lh OS REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 493 DIA MEM BOOT UP REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 483 DIAMETER OP MON REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 484 DIA WEB SPEED IP REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 485 DIA REEL SPD IP REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 486 DIAMETER MIN REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 487 DIA MIN SPEED REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 488 DIAMETER HOLD REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 489 DIA FILTER TC REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 490 DIAMETER PRESET REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 491 DIA PRESET VALUE gt D oe oe oe oe oe Pe Pe w REEL DIAMETER CALC 3 492 DIA WEB BRK THR results it is essential to keep the torque required for loss com
560. y Warning If the maximum motor armature current rating is less than approximately 50 of the maximum model rating the AUTOTUNE results may not be optimum There are 2 possible ways of overcoming this Either 1 Set the current loop control terms manually See 6 8 12 CURRENT CONTROL Discontinuous current point PIN 95 104 CHANGE PARAMETERS Or 2 Re burden the unit using the 50 100 burden jumper on the power board See 13 13 4 DRIVE PERSONALITY Armature current burden resistance PIN 680 There are 2 stages to the autotune function Stage 1 The current automatically increases positively until it becomes continuous Stage 2 The current is automatically perturbated until the response is optimised When it has finished it drops out the main contactor sets the required parameters and then automatically DISABLES itself You can check that it has finished by looking in the display window and waiting for the DISABLED comment to re appear on the bottom line You must then save the parameters using the PARAMETER SAVE menu If the routine is interrupted by a power loss or alarm then the routine is aborted and the old parameter values are left intact In the case where the motor has a short time constant the armature current may remain discontinuous even at currents in excess of 100 There are 2 possible outcomes 1 The autotune will find that the current never goes continuous up to 150 in stage 1 Stage 2 is abandoned The autotun
561. y clamp or the voltage clamp prevailing and the field current control as a higher safety level 62 CHANGE PARAMETERS 6 1 5 CALIBRATION Base rated motor rpm PIN 5 QUICK START CALIBRATION 3 5 BASE RATED RPM n 5 BASE RATED RPM Ni 1500 RPM i gt Revs per minute of the motor PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN at full field and armature volts BASE RATED RPM O 6000 RPM 1500 This value is usually found on the motor dataplate 6 1 6 CALIBRATION Desired max rpm PIN 6 QUICK START R CALIBRATION 3 6 DESIRED MAX RPM Revs per minute of the motor PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN at your desired maximum speed DESIRED MAX RPM 6000 RPM 1500 6 This represents 100 speed If your DESIRED MAXIMUM RPM is higher than the BASE RATED RPM then you will need to implement field weakening in the CHANGE PARAMETERS FIELD CONTROL menu You must however verify that your motor and load are rated for rotation above base speed Failure to do so may result in mechanical failure with disastrous consequences If however your desired maximum rpm is low compared to the base rpm then you need to be aware of the heat dissipation in the motor at full torque Use force venting of the motor if necessary 6 1 7 CALIBRATION Zero speed offset PIN 7 CALIBRATION 3 7 ZERO SPEED OFFSET a Used to correct any offset from PARAMETER RANGE DEFAULT PIN the speed feedback source ZERO SPEED OFFSET 5 00 0
562. y windows and their parameters Transmitting parameters from the PL X to a host is defined as DRIVE TRANSMIT whereas receiving data by the PL X from a host is defined as DRIVE RECEIVE RS232 PORT1 Setup Set the PL X RS232 PORT1 baud rate to match the host port baud rate When using a computer or printer set its serial port to work with the following fixed protocols 1 Stop bit NO Parity 8 bits XON XOFF Handshaking To use the PARAMETER EXCHANGE sub menu first choose PARAM EXCH SELECT in the previous menu window called RS232 PORT1 188 PORT1 FUNCTION 10 2 1 PARAMETER EXCHANGE Drive transmit PARAMETER EXCHANGE 4 DRIVE TRANSMIT 5 Starts transmission of the parameter file PARAMETER RANGE in 677 RECIPE PAGE to the host DRIVE TRANSMIT TRANSMITTING then FINISHED See 10 2 4 Rules of parameter exchange relating to software version This is the transfer of the Parameter file from the page selected in 677 RECIPE PAGE from the PL X to a host computer This file information fully describes the PL X s settings for the chosen page in a binary format The file is of the drive s saved settings for the chosen page which will not be the present settings if changes have been made without performing a PARAMETER SAVE Read only values will be at the level pertaining at the time of transmission The files for each RECIPE PAGE may be transmitted irrespective of the displayed set Note The source page is included in the file this ensures that the file will r
563. ystem will start communicating See also 10 1 4 How to use USB ports There is a suitable cable supplied to connect the PC COM 1 serial port to PL X RS232 1 187 PORT1 BAUD RATE Set to 19200 on the target PL X and in Options Setup COM Port in PL PILOT 188 PORT1 FUNCTION Set to ASCII COMMS on the target PL X Warning PL PILOT may add up to 10mS to PL X cycle times which may affect the response of applications that require fast sampling Eg SPINDLE ORIENTATE To overcome this effect reduce the baud rate Note PL PILOT is not subject to the PASSWORD See 11 2 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS PASSWORD CONTROL See also 5 3 Archiving PL X recipes SERIAL LINKS 161 10 3 5232 PORT PORT1 REF EXCHANGE Allows the accurate transmission of parameters typically a reference between units with the same REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 OV The slave master mode is set by PORT1 GET FROM FUNCTION RS232 PORT 1 REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 189 REF XC SLV RATIO In MASTER mode the unit initiates high bandwidth REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 transmission of data and can also receive data 190 REF XC SLV SIGN In SLAVE mode the unit waits to receive data and then immediately transmits its own data REFERENCE EXCHANGE 4 Using a GETFROM to source the transmit data and 191 REF XC SLAVE MON and a GOTO to target the received data within each PL X in the chain gives ultimate flexibility to the user See 13 2 Configurable connecti

Bardac DC Drives- PLX User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents